01 0565 ENG 01 01v31 10 2017

01-0565-ENG/01
TATRA TAKES YOU FURTHER tatratrucks.com
TATRA FORCE
Operation Manual
TATRA FORCE EURO 5
Operation Manual
Publication number: 01-0565-ENG/01
TATRA TRUCKS a. s. 1st edition 31-10-2017

SERVIS AND INFORMATION SUPPORT
To ensure high quality and reliable service of your vehicle, use our authorized TATRA service facilities. We
operate globally through our agents. For an updated authorized TATRA service facility network go to
tatratrucks.com, section "Your TATRA partner”.
If you need any information about the TATRA service network or you have technical queries, do not hesitate to
contact our TATRA Service Assistance.
TATRA Service Assistance

+420 725 888 338 - Czech Fax: +420 556 49 2696
+420 556 49 4679 - English E-mail: servis@tatra.cz
+420 556 49 2912 - Russian www: tatratrucks.com
Manual arrangement (explanation)
This Operation Manual is structured to ease the search for necessary information.
Breakdown of chapters
The Operation Manual is divided into paragraphs, which are linked to the chapters.
Paragraphs
Most of the chapters apply to all vehicle versions.
As vehicles are optionally equipped with various accessories, the Manual can include description of
accessories not applicable to your vehicle.
Accessories (equipment) marked with * are only installed in certain vehicle versions, or are supplied as extra
equipment.
The signal words such as CAUTION, WARNING and Note are used within the text of this manual.
The following principles are used throughout the manual. Please make sure you fully understand their
meaning here. This information is necessary for the safety of the crew and vehicle.
CAUTION!
Headline CAUTION! Alerts you to a serious risk of accident or injury.
WARNING:
Headline WARNING: informs you about the possibility of damage to the vehicle.
Note:
Headline Note: provides general information on a respective paragraph.
General information
Where directional and orientation terms such as left side, right side, front and rear are used in this document,
they are always meant when viewed in the driving direction.
Vehicle documentation
The vehicle documentation of your vehicle is always "Operating Instructions" and "Service Booklet".
In addition to the documentation, your vehicle, which is equipped with special equipment or superstructure,
may be supplemented by separate instructions for such special equipment or superstructure (eg tachograph,
tanker, tipper, truck, etc.).
Warranties and complaints on special equipment or superstructures are governed by the warranty terms and
claims related to the vehicle.
The Operation manual is designed for vehicles series TATRA FORCE EURO 5
Derived chassis
4x4
721R52/371, 721R52/372, 721R52/410
7T5R21/371, 7T5R21/42ZA
6x6
731R31/41A, 731R32/411, 731R32/412,
731R32/415, 731R32/417, 731R32/418
7T5R31/411, 7T5R31/412
8x8
731R99/371, 731R99/375
Operation Manual
Publication number: 01-0565-ENG/01
Contents
1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 Basic information about the Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2 General safety instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2.1 Safety precautions for vehicle use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2.2 Safety instructions for working with hazardous materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.2.3 Fire safety rules for unit operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.2.4 Safety precautions for cab lifting/lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.2.5 Safety instructions for operation with refrigerant (A/C). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.2.6 Safety instructions for the EBERSPÄCHER independent hot air heater . . . . . . . 1-14
1.2.7 Safety instructions for lifting/lowering the spare wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.2.8 Precautions on tipper body use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.2.9 Safety instructions for operation with winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.3 Environmental precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.4 List of symbols used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1.5 Definitions of compulsory replaceable parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
1.6 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
2 Vehicle identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 Production label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 Dimension plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3 Vehicle Identification Number - VIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.4 Chassis identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.5 Engine type plate TATRA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.6 Fording label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.7 Other serial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.8 Type sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.9 Outfit list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
3 Vehicle description and basic technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Determination of the product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Vehicle technical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.3 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.4 Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.5 Transmission assemblies TATRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.6 Transmission ALLISON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.7 Transfer case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.8 Power take-off drive (PTO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.9 Front axle(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.10 Rear axle(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.11 Front suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.12 Rear suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.13 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.14 Fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
1
3.15 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.15.1 Central tire inflation system (CTIS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.15.2 Tires inflation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.16 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.16.1 Four independent brake systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.16.2 Brake disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.16.3 Drum brakes (PERROT - type brake units with wedge expanders) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.16.4 Pressure air connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.16.5 Checking connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.17 Chassis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.18 Driver´s cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.19 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.20 Electric equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.20.1 Parameters of electrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.21 Winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.21.1 Hydraulic winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.22 Emission kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
4 Description of the vehicle control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Driver´s cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.1 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.2 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.3 The side window in the door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.1.4 Getting on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.1.5 Front bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2 Seats and safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2.1 Passenger´s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2.2 Passenger´s seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2.3 Emergency seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2.4 Solid folding bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2.5 Adjustable head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2.6 Safety belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.3 Windshield washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.4 Windshield wipers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.5 Adjustable steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.6 Rear-view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.6.1 Electric setting of main rear-view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.6.2 Rear-view mirror heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.7 Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.8 Search lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.9 Elevated headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.10 Sun visors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.11 Roof hatches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.12 Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.12.1 Storage compartments in the cab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.12.2 Storage compartments in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.13 Cab lifting and lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
2
4.13.1 Prior to cab lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.13.2 Manual lifting and lowering the cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.13.3 Electrical lifting and lowering the cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4.13.4 Unlocking and locking the cab mechanically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.14 Driver´s cab interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.15 Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.15.1 Left part of instrument panel - switches (part I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.15.2 Left part of instrument panel - controllers (part I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.15.3 Main instrument panel - instruments and controllers (part II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.15.4 Main instrument panel - indicator lamps (part II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.15.5 Right part of main instrument panel - instruments and controllers (part III) . . . . . 4-25
4.15.6 Central part instrument panel - accessories (part IV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.15.7 Right part of main instrument panel - switches and indicator lamps (part III). . . . 4-26
4.15.8 Ceiling panel - instruments and controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4.15.9 Gearshift panel - switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.15.10 Gearshift panel - controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.15.11 Push switch with a lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.15.12 Right part of instrument panel (part V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.16 Electrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.16.1 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.16.2 Battery disconnector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.16.3 Fuses, relays and diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.16.4 First group of fuses, relays and diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.16.5 Power unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4.16.6 Second group of fuses a relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4.16.7 Electric sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
4.16.7.1 Cab interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
4.16.7.2 Accessory holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4.16.8 Front bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4.16.8.1 Rear bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4.16.8.2 Rear left lamp console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
4.16.8.3 Rear right lamp console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
4.17 Description of instruments and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
4.17.1 Ignition box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
4.17.2 Combined switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4.17.3 Main headlamp control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4.17.4 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4.17.5 Digital tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4.17.6 Tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4.17.7 Electronic speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4.17.8 Double air pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4.17.9 Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4.17.10 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4.17.11 Engine oil temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4.17.12 Transmission oil temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4.17.13 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
3
4.18 Heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4.19 EBERSPÄCHER independent diesel heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4.19.1 Control timer of the independent hot-air heater/optional equipment . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
4.19.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
4.19.1.2 Button function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
4.19.1.3 Operation and setting/adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
4.19.1.4 Operation and setting / adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
4.19.1.5 Control of additional equipment - second heating device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
4.19.1.6 General information on programming the preset time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
4.19.1.7 Occurrence of faults and their solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
4.20 Ventilation, dependent heater and cooling system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
4.20.1 Dust and pollen filters in the climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
4.20.1.1 Control panel of the ventilation, dependent heater and cooling system . . . . . . . . 4-85
4.21 Selective catalytic reduction (SCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
4.21.1 Indicator lamps function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
4.21.2 Deactivating the Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system when operating
with the unified F34 fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
4.22 Fuel tank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
4.23 AdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
4.24 Vehicle equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
4.24.1 Front hitches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
4.24.2 Trailer coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
4.24.3 The hitch on rear cross member (towing hook) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
4.24.4 Connecting air hoses with coupling heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
4.24.5 Connecting an external air supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
4.24.6 Air tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
4.24.7 Wheel ckocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
4.24.8 Fuel canisters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
5 Vehicle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.1.1 Instructions for running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 Technical servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.3 Before the ride . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.4 After the ride . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.5 Refuelling diesel and refilling AdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.6 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.6.1 Starting the vehicle with the TATRA gearbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.6.1.1 Starting a cold engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.6.1.2 Start warned-up engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.6.2 Starting a vehicle with the ALLISON transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.6.2.1 CHECK TRANS transmission indicator lamp during engine starting . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.7 After starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.7.1 Engine speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.7.2 Prior to move-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.8 Engine shut-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.8.1 Engine temperature during operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
4
5.8.2 Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.9 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.9.1 Manual gearbox TATRA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.9.1.1 Gear shifting in vehicles with in-built 14 TS 210 L or 14TS 180T
transmission units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.9.2 TATRA semi-automatic transmission - NORGREN gear shifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.9.2.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.9.2.2 LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.9.2.3 Gear shift controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.9.2.4 Emergency gear shift controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.9.2.5 Gearshift operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.9.2.6 Manual mode (M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.9.2.7 Automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5.9.3 Main user menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.9.3.1 Fault conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
5.9.3.2 Fail-safe function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
5.9.4 Automatic transmission ALLISON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5.9.4.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5.9.4.2 Shift selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5.9.4.3 Selecting range and shift schedules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.9.4.4 Shifting gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
5.9.4.5 Cold weather starts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.9.5 High fluid temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
5.9.6 Fault warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
5.9.7 Rocking out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
5.9.8 Shift selector lever and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
5.10 Two-speed transfer case gear shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
5.11 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
5.11.1 Service brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
5.11.2 Emergency and parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
5.11.3 Engine brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
5.11.4 Brake system indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
5.11.5 Brake lining indicator lamp of disc brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
5.11.6 Anti-lock brake system (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
5.11.7 Vehicle and trailer ABS indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
5.11.8 ABS switch for driving off road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
5.11.9 Test of brake circuit bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
5.12 Power-steering function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
5.13 Differential locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
5.13.1 Using differential lock - version No.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
5.13.1.1 Enganging the front axle drive and inter-axle differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
5.13.1.2 Locking the axle differentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
5.13.2 Using differential lock - version No.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
5.13.2.1 Inter-axle differential lock operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
5.13.2.2 Locking the axle differentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
5.14 Tipping the vehicle body and trailer platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
5
5.14.1 Body tipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
5.14.2 Trailer platform tipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
5.14.3 Operation of three-sided tipper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
5.14.4 Locking an empty tipper body to prevent spontaneous tipping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
5.15 Loading and unloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
5.16 Handling with the underride barrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
5.17 Vehicle height setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
5.18 Discharging air from bellows springs (suspension bellows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
5.19 Power take-off (PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
5.19.1 Clutch PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
5.19.1.1 PTOs with forced cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
5.19.1.2 PTOs without forced cooling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
5.19.2 Transmission power take-off (PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
5.19.2.1 Vehicle with the TATRA manual gearbox or with semi-automatic manual
gearbox TATRA - NORGREN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
5.19.2.2 Vehicle with the ALLISON transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
5.19.3 Superstructure PTO control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
5.20 Switching off the rear axle steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
5.21 Central tire inflation system (CTIS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
5.21.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
5.21.2 Tire inflation and underinflation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
5.22 After operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
5.23 Trailer operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
5.23.1 Before connecting a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
5.23.2 Recommendations for trailer operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
5.23.3 Trailer coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
5.23.3.1 Trailer coupling with automatic unlocking (RINGFEDER, type 4040 / G150
automatic trailer hitch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
5.23.3.2 Trailer connection with manual unlocking (non-automatic ROCKINGER
RO 225 G110 trailer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
5.23.4 Connecting the brake lines of a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
5.23.5 Connecting the ABS connector of a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
5.23.6 Connecting the trailer lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
5.23.7 Coupling with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
5.23.8 Uncoupling the vehicle from a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
5.23.9 Trailer coupling indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
5.24 Spare wheel lifting equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
5.24.1 Spare wheel lifting equipment - mechanical version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
5.24.2 Spare wheel lifting equipment - hydraulic version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
5.25 Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
5.25.1 Instructions to extend the tire service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
5.25.2 Pressure and inflation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102
5.25.3 Tire inflation from an external source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102
5.25.4 Replacing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
5.26 Emergency vehicle towing - recommended precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
5.26.1 Recommended precautions for towing with another vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
5.27 Cranking the engine by towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
6
5.28 Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
5.28.1 Starting the vehicle from the external source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117
5.28.2 Braking system in winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
5.28.3 Recommendations for winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
5.29 Towing a suspended vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-122
5.29.1 Hooking off the rear half-axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-122
5.30 River fording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125
5.30.1 Fording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125
5.30.2 Maintenance after fording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129
5.31 RAMSEY hydraulic winch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
5.31.1 Discription of RAMSEY hydraulic winch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
5.31.2 Hydraulic winch control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-134
5.32 SEPSON hydraulic winch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137
5.32.1 Description of SEPSON hydraulic winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137
5.32.2 Hydraulic winch control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-141
5.33 Recovering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
5.34 Electric engine preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-147
5.34.1 Engine oil preheating by a resistor element from a 230V power supply . . . . . . . 5-147
5.34.2 First aid in case of electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-149
5.35 Modifying the exhaust system to operate with the unified F-34 fuel. . . . . . . . . . . 5-152
5.35.1 Replacing the catalytic converter with the exhaust muffler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-153
5.35.1.1 Catalytic converter removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-153
5.35.1.2 Muffler installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-156
5.35.2 Replacing the muffler with catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157
5.35.2.1 Muffler removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157
5.35.2.2 Catalytic converter installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157
6 Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1 Operations and preventive maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.1 Daily - before the ride . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.2 Monthly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Technical maintenance during running in - after 2,500 - 3,000 km . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.3 Technical maintenance TM1 after covering every 30,000 km or every
600 engine hours or every 12 months (whichever is earlier) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
1,200 engine hours or every 36 months (whichever is earlier). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.5 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.5.1 Engine cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.5.2 Oil system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.5.3 Turbocharger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.5.4 Fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.5.4.1 Dirt and water discharge from the fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.5.4.2 Coarse fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.5.4.3 Fine fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.5.4.4 Fuel system bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.5.5 Air filtration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.5.5.1 Air filter SANDRIK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.5.5.2 Air filter DONALDSON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
7
6.5.6 Rubber dust nozzle on the air intake cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6.5.7 Selective catalytic reduction system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.5.7.1 Filter element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.5.8 Auxiliary engine oil cooler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.6 Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
6.6.1 Clutch control equalizing tank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
6.6.2 Clutch case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6.7 Propeller shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6.7.1 Propeller shaft cross joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6.7.2 Clutch shaft bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.8 Power take- off (PTO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6.8.1 Clutch PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6.8.2 Transmission PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6.9 Manual gearbox TATRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6.10 Automatic transmission ALLISON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.10.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.10.2 General information on transmission servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6.10.3 Checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
6.10.4 Checking oil levels using dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
6.10.5 Checking oil levels using shift selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
6.10.6 Oil and filter change interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
6.10.7 Refilling oil and changing filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
6.10.8 Breather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
6.10.9 Auxiliary transmission oil cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
6.10.10 Diagnostic transmission codes (ALLISON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
6.11 Transfer case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
6.11.1 Auxiliary transmission with oil level gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
6.11.2 Auxiliary transmission without oil level gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
6.12 Axles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
6.12.1 Back-bone tube with separate oil filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
6.12.2 Front steering axle(s) and rear steering axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
6.12.3 Wheel hubs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
6.12.4 Wheel reduction gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
6.13 Retarder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
6.13.1 TELMA retarder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
6.14 Suspension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
6.14.1 Front suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
6.14.2 Rear suspension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
6.15 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
6.15.1 Automatic brake pressure control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
6.15.2 Drum brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
6.15.2.1 PERROT brake units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
6.15.2.2 Brake lining. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
6.15.3 Disc brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
6.15.3.1 Checking the brake lining and discs - disc brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
6.15.3.2 Checking the brake lining wear using a rubber bushing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
8
6.15.3.3 Removing and replacing the brake lining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
6.15.4 Air dryer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
6.15.5 Condensate separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
6.15.6 Air reservoirs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
6.15.7 Filling the brake system with the compressed air. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
6.15.8 Emergency release of spring-loaded brake cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
6.15.9 Brake system tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
6.16 Power-assisted steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
6.16.1 Hydraulic power steering circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
6.16.2 Steering of cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
6.16.3 Steering of chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
6.16.4 Steering rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
6.17 Cab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
6.17.1 Hydraulic cab lifting equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
6.17.2 Hydraulic circuit cab tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
6.18 Roof hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
6.19 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
6.20 Heating and ventilation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
6.20.1 Ventillation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
6.20.2 Dust and pollen filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
6.20.3 Air-conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
6.20.4 Air conditioning condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
6.21 Independent hot-air heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
6.22 Spare wheel holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
6.22.1 Hydraulic spare wheel lifting system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
6.22.2 Mechanical spare wheel lifting system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
6.23 Trailer hitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
6.23.1 Trailer hitch Ringfeder type 4040/G150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
6.23.2 Non-automatic trailer hitch ROCKINGER RO 225 G110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
6.23.3 Non-automatic towing hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
6.24 Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
6.25 Winch hydraulic circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
6.25.1 Filter body without oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91
6.25.2 Filter the oil tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
6.25.2.1 Oil filter element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
6.25.2.2 Bleeding the oil tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
6.25.3 Hydraulic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
6.26 Vehicle accessories - hydraulic winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
6.26.1 Hydraulic winch RAMSEY H 800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
6.26.1.1 Checking and maintenance of the winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
6.26.2 Gearbox of the winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
6.26.3 Hydraulic winch SEPSON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
6.26.3.1 Checking and maintenance of the winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
6.26.3.2 Gearbox of the winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100
6.26.3.3 Drum brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101
6.26.4 Winch accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102
9
6.26.4.1 Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102
6.26.4.2 Winch rope guides and idle rollers Pulleys for guiding the rope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
6.27 Body tipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
6.27.1 Tipper body maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
6.27.2 Hydraulic body tipping circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
6.27.3 Filter elements of the hydraulic body tipping circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
6.27.3.1 Oil filter element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
6.27.3.2 Air filter element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108
6.27.3.3 Breather filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108
6.27.4 Tipper body control mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-109
6.27.4.1 Telescopic cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-109
6.27.4.2 Swivel forks on the rear body beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
6.28 Electric equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
6.28.1 Welding repairs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
6.28.2 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
6.28.3 Preservation supply sockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-115
6.28.4 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
6.28.4.1 Front headlamps with halogen lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
6.28.4.2 Front fog lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
6.28.4.3 Elevated (auxiliary) headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-119
6.28.4.4 Side direction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
6.28.4.5 Rear combined lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
6.28.4.6 LED side markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-121
6.28.4.7 Dome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-121
6.28.4.8 Map reading lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-121
6.28.4.9 Search lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122
6.28.5 Adjusting of main headlamps and front fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122
6.28.6 List of bulbs used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-125
6.28.7 Electromagnetic air valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126
6.29 Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-127
6.30 Bleeding of axles, transmission, transfer case, tank AdBlue and tank for winch . 6-129
6.31 Electric engine preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-130
6.31.1 Electrical preheating of the engine oil with a resistor element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-130
6.32 Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-131
6.32.1 Cab maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-131
6.32.2 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-131
7 Overview of lubricants and operating fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Operating fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.1 Diesel oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.2 AdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2 Oils and lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.3 Recommended oils and operating fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.3.1 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.3.2 Manual gearbox TATRA, transfer case, axle final drives (with hub reduction
gears), back-bone tube with separate oil filling, retarder and clutch PTO . . . . . . 7-5
7.3.3 Transmission ALLISON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
10
7.3.4 Axle final drives (without hub reduction gears) and back-bone tube with
separate oil filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.3.5 Hub reduction gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.3.6 Power-steering hydraulic circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.3.7 Cab tilting hydraulic circuit and hydraulic spare wheel tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.3.8 Winch hydraulic circuit and hydraulic body tipping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.3.8.1 Gear housing of winch (RAMSEY H-800) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.3.9 Hydraulic clutch control (brake fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.4 Plastic lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.4.1 Plastic lubricants - propeller shaft - splining, bearings, holder pins SWH . . . . . . 7-10
7.5 Drain intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.5.1 Engine oil refilling intervals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.5.2 Oil and filter change intervals in the ALLISON transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.5.3 Oil refilling intervals in the manual gearbox TATRA , transfer case, axle final
drives, retarder and back-bone tube (with separate oil filling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7.6 Lubrication intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.7 Lubrication points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7.8 Filling capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.9 Operating (original) liquids in factory-filled vehicle assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
8 Storage and transport conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Storage conditions for TATRA vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2 Vehicle transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2.1 Railway transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2.2 Transport on low-bed trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8.2.3 Loading vehicle on a means of transport using a loading ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.2.4 Loading the vehicle on a means of transport using a crane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
9 ES Declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
11
12
A 5557
1 General information
Page 1-1
General information 01-0565-ENG/01
1.1 Basic information about the Manual

The vehicles of TATRA FORCE EURO 5 series in the 4x4, 6x6 and 8x8 versions are off-road vehicles
intended for installation of the superstructures with the possibility of operation on roads, forest roads and
off-road.
Their outstanding driving properties proved even in the roughest terrain and climatic conditions result from
a high rigidity of the chassis, which uses the central back-bone tube, cross girders and frame assisted by the
all-wheel drive of half-axles being sprung independently on each other.
The mentioned vehicles feature two, three or four axles with a switchable front axle(s) drive.
They are powered by eight-cylinder turbocharged air-cooled engines meeting the EURO 5 emissions
regulations.
However, the vehicle operating ability and reliability depend not only on its perfect design proved in the
exacting tests and rallys, but also on its proper attendance.
This “Operation Manual” contains the data, which should help the driver to assure an optimum economic
operation, driving safety and comfort. In addition to the information about the vehicle´s operation and
attendance, the Manual pays attention also to the vehicle´s maintenance and minor repairs which can be
done by yourself.
Keep this “Operation Manual” in the driver´s cab at all times for ready reference.
Prior to start out for the first time, read it through carefully and pay particular attention especially to
chapters “Safety precautions”, “Vehicle description and main specifications”, “Description of the
vehicle control” and “Vehicle operation”.
If you follow all instructions mentioned, the TATRA vehicle will reward you with a trouble-free and economic
operation.
A sure way how to achieve it is to have your vehicle serviced at the TATRA service network.
CAUTION!
The specifications and illustrations contained in this Manual are subject to a change without any prior
announcement.
This Operation Manual also describes the equipment that is delivered as option or as a part of the
vehicle´s accessories.
For that reason you can sometimes skip over some articles describing the equipment that has not
been supplied with your vehicle.
If the vehicle is equipped with a superstructure (body, truck, tanker, etc.), separate "Bodybuilder Guidelines"
also form an integral part of the vehicle documentation. Therefore, please read the "Superstructure Safety
Instructions", "Superstructure Control" and "Superstructure Operation and Maintenance" sections before
taking the first ride or use.
Page 1-2
31-10-2017 General information
1.2 General safety instructions

To prevent the damage to your vehicle, to avoid a possibility of personal injuries and a risk of the
accident, follow all safety precautions and instructions mentioned in this “Operation Manual” and
those stated below.
CAUTION!
A failure to observe the following safety instructions can seriously jeopardize the health and safety of persons,
cause damage to the vehicle and result in dangerous situations.
- Always make sure to follow the safety instructions in this manual and do not ignore them.
- Please read the instructions on the labels and stickers provided with the various vehicle parts and follow
them! These labels are designed to protect your health and safety, so do not overlook them!
- If you have to stop in a dangerous place and you are about to leave the vehicle, turn the hazard lights on,
put a warning vest on and place a warning triangle in a safe distance behind the vehicle (the use of a
warning vest is mandatory in some countries).
Use protecting aids such as gloves, glasses, face shield, working cloth, safety boots, head-dress, respirator,
hearing protector, etc. when working on the vehicle.
1.2.1 Safety precautions for vehicle use

Basic safety rules
Driver
Drivers must hold all relevant certificates of his/her qualification to drive.
The driver may only drive the unit if in good state of health and rested properly.
Vehicle
Vehicle condition and equipment must meet standards and regulations of a respective country where the unit
is operated.
Before operation, technical condition must be checked, ranging from a check of rearview mirrors and
headlamps for dirt, up to storage of outfit required (tow bar, anti-skid chains, etc.).
Cab
Only maximum permissible number of persons may be transported in the cab, no hazardous substances may
be transported.
Check the floor on the driver’s side for loose objects. These objects can interfere with the pedal, which can
lead to very dangerous situations.
When driving a vehicle equipped with a manual transmission, do not lean your foot on the clutch pedal, it
could result in excessive clutch wear.
Superstructure
The superstructure is only allowed to be used by persons trained in its controls and informed about traffic
safety. While working with the superstructure, all safety regulations must be complied with (see separate
instructions to the superstructure).Permissible axle load and the total vehicle weight may not be exceeded.
Load (cargo)
The cargo must be properly secured so that it could not move, even during an emergency stop. Please
remember that the side walls, bulkheads, etc. are often not designed for a big thrust. The cargo must not
protrude beyond the vehicle contour above the limit permitted by local regulations. The cargo has an influence
on the vehicle stability and may also require a larger vehicle turning radius.
Page 1-3
When loading, make sure not to exceed the following values:

- Gross Combination Weight (GCW)
- Vehicle maximum permissible all-up weight (GVW)
- maximum permissible axle load
When carrying dangerous substances, the vehicle must properly be marked and in a good condition.
On-vehicle adjustments
Vehicle modifications or adjustments may require reprogramming the electronic units in an authorized TATRA
TRUCKS service dealer.
While driving
Should a malfunction occur during operation, stop safely and search for a cause.
Driving may only be continued after a defect/malfunction is removed or it has been verified that it is not
serious from the technical point of view and safety is not compromised.
While driving, the driver may not use any equipment, even included in the unit accessories, which might
compromise his/her focus on driving.
Always adapt your driving style to the load nature.
When driving, pay maximum attention to unit operation and control.
CAUTION!
It is forbidden to shut down the engine of a moving vehicle!
There is a risk of loss of vehicle control that can lead to a serious accident, property damage, injury or death.
CAUTION!
On the ride, do not turn off the engine (powersteering, insufficient braking).
A failure to follow this instruction may result in serious accident, property damage, injury or death of persons..
Parking
Stationary vehicle must be parked properly.
When parking on a hill, on slippery surfaces, etc., it is necessary to observe the following guidelines.
1. Chock the wheels of a fixed axle with wedges on both sides.
2. Turn the wheels so that the vehicle will move away from the road centre if it moves.
A stationary unit must have the following:

- parking brake engaged;
- shift selector lever in neutral (N);
- battery disconnector turned off;
- vents of engine-independent diesel heater must not be closed;
- no important documents should be left in the cab.
If a combination of vehicles is concerned, the driver, before leaving the vehicle, must test the unit´s ability to
keep the unbraked trailer (release the parking brake lever to unbrake the trailer while the vehicle is braked,
return it to the braking position again to brake the whole vehicle combination).
If the vehicle must stay on a road, always leave the hazards lights turned on.
In case of longer standing, place a warning triangle behind the unit in accordance with on-road traffic
regulations.
Page 1-4
Coupling a trailer
Before each ride, check the trailer coupling and make sure the air hoses and electrical connections are
properly connected.
Anchoring the vehicle on a means of transportation

To anchor the vehicle in the front, use the lower anchorage eyes of the lifting attachments in the front bumper.
To anchor the vehicle in the rear, use the lower anchorage eyes of the lifting attachments in the vehicle rear or
the hitch. Never use the rear suspension leaf springs to tie down the vehicle in the rear.
Safety belts
Always wear your seat belt (mandatory in certain countries). Seat belts work properly only if they are properly
fastened. For this reason, never use a buckle or other tool to reduce belt tension.
Engine
Do not allow the engine to run in closed rooms not being ventilated adequately.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an invisible and odorless gas that is highly toxic.
Inhalation of these gases may result in loss of consciousness and death. Do not allow the engine to run in
closed or poorly ventilated rooms. Make sure the exhaust gases are discharged properly.
A poorly maintained, damaged or corroded exhaust system can cause carbon monoxide intrusion into the
cab. Carbon monoxide can also come from other vehicles in the area. Improper vehicle maintenance can
cause carbon monoxide intrusion into the cab and consequent serious illness. Never leave the engine run
longer time to idle. If you smell exhaust fumes, find out the cause and remove it as soon as possible.
Never leave the engine running at idle speed without the driver's presence, thus reducing the risk of personal
injury and/or damage to the vehicle due to engine overheating, which can result in a fire. If the engine
overheats, it is necessary to immediately take necessary measures to rectify this situation. Continuous
operation of the engine unattended even for a short period of time can result in a serious engine failure or fire.
SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction)

The vehicle complies with the current European emission legislation standard EURO 5. To meet this stringent
legislation, the vehicle is equipped with an SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction). This system uses AdBlue to
operate.
To avoid malfunction and damage of the system, it is important to strictly observe the following precautions.
- It is recommended to fill the AdBlue tank directly (always from the original packaging), using official AdBlue
filling equipment. Filling up the AdBlue tank using a dedicated filler gun results in a maximum fill volume of
80%.
- Always fill up the system with 100% clean AdBlue according to DIN 70070. Never use contaminated AdBlue
or contaminated canisters or funnels to fill up the AdBlue tank.
- Avoid diesel mixing with AdBlue in the AdBlue tank: Always use 100% clean canisters and funnels that have
not been used for any other liquids, such as diesel or petrol.
- Due to legislative requirements, the engine can be derated when the exhaust gas emissions are outside the
legal limits. The engine power is limited to approximately 60% of the maximum power.
The engine is derated under the following conditions:
- Emission level is above the legal limits.
- Empty AdBlue tank.
- Interrupted AdBlue dosing, SCR system shuts down.
- Malfunction of the SCR system.
Derate is activated at vehicle standstill or engine idle if the vehicle speed sensor has failed. Derate is also
Page 1-5
deactivated at vehicle standstill or engine idle if the vehicle speed sensor has failed. When the occurred
malfunction is eliminated, the derate is deactivated.
In order to provide the possibility of deploying the fire vehicle, among others, for the preparation for
extraordinary events and during rescue and clean up operations and to protect the population before and after
the period of emergency and state of war, where it is impossible to exclude difficulties with the supply of fire
protection units, for example with AdBlue or fuel from the public network, the engine design allows for the
operation:
a. without the AdBlue additive, without limitation to the performance parameters and reduced engine life
and without the need for increased maintenance and servicing during or after operation;
b. when using a unified fuel designated pursuant to the F 34 military standards without additives. Such a
delivery usually includes all necessary components and possibly tools needed to modify the exhaust
system. Where these technical conditions are not warranted by the engine according to the currently
valid emission standard, an engine compliant with a lower emission standard can be used providing
the other current regulations for the vehicle road operation are met.
Note:
No engine power limitation applies to the vehicles listed in the relevant exceptions pursuant to the Decree of
the Ministry of Transport and Communications (e.g. Fire Brigade) when operated with an empty AdBlue tank
or SCR system malfunction.
WARNING:
AdBlue fluid is aggressive to metals and therefore must not come into contact with metal parts.
Danger of fire and burns

The exhaust manifold may be very hot (even +200 °C). Be sure that no flammables (e.g. hay, leaves, grass,
etc.) get into contact with the hot exhaust manifold during driving or engine running at idle and/or at standstill
after stopping the engine; a fire resulting in a heavy personal injury and a material damage may occur.
Take extra caution with the automatic transmission cooling system and condenser on the roof, both of them
may reach up to 85 °C.
Vehicle components
Keep a safe distance from the rotating and hot vehicle parts.
Fire Extinguisher
Always make sure the fire extinguisher is in the vehicle (mandatory in some countries). Securely fasten the
extinguisher within reach of the driver, where it will be easily accessible for rescue workers and others
providing assistance. Have the fire extinguisher checked every year. Replace the used fire extinguisher at the
earliest opportunity.
Note:
The fire extinguisher must not be positioned in such a way that the cylinder valve is facing down or in the
direction of travel, or upright.
In case of fire:
Certain plastics can produce gases during burning, form a corrosive acid if combined with water. Therefore,
do not touch any liquids flowing out of the fire extinguisher in the vehicle without wearing protective gloves.
CAUTION!
Danger of inhalation of toxic combustion products.
Page 1-6
First aid kit

Always make sure the first aid kit is in the vehicle (mandatory in some countries). Replenish the first aid kit
after using as soon as possible and check the warranty period of the first aid kit contents.
Reflective vest
In case of vehicle breakdown on the road, use a reflective vest when being outside the vehicle (mandatory in
some countries). It has to be stored in the cab and driver should use it always before getting out of the vehicle
on a public road.
Warning triangle
The vehicle must always be equipped with a warning triangle (mandatory in some countries), possibly in
combination with other means of marking.
Operating fluids
Various oils and lubricants, brake fluid, electrolyte, diesel fuel, AdBlue and the anti-freeze are filled to your
vehicle; all of them may be harmful to your health. Never allow these fluids to get in your eyes or to come in
direct contact with your skin. Do not us flammables on the engine or in the near proximity! Pay extreme
attention when discharging heated oils. They may cause serious burns.
WARNING:
Do not handle with combustibles around the vehicle exhaust system.
Air conditioning system

The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Removal of any parts of the air
conditioning system is not permitted. Work on the air conditioning system may only be carried out by qualified
personnel. Contact a TATRA TRUCKS dealer.
If the air conditioning fails, have it repaired by a TATRA TRUCKS dealer as soon as possible to avoid further
damage to the system.
Maintenance works
When servicing or repairing the vehicle, make sure the shift selector lever is in neutral N, the vehicle is
secured with the parking brake and wheels are supported with blocks.
No objects may be laid on rotating components.
When working under the cab make sure the cab is lifted fully and secured against accidental releasing to the
operating position.
Before lifting the cab, secure objects in the cab to avoid damage to the windshield and reassure that there is
enough room in front of the vehicle.
In case of accident, lift the cab only if necessary. Lifting mechanism may be damaged.
When working under the vehicle lifted using the lifting equipment, secure the vehicle with appropriate suports.
Air leakage
If air pressure in the air tanks drops quickly after engine shutdown, this means that the vehicle air system is
leaking.
As a leakage influences safe operation of the braking system, all leaks must be removed as soon as possible.
Page 1-7
Differential
The differential can be equipped with a differential lock. The differential lock may only be used when driving on
soft ground or on a slippery road surface, and never on firm ground.
WARNING:
If excessive wheel slip is detected, follow the instructions for the use and activation of the differential
lock. Excessive speed difference between the wheels on an axle when driving on soft ground or on
slippery road surfaces can lead to serious damage to the differential.
Electric system
Nominal voltage of the vehicle electric system is 24 V.
When replacing or assembling electric or electronic components, make sure they are designed for this type of
electric system.
Connecting accessories
Never connect accessories or other electrical components to the vehicle by splitting the vehicle wiring or
connection to the electrical components. A failure to comply with these conditions may have serious
consequences for the electrical systems in the vehicle and can lead to short circuits and fires. Connect
accessories only to dedicated outlets for accessories in the instrument cluster or a lighter, always taking into
account the maximum allowable power. Accessories may also be connected, after consultation with the
authorized TATRA TRUCKS service dealer, to the dedicated connectors for accessories mounted in the
vehicle.
Lighting
When replacing the bulbs the following conditions must be met:
- Lights turned off.
- Ignition turned off.
- Always disconnect the lighting system from the power supply by removing the light fuses.
- Wait until the lighting units cool down before touching them. Injury hazard!
After replacing a lamp, have the headlight settings checked at a TATRA TRUCKS authorized service dealer at
the earliest opportunity.
Batteries
The vehicle is equipped with a set of two 12-volt batteries.
WARNING:
Never disconnect the battery leads while the engine is running! Disconnecting the battery leads with
the engine running can cause damage to electrical components in the vehicle.
Always disconnect the battery earth lead before carrying out repairs or service on the electrical system. The
battery earth lead (grounding conductor) can be disconnected only after 90 seconds delay between switching
off the ignition. A failure to follow these instructions may result in significant adverse effects on various
electrical systems in the vehicle. Never place any tools on the battery. This may cause a short circuit and may
even cause the battery to explode.
Charge the batteries in a room perfectly ventilated only. Never create a spark, smoke or light a match around
the batteries. Quick batteries charging should be applied only if necessary. Ropes have to be removed from
batteries during this kind of charging.
Page 1-8
Battery capacity
Using electrical components, such as the cab heater or refrigerator when the engine is not running, power will
be drawn from the batteries.
Approximately half the battery capacity is required to start the engine. If this is the case over a longer period,
particularly during low temperatures, theresult may be that the electrics have used so much power that there
is not enoughto start the engine.
If the larger consumers, such as the cab heater, refrigerator, coffee percolator, microwave oven or tail-lift are
used, it is recommended that you obtain batteries of a higher capacity in consultation with your TATRA
TRUCKS dealer.
Battery disconnector
The battery disconnector (isolator) can be switched off only after a 90-second delay from switching
the ignition off.
Before turning off the battery disconnector, the SCR ramp-down phase must be completed (Selective
Catalytic Reduction).
CAUTION!
Never use the battery disconnector while driving. Never use the battery disconnector when the
ignition is on. Using the battery disconnector while driving will turn off all electrical systems and the
engine. This can lead to very dangerous situations and damage to the vehicle electronics.
Polyamide pipes
A warning plate warns of drilling and welding procedures performed near plastic tubes.
WARNING:
The pneumatic brake pipes and fuel pipes are made of the plastic material being resistant to
temperatures up to 120 °C only.
For this reason, they must be protected or removed when welding.
The same applies to the wiring and other plastics.
A failure to follow this warning may result in serious damage to the vehicle.
Electric arc welding

Due to the use of electronic circuits and control units on the vehicle, it is always necessary to disconnect all
electronic control units (engine, transmission units, ABS, etc.) before the start of welding.
In addition, it is necessary to disconnect the clip c/w rope from the positive (+) batteries terminal and to
connect the rope to the vehicle ground.
At the same time it is necessary to insulate the batteries positive terminal to protect it from possible
short-circuit.
Connect the welding set earthing terminal as close as possible to the weld, but never on a rotating part nor
a set with moving parts.
During reconnecting, remember first to disconnect the ground connection and only after doing it, connect it to
the terminal!
Should you not keep the above-mentioned instructions, the vehicle electronic devices may be damaged.
Make sure sparks given off do not fall to the air and fuel system hoses, bellows springs, electric wiring and so
on.
Wheel nuts tightening

On the new vehicles and after each wheel replacement it is necessary to retorque the wheels to 650 ± 50 Nm
after covering about 50 km.
Page 1-9
Recommendations for vehicle towing

(Refer to Chapter 5.26 ”Emergency vehicle towing - recommended precautions”).
Manual tools
When using electric tools, make sure to avoid damage to the air, fuel and oil pipes and electric wiring and
prevent contact of any waste parts to any vehicle system.
Mobile phones and walki-talkies

CAUTION!
Do not use mobile phones and transmitters (walkie-talkies) without a separate antenna installed on
the vehicle. The use of mobile telephones or transmitters without a separateoutside aerial may cause
excessively high electromagnetic fields in the cab interior (resonance effect). In this case, there may
be interference to the operation of the vehicle electronics.
If mobile phones or radio equipment is used, it is necessary to consider the following points:
- Mobile phones and transmitters (walkie-talkies) must not be used without a separate antenna installed on
the vehicle.
- In addition, an external antenna is important to assure maximum range of these equipments.
Note:
Follow the regulations applicable to the use of phones and walkie-talkies!
CAUTION!
For the safety reasons, drivers should not use the mobile phones during driving!
Accessories and spare parts

We recommend using, in your own interest, of only accessories approved by TATRA TRUCKS a .s.,
and TATRA genuine spare parts according to the catalogue.
These accessories and spare parts have been tested in terms of reliability, appropriateness and safety for
TATRA vehicle.
As regards the other products, TATRA TRUCKS a. s., is neither able to qualify these properties in spite of
continuous market monitoring nor guarantee their safety and reliability although these products are provided
with different official permissions for sale.
Winter conditions
During the cold weather, pay special attention to, inter alia, the following:
- Make sure (especially when driving in mountainous areas), that the vehicle is fitted with winter tires or snow
chains.
- Before using windshield wipers, check that the blades are not frozen to the windscreen, - otherwise they
may be damaged. Freezing of the wiper blades to the windshield can be prevented if you put something
between the blades and the windshield.
- When the tank is filled with winter diesel, run the auxiliary heater with the new fuel for half an hour.
- Check whether all the old fuel has been consumed.
- AdBlue expands more than pure water when it freezes. If the vehicle is parked or stored for more than 48
hours at a temperature - 20 °C or lower, it is recommended not to fulfill the AdBlue tank more than up to
75%. This way you can prevent, for example, possible damage to the AdBlue tank.
Page 1-10
Environment
Environmental pollution poses a serious threat. In order to reduce the pollution to a minimum TATRA
TRUCKS recommends observing the following rules:
- Never spill used oil, fuel, lubricants, hydraulic fluid, AdBlue nor coolant into drains, sewers, waste dumps or
on the ground. Such a method of disposal is illegal.
- These liquids must be returned for recycling or disposal to the relevant organizations or companies carrying
out chemical waste collection.
- All liquids must be stored separately.
- Make sure that the vehicle undergoes regular servicing pursuant to the instructions and recommendations
from TATRA TRUCKS. Proper implementation of the vehicle servicing reduces fuel consumption and
exhaust emissions.
Assembly of superstructures and transformation of TATRA vehicle

If a superstructure is to be mounted on the tractor unit or TATRA vehicle transformation is assumed,
it is recommended to follow the ASSEMBLY MANUAL FOR TATRA SUPERSTRUCTURES, publication No.
11-0501-ENG and applicable guidelines of TATRA TRUCKS a. s.
It is possible to download the Superstructure Assembly Manual for TATRA chassis from Tatra Dealer Portal in
Documentation section - http://tdp.tatra.cz
1.2.2 Safety instructions for working with hazardous materials

The hazardous material identification is required for various cases of vehicle transportation or accidents.
Thus, the operating and transportation configuration of T 815-7 vehicle contains the following hazardous
materials:
WARNING:
Oil products are toxic and flammable.
Battery, wet, filled with acid.

Hazard identification: Battery acid and hydrogen gas from battery use.
The vehicle uses four batteries during normal operations.
Never short the battery terminals.
Do not smoke or use open flames near batteries.
Batteries may explode from spark.
Battery acid is harmful to skin and eyes.
Always use rubber gloves, protecting shield or eye-glasses, leather or rubber apron.
Diesel fuel
Hazard identification: Automotive fuel, diesel fuel.
The vehicle has fuel tank, independent heating and fuel manifold.
Diesel fuel is toxic and flammable.
Use gloves when handling.
Oils
Hazard identification: Lubrication oils.
The vehicle uses the following lubricating oils:
Engine oil, transmission oil and hydraulic oil.
Use gloves when handling.
Page 1-11
Ethyl alcohol
Hazard designation: Antifreeze for window washers (e.g. ethyl alcohol).
The vehicle has one washer container. The antifreeze and its fumes are flammable. When handling, use
protective gloves to avoid inhalation. Protect eyes with glasses.
Refrigerant
Hazard designation: Refrigerant.
Avoid direct contact with the refrigerant.
The refrigerant has a low boiling point and can cause chilblains (-26 °C).
1.2.3 Fire safety rules for unit operation

As a large quantity of extremely flammable liquids is used during vehicle operation (fuel, oils, etc.) and the
operation itself creates a number of ignition sources (exhaust, electric short circuits, defective brakes, etc.),
pay extreme attention to fire prevention.
Fuel system
Check the fuel system for leaks on regular basis.
Groundless increase in fuel consumption may be caused by fuel leaks.
Exhaust manifold
Keep tight connections of individual exhaust system components, replace sealing with new one if
disassembled.
Do not operate the unit with perforated muffler.
Electric equipment
Check the rope insulation regularly, remove defects found out immediately.
Keep all contacts clean, free of corrosion and tightened properly.
If a fuse is blown, find the short circuit and repair.
Use fuses of specified values only.
Never replace a fuse with another wire.
Never use defective consumers.
Turn off the battery disconnector if the vehicle is left for a longer period of time.
Brakes
After operation, even in case of apparently reduced power output, check the wheel discs for overheating on
brakes.
Tires
An excessively underinflated (flat) tire may cause fire at high speeds.
Cleanliness
Greasy spots are not capable of self-ignition as a rule, but they rapidly spread the fire to other vehicle parts.
Page 1-12
1.2.4 Safety precautions for cab lifting/lowering

Safety instructions before lifting the cab
1. While lifting the cab, there must be free space of 1,500 mm in front of the vehicle at least!
2. Before lifting the cab, always make sure that the vehicle is on a solid surface.
3. The vehicle must be parked on a level surface. Never lift the cab when the vehicle is tilted more than
10%.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in overloading of the cab tilting piston rod or pump.
4. Before lifting the cab, chock the drive axle wheels on both sides.
5. Turn off the independent diesel heater and all electric circuits.
6. Before lifting the cab, turn off the engine, secure the vehicle with the parking brake and shift into neutral.
If it is necessary to start the engine while the cab is raised, make sure that the shift selector lever is in
neutral.
7. Before lifting the cab, close and secure the roof hatch.
8. To avoid damage to the windshield, ensure that there are no loose objects in the cab.
9. Before lifting the cab, lift off the front bonnet and lock it in the open position.
Safety precautions for cab lifting
1. While lifting, proceed with the utmost caution. Do not stand in front of the cab during lifting/lowering the
cab.
2. Pay enhanced attention while opening the door when the cab is lifted. A failure to follow this instruction
may result in cab or door damage and subsequent serious injury.
3. Make sure there are no persons in the cab during lifting or lowering.
4. Before lifting the cab, make sure that there is no obstacle in the cab lifting path! Warning with other
persons! There is a risk of hand injury by squeezing between the bumper and driver's cab!
5. Work under tilted cab also requires extreme caution.
6. Staying under partially tilted cab is not acceptable.
7. If the vehicle is equipped with a safety strut for tilted cab, it must be always used!
8. Lift the cab forward to its foremost position; then it cannot accidentally tilt back.
9. After a collision (i.e. traffic accident) tilt the cab only in an emergency. The cab must under no
circumstances be tilted without proper safety measures! The tilt mechanism may be damaged. In such
a case there is a danger that the cab will no longer be secured and may tip over and fall forward.
Safety precautions for cab lowering
1. Remove the safety strut before lowering the cab.
2. While lowering, proceed with the utmost caution. Do not stand under the cab when lowering the cab.
3. Before lowering the cab, make sure that there is no obstacle in the cab lowering path! Caution with other
persons! There is a risk of hand injury by squeezing between the cab and frame or fender!
Safety precautions after cab lowering
1. After lowering check the cab locks, they must be properly secured.
Page 1-13
1.2.5 Safety instructions for operation with refrigerant (A/C)

The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Dismantling any part of the A/C system is
not allowed. Work on the A/C system is only to be done by suitably qualified personnel.
Contact an authorized TATRA TRUCKS repair shop. Malfunctions in the A/C system must be repaired by an
authorized TATRA TRUCKS repairer as soon as possible to prevent greater damage to the system.
1.2.6 Safety instructions for the EBERSPÄCHER independent hot air heater
CAUTION!
Danger of burns, fire and injury!!
The engine-independent hot air heaters are used to heat the cab interior.
1. The engine-independent hot air heating may be brought into operation only with the upper casing closed
and exhaust outlet mounted on. Do not open the upper casing during operation.
2. Beware of very hot surface of the independent hot air heater, exhaust gas and hot air duct during the
heating operation and immediately after switching off. When working on these hot parts, make sure the
independent hot air heater is turned off and wait until the parts are completely cold down.
3. If the fuel is leaking from the independent hot-air heater system or the fuel is leaking in general, switch off
the independent hot-air heater, or do not switch it on and remove the fuses of the independent hot-air
heater. Have the cause of the fault removed in an authorized TATRA TRUCKS service dealer.
Do not breathe fumes (they are toxic).
4. Do not operate an independent hot-air heater in enclosed areas such as a garage or a parking garage.
5. The independent hot-air heater may not be operated where flammable vapours or dust may form,
e.g. nearby:
- fuel depot;
- coal yard;
- wood store;
- grain storage and the like.
6. When refueling, switch off the independent hot air heater
7. Never store or transport especially canisters with spare fuel, oil cans, sprays, gas cylinders, fire
extinguishers, cleaning cloths, papers and the like on or beside the independent hot-air heater.
8. Replace defective fuses only with fuses with the specified fuse rating.
9. If the fuel leaks from the diesel heating system, make sure to have the damage removed immediately at
an authorized TATRA TRUCKS service dealer.
10. When turning off the independent hot-air heater, never interrupt its run-out prematurely, for example by
turning off the battery disconnector, except for emergency shutdown.
Page 1-14
1.2.7 Safety instructions for lifting/lowering the spare wheel

Safety instructions before lowering the spare wheel
1. Safety instructions before lowering the spare wheel.
Use caution when handling the spare wheel, especially with respect to the wheel weight.
2. When unlocking the arm and lowering (lifting) the spare wheel, make sure no person stands in the wheel
route. Do not stay in the wheel route when lowering!
Pay extreme attention when working with spare wheel on the road. The arm with the spare wheel reaches
far from the vehicle when lowered on the ground.
3. Make sure that there is no obstacle in the path of the spare wheel being lowered!
4. When replacing a wheel on the road, be very careful to avoid danger to road traffic and your safety
5. When lowering the wheel lifting device, use caution to avoid catching with the bodywork.
Safety instructions before lifting the spare wheel
1. Do not stay in the wheel route when lifting! Pay extreme attention when working with spare wheel on the
road.
2. When lifting the arm with the wheel, use caution to avoid catching with the bodywork.
Safety instructions after lifting the spare wheel
1. Secure the spare wheel holder arm in the upper transport position and, when operating the vehicle,
without the spare wheel. Make sure that the spare wheel holder arm is safely secured. A failure to
comply may result in injury or death.
Page 1-15
1.2.8 Precautions on tipper body use

This chapter only lists the basic safety instructions for the use of tipper bodies.
For more information and instructions, see separate superstructure (body) instructions.
Driver´s responsibility for tipping:

- Always remember that the vehicle security when tipping is solely a driver’s responsibility.
- Never dump the material from the tipper body, unless you are sure that the vehicle can not overturn during
tipping.
- Always make sure that the vehicle is on a solid surface, preferably not in a downhill direction. Make sure
that the vehicle will remain on a solid surface, even if it will move forward.
- Always make sure that the tipper trailer is aligned behind the vehicle.
- Before tipping, make sure that no persons are near the vehicle, and that nobody can be compromised even
if the vehicle rolls over.
- Always make sure before tipping that the tailgate is open.
- Never stand nor go directly behind the raised vehicle body, or behind the vehicle tipping load.
- Never leave your vehicle during tipping, and make sure that all cab doors are securely closed.
- Always pay close attention to possible barriers, especially high-voltage lines. Do not expect that you will be
alerted to such obstacles by the building owner (operator). If the vehicle tipper body came into contact with
power lines, it must be lowered immediately. If you are unable to do so immediately, jump from the vehicle
and remember that you must not touch the vehicle and the ground at the same moment as it would close the
electrical circuit. Do not let anyone approach the vehicle, if it is in contact with power lines. IMMEDIATELY
CALL EMERGENCY SERVICE RESPONSIBLE FOR ELECTRICAL WIRING.
- Remember that an electric discharge can jump on a relatively large distance. Therefore, be careful when
tipping in the vicinity of power lines.
- Always be sure, if the load is higher than the rear tailgate, that it cannot stop under it, because under
certain circumstances this may result in disengaging of the body from the cylinder and then flipping the
whole body back under the weight of the jammed load.
- Remember that if the load does not start dumping at an angle of 20° (i.e. roughly at a half the body lifting
travel), it is necessary to stop tipping and see what has caused it. In this case, take a look around the
vehicle while keeping a safe distance from it.
- Never attempt to loosen the load from the body by jerky movements of the vehicle forward and backward.
- Remember that if the vehicle rolls over, it is much safer to stay in the cab. Brace yourself firmly into the seat
and hold the steering wheel.
- Never attempt to leave the vehicle when it starts rolling over.
- Do not forget to return the tipping control lever to the neutral position at the moment when the body rises to
the maximum.
- Never forget to make sure that PTO is turned off after tipping.
- Never rev engine into the red zone while tipping, it could result in an oil vacuum at the pump suction side
and cause damage.
- Do not forget to make sure that the body is completely empty. Always before departure from the place of
unloading, return the cargo bed down and remove possible obstacles and secure the tailgate.
Driver´s responsibility when loading:

- Always make sure the persons loading your vehicle are competent and that they will safely load the cargo
to your vehicle. If in doubt, check with the building owner or operator that they have the appropriate
experience.
- Always make sure that the load is evenly distributed across the body (platform) surface to prevent the
rollover to a side during tipping, and to ensure a balanced axis load. The tipping system can be damaged if
the cargo is too far forward.
Page 1-16
- Never stand near the vehicle if it is being loaded or is parked in the loading area. Never stand on the vehicle
when it is being loaded.
- Pay attention to cargoes that can easily freeze or stick, such as wet sand or gravel. Cargo that freezes on
one side of the platform may cause rollover while tipping.
- Pay attention to cargoes of different density. If coarser load portions start dumping first, while finer parts
remain stuck together, the vehicle can lose its balance and become unstable.
Vehicle operator’s liability:

- Never work under the tipper body raised without an adequate support. All safety measures regarding
stability during tipping, binding to the driver, are equally binding to the maintenance staff and mechanics.
- Always check and lubricate all hinges and cylinder during routine inspections. Make sure all hose
connections are OK and that there are no fluid leaks. Hydraulic fluid can cause health problems, threaten
the environment and it must not escape from the closed system.
- Always check that the hydraulic hoses are neither swollen nor scrubbing the body.
- Regularly check the body for protruding sharp parts that could cause injury to bystanders or building
workers. Make sure that the seal around the tailgate is fine, and that the material can not escape when
closed.
- Always check the vehicle tail lamps for damage after tipping or riding off road.
- Always take advantage of an authorized supplier to procure all the parts necessary to repair or renew the
cylinder. Make sure all seals come in the original sealed containers marked by the manufacturer.
Page 1-17
1.2.9 Safety instructions for operation with winch

1. The main principles of safety at work never use the winch in explosive environment.
2. Using the winch for transporting, lifting or securing of persons is strictly prohibited.
3. A winch operator must be demonstrably be instructed in the basic principles of safety and the whole
Operation Manual. The operator must be trained with special emphasis on the winch control and
operation.
4. The operator must be familiar with the operation of the hydraulic circuit. The operation of the directional
control valve should be checked every day before work.
5. Do neither allow children to tamper with the winch in any way, nor stay close to pulling loads.
6. Use powder extinguisher in the event of fire.
7. If oil leaks from the hydraulic circuit, proceed in accordance with the regulations on environmental
protection.
How to tow loads:

1. Avoid pulling loads, which are buried, stuck by or otherwise attached.
2. Pull only the loads of known weight with respect to the winch pulling power to prevent overloading and
damage to the winch.
3. Under poor visibility the work area must be well lit.
4. Use gloves to protect your hands while tying loads.
5. When tying loads, use only a rope and hook, or textile or other tiedown tool of the capacity corresponding
to the winch tensile strength.
6. When unwinding the rope, a minimum of 5 threads must remain on the drum.
7. Make sure the hook or any other tiewdown/slinging tool is perfectly coupled. If the hook or slinging tool
slips out when the rope is under tension, this may result in serious injury. Also a loose load may be cause
serious injury during reverse motion.
8. Neither operator nor bystanders may stay in the workspace between the load and the winch and within
the distance, which could be dangerous in case of rope breakage.
9. When winding watch the moving load carefully and in case of any dangerous situation immediately stop
winding.
10. Never leave a load under tension unattended.
11. Do not roll the vehicle with the winch under tension (rope overload and damage to the winch will occur).
12. A winch operator must take extra care when winding or unwinding the rope. Particularly avoid contact
with the moving rope. There is the risk of entanglement between the fairlead rollers.
13. After pulling the load make sure that the load cannot loosen off (reverse motion), if necessary secure the
load with chocks or other appropriate means.
14. When winding a slack rope pay extra attention when the hook approaches to the fairlead (approximately
100 mm of free rope must remain between the hook and fairlead), use the enclosed hook or nylon strap
for this.
15. In all cases when you work together with another competent person in pulling the load, always make a
sound signal beforehand.
Page 1-18
1.3 Environmental precautions

The operation fluids and chemicals in all forms are very dangerous to the environment.
Disposal of waste, except for special cases stipulated by the law, such as wastewater, rare metals, radioactive
waste, is governed in respective countries by a respective Act regarding waste.
Each person is obliged to dispose of waste only in the manner stipulated by legal regulations valid in the
respective country.
Waste mean, in the sense of the Act mentioned, any movable thing a person gets rid of or intends or has to
get rid of and is classified by any group of waste as specified by the Appendix to the mentioned Act.
Waste specified in the List of hazardous waste included in the implementing legal regulation and any other
waste showing one or more hazardous properties specified in the Appendix to the mentioned Act, shall be
considered as hazardous.
Disposal of waste occurs always when a person passes a movable thing classified in any of waste groups, for
the use or removal in the sense of the mentioned Act or if he/she passes it to a person authorized to collect or
buy-out waste under the same Act no matter whether it is free of charge or not.
Disposal of waste occurs even when a person removes a movable thing classified with any of the waste
groups himself/herself.
Any person is obliged, when performing his/her activities, within the scope of his/her competence, anticipate
the occurrence of waste, limit quantity and hazardous properties thereof; waste that cannot be avoided must
always be used or removed in the manner not jeopardizing human health and environment, being in
compliance with the mentioned Act and special legal regulations.
Any person is obliged, when performing his/her activities, within the scope of his/her competence and within
the limits given by the mentioned act, to preferably ensure the use of waste before disposal thereof.
The material use of waste is preferred against the other use of waste.
This obligation is not required if technical or economical preconditions for meeting thereof do not exist at the
respective time and place and the procedure in compliance with waste management plans is followed.
When considering the appropriateness of a waste disposal method, the manner shall always be preferred
assuring higher protection of human health and is friendlier to the environment.
Any person is obliged to dispose of waste only in the manner stipulated by the Act and other legal regulations
regarding environment protection.
When liquidating the vehicle or chassis, proceed in accordance with legal regulations, including associated
public notices and decrees.
Wreck cars
A wreck car means any complete or incomplete motor vehicle that was designed to be operated on roads for
the purpose of transportation of persons, animals or material, and has become a waste as per the mentioned
Act.
Anyone who gets rid of a wreck car must pass the wreck car to the operators competent to use, remove,
collect or buy out wreck cars.
Tires
A tire means any mechanical equipment made of rubber, chemical compounds, fabric and steel or other
materials that, having been installed to the vehicle wheel, provides traction and contains load-carrying gas.
Any person liquidating a tire is obliged to pass it to the operators competent to use, remove, collect or buy out
tires.
Used oils
Used oil means any mineral or synthetic lubricating or industrial oil that has become inappropriate for the use
as intended originally, namely oil from combustion engines, gearbox oil, hydraulic oil, as well as mineral or
synthetic lubricating oil.
Any person liquidating used oil is obliged to pass it to the operators competent to use, remove, collect or buy
out used oils.
Page 1-19
Batteries
A battery means a source of power generated by direct conversion of chemical energy.
Any person liquidating batteries is obliged to pass it to the operators competent to use, remove, collect or buy
out batteries.
Filtering equipment
Filtering equipment means such equipment containing a replaceable part (filter element) designed to remove
solid particles from fluids and gases.
Any person liquidating filtering equipment or filter element is obliged to pass it to the operators competent to
use, remove, collect or buy out filtering equipment or filter elements.
Used operating fluids

Used operating fluid means any natural or synthetic fluid or combination thereof that has become
inappropriate for the use as intended originally.
Namely, braking fluid, coolant, antifreeze, fluids with anticorrosion additives and others, as the case may be.
Any person liquidating used operating fluids is obliged to pass it to the operators competent to use, remove,
collect or buy out used operating fluids.
Diesel fuel
Diesel fuel means a distillate obtained by crude oil refining or distillation of organogenic shale designed to
drive diesel engines.
Any person liquidating diesel oil is obliged to pass it to the operators competent to use, remove, collect or buy
out diesel oil.
Used grease
Used grease means any mineral or synthetic lubricating, sealing or preserving grease that has become
inappropriate for the use as intended originally.
Any person liquidating used grease is obliged to pass it to the operators competent to use, remove, collect or
buy out grease.
Sorption agents, wiping cloths

Sorption agents (textile or loose) serves to capture the spilled operating fluids or clean machine parts,
e.g. remove engine oils, lubricants, etc.
Page 1-20
1.4 List of symbols used

Diodes
Diode
Indicator lamps
ABS - vehicle
ABS - INFO
ABS - trailer
ABS - off-road
AdBlue level
Air filter
Axle differential
Cab´s locking
Check TRANS (“ALLISON”)
Charging
Engine overheating
Engine failure
High beam
Intake air electric heater
Inter-axle differential
Error in system SCR
Minimum fuel level
Oil pressure
Parking and emergency brake
Page 1-21
Pressure drop in brake cylinders
PTO drive - 1
PTO drive - 2
Rear fog lamp
Servocircuit 1
Servocircuit 2
Service brake air overpressure
Speed limiter
Turn signals - vehicle
Turn signals - trailer
Trailer body tipping
Trailer/semi-trailer tipping preselection
Vehicle height setting (suspension bellows deflated)
Vehicle height setting (suspension bellows inflated)
Ventilation, dependent heater and cooling system control
Temperature setting
Temperature setting
Fan speed setting
Air supply to the head
Air supply to the head and feet
Air supply to the feet and windshield
Air supply to the windshield/defrosting
Page 1-22
Outside temperature display
Turning on the automatic mode/"ECON" mode
Internal air recirculation
A/C feature display
Fuses
ABS
Acoustic alarms (buzzer)
Air conditioning (A/C) condenser engine
Air-conditioning (A/C) system
Auto-radio
Battery disconecting switch
Cab´s locking
Cab (interior) illumination
Control of main headlamps
Diagnostic socket
Daily light
Engine shutdown
Engine start
Front fog lamps
Fuel heating
High beam, RH
High beam, LH
Page 1-23
Headlamps (low beams)
Headlamps (high beams)
Horn
Independent heater
Low beam, LH
Low beam, RH
Rear fog lamps
Starter relay control
Side marker lights, RH
Side marker lights, LH
Socket - cigarette lighter
Stop lights
Switch box - circuit “15”
Tachograph, electronic speedometer
Turn signals
Ventilation, dependent heater and cooling system power supply
Voltage converter 24V/12V
Voltage transformer
Warning lamps
Windshield wiper/washer
Urea dosing system (UDA2)
Engine control unit
Starter swich
Page 1-24
Relays
ABS
AdBlue tank heating
Acoustic signaling
Air conditioning (A/C) condenser engine
Air conditioning (A/C) system compressore
Blocking PTO of transmission
Cab tilting
Daytime running lights
Start blocking
Engine start
Electric air heating
Electric circuit connection “15”
Fuel cleaner
Front fog lamps
Headlamps (low beams)
Headlamps (high beams)
High-pressure brake systems
Low fuel level
PTO blocking
Preheating of AdBlue hoses
Rear fog lamp
Reverse horn
Page 1-25
Spot lights
Starter
Starter relay control
Ventilation, dependent heater and cooling system power supply
Windshield wiper/washer
Wiper cycle timer
Working (elevated) lamp
Compressed air circuit test indicator relay
Gear shift control
High-low range control (H - L)
Air-conditioning system condenser cooling fan
Rear fog lamps
AdBlue tank heating
Cab´s tilting
Hydraulic circuit control - lowering, driving position
Hydraulic circuit control - lifting
Switches
ABS - off-road
Axle differential
Beacon
Ceiling lamp
Central locking
Page 1-26
CTIS (Central tire inflation system)
Electric fuel pump
Engine brake
Front fog lamp
Fuel heating
Inter-axle differential
PTO drive - 1
PTO drive - 2
Rear fog lamp
Rear-view mirrors heating
Rear working lamp
Side marker lights and high/low beam
Warning lamps
SCR emission systems
Vehicle height setting
Tachograph
Date of the inserted disc
Driving interruption
Driver´s name
km Kilometres covered
Place of arrival
Place of the journey start
Page 1-27
Other working emergencies
Other working times
Odometer reading on termination of the journey
Odometer reading before the journey
State license number
Tie-rod
Engine shut-off
Push-buttons
Instruments brightness control
Independent heater - operation
Test
Socket
Socket 12 V
Socket 24 V
Socket 24V - cigarette lighter
Page 1-28
1.5 Definitions of compulsory replaceable parts

Compulsory replaceable parts are the parts recommended by the manufacturer which must be unconditionally
replaced under certain circumstances which occur in the operation or in the course of a repair performed.
- Compulsory replaceable parts for the reason of the lapse of the specified period of time
These are the parts which must be replaced as ordered by the manufacturer after working out a certain
period of time regardless of the number of kilometres covered, engine hours worked out, operations
performed, etc.
There are for example various rubber components, gaskets, hoses, etc.
The reason for the necessary part replacement is a material ageing, weather conditions or the lapse of the
specified time.
When you not observe the replacement of these parts, the equipment safety or function ability in the course
of the use or the environment protection may be impaired.
- Compulsory replaceable parts of the single use
Some parts are determined for the single use because they are damaged fully during their removal so that
they must be replaced with new ones.
These parts include paper gaskets, some fasteners, clips, etc.
The reuse of these parts is not permissible.
- Compulsory replaceable parts for the reason of working out a specified number of engine hours or
covering a specified number of kilometres
This group of compulsory replaceable parts is the widest and includes e.g. filter elements for grease oil or
hydraulic oil filters, protective collars or parts, which lost their service ability because of mechanical
damage.
When not keeping the specified replacement of the part, the product service ability, the product service
safety or the environment protection may be impaired.
- Compulsory replaceable parts for preventive reasons
Some product parts being repaired are replaced preventively regardless of a number of engine hours
worked out, kilometres covered or time of the use at the time of removal.
This group of compulsory replaceable parts includes e.g. bearings, bearing bushes, sealing rings,
safety pieces, gaskets, some fastening elements, etc.
You avoid a later malfunction when you replace these parts.
Page 1-29
1.6 Abbreviations
A/C system Air-conditioning system

Ah Ampere-hour
ABS Anti-lock Brake System
ACEA Association des Constructeurs Européens d'Automobiles
AKB Batteries
AMP Manufacturer connector
AMU Engine Monitoring Unit
API American Petroleum Institute
AZR Automatic Brake Pressure Control
Bé Electrolyte density units (Baumé)
C Crawler Shift
ČOS Czech Defense Standard
ČSN Czech National Standard
ČSN-ISO ČSN International Standart Organization
DIN German Standard
DMD Display Mode/Diagnostic
DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code
ECE Economic Commission for Europe
ECU Engine Control Unit
EEC European Economic Community
EU European Union
Eh Engine Hours
GDN Ground
GL Gear Lubricant
GVW Gross vehicle Weight
h Hour
H High range
Chap Chapter
IEC Intemational Electrotechnical Commission
ISO International Standards Organization
ISO-VG International Standards Organization - Viscosity Grade
L Low range
LED Light Emitting Diode
LH Left Hand
M/A Mechanical/Automatic
MB Standard for Mercedes Benz
MoS2 Molybdenum disulfide, additive mainly to plastic lubricants
max Maximum
min Minimum
No Number
NA Not Applicable
NLGI National Lubrivants and Greases Institute - it issues and approves the standards
NM Diesel fuel
NOx Nitrogen Oxide
NS Painting system
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
OM Operation Manual
Page 1-30
ON Turned ON
OFF Turned Off
OLS Oil Lever Sensor
PTO Power Take-Off
R Reverse Shift
RAL Germany Colour System
RH Right Hand
rpm Revolutions per Minute
SAE Society of Automotive Enginers
SCR Selective Catalytic Reduction
SWH Spare Wheel Holder
TEU Engine control unit
TCM Transmission Control Module
TDS TATRA Drain Spefication (oil refill interval related to the fuel consuption or km
covered)
TM Technical maintenance
TNT TATRA vehicleS a.s. manufacturer world code (for vehicles)
TNU TATRA vehicleS a.s. manufacturer world code (for chassis)
TRN Technical Standart TATRA a. s.
TSU Auxiliary engine cooler
VIN vehicle Identification Number
W Winter
UDA2 Urea Dosing System
Page 1-31
Page 1-32
17
18
1
2 19
3 10 20
4 11
5 12
6 13
7 14
8 15 21
9 16
2 Vehicle identification
Page 2-1
Vehicle identification 01-0565-ENG/01
2.1 Production label

The type plate is located on the right side under the front
fold-away bonnet. The label includes stamped certification
(of vehicle type roadworthiness), vehicle identification
number (VIN) and basic weight data, including permissible
axle loads.
Production label data

1 - national type approval number
2 - vehicle Identification Number (VIN) B 3760
3 - permissible total vehicle weight
4 - total set weight
5 - load of the front axle
17
6 - load of the second axle
7 - load of the third axle 18
1
8 - load of the fourth axle 2 19
9 - supplementary data 3 10 20
10 - total vehicle weight 4 11
5 12
11 - total weight of vehicle combination 6 13
12 - load of the front axle 7 14
13 - load of the second axle 8 15 21
9 16
14 - load of the third axle B 2683
15 - load of the fourth axle
16 - supplementary data
17 - manufacturer’s sign
18 - engine corrected smoke coefficient
19 - numerical identification of the vehicle with design adjustments upon customer’s request (modification)
20 - label of compliance for export to Russia
21 - dipped light setting value
Note:
Data under items 3 through 8 indicate axle weight and loads according to Public Notices valid in respective
states.
Data under items 10 through 15 indicate maximum permitted weight and maximum permitted load of
individual axles according to the vehicle manufacturer. Data 19 indicates the modification behind the slash.
Page 2-2
31-10-2017 Vehicle identification
2.2 Dimension plate

The dimension plate is located on the side gearshift panel
next to the driver’s seat and features stamped certificate of
vehicle identification number (VIN) and basic dimensions.
Dimension plate data 1

1 - Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) L 2 m
2 - Vehicle (chassis) length
w 3 m
3 - Vehicle (chassis) width
4 - Min. distance between the vehicle front and coupling 4 m
a
device centre (coupling hitch or fifth wheel) 5 m
5 - Max. distance between the vehicle front and coupling
device centre (coupling hitch or fifth wheel) B 2684
2.3 Vehicle Identification Number - VIN

Vehicle identification number - indludes the following data:
1 - Manufacturer’s world code – (TNT – for vehicles)
- Manufacturer’s world code – (TNU – for chassis)
2 - Vehicle describing code – indicates vehicle type and
kind: e.g. 731R32
or
e.g. 7T5R31
5
3 - Year of manufacture 1 4
From the year 2010 on, the following alphabet 3
sequence will be used: F-2015, G-2016, H-2017 2
4 - Manufacturing plant (K) - TATRA TRUCKS a. s.,
Koprivnice) B 1727
5 - Product serial number, e.g. 000414
A three-digit number follows the identification number on the label. E.g. 412 - indicates more detailed vehicle
(chassis) version.
Page 2-3
2.4 Chassis identification number

For 4x4 and 6x6 version, it is stamped on the right side of
the front central tube (behind the front axle) and it is the
same as the production label identification number.
e.g.: TNU731R32FK000414
B 1632
For 8x8 version, it is stamped on the right side of the front

intermediate cross member (between the front axles) and it
is the same as the production label identification number,
e.g.: TNU731R99FK000253
B 1614
2.5 Engine type plate TATRA

The engine type plate is located stamped in the front on the
right side of the crankcase and can be read after tilting the TYPE 1
4
5
CODE 2 8 6
cab. Nr 3 7
B 1342
Page 2-4
31-10-2017 Vehicle identification
Engine type plate data

1 - Engine type
2 - Engine version
3 - Engine serial number
4
4 - Type approval (homologation) pursuant to the EU
Guideline - engine emissions for working machines
TYPE 1 5
5 - Approval number pursuant to ECE 24 - engine smoke CODE 2 8 6
6 - Approval number pursuant to ECE 49 - engine Nr 3 7
emissions
7 - Approval number pursuant to ECE 85 - engine power
8 - Certificate issued in the Czech republic - (E8) B 1341
E.g.:
T3D-928-31
-711-
-001896-
2.6 Fording label

The fording label located on the instrument panel in front of
the driver indicates the maximum fording depth of a
particular vehicle.
1200
B 2994
2.7 Other serial numbers

The other important units (transmission, transfer case, axles, steering, cab, winch and body) have the serial
numbers of their own which are important especially when the claim is lodged.
2.8 Type sheet

The vehicle type sheet is not included in this publication, but it is saved at "Tatra Dealer Portal".
2.9 Outfit list

The vehicle outfit list is not included in this publication, but it forms an integral part to the vehicle
documentation.
Page 2-5
Page 2-6
B 1440
3 Vehicle description and basic technical data
Page 3-1
Vehicle description and basic technical data 01-0565-ENG/01
3.1 Determination of the product

The vehicles of TATRA FORCE range in the 4x4, 6x6 a 8x8 versions are off-road vehicles with a low cab
intended for installation of the special superstructures on the chassis frame, with the possibility of operation
on roads, forest roads and off-road. Furthermore, the vehicles may be designed for completion with the
rescue crane superstructure and operation within the Integrated Rescue System.
The vehicle is designed to operate on the fuel NM-54 (EN 590).
The vehicle allows the operation on a unified fuel of the NATO F-34 standard.
The vehicles are able to be operated in areas with a mild climate (WT) within the following temperature range:
- 30 °C to +40 °C - operation ability
- 40 °C to +55 °C - operation resistance
The vehicles are normally adapted for fording depth of 800 mm. Some vehicle versions can be redesigned
for the fording depth up to 1,200 mm.
3.2 Vehicle technical description

- Two-axle, three-axle or four-axle frame chassis with independently suspended half-axles
- Rear axle(s) driven permanently;
- Connectable front axle(s) drive;
- Dual-circuit pneumatic brake system with ABS;
- Dual-circuit steering system with monoblock;
- The vehicle is equipped with a secondary (remote) engine speed control;
- The Central Tire Inflation System with optional tire pressure change while driving;*
- Hydraulic winch;*
- Electric preheating of the engine oil pan (230 V).*
Page 3-2
31-10-2017 Vehicle description and basic technical data
3.3 Engine
Engine type T3D-928-21 T3D-928-30
Technical description Diesel four-stroke V-type air-cooled turbo-charged engine with direct
fuel injection, charge air cooling and electronic cooling control,
Selective catalytic reduction (SCR)
Number of cylinders 8
Bore/stroke 120/140 mm
Stroke capacity 12,667 cm3
Power output (ECE R-85-00) 280 kW/1,800 rpm 325 kW/1,800 rpm
Torque (ECE R-85-00) 1,800 Nm/1,100 - 1,200 rpm 2,100 Nm/1,100 - 1,200 rpm
Max. permissible speed 2,400 rpm
Idle speed 600 ± 50 rpm
EURO regulations met EURO 5
Fuel quality required diesel fuel NM-54 (EN 590)
The manufacturer allows the operation with the unified F-34 fuel designated pursuant to the military standard
without additives. If the vehicle is operated with the F34 fuel, adjustments to the vehicle exhaust system need
to be made (catalyst replaced with a muffler).
3.4 Clutch
Type - MFZ 1 x 430 SACHS
- Single-plate friction clutch with Bellewille spring, controlled hydraulically, with a pneumatic booster.
Automatic clearance setting.
3.5 Transmission assemblies TATRA
Transmission assembly type 14 TS 210 L - 2,30 TRS 1,24/2,9

Technical description Mechanical, fourteen-speed synchronized, power-assisted, with PTO
output combined with an transfer case. Normal (HIGH) and reduced
(LOW) ranges are engaged electro-pneumatically with gearshift lever
pre-selector.
Transmission assembly type 14 TS 210 T- N - 2,30 TRS 1,24/2,9

(semi-automatic Norgren gear shift control)
output combined with an transfer case. Semi-automatic gear shifting
with preselection option. Normal (HIGH) and reduced (LOW) ranges are
engaged using a switch on the Norgren control lever.
Page 3-3
Transmission assembly type 14 TS 210 L - 2,30 TRS 0,79/1,85

(for hub reduction gears)
output combined with an transfer case. Normal (HIGH) and reduced
(LOW) ranges are engaged electro-pneumatically with gearshift lever
pre-selector.
3.6 Transmission ALLISON

Manufacturer Allison Transmission
Type Allison 4500
Number of gears 6 forward gears,

1 reverse
Power capacity 410 kW (550 HP)
Torque capacity 2,100 Nm
Torque conventer TC-541
Oil system
45 l§
- capacitya
- Allison approved fluids TES 295
- Main and lube circuit filter integral
Gear ratios Gear 1 2 3 4 5 6
Forward 4.70 2.21 1.53 1.00 0,76 0.67
Reverse -5.55
a.Transmission only. Initial a fill, does not include cooler, hoses or fittings.
6-speed fully automatic ALLISON transmission, electronically controlled.

The transmission is engine-integrated and coupled with the drop box via a propeller shaft.
Integrated hydraulic torque converter with the automatic blocking clutch.
Electronic gear shifting under load.
Automatic engine overspeed protection.
Automatic transmission diagnosis, diagnostic codes.
Electronic oil level sensor.
Page 3-4
3.7 Transfer case

Transfer case model 2.30 TRS 1,24/2,91 (for manual gearbox TATRA)
Technical description Speed-reducing, two-stage type, shifting while driving, with optional PTO
connection
Transfer case model 2.30 TRS 2,30 TRS 0,79/1,85 (for manual gearbox TATRA)
Technical description Speed-reducing, two-stage type, shifting while driving, with optional PTO
connection
Transfer case model 2.30 TRK 1,48/3,4 (for transmission ALLISON)
Technical description Speed-reducing, two-stage type, shifting on vehicle at standstill, with

optional PTO connection
3.8 Power take-off drive (PTO)

- The vehicle TATRA FORCE may be fitted with transmission PTO, transfer case PTO and/or combination
thereof.
3.9 Front axle(s)

Type TATRA
- Driven, steerable, with swinging half-axles, with reduction gears in wheels (version 8x8).
- Lockable axle differential.
The basic adjustment of the wheel camber depends on the vehicle´s operating conditions and load.
Therefore have the wheel camber and wheel toe-in adjusted at the TATRA authorized service station.
3.10 Rear axle(s)

Type TATRA
- Driven, with swinging half-axles, with reduction gears in wheels (version 8x8).
- Lockable axle differentials.
- Axle differentials are driven through the inter-axle differential.
- Driven, steerable, with reduction gears in wheels (7T5R21.42ZA).
3.11 Front suspension

- Air bellows under frame, hydraulic shock-absorber, rubber stoppers, torsion stabilizer*
Page 3-5
3.12 Rear suspension

- Air bellows under frame, hydraulic shock-absorber, rubber stoppers, torsion stabilizers.
- Leaf spring*.
3.13 Steering
- Dual-circuit system, Type ZF.
- Left-hand drive with the monoblock power-assisted steering.
- For 8x8 vehicles, both front axles are steerable*.
- Mechanically adjustable steering column.
- Hydraulic transfer of steering action to the rear axle (7T5R21.42ZA).
3.14 Fuel system

- Lockable fuel and AdBlue tanks.
- Fuel filter with water separator and fuel preheating.
- Electrical fuel pump.
3.15 Wheels
Front tires Rear tires Disc front wheels Disc rear wheels
14,00 R20 14,00 R20 20-10,00V 20-10,00V
16,00 R20 16,00 R20 20-10,00V 20-10,00V
445/65 R22.5a 445/65 R22.5a 22,5-14,00a 22,5-14,00a
a.For application T 815 - 721R52/410
Number of wheels: 721R52 (7T5R21) 4+1

731R32 (7T5R31) 6+1
731R99 8+1
- Rear axle(s): tire fitting - single.

- Spare wheel holder behind the cab*.
- Snow chains can be used at the rear axle(s).
- In some vehicle versions, a Central Tire Inflation System (CTIS)* can be installed or half-axle hang-off*
can be applied, which eliminates the need for a spare wheel.
The Central Tire Inflation System allows to operate the vehicle without a spare wheel.
Page 3-6
3.15.1 Central tire inflation system (CTIS)*

- The aim of the central tire inflation system is to reach optimum pressure depending on the type and nature
of the road surface to enable comfortable and smooth ride in difficult off-road conditions.
- It is either a single (double)-circuit system controlled from the driver's seat, secured against a complete
pressure loss during tire deflation.
- Use a pressure gauge on the instrument panel in the driver's cab to check whether there is any excess
pressure in tires.
- Each wheel has a manual valve which can be disconnected from the system if needed.
- Standard wheel valve at each wheel for emergency inflation or tire pressure check.
3.15.2 Tires inflation

Most TATRA vehicle models TATRA FORCE are fitted with
a label showing the tires inflation pressures related to the
tires specified and the gross vehicle weight.
This label is located inside the cab on the driver's seat
pedestal.
B 3749
Some TATRA vehicle modifications TATRA FORCE

(equipped with the CTIS) have a label which specifies tire
inflation values depending on the type and nature of the
road surface to enable comfortable and smooth ride.
This label is located on the right panel of the main
intrument panel above the switches.
B 1470
Page 3-7
3.16 Brake system

Dual-circuit drum brakes controlled pneumatically.
Independent wedge toggles.
3.16.1 Four independent brake systems

Service brake Pneumatic, double-circuit, acting on all wheels in relation to the trailer braking system,
controlled by the foot pedal
Emergency brake Spring brake cylinders acting on the 2nd front (8x8) and rear axle wheels in relation to
the trailer braking system, controlled by the manual brake valve
Parking brake Spring brake cylinders acting on the 2nd front (8x8) and rear axle wheels in relation to
the trailer braking system, controlled by the manual brake valve
Engine brake engine (exhaust-type), controlled by a lever under the steering wheel
Retarder* A device for slowing down large vehicles
Trailer braking* Three-circuit trailer brake valve and coupling head (filling and braking) pursuant to
ISO 1728.
The brake system of the TATRA FORCE vehicle is fitted with the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).
3.16.2 Brake disc

The vehicle axles are equipped with disc brakes and brake pad wear indication.
Type ............................................................................................KNORR BREMSE
ABS ............................................................................................. WABCO (KNORR BREMSE)
Automatic brake pressure regulator (AZR) .................................. KNORR BREMSE (WABCO)
Brake cylinders- front I ................................................................. membrane - type “24”
- rear I, II .............................................................. combined (membrane, spring 24”/24”)
Diameter of disc ........................................................................... 430 mm
Brake system operating pressure ................................................ 8.5-0.4 bars (850-40 kPa)
Air dryer ....................................................................... WABCO (KNORR BREMSE)
3.16.3 Drum brakes (PERROT - type brake units with wedge expanders)
Some vehicle versions may have axles fitted with drum brakes.
- Brake drums diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 mm
- Width of brake lining:
- front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 mm
- rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 mm
- total brake lining area for one wheel
with brake lining width of 180 mm . 1,318.5 cm2
- Brake cylinders - front I, II membrane - type 22"
- rear I, II membrane spring-loaded type 22"/24"
- Brake system operating pressure 8.5-0.4 bars (850-40 kPa)
- Air dryer WABCO (KNORR BREMSE
Page 3-8
3.16.4 Pressure air connection

While inflating the vehicle from the external source, the pressure must not exceed the cut-out pressure of the
pressure regulator - i. e. 8.5 bars on vehicles with a low-pressure system and 12.5 bars on vehicles
with a high-pressure system.
3.16.5 Checking connections

The braking system is equipped with checking connections
for measuring the air pressure in various system parts
pursuant to ECE-R-13. 4 3 2 1
5
A part of checking connections is located on the right side 6
behind the cab under brecket accessory or on the left
longitudinal member behind the second rear axle, with the
following identification:
1 - air reservoir of front axle
2 - air reservoir of rear axle
3 - spring-load brake - inlet
4 - spring-load brake - outlet
B 0988
5 - air bellows - LH
6 - air bellows - RH
Other checking connections

- source air reservoir - at the air dryer, on the right behind
the front bumper
- brake cylinder of the front axle
- brake cylinder of the rear axle
- brake pressure regulator - control pressure
- brake pressure regulator load simulator
B 2510
3.17 Chassis
- The unique design of the TATRA chassis frame consists of the front axle final drive housing, front backbone
tube, transfer case, rear backbone tube, rear axle final drive housing (4x4 versions), first rear axle final drive
housing, intermediate part, second rear axle final drive housing (6x6 versions), first front axle final drive
housing, intermediate part, second front axle final drive housing, front backbone tube, transfer case, rear
backbone tube, first rear axle final drive housing, intermediate part, second rear axle final drive housing (8x8
versions), connected by means of cross members complete with a ladder-type frame.
Page 3-9
3.18 Driver´s cab

TATRA type
- Low, all-metal, two-door, two seated, tiltable by means of a hydraulic system.
- Instrument panel with instrumentation and light switches and controls, sheet-metal, LH steering.
- Rear-view mirrors:
- main, electrically operated and heated;
- wide-angle (auxiliary) rear-view mirror;
- close-proximity mirror.
- Cab heating is ensured as follows:
- dependent oil heater;
- independent hot-air heater.
- The optimum temperature inside the cab is secured by the ventilation, dependent heater and cooling
system.
- Number of seats 1 + 1, 1+ 2 or 1 + 3.
- Driver's seat: unsprung, adjustable, adjustable integral headrest and seat is equipped with three-point seat
belt.
- Passenger seats:
- non-tilting, with three-point seat belt and headrest*
- unsprung, adjustable three-point seat belt and headrest*
- Elevated roof (made of a laminate with a metal frame*).
- Reading map lamp;
- Search lamp*;
- Front auxiliary headlamps*;
- Sun visors;
- Car radio.
3.19 Hitches
Front towing devices
- Two towing devices designed for the vehicle´s towing or recovery with a pintle Ø 35 mm.
Permissible pulling force: 1/2 gross vehicle weight per 1 towing device.
Rear towing hitch

- Emergency towing hook (pintle) in the rear cross member to recover the vehicle.*
- For trailer towing- certified automatic hitch* - tow ring Ø 40 mm*
- certified non-automatic hitch* - tow ring Ø 40 mm*
Page 3-10
3.20 Electric equipment
3.20.1 Parameters of electrical equipment

- Nominal voltage 24 V
- Battery ground basic (negative pole)
- Batteries 2 x 12 V, 180 Ah
- Alternator 28 V/55 - 80 A
- Starter 24 V/6,6 kW
Electric sockets
Sockets in the cab:
- 24V, in the cab (e.g. for portable lamp connection);
- 24V, in the cab (e.g. for cigarette lighter, portable beacon);
- 12V, in the cab (e.g. for radio set connection);
- 12V, in the cab (e.g. for charging a mobile phone).
Sockets on vehicle side behind the driver´s cab:

- starter receptacle for emergency engine start from an auxiliary source, 2-pin knife ZAB 24V*;
- starter receptacle for emergency engine start from an auxiliary source, 2-pin*;
- 7-pin socket for superstructure connection, 24V N-type, ISO 1185*;
- preservation socket*;
- 230V electric socket (for engine oil pan preheating)*.
Sockets in the vehicle rear:

- 7-pin, 24V N-type, ISO 1185;
- 7-pin, 24V S-type, ISO 3731;
- trailer ABS electric socket*;
- portable beacon electric socket*;
- preservation socket*.
Battery disconnector (MEMBER) - transport of hazardous substances*;

Digital tachograph*;
Tachometer with engine hours counter;
Speed limiter*.
Page 3-11
3.21 Winch*
The vehicle can be equipped with different types of winches. Winches can be equipped with lighting for safe
operation under poor visibility.
3.21.1 Hydraulic winch*
- High-performance and fast hydraulic winch is very suitable for towing services, recovery purposes, handling
with vehicles, loads, etc.
- Fully integrated hydraulic winch to the vehicle chassis with its own hydraulic circuit and remote control
feature.
- The cable is routed backwards and can be led forward through a system of pulleys.
For this purpose, a bracket with guide rollers is mounted on the front bumper which can be disassembled
and stored in the vehicle equipment (not to restrict the approach angle).
- This winch is capable of operating at external ambient temperatures from -40 °C to +60 °C.
Hydraulic winch RAMSEY*

Basic data for the winch:
Type H-800
Max. pulling force 90 kN
Length of rope with hook 60 m
Diameter of rope 16 mm
Control cable 15 m
Hydraulic winch SEPSON H 150 PF*

Type H 150 PF
Control cable 10 m
Hydraulic winch SEPSON H 100 PS*

Type H 100 PS
Control cable 10 m
Page 3-12
3.22 Emission kit

Adjustment of exhaust gas emissions using the SCR system (Selective Catalytic Reduction) to comply with
E5 emission limits. Tank for AdBlue agent - 60 liters.
Page 3-13
Page 3-14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
B 3431
4 Description of the vehicle control
Page 4-1
Description of the vehicle control 01-0565-ENG/01
4.1 Driver´s cab

A two-door or four-door, two to four-seat, tiltable using the hydraulic unit.
4.1.1 Keys
Two keys to unlock both doors and to control the ignition lock are delivered with the vehicle.
In addition, there are two keys to open/lock the fuel tank, two keys to open/lock the AdBlue tank and two keys
to open/lock the toolbox*.
CAUTION!
If you leave the vehicle even though for a moment only, never leave the keys in the vehicle.
Remove the key from the ignition box only after the vehicle stops completely.
Otherwise, the steering wheel lock can suddenly block - risk of accident.
Note:
If you loose your keys, contact an authorized TATRA service.
4.1.2 Doors
The doors on the driver and passenger’s side are fitted
with a safety lock.
1
Opening and closing the door from outside
Opening
2
- Unlock the door.
Unlock by inserting the key into lock 1.
- Tilt handle 2 upwards and pull the door.
Closing
- B 2898
- Lock the door.

Lock the door with the key in lock 1.
Opening and closing the door from inside

Opening
- When opening the door from inside, unlock the door
using the inside handle 1, and then pull it.
1
2
Open the door by pushing outwards.
Closing
- To close the door from the inside, pull the door using the
handle 2.
CAUTION! 3
All doors must properly be closed while driving.
Failure may result in injury or death. B 3425
Glove box in the door*

The glove box 3 is provided on the door to store documentation or bottles.
Page 4-2
31-10-2017 Description of the vehicle control
4.1.3 The side window in the door

The side window in the door is divided and can be opened
utilizing the handles placed on the glass.
- When opening the window, unlock the latch of the handle

and then push the handle to open the side window.
- When closing the side window partially, push the handle.
- When closing the side window fully, push the handle until
the latch of the handle clicks-in and thereby automatically
prevents the window from opening.
B 1355
4.1.4 Getting on/off

Handles
CAUTION!
When entering or leaving the cab, always use
a three-point contact system.
A failure may result in injury or death.
- When entering and leaving the cab, use the handles 1

attached to the instrument panel and driver's cab pillar. 1
3
CAUTION! 2 B 0831
Never use the steering wheel as handrail!
Stairs
- Also use all step stairs 2 a 3 for getting on/off and be always faced to the cab.
Page 4-3
4.1.5 Front bonnet

Opening the front bonnet
- Pull the lower part of the bonnet to yourself and lift up.
- The bonnet lift up.
- Lock the bonnet in the open position using two struts 2.
Closing the front bonnet 1

- Gently lift the bonnet and pull the struts 2.
- Close the bonnet.
B 0828
4.2 Seats and safety belts
4.2.1 Passenger´s seat

The driver’s seat is cushioned mechanically.
Seat is provided with headrests, height and longitudinal 3
cushion setting, continuous backrest setting and safety
belts.
To move the cushion back and forth, lift the handle 1
slightly.
After relieving the cushion and lifting the lever 2, seat can
be shifted vertically in four positions.
Rotate knob 3 to tilt the backrest continuously. 2
1
A 7727
CAUTION!
Adjust the seat with the vehicle at rest only.
You could lose control over the vehicle and cause an accident if you attempt to adjust the seat when
driving.
Page 4-4
4.2.2 Passenger´s seats

Moreover, the passenger seats may also be non-folding,
unsprung and fitted with headrests and three-point
self-retracting seat belts.
4.2.3 Emergency seats

The emergency seats are rigid, unsprung with integral
headrests and three-point seat belts.
4.2.4 Solid folding bed* B 2972
The cab may be equipped with a solid, split folding bed (sleeping berth), which is located behind the seats.
The sleeping berth in the driver's cab serves only for emergency (short-term) rest.
Storage compartments are available under it.
4.2.5 Adjustable head restraint

The head restraint position is adjustable in height.
The head restraint should be adjusted to the physical dimensions of the seated person.
Head restraint - Height adjustment

The maximum possible protection is provided by the head
restraint if its upper edge is aligned with the head vertex.
A
1
Moving upwards
- Grasp the headrest 1 with both hands on both sides and
slide it in the direction of the arrow A.
Moving downwards B
- Press and hold the lock 2 in the direction of the arrow C.
3 2
- Move the headrest in the direction of arrow B. C
B 3322
CAUTION!
If the seat is occupied, the respective headrest must be adjusted correctly
(not in the lower position) - there is a danger of fatal injuries!
Note:
If the seat is equipped with a headrest integrated in the seat backrest, the headrest can neither be height
adjusted nor dismantled.
Head restraint - removal/installation

- Pull the headrest from the backrest until it stops.
- Press the lock 2 in the direction of the arrow C, and pull the headrest from the backrest in direction of the
arrow A.
- When reinstalling, push the lock 1 in the direction of the arrow C and slide the headrest downwards in the
direction of the arrow B into the backrest. Release the lock 1.
CAUTION!
If the seat is occupied, the headrest must be installed and adjusted correctly - there is a danger
of fatal injuries!
Page 4-5
Some seats are equipped with a headrest integrated in the seat backrest.
This headrest can neither be height adjusted nor removed.
4.2.6 Safety belts

The cab is equipped with seats with three-point
self-retracting seat belts.
The passenger seats can be equipped with two-point seat
belts.
- The seat belts protect passengers in the event of
a collision.
- When riding all passengers must be attached (in most
countries the obligation to be fastened with seat belts is
prescribed by the traffic regulations).
Seat belts must be used even in the urban traffic A 5592
- The seat belt provides an optimum safety if tensioned
properly.
For that reason, do not use any clamps or other devices to relieve belt tension.
CAUTION!
Always buckle up before and while driving. A failure to comply may result in injury or death.
Self-retracting three-point seat belts

Proper adjustment of seat belts
Putting on a seat belt
- To clasp the seat belt properly, insert the seat belt tongue into the buckle until you hear a 'click'.
- To change the length of the strap, pull the belt buckle and tighten the belt by pulling the belt ends.
- Pull the ends of the shoulder straps to tighten the shoulder straps.
Undoing seat belt

- To open the seat belt press the red button on the bushing.
The seat belt will automatically retract.
While doing so, hold the latch to make winding easier.
CAUTION!
It is not allowed to repair or modify seat belts. Regularly inspect the seat belts for signs of wear and
damage. If the seat belts have been worn or damaged, replace them. If the seat belts have been
exposed to excessive load during the frontal crash, the whole set of seat belts must be replaced
although there might be no visible marks of damage.
Inspection of the seat belt retractor (regularly before driving):

- Pull out the belt from the retractor quickly and make sure whether the belt locks.
- On the move, check this function from time to time.
- Regularly inspect the seat belts for signs of wear and damage.
- Apply the multipurpose-cleaning agent without caustic to clean the seat belts.
Self-retracting two-point seat belts

Fastening on a seat belt
- To change the length of a strap, pull the belt buckle and tighten the belt by pulling the belt ends.
Page 4-6
- Slowly pull the seat belt buckle across the chest and pelvis.
- To properly retract the seat belt push the latch inside the lock until it audibly clicks.
- Pull to check whether the seat belt latch securely fits into the lock.
Releasing n a seat belt

Release the seat belt only when the vehicle is stationary.
- Press the red button in the belt buckle to release the belt. The lock tongue pops out.
CAUTION!
It is not allowed to repair or modify seat belts. Regularly inspect the seat belts for signs of wear and
damage. If the seat belts have been worn or damaged, replace them.
If the seat belts have been exposed to excessive load during the frontal crash, the whole set of seat
belts must be replaced although there might be no visible marks of damage.
Inspection of the seat belt retractor (regularly before driving):

- Pull out the belt from the retractor quickly and make sure whether the belt locks.
- On the move, check this function from time to time.
- Regularly inspect the seat belts for signs of wear and damage.
- Apply the multipurpose-cleaning agent without caustic to clean the seat belts.
4.3 Windshield washer tank

The windshield washer tank reservoir can be located in
front of the right front wheel.
The reservoir is accessible after unscrewing the filler cap.
Fill it with water.
Winter periods
In winter, use special antifreeze in the washers to ensure
trouble-free wiper operation at low temperatures.
Fill it with water and with anti-freeze liquid in winter.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
The washer pump function is permissible for about B 2281
20 seconds as a maximum.
CAUTION!
Special antifreeze for windscreen washers can contain ethyl alcohol.
The antifreeze and its fumes are flammable.
When handling, use protective gloves to avoid inhalation.
Protect your eyes with goggles.
4.4 Windshield wipers

In order to extend the life of rubber blades of wipers on the vehicle standing for a longer period of time and
avoid sticking due to freezing in winter, if the temperature drops under zero, support the arms to avoid the
contact of the rubber blade with the windshield.
Clean the blades regularly with water and wipe with a soft rag.
Page 4-7
4.5 Adjustable steering wheel

Setting steering wheel position
The steering wheel can be adjusted up or down and

towards/away the driver using the lever 1 under the
steering wheel on the right side.
Set the steering wheel as follows:
- Pull the lever 1 to position I (steering wheel setting
position).
- Set the steering wheel to the desired position. 0
1
- Once finished, set the lever to its original position 0. I B 1716
Now the steering wheel is locked in position.
CAUTION!
Set the steering wheel in a standing chassis only. Setting of steering wheel while driving may result in
chassis crash, property damage, injury or death of persons.
4.6 Rear-view mirrors

There are the following mirrors on the right doors:
1 - close-proximity mirror
2 - wide-angle (auxiliary) rear-view mirror 2
1
3 - (main) rear-view mirror - electrically controlled and
heated mirror.
B 1358
There are the following mirrors on the left doors:

2 - wide-angle (auxiliary) rear-view mirror*
3 - (main) rear-view mirror - electrically controlled and
heated mirror 2
1
The following is mounted on the roof:
3
1 - front view mirror - designed to monitor situation in front
of the cab..
Note:
The rearview mirrors can be protected against damage B 3750
when passing through dense forest vegetation (where
equipped).
Page 4-8
4.6.1 Electric setting of main rear-view mirrors

The main rearview mirrors can be set using the control 2
located on the right panel of the main instrument panel.
WARNING: 1
The mirror setting can be operated only with the key
in the ignition key in position I. 2
3
B 3804
Control procedure: 3
Position 1 - Left rear-view mirror setting
1
Turn the knob to position 1 and move it in the
2
desired direction (up, down, left, right) to set
the mirror as required.
Position 2 - Right rear-view mirror setting
Turn the knob to position 2 and move it in the
desired direction (up, down, left, right) to set
the mirror as required.
Position 3 - neutral position
Mirror control disabled.
B 1219
WARNING:
Make sure that rear-view mirrors are set correctly to ensure maximum possible view behind the
vehicle and to both sides.
A failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle accident and subsequent serious injury or
death of persons.
4.6.2 Rear-view mirror heater
- Use the switch 1 to switch on the main rear-view

mirror heater.
- The switch indicator lamp indicates that heater is on.
WARNING:
1 2
If the vehicle is at standstill, it is recommended to turn
on the rear-view mirror heater while the engine is
running.
3 4 5
Rear-view mirror heating must be turned on if the mirrors
B 3428
are frosty or dewy.
Page 4-9
4.7 Map lamp

The map lamp 1 is located in front of the passenger seat
on a flexible holder.
Use switch on the map lamp body to switch the lamp on/off. 1
A 7382
4.8 Search lamp*

It is located in the roof in front of the driver and it is used
for spatial orientation around the vehicle.
B 1615
- It is controllable using rotary knob 1 and switchable using

switch 2.
1 2
A 7383
Page 4-10
4.9 Elevated headlamps*

Elevated headlamps are located on the front cab wall.
The side marker in the elevated headlamps turns on
together with the vehicle's side markers.
Use the switch 3 to turn on the elevated headlamps.
They will also light up when the side markers of the
headlamps 3 are switched on (Fig. B 3428).
The indicator lamp located directly in the switch indicates
the lamps switched on.
B 3757
4.10 Sun visors

The windshield is fitted with three sun visors that can be
tilted in the arrow direction to protect the driver and
co-driver against the sun glare.
A 5912
Page 4-11
4.11 Roof hatches

Depending on your vehicle equipment.
Roof hatch with the locking lever*
Opening
- Turn the locking lever on the roof hatch to position 1 to
release the roof hatch.
- Push to open the roof hatch.
Closing
- Fold the roof hatch.
- Rotate the locking lever to position 2 to lock the roof
hatch.
CAUTION! A 6531
Never drive with unlocked roof hatch.
CAUTION!!
When leaving the vehicle, do not forget to lock the roof hatch in the closed position to avoid rainwater
penetration into the cab. Doing so, you will prevent from water entering to the cab if it rains.
Unsecured roof hatch can be opened from the outside.
Roof hatch with handle*

Opening
- Pull the handle to unlock the roof hatch.
- After unlocking open the roof hatch. Use the rubber
stopper on the roof to secure the roof hatch in the open
position.
Closing
- Release the roof hatch from the rubber stopper and fold it.
- Lock the roof hatch with the handle.
CAUTION! B 2063
Never drive with unlocked roof hatch.
CAUTION!
When leaving the vehicle, do not forget to lock the roof hatch in the closed position to avoid rainwater
penetration into the cab. Doing so, you will prevent from water entering to the cab if it rains.
Unsecured roof hatch can be opened from the outside.
Roof vent lid*

Opening
- Push on the roof vent lid in the place of handle outwardly
until the desired (one of three) opening position is
achieved.
Closing
- Return the roof vent lid to its original position.
CAUTION!
When leaving the vehicle, do not forget to close and
lock the roof vent lid. Doing so, you will prevent from
A 6740
water entering to the cab if it rains.
Page 4-12
4.12 Storage compartments
4.12.1 Storage compartments in the cab

Ceiling panel storage compartment
The storage compartment is provided in the ceiling panel
designed to save the vehicle and transport documents up
to the weight of 5 kg.
B 3456
Storage compartment on the gearshift panel*

The shift panel features a storage compartment that serves
to store the crew's personal things.
B 3709
4.12.2 Storage compartments in the vehicle

Toolbox
Some vehicle versions may be equipped with a lockable
toolbox. The toolbox is used for storing tools, basic
compulsory vehicle or superstructure equipment, or to
store electric winch.
B 2526
Page 4-13
4.13 Cab lifting and lowering
4.13.1 Prior to cab lifting

CAUTION!
While lifting the cab, there must be free space of 1,500 mm in front of the chassis at least!
The vehicle must be on level ground. Never fold the cab when the vehicle is tilted more than 10%.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in overloading of the piston rod or cab tilting pump.
Do not stand in front of or behind the cab during tilting.
- The vehicle must stand on a level ground.

- For safety reasons, secure the vehicle with the parking brake and move the gearshift lever in neutral “N”.
- Chock the wheels.
- Turn OFF the independent hot-air heater.
- Switch OFF all electric circuits.
- Turn OFF the engine.
- Key in the ignition box in position “0" - manual (mechanical) lifting and lowering the cab.
- Key in the ignition box in position “I" - electrical lifting and lowering the cab*.
- Close and lock the roof hatch
WARNING:
Remove all things from seats and the engine cover that could damage the windshield after cab tilting!
- Secure the bonnet with a strut in the open position or close it.
- Close the cab door.
- Make sure there is enough room and no obstacle in the path of cab lowering.
- The manual pump 2 for cab lifting and lowering is located
on the right behind the cab under the accessory holder.
1
- The control switch 3 for electric lifting and lowering the
cab is located on the right side behind the cab on the
pump for lifting and lowering the cab. 2
8 3
7
6 5 4 B 1520
WARNING:
1
The cab of some vehicle versions may be secured by 2
mechanical hooks.
Before tilting the cab forwards (either manually or
electrically), the hooks fastening the cab to the frame
must be manually unlocked.
To unlock the hooks operate levers 1. The levers are
fitted both to the left and right side behind the cab (see
chapter 4.13.4 “Unlocking and locking the cab
mechanically”!!!
A
B 2434
Page 4-14
4.13.2 Manual lifting and lowering the cab

Cab lifting
CAUTION!
Make sure there are no persons in the cab during
lifting.
CAUTION!
Make sure there is no obstacle in the path of the cab
lifting! Caution with other persons! Danger of hand
injury between the cab and bumper when lifting!
- Set the pump controller to the “lifting” position A .

A 6551
- Fit the assembly lever C to socket and start pumping to
lift the cab.
- The initial pressure of the hydraulic system will unlock the cab and cab rises in the extreme position while
pumping continuously.
Always pump until the cab tips over under its own weight (short cab) or the cab lifting does not stop
completely (long cab) .
If the work requires only partial tilting the cab, the work must be done with extreme caution.
- Install the strut (in case of a long cab).
- Hold the door while opening it when the cab is lifted.
CAUTION!
Pay enhanced attention while opening the door when the cab is lifted. A failure to follow this
instruction may result in cab or door damage and subsequent serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
If it is necessary to start the engine while the cab is raised, make sure that the shift lever is in neutral.
Cab lowering
CAUTION!
Make sure there are no persons in the cab during lowering.
CAUTION!
Make sure there is no obstacle in the path of the cab lowering! Caution with other persons! Danger of
hand injury between the cab and frame when lowering!
- Make sure the gearshift lever is in neutral. Ensure that the cab doors are fully closed.
- Remove the strut (long cab).
- Before lowering the cab to the basic position, set the pump controller “lowering” position B .
- Insert the assembly lever C in socket and keep pumping until the cab rests on the frame locks.
- After the cab seats on locks, continue pumping until you feel strong resistance on the lever; this will secure
the cab against self-tilting.
- Leave the pump controller on the pump in the lowering position B (transport position).
Page 4-15
- If the indicator lamp 24 lights up when starting the engine, the cab is not secured properly. Stop the
engine immediately and thoroughly secure the cabin in the lowered position.
Note:
While driving, the pump controller must be in the lowering position. Otherwise, it may cause damage to parts
of the cab tilting system.
4.13.3 Electrical lifting and lowering the cab*

Cab lifting
CAUTION!
Make sure there are no persons in the cab during
lifting.
CAUTION!
lifting! Caution with other persons! Danger of hand
injury between the cab and bumper when lifting!
- Switch ON the battery disconnector.
A 7696
- The key in the ignition box turn into the position I.
- Set the pump controller to "lifting" position A .
- Turn the key in the control switch of cab lifting and lowering to the right and hold until the cab raises in the
extreme position.
- The initial pressure of the hydraulic system will unlock
the cab and cab rises in the extreme position while
pumping continuously. The indicator lamp 24
illuminates on the instrument panel.
If the work requires only partial tilting the cab, the work
must be done with extreme caution.
- Install the strut (long cab).
- Hold the door while opening it when the cab is lifted.
CAUTION!
A 6551
Pay enhanced attention while opening the door when
the cab is lifted. A failure to follow this instruction may result in cab or door damage and subsequent
serious injury or death.
WARNING:
If it is necessary to start the engine while the cab is raised, make sure that the gearshift lever is in
neutral.
Page 4-16
Cab lowering
CAUTION!
Make sure there are no persons in the cab during or
lowering.
CAUTION!
lowering! Caution with other persons! Danger of hand
injury between the cab and frame when lowering!
- The key in the ignition box turn into the position I.
A 6511
- Make sure the gearshift lever is in neutral “N”.
Ensure that the cab doors are fully closed.
- Remove the strut (long cab).
- Before lowering the cab to the basic position, set the pump controller to the “lowering” position B .
- Turn the key in the control switch of cab lifting and lowering (Fig. A 6511) to the right and hold until the cab
rests to the frame locks.
- Once the cab rests to the locks, it will lock to prevent spontaneous tilting and the indicator lamp 24
goes out.
- If the indicator lamp 24 lights up when starting the engine, the cab is not secured properly.
Stop the engine immediately and thoroughly secure the cabin in the lowered position.
Note:
While driving, the pump controller must be in the lowering position. Otherwise, it may cause damage to parts
of the cab tilting system.
Page 4-17
4.13.4 Unlocking and locking the cab mechanically*

The cab of some vehicle versions may be secured by mechanical hooks.
Before tilting the cab forwards (either manually or electrically), the hooks fastening the cab to the frame must
be manually unlocked.
To unlock the hooks operate levers 1. The levers are fitted both to the left and right side behind the cab.
Legend to Fig. B 2434 and Fig. B 2435:

1 - lever
1
2
2 - locking pin
Control in lever position: A - cab locked
Control in lever position: B - cab unlocked
Unlocking the cab

Unlock the cab as follows:
- Put a rim tool into the tube of control lever 1.
A
- Release locking pin 2 from the horizontal position and put B 2434
it into the vertical one.
- Change the position of control lever 1 to bottom position B; after lowering control lever 1, the locking pin
locks behind the locking bolt and will thus keep the hook in the open position.
- Unlock the cab on the other side of the vehicle as well.
- The hooks and the cab are unlocked now.
- You can tilt the unlocked cab forwards.
WARNING!
The hooks must be unlocked on both the left and right side of the vehicle!!!
Locking the cab

1
After tilting the cab forwards, the hooks are not secured. 2
- Put a rim tool into the tube of control lever 1.
- Release locking pin 2.
- Push control lever 1 slightly down and put locking pin 2
from the vertical position into the horizontal one.
- Change the position of control lever 1 to upper position
B.
- Secure the cab on the other side of the vehicle as well.
B
B 2435
- The hooks and cab are secured now.
WARNING!
The hooks must be secured both on the left and right side of the vehicle!!!
Page 4-18
4.14 Driver´s cab interior

For layout of basic controls in the cab see the figure: 1 12 1314
2
3 15
1 - combined switch
2 - instrument panel 4
3 - A/C vents
4 - handles 11
3 10 4
5 - clutch pedal
9
6 - service brake pedal
7 - accelerator pedal 8
7
8 - driver’s seat 56
9 - steering wheel height setting handle 16
B 2490
10 - handle to adjust the engine idle speed
11 - tie-rod to stop the engine manually
12 - engine brake control lever
13 - emergency and parking brake lever
14 - gearshift panel - gearshift lever
gearshift lever (applies to the vehicles with the TATR manual gearbox) or
gearshift controller (applies to the vehicles with semi-automatic transmission - NORGREN gearshift
system) or
shifting selector (applies to the vehicles with the automatic ALLISON transmission).
15 - gearshift panel - emergency gearshift controller NORGREN (applies to the vehicles with a
semi-automatic transmission - NORGREN gear shift system)*
16 - winch cable control socket (for hydraulic winch)*
Page 4-19
4.15 Instrument panel
I II III IV V
B 3427
The instrument panel shown on the figure is in full outfit including all instruments, controllers, switches and
indicator lamps and for that reason the instrument panel in your vehicle may be different from that.
The instrument panel is divided in five parts:

I. Left part of main instrument panel - controllers and switches
II. Main instrument panel - instruments, controllers and indicator lamps
III. Right part of main instrument panel - instruments, controllers, indicator lamps, sockets and parking brake
IV. Central part instrument panel - map reading lamp
V. Right part of instrument panel - fuse box and power unit panel
Page 4-20
4.15.1 Left part of instrument panel - switches (part I)
Exterior rear-view mirrors and windshield

1.
heater with indicator lamp (green)
Rear fog lamps (yellow)*

2.
Push the switch into position I keep
pushing it repeatedly. 1 2
3. Master lighting switch (green)

Position 0 - OFF, position 1 - parking
lights, position 2 - main headlamps 3 4 5
Front fog lamps with indicator lamp B 3428

4.
(green)
5. Controller to adjust the instruments and controllers brightness (green)
4.15.2 Left part of instrument panel - controllers (part I)

1 - Independent diesel heater timer
2 - Setting of rear-view mirrors
3 - Batttery disconnector for vehicle 1
3
B 3804
Note:
Separate Operating Instructions for the independent heater are attached to the vehicle documentation
in the cab.
Page 4-21
4.15.3 Main instrument panel - instruments and controllers (part II)

A vehicle equipped with the TATRA manual gearbox
1 - Tachograph (electronic speedometer)
2 - Tachometer
3 - Voltmeter* 3 4 1 5 6
4 - Engine oil pressure gauge
5 - Double air pressure gauge 2 7
6 - Fuel gauge
7 - Unoccupied
8 - LCD display NORGREN*
8
B 3430
A vehicle equipped with the ALLISON transmission

1 - Tachograph (electronic speedometer)
2 - Tachometer
3 - Voltmeter* 3 4 1 5 6
4 - Engine oil pressure gauge
5 - Double air pressure gauge 2 7
6 - Fuel gauge
7 - Transmission temperature gauge (ALLISON)
B 3725
Page 4-22
4.15.4 Main instrument panel - indicator lamps (part II)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1. AdBlue tank level (yellow) 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
2. SCR error warning lamp (yellow)
3a. $)&$, Transmission ALLISON - failure * (yellow)

53"/4
3b ETS - rear axle steering (yellow)*

ETS If there is a failure of ETS, a warning B 3431
indicator lamp goes on and audible alarm
goes off.
4a. Transmission PTO 1 - activated (yellow)*
4b Transmission oil overheating (ALLISON) (red)*
5a. Rear fog lamps (yellow)*
5b. Transmission PTO 1 - activated (yellow)*
6. High beams (blue)
7. Vehicle direction indicators (green)
8. Trailer direction indicators (green)
Axle differential lock (green)*

9a.
(manual gearbox TATRA)
Axle differential lock (green)*

9b.
(automatic transmission ALLISON)
10. Front wheel drive and inter-axle differential lock (green)
ABS vehicle (yellow)

11.
Alerts driver of ABS vehicle problem
ABS trailer (yellow)

12.
Alerts drive of ABS trailer problem
ABS - INFO (yellow)*

13a.
Trailer equipped with ABS
13b. Rear fog lamps (yellow)*
Page 4-23
14a. Speed limiter (yellow)*
14b. Retarder (yellow)*
Power-assisted steering circuit 1 - failure (red)

15.
The light will go out after starting the engine. It signals a decreased oil flow in the main
power-assisted steering circuit.
Power-assisted steering circuit 2 - operational condition (yellow)
16. The light is on after starting the engine, it will go out after the vehicle starts moving, it will light
up again if the vehicle speed decreases (about 7 km/hour). It signals a decreased oil flow in the
power-assisted steering standby circuit.
17. Air cleaner (white)
18. Engine pre-heating (yellow)
19. Charging - failure (red)
20. Engine lubrication (red)
21. Engine overheating (red)
22. Engine failure (red)
23. Minimum fuel level (yellow)
24. Cab tilting (red)
25. Low air pressure in both service brake circuits (red)
26. Low air pressure in the emergency brake circuit (red)
27. Parking brake - activated (red)
28. Brake system failure (red)*

Indicates the brake pad wear on the vehicle's disc brakes.
This symbol will illuminate if the brake pad is worn on one or more wheels.
Page 4-24
4.15.5 Right part of main instrument panel - instruments and controllers (part III)
1 - Control panel of the ventilation, depend heater and

cooling system
2 - Parking brake
3 - Tire pressure gauge (for inflation front and rear axles
tires)*
Note:
All vehicles are provided with radio pre-installation.
If the vehicle is equipped with a radio set, a separated 3 1 2
“Radio operating manual" forms an integral part of the
vehicle documentation.
B 3726
4.15.6 Central part instrument panel - accessories (part IV)
1 - 24V/10A socket - cigarette lighter

For use e.g. for cigarette lighter or portable beacon..
1 2 3
2 - 12V/10A socket
For use as e.g. a radio set connection.
3 - 24V/10A socket
For use as e.g. a portable lamp connection.
4
4 - 12V/10A socket
For use as e.g. charging a mobile phone.
B 3434
Page 4-25
4.15.7 Right part of main instrument panel - switches and indicator lamps (part III)
Front axle(s) tire inflation, underinflation

1.
(yellow)*
Lower position - tire inflation
Upper position - tire underinflation
Rear axle(s) tire inflation, underinflation

2.
(yellow)*
Lower position - tire inflation
Upper position - tire underinflation
Elevated headlamps with indicator lamp

3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
(yellow)*
Position 0 - OFF
Position I - ON 10
It only lights with the vehicle's external 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
lighting (switch 3).
B 3727
4. Front auxiliary lamps (green)
5. Service brake indicator lamp bulb 25 check button (green)
Turning off the SCR emission systems (yellow)*

6.
Used only when operated with the unified F34 fuel.
7a. Electric fuel delivery pump c/w indicator lamp (white)*
7b. Trailer tipping preselection c/w indicator lamp (yellow)*
8. Fuel pre-heating c/w indicator lamp (green)*
Ceiling light (green)

9.
Position 0 - Off
Position 1 - On with door open
Position 2 - On with door closed
Vehicle height setting indicator lamp (yellow)
10.
Enhanced ground clearance (suspension bellows inflated)
Vehicle height setting indicator lamp (yellow)

11.
Reduced ground clearance (suspension bellows deflated)
12. Vehicle height setting (yellow)
13a. Low range switch in transfer case(green)

WARNING: Engage in a chassis at rest only, with parking brake engaged.
Position I - quick gear (hare)
Position II - slow gear (turtle)
Page 4-26
13b. Tipper body indicator lamp (green)*
14. ABS - off road (yellow)
15. Transmission PTO (PTO 1) (yellow)
16. Clutch PTO c/w indicator lamp (PTO 2) (yellow)*
Exhaust brake (green)

17.
Exhaust brake switch depending on the service brake.
18. Beacon with indicator lamp (yellow)*
19. Warning lights with indicator lamp (red)
4.15.8 Ceiling panel - instruments and controllers

1 - Radio
2 - Digital tachograph
Note:
All vehicles are provided with radio pre-installation.
If the vehicle is equipped with a radio set, a separated
"Radio operating manual" forms an integral part of the
vehicle documentation.
1 2
B 3457
Page 4-27
4.15.9 Gearshift panel - switches

Version No. 1
1. Axle differential on/off (green)
Front axle drive and inter-axle differential

2.
on/off (green)
3. Unoccupied
ETS - rear axle steering (yellow)*

4. ETS Switching off the rear axle steering B 3728
5. Air horn (green)*
6. Central door locking*
Version No. 2
1. Front axle differential lock button (green)
2. Rear axle differential lock switch (green)
3. Front drive and inter-axle differential lock control switch (green)
ETS - rear axle steering (yellow)*

4. ETS Switching off the rear axle steering
5. Air horn (green)*
6. Central door locking*
Page 4-28
4.15.10 Gearshift panel - controls*

1 - Gearshift controller with presection switch (NORGREN)
2 - Emergency gear shift controller (NORGREN))
1
B 2756
4.15.11 Push switch with a lock button*

Some functions use push switch with a lock button, which
need to be unlocked both in order to activate switch.
Switch activation
1 A
- Press blocking button 1 down and press switch part B.
Switch deactivation
- Press switch part A only.
2
WARNING: B
Unless these instructions are followed, the switch will
be destroyed. B 2290
4.15.12 Right part of instrument panel (part V)

1 - Fuse box cover
2 - Power unit cover
Fuse box
The electric circuits of the vehicle are secured with fuses,
relays and diodes located on the fuse box under the fuse
box cover 1.
The fuse box 1 is accessible after unscrewing four screws.
1
Power unit
The following is located in front of the passenger seat, at
the instrument panel bottom under the cover of the power
unit 2.
The on-vehicle power unit is accessible after unscrewing
three bolts.
2 B 3251
Page 4-29
4.16 Electrical equipment

The electrical equipment assures basic illumination, indication, as well as safety and auxiliary functions
for vehicle operation.
4.16.1 Batteries
The batteries are a source of electric power.
They are located in the battery box on the right side of the
vehicle behind the cab.
During the vehicle operation, the batteries are charged
from the charging system formed by the alternator with
rectifier and voltage regulator.
Parked vehicle can also be recharged through the
preservation socket designed for recharging (above the
battery box or on the rear part of the vehicle).
CAUTION!
Batteries can emit explosive gases. To avoid personal
B 1079
injury, always ventilate the compartment before
servicing the batteries.
To avoid sparks:
- when disconnecting a battery, first disconnect the cable clamp from the negative (-) battery terminal.
- when connecting a battery, connect the cable clamp to the negative (-) battery terminal as the last step.
4.16.2 Battery disconnector

It serves for battery disconnect when driver leaves the
vehicle for long time to prevent battery discharge by some
equipment forgotten switched on, or when repair at electric
installation is carried out.
When the battery disconnector is turned off, the
independent heater control panel remains energized.
Battery disconector is located right behind the cab on the
the holder equipments or in the cab under the instrument
panel, to the left from the steering wheel shaft.
B 1372
Page 4-30
Battery disconnect should not be performed prior to

80 seconds following a key-off (engine stop).
CAUTION! 1
Never disconnect the batteries while the engine is
running. 2
CAUTION!
While towing the vehicle, never leave the ignition key
in the STOP position!
Always switch off the batteries when repairing or replacing

some part of the electrical equipment.
This will prevent a contingent short circuit in electric line 3
during the assembly operations.
B 3804
OFF
ON
A 7775
Page 4-31
4.16.3 Fuses, relays and diodes

Electric circuits are protected with fuses, diodes and relays.
Possible malfunction of electric installation is indicated by a respective fuse (when blown).

Replace a blown fuse after failure removal only with a fuse of the same current value as per the illustration
located on the fuse box lid.
WARNING:
The fuse box may only be fitted with specified fuses, diodes and relays. The manufacturer assumes
no responsibility for defects caused due to a failure to fit elements or observe fitting of elements of
specified values.
4.16.4 First group of fuses, relays and diodes

Fuse box
The first group of fuses, relays and diodes is located in the fuse box 1 (Fig. B 3251) before the passenger
instrument panel. The fuse box is accessible after unscrewing four screws.
For population of fuses, diodes and relays see the fuse box lid inside.
Overview of fuses in the fuse box

A fuse plate in a vehicle with the TATRA manual gearbox (including the NORGREN system
B 3729
Page 4-32
Fuse box plate in a vehicle with the ALLISON transmission
B 3730
Fuse box plate in a vehicle with the steerable rear axle (7T5R21.42ZA)
B 3802
Fuses
F1 Low beam, LH headlamp 5A
F2 Low beam, RH headlamp 5A
F3 High beam, LH headlamp 5A
F4 High beam, RH headlamp 5A
Page 4-33
F5 Left side markers 5A
F6 Right side markers, rear fog lamp, control front fog lamp 10 A
F7 Front fog lamp, daily light 15 A
F8 Stop lights 10 A
F9 Main headlamp control (combined switch) 5A
F 10 Warning lamps, cab (interior) illumination, lighter socket 15 A
F 11 Starter swich "15" 15 A
F 12 Starter swich "50" 25 A
F 13a Turn signals 5A
F 13b Reverse lamp, turn signals 5A
F 14 Wipers, horn, windshield washer 10 A
F 15 "15" switching circuit, 15 A
F 16 Independent heater * 15 A
F 17 Independent heater * 5A
F 18 24V/12V voltage converter, customer connector 10 A
F 19 Unoccupied
F 20 Urea dosing system (UDA2) 15 A
F 21 Unoccupied
F 22 Pre-heat fuel filter 25 A
Page 4-34
F 23 Unoccupied
F 24 Custom connector power supply 10 A
Power supply to the semi-automatic NORGREN shifting control

F 25a 5A
unit and display
F 25b Power supply the ALLISON control unit 5A
F 26 Unoccupied
F 27 Preservation charging sockets 5A
F 28 Power supply the ALLISON control unit 10 A
F 29 Unoccupied
F 30 Tachograph (electronic speedometer), inverter 5A
F 31 Unoccupied
F 32 Unoccupied
F 33 Cab lifting* 30 A
F 34 Unoccupied
F 35 Air-conditioning system power supply 5A
F 36 Air-conditioning system power supply 15 A
F 37 Air-conditioning system compressor 5A
F 38a DIAG Diagnostic sockets 5A
DIAG F 38b Diagnostic sockets, engine TEU 5A
F 39 Air-conditioning system power supply 15 A
Page 4-35
F 40 Air-conditioning system condenser cooling fan 25 A
F 41 Air-conditioning system condenser cooling fan 25 A
F 42 Unoccupied
Brake pad wear (disc brakes)*

F 43 5A
ALLISON transmission
F 44 Central door lock* 15 A
Brake pad wear (disc brakes)*

F 45a 5A
Manual gearbox TATRA
F 45b ALLISON transmission - transmission oil cooling fan control* 25 A
ETS control unit - power supply circuit "15" (control lamp,

F 45c 5A
Gateway) (rear axle steering)*
F 46a ALLISON transmission - transmission oil cooling fan control* 25 A
F 46b ETS control unit - (control lamp, Gateway) (rear axle steering)* 10 A
F 47 ETS control unit - power supply circuit "30" (rear axle steering)* 15 A
F 48 Unoccupied
F 49 Unoccupied
F 50 Battery disconecting switch 5A
Color marking of knife-blade-contact fuses

Color Value (A)
brown 5A
red 10 A
blue 15 A
white 25 A
green 30 A
Page 4-36
Diodes
V 418 Parking brake indicator lamp
V 547 Rear fog lamp
V 548 Rear fog lamp
V 549 Transfer case control
V 641 PTO lock-up
V 648 Minimum air pressure indication
V 714 Clutch PTO lock-up*
V 714 A Clutch PTO lock-up*
V 771 Battery charging indicator lamp
V 788 Transmission Allison - overheating oil indicator lamp
V 840 Transmission ALLISON oil cooling fan
Relays
K 89 High beam headlamps
A 120 Wiper cycle timer
K 148 Low beam headlamps
K 149 Front fog lamps
K 239 Gearshift control (5-6)*
K 282 Auxiliary working headlamps*
K 401 Gearshift control (C-4)*
Page 4-37
K 472 PTO lock-up (transmission)
K 506 Engine start
K 514 Auxiliary headlamp (high beam)
K 525 Electric circuit connection “15”
K 525a Electric circuit connection “15” (ALLISON)
K 553 Rear fog lamp
K 590 Intake air preheating
K 597 Start blocking
K 630 Fuel cleaner
H 647 Acoustic signaling - multi-input
K 648 Recharging
K 684 A/C compressor
K 690 Power supply of the ventilation and dependent heating system
K 691a A/C condenser engine
K 780 Cab tilting
K 802 Daytime running lights*
K 840a Transmission ALLISON oil cooling fan
K 840b Transmission ALLISON oil cooling fan
K 846a Engine oil cooling fan
Page 4-38
K 846b Engine oil cooling fan
K 847 Start blocking by the transmission ALLISON
4.16.5 Power unit

The following is located in front of the passenger seat, at
the instrument panel bottom under the cover of the power
unit 2.
The on-vehicle power unit is accessible after unscrewing
three bolts.
The following is located under the power unit cover 2:
Version No. 1 1
Vehicle equipped with the manual gearbox TATRA
(including the NORGREN system).
1 - Vehicle ABS wiring panel (fuses and relays ABS)
2 - Custom connector
Designed for superstructure installers as a point to
connect electrical devices (signals) from the
superstructure.
The custom connector is a 21-pin connector labeled
X43.
2
3 - ETS control unit (rear axle steering) B 3251
Control unit of electronic control of the rear axle

steering
4 - ABS control unit 2
The ABS control unit is sealed and can only be 1
tampered by an authorized TATRA TRUCKS service 9
dealer.
8
5 - Engine control unit (TEU)
6 - Manual gearbox TATRA (NORGREN) control unit
3
7 - Turn signal interrupter
4
8 - Voltage converter 24V/12V 7
9 - Instrument panel controls backlight corrector 6 5
B 3803
Page 4-39
Version No. 1
Vehicle equipped with the ALLISON transmission.
5
1 - Engine control unit (TEU) 8
2 - Voltage converter 24V/12V 6
3 - Vehicle ABS wiring panel (Fuses and relays ABS)
4 - ABS control unit 9 7
The ABS control unit is sealed and can only be
tampered by an authorized TATRA TRUCKS service
4
dealer.
1 2 3 B 3334
5 - Engine Monitoring Unit (ECU AMU)
6 - ALLISON control unit (ECU ALLISON)
7 - The disk brake pad control unit (ECU WSM)
8 - Turn signal interrupter
9 - Instrument panel controls backlight corrector
WARNING:
In case of a failure, the driver may not make any inexpert adjustments to the ABS control unit.
Diagnostic instrumentation is needed to examine potential defects in ABS system. Therefore, contact
the nearest authorized TATRA TRUCKS repair shop.
Page 4-40
4.16.6 Second group of fuses a relays

The second group of fuses and relays is located in the power unit area under the cover at the instrument
panel bottom in front of the passenger seat and it is accessible after unscrewing three bolts.
Two groups of fuse panels are located in the power unit area:
Vehicle ABS wiring panel

Relays ABS
Disconnection of engine brake
K 642
from ABS
K642 K643
K 643 Retarder disconnection - ABS
F55
F53
F52
F56
F51
B 3658
Fuses ABS
F 51 ABS socket for trailer 25 A
F 52 The "30" circuit for the ABS control unit 10 A
F 53 ABS 10 A
F 55 The "15" circuit for the ABS control unit 5A
F 56 ABS INFO 5A
Page 4-41
4.16.7 Electric sockets
4.16.7.1 Cab interior

The following sockets are situated inside the cab:
a) Diagnostic connectors in the fuse box

Version No. 1
For the vehicle equipped with the TATRA gearbox, one
diagnostic socket is located in the fuse box.
The following can be carried out using the diagnostic
socket (16-pin socket):
- Test of engine control unit (TEU);
- Check of ABS system;
- Check of dynamic injection advance;
- A/C reset (only for A/C manufacturer);
- Brake pad wear test by the control unit (ECU WSM) - B 1311
disc brakes.
- Test of SCR emission system.
Version No. 2
A vehicle equipped with the manual gearbox TATRA
(including the NORGREN system) features two diagnostic 1
sockets situated in the fuse box.
2
Diagnostic connector No. 1
socket 1 (16-pin socket):
- Check of dynamic injection advance; B 1390
- A/C reset (only for A/C manufacturer);
- Brake pad wear test by the control unit (ECU WSM) - disc brakes.
Diagnostic connector No. 2

The following can be carried out using the diagnostic socket 2 (9-pin socket):
- Test of the NORGREN electronic transmission control unit;
- Test of SCR emission system.
- ETS system (rear axle steering)*.
Page 4-42
Version No. 3
A vehicle equipped with the ALLISON transmission
features two diagnostic sockets situated in the fuse box. 1
Diagnostic connector No.1 2
- A/C reset (only for A/C manufacturer).
Diagnostic connector No. 2 B 1390

- Test of the NORGREN transmission control unit;
- Brake pad wear test by the control unit (ECU WSM) - disc brakes;
- Check of dynamic injection advance.
b) Sockets on centrum part of instrument panel (part III)

The following sockets are situated on the instrument panel in front of the passenger seats (see Chapter
4.13.7).
c) Gearshift panel
Winch cable control socket*
Socket for the cable controller of the hydraulic winch is
located on the side gearshift panel next to the driver's seat.
B 2313
Page 4-43
4.16.7.2 Accessory holder

Electric sockets
There are the following electric sockets situated on the
accessory console, on the right side of the tractor unit
behind the cab: 4
1 - Knife socket, two-pin socket (ZAB 24V)*
Designed for external source connection upon 3
emergency starting or supply of other equipment.
2 - Preservation socket* 2 1
Used for charging the batteries.
3 - Seven-pole socket (24V N-type)* 1
B 2522
Designed to connect a superstructure.
4 - Two-pin standard socket*
Used to connect an external power source and
for superstructure power supply from batteries.
Electric accessories*
The electrical equipment for engine oil pan preheating is
1 2
situated on the accessory console on the left vehicle side
behind the cab.
The following accessories are located on the accessory
console:
1 - wall outlet (230V socket)
2 - current circuit breaker (RCD)
A 7074
Page 4-44
4.16.8 Front bumper

The front bumper are located these electric sockets and
connection air pressure:
1 - Seven-pin socket (24V N-type)
For connection to another vehicle (when towing the
vehicle)
2 - Connection of filling air pressure
To connect an external air source or for connection to
another vehicle (to tow the vehicle)
3 - Connection of controlling air pressure 1 2 3 4
For connection to another vehicle (to tow the vehicle) 1
B 3340
4 - Unoccupied
4.16.8.1 Rear bumper

The rear bumper are located these electric sockets and
air connections:
1 - Seven-pole socket (24V N-type)*
Trailer tail lamps. 1 2
2 - Seven-pole socket (24V S-type)* 3
Back-up lamp and trailer fog lamp.
4 - Trailer ABS socket*
5
4
1
B 2487
1 5 4 3 2 1
B 3144
Page 4-45
4.16.8.2 Rear left lamp console

Beacon socket*
The beacon socket is located on the left lamp console.
B 2517
4.16.8.3 Rear right lamp console

Preservation socket*
The preservation socket is located on the right lamp
console.
Preservation socket designed to connect an external

preservation power supply.
B 2518
4.17 Description of instruments and controls
4.17.1 Ignition box
STOP - Key take-out position and steering lock function.

The steering wheel is locked after removing the
key.
The following is active in this position: vehicle
illumination, warning lights, oil heater, brake
lights and radio (where fitted).
0 - The steering lock cannot be open in this

position.
If the key cannot be turned to this position, turn
steering wheel slightly till the pawl is released. B 3477
I - Other electric circuits are ON.
II - Engine starting.
Turning the key from position I to position 0 to stop the engine.
Page 4-46
4.17.2 Combined switch
1 - Horn button
2 - Windshield washer button

Push to turn the windshield washer pump ON.
Having been sprayed, the windshield will be wiped off
by wiper blades automatically (in two cycles).
In order to ensure proper operation of this equipment
even in winter, it is necessary to keep the spray nozzles
free of snow or remove adhering ice with de-icing spray.
A 2940
3 - Wiper switch
Before operating the wipers in freezing weather for the first time, make sure the rubber wiper blades are
not frozen to the windshield.
- 0 - OFF
- I - low speed
- II - high speed
- J - wiper cycle control
The intermittent wiping within the interval range from 0.5 to 60 seconds can be preset.
Required wiping interval is achieved first by setting the switch to position J, the windshield will be
wiped off once, then move the switch to position 0 immediately.
Required wiper interval will correspond to the time that passed during moving the wipers switch to
position J again.
4 - change-over switch between high and low beam
Headlights are on after depressing the two-position
switch 3 at the instrument panel. High beam can be
turned on by pushing the switch lever.
5 - headlamp flasher . 1 2
By pushing the combined switch lever towards the
steering wheel. Blue indicator lamp 6 is on. The switch
lever shall return to the original position after releasing.
3 4 5
6 - right direction indicator . B 3428
Permanent blinking to the right. Push the switch lever

through the pressure point upwards into position 6. Green indicator lamp 7 is blinking. The switch lever
shall return automatically into the original position after driving in straight direction.
7 - left direction indicator .

Permanent blinking to the left. Push the switch lever through the pressure point downwards into position 7.
Green indicator lamp 7 is blinking. The switch lever shall return automatically into the original position after
driving in straight direction
Short blinking in the right/left

Push the switch lever in the required direction until the pressure point and hold.
Green indicator lamp 7 is blinking. When with trailer, green control lamp 8 is blinking as well.
After releasing the lever, it shall return to the original position.
Page 4-47
Daytime running lights*

- after turning the ignition switch (key) (position I), all vehicle marker lights illuminate;
- after engine start (position II), low beams will automatically turn on;
- after stopping the engine, lights switch off automatically.
CAUTION!
If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic daytime light system and if the high beam switch 4 is in
the ON position, the engine will start after the automatic activation of both low beam and high beam,
or fog lights. The activation of these lights is indicated by the indicator lamp on the vehicle
instrument panel. Therefore, before the ride always check the high beam switch 4 position and switch
it to OFF position to avoid unconscious dazzling of oncoming vehicle drivers.
4.17.3 Main headlamp control

Switch main vehicle lights
By pushing the three-position switch 3 are turned on:
- Position 0 - OFF
- Position I - parking lights;
- Position II - main headlamps.
Then use the combined switch lever to switch over between the low and high beam lights (Fig. A 2940).
Front auxiliary lamps

They light up when side markers (parking lamps) 3 are turned on and are switched on by the rocker
switch 4 .
The indicator lamp located directly in the switch indicates the lamps switched on.
4.17.4 Tachometer
The tachometer indicates engine speed and measures the B
engine run in engine hours during operation.
A - economic mode (1,000 - 1,500 rpm). A
B - permitted speed range with the option of engine brake
(850 - 2,150 rpm).
B - RED ZONE - permitted speed range without the use of C
the engine brake (2,300 - 2,500 rpm).
D - RED ZONE 1234
Too high speed (2,500 rpm and more) (engine D

overspeed zone).
NOT PERMITTED. B 1873
MAKE SURE TO STAY OUT OF THIS ZONE!!!

WARNING:
Correct gearshifting, brake application and driving should always be performed to keep the engine
speed within the range so that speedometer hand never reaches the red zone to avoid overspeeding
and subsequent damage to the engine.
Page 4-48
4.17.5 Digital tachograph*

The digital tachograph is installed in the instrument panel.
The digital tachograph is based on the large-capacity
memory (so-called mass memory) sufficient to store date
for the whole working year. VDO
This memory contains the same information as that on the

old discs (drivers at a specific time, driving duration, OK
instantaneous speed. 1 2
The tachograph identifies specific drivers using his/her
personal card.
Besides the driver, also the carriers, service shops and
inspection bodies have the chip cards.
B 2521
In addition to the data download interface, the DTCO 1381
digital tachograph is also provided with so-called
information interface allowing for continuous data transmission into the dashboard computer.
WARNING:
The digital tachograph is fitted with a battery that needs to be replaced every two years.
If the battery is low, damage to the tachograph may occur.
Note:
A separate "Digital tachograph manual" forms an integral part of the vehicle documentation.
4.17.6 Tachograph*
The tachograph is a combined instrument that records the
distance covered in kilometres, driving and stops modes,
instantaneous speed, instrument opening and driver shifts.
A 5915
Tachograph operation instructions

Instrument opening and closing
Opening
- Insert the key into a lock.
- Turn the key through an angle of 90° to the left.
- Tilt the instrument cover.
Closing
- Click the instrument cover and press it to the instrument.
- Turn the key through an angle of 90° to the right.
A 5916
WARNING:
Open the tachograph with the vehicle at standstill only.
Page 4-49
Replacement of the recording disc on a single-disc tachograph

Recording disc installation
- Fill in the inner field of the recording disc.
Driver's name and surname

Place of the journey start
Date of the disc installation (upper line)
State license number
Odometer - reading on start of the journey
- Open the instrument cover.

- Insert the filled-in disc with a front side up and push it down.
While installing it, take care that the oval-shaped hole of the disc would not be damaged.
- Shut the instrument cover - the recording disc grasps automatically.
Turn the rotary switch of the driver's activity to a respective position.

The tachograph records the driving time automatically.
Other working times
Other operating emergencies
Driving interruptions and periods of daily rests
Removal of the recording disc

- Remove the recording disc and fill in entries in the inner field.
Place of arrival
Date of the disc removal (lower line)
Odometer reading on termination of the journey
km Kilometers covered
WARNING:
On termination of the work, however, after 24 hours at the latest, it is necessary to remove the disc
from the instrument.
Replacement of recording discs on a two-disc tachograph - driver and co-driver

Installation of recording discs
- Fill in the inner field of recording discs (for driver and co-driver).
- Click the partition plate towards the instrument.
Page 4-50
- Install the co-driver's disc with a filled-in front side up so that it would grasp and turn it so long until the hole
fits to the carrier properly and press it.
- During installation take care that the oval-shaped hole of the disc would not be damaged.
- Click the partition plate towards the instrument cover.
- Insert the driver's disc with a filled-in front side up so that it would grasp like the co-driver's disc and press it.
- Shut the instrument cover; recording discs will grasp automatically.
- Turn the rotary switches 1 and 2 of the crew to a respective activity.
A driver controls the switch 1.
A co-driver controls the switch 2.
Removal of recording discs

- Remove the driver's disc.
- Click the partition plate towards the instrument.
- Remove the co-driver's disc.
- Click the partition plate towards the cover.
- Shut the instrument cover.
- Fill in entries into the inner field of removed driver and co-driver's recording discs.
Driver's change
The vehicle's crew exchanges - a co-driver becomes a driver.
- Exchange the recording discs.
- A new driver controls the rotary switch 1 of the driver's activity and a co-driver controls the rotary switch 2
of the co-driver's activity only.
A driver or a co-driver leaves the vehicle:

- He who leaves the vehicle, takes his disc.
- A new driver puts his filled-in disc on the partition plate or a new co-driver puts his filled-in disc under the
partition plate.
If a new co-driver does not come, set the switch 2 activity to a time of rest .
Both the driver and the co-driver leave the vehicle:

- Both of them will take their discs.
- A new crew will install their filled-in discs.
WARNING:
After standstill of the vehicle or after removal of disc(s), it is necessary to adjust the switch(es)
of the crew's activity to position .
Tachograph clock setting

The driver must care of setting a correct time:
- Use the key to open the tachograph.
- Adjust the exact time by turning the adjusting knob clockwise on the edge of the outer bush
on the tachograph tilting cover.
WARNING:
The tachograph timer has the 12-hours´ cycle but there is a 24-hours´ cycle on the disc.
Bear it in mind while setting the clock.
Page 4-51
LED indicator lamp

When the diode lights, it means that the tachograph is not ready to operate.
VEEDER-ROOT* - the diode flashes with the ignition on with the disc not installed.
After installation of the disc and a correct closing of the tachograph, the diode goes out.
If the vehicle is operated without a disc installed, the diode goes out at speed of 20 km/h.
If the ignition is off and the disc has not been installed, the diode flashes after another 20 seconds.
When the tachograph is operated with one recording disc only, a plastic disc must be installed
in the co-driver's place - you can find it in the tachograph equipment.
VDO-KIENZLE* - the diode lights if the disc has not been installed or if the rotary switch 2 of the co-driver's
activity has not been set to a rest time or if the instrument cover has not been closed properly and/or
if the recording pin has been damaged.
When the diode flashes, there is a fault in the working time recorder.
With the microprocessor tachograph model (see "EMV μP" on the type label) no blind disc beneath
the partition plate is used.
Therefore, set the rotary switch 2 of the co-driver's activity to position , because otherwise the LED signal
lamp lights.
WARNING:
The vehicle's owner is obliged to have the built-in tachograph checked.
The specified inspection interval makes 2 years or always:
- when the tire effective circumference has been changed;
- when seals have been damaged;
- after repair of the instrument.
Take care that the specified data on the type label is corrected at every inspection.
4.17.7 Electronic speedometer

Speedometer is a combined device recording the total and
daily distance covered in kilometers and instantaneous
speed in relation to time.
100436.9
15:00
B 1874
Page 4-52
1 - Speed indication in km/h.

2 - Odometer
Numerical display shows total vehicle distance 1
covered.
The first six numbers indicates kilometers, last number
indicates hundreds of meters.
Either time or daily kilometers covered are shown in the
lower part.
3 - Setting knob
With this knob you may do the following:
- switch from the time mode to daily traveled 3 2 A 7493
kilometers;
- set the time and day;
- reset the trip computer.
Activation of electronic indicator

The electronic indicator is active immediately after ignition turning-on:
- total kilometer reading appears on the display 2;
- total daily kilometer reading appears on the display 2;
- odometer 2 and speedometer 1 will illuminate when headlamps are turned on.
Press adjustment knob 3 momentarily to switch from the time mode to trip computer mode (daily
kilometers covered).
The display goes out shortly after the ignition is turned off.
If the setting knob 3 is depressed briefly when ignition is off, information on kilometers covered will appear
on the display in about two seconds.
Time setting (e.g. 21:45)

1. Turn on the ignition.
The last selected option will appear in the second line of the display:
time mode or daily kilometer reading.
2. Switch to the time display mode by brief pressing the setting knob 3,
if needed.
3. When time is shown, keep the setting knob 3 depressed for more than
2 seconds.
4. To set time, press and hold the knob 3 until required hour digit appears.
Page 4-53
5. Press again and minute digits will blink.
6. Set current minutes by pressing and holding the setting knob 3 until desired digit
appears.
7. Press the setting knob 3 briefly to confirm the time set.
Note:
If the button has not been used for more than one minute in the course of setting, the
procedure will be interrupted.
Resetting of daily traveled kilometer reading

1. Turn on the ignition.
The last selected option will appear in the second line of the display:
time mode or daily kilometer reading.
2. Pressing the setting knob 3 momentarily to switch to daily kilometers covered, if

needed.
3. When daily kilometers appear, press and hold the knob 3 longer than 2 seconds.
Daily trip computer number resets and indicates zero.
Page 4-54
4.17.8 Double air pressure gauge

1. Indicates the value of the brake system pressure.
The red pointer indicates the air pressure in the rear
axle circuit(s).
The white pointer indicates the air pressure in the
front axle circuit(s).
2. Indicates the value of front and rear axles tire

pressure.
The red pointer indicates the air pressure in the rear
axle tires.
The white pointer indicates the air pressure in the B 1865
front axle tires.
4.17.9 Engine oil pressure gauge

Informs about the engine oil pressure.
At the engine working temperature, the pressure varies
between 3 and 5 bars.
The pressure at idle speed is 1 bar.
B 1867
4.17.10 Fuel gauge

Indicates fuel quantity in the fuel tank.
If the indicator lamp 23 lights permanently, refuel the
tank as soon as possible.
The fuel gauge indicates the fuel quantity in the tank only
when the key in the switch box is in position I.
B 1868
Page 4-55
4.17.11 Engine oil temperature gauge*

Indicates the engine oil temperature.
B 1870
4.17.12 Transmission oil temperature gauge*

Informs about oil temperature in the transmission.
During normal driving conditions its temperature is
maintained in the range from 80°C to 100°C (from 176
°F to 212 °F).
The maximum allowable oil temperature for the
continuous operation is 120°C (248 °F).
B 2288
Page 4-56
4.17.13 Voltmeter*
It informs about battery charging status and voltage during
driving. Operating voltage is 24 V to 29.5V.
Red field (18 V - 20.5 V)

If the voltmeter pointer is in this red field after the ignition is
on, this means that the batteries are charged
insufficiently. It is necessary to charge or to replace the
batteries.
B 1872
Hatched green field (20.5 V - 24 V)

Here the pointer indicates that the batteries are charged insufficiently.
In addition, if the pointer is in this field with the engine running, it indicates an incorrect function of the source
seat.
Green field (24 V - 29.5 V)

Here the pointer indicates well-charged batteries.
With the engine running and thus at a function of the source set, the pointer indicates the state of regulated
voltage of the set.
During the driving and with a good function of the source set, the pointer must show the value 28 V
approximately.
Red field (29.5 V - 32 V)

If the pointer is in this field on the move, it indicates a poor function of the source set.
Page 4-57
4.18 Heater
The driver’s cab interior can be heated using the following systems:
1. Independent diesel heating.
Independent diesel heater works independently of the engine operation.
TATRA vehicleS a. s. recommends checking and setting of the independent hot-air heater always
before a heating season in an authorized service!
2. Engine-dependent (oil) heating uses engine oil temperature and its thermal efficiency during the ride
or with the engine running in the vehicle at rest depends on oil temperature.
The ventilation, dependent heater and cooling system is working with the engine running and the fan turned
on only.
4.19 EBERSPÄCHER independent diesel heater*

Independent diesel heating is placed inside the cab under
the passenger seat or behind the driver´s seat and serves
mainly to rapidly heat up the cab before driving.
Independent diesel oil heating system operates
independently of the engine thermal regime and with
the battery disconnector turned on.
CAUTION!
The engine independent oil heater must not be
operated where flammable fumes or dust may create,
e.g. in the vicinity of fuel, coal or wood stores.
B 2335
Keep the heating system clean thoroughly.
CAUTION!
The engine independent oil heater must not be operated where flammable fumes or dust may create,
e.g. in the vicinity of fuel, coal or wood stores.
Never operate the heater in enclosed spaces such as in garages or in the underground car parks.
Poisoning hazard!
Exhaust gases containing toxic ingredients are produced by each combustion.
ALWAYS TURN THE HEATER OFF WHEN REFUELLING!!
Page 4-58
4.19.1 Control timer of the independent hot-air heater/optional equipment
4.19.1.1 Description
The timer 1 located on the left panel of the main dashboard
is used to operate the independent hot-air heater/optional
equipment. 1
Field of application
They can be used to programmatically control the heating 2
system operation (independent heater) or an auxiliary
device. Designed to select the operating mode, set the
operating time, preset the switch-on time and turn on/off
the independent hot-air heater or an optional built-in
device.
The timer features a simple control structure.

All functions can be adjusted and changed using only four 3
buttons.
B 3804
If the vehicle was de-energized (batteries removed) and

the power supply was restored later, the INIT message
displays to automatically detect the heater. If the detection
was successful, the time on the home screen flashes.
The time must be set. Then you need to set a weekday.
Note:
The display is slowed down at temperatures below -10 °C,
i.e. the symbol flicker sequence is somewhat slower,
starting from +70 °C the display contrast is weaker.
B 3411
Note:
If the cab temperature drops below -19 °C, it is first necessary to heat the independent hot-air heater timer to
the temperature when the LCD is legible and then to reset the hot-air heater timer pursuant to the instructions
of Chap. 4.19.1.6 "General Preset Time Programming Instructions".
4.19.1.2 Button function
- LONGPRESS button
The button must be pressed for longer than 2 seconds.
The heater is switched on immediately if ON or OFF appears in the display (except if
programming is running or while making settings).
- SHORTPRESS button
The button must be pressed for less than 2 seconds
- if the display shows OFF → EasyStart Timer ON, the Start display appears.
- a selected function is confirmed.
- inputs are confirmed.
Page 4-59
- LONGPRESS button
The button must be pressed for longer than 2 seconds
- all functions are ended.
- if the display shows OFF → EasyStart Timer ON, the Start display appears
- SHORTPRESS button
The button must be pressed for less than 2 seconds
- the displayed, activated function is ended, other activated functions are retained.
- with each SHORTPRESS the display changes to a next-higher level up to EasyStart Timer
OFF.
- the Start display appears and no function is active:
→ EasyStart Timer OFF.
- EasyStart Timer is in submenu → the setting is exited, already set values are not saved.
Press button 1x / keep pressed

- EasyStart Timer is in the Main menu and the Start display appears → in the Menu bar the
next, righthand symbol appears in the middle and flashing.
- EasyStart Timer is in the → submenu, the displayed value is changed (larger), or the next
selection is displayed.
Press button 1x / keep pressed

- EasyStart Timer is in the Main menu and the Start display appears → in the Menu bar the
next, lefthand symbol appears in the middle and flashing.
- EasyStart Timer is in the → submenu, the displayed value is changed (smaller), or the next
selection is displayed.
4.19.1.3 Operation and setting/adjustment

Notes on operation and setting
ACTIVATING THE EASYSTART TIMER

If the display is not lit the EasyStart Timer must be activated (not if heating ON with LONGPRESS).
SHORTPRESS on one of the four buttons, the Start display appears in the display, then continue with
the operation or setting
ACTIVATING A MENU ITEM

The symbol of the menu item to be activated appears in the middle and flashing in the display. In the case
of several activated menu items the symbols are displayed alternately.
DISPLAY
The display is lit:
- during use of the EasyStart Timer;
- if terminal 58 is connected, with switched on vehicle lighting;
- if the heater / add-on heater is ON.
Page 4-60
DISPLAY DISAPPEARS
If the vehicle lighting is switched off, no heater or add-on unit is switched on or if no setting or actuation is
made, the display goes out within 10 seconds, i.e. the EasyStart Timer switches to standby. For renewed
input, one of the four buttons must be pressed first (not in heating ON with LONGPRESS).
FLASHING SYMBOL / FLASHING VALUE

In the Main menu a flashing symbol in the Menu bar is activated with the button.
In the submenu a flashing value can be confirmed or a selection made using the or button.
HEATING ON WITH LONGPRESS

The heater is switched on immediately. An add-on heater is not switched on immediately.
HEATING OFF WITH LONGPRESS

If a heater and an add-on unit is in operation both are switched off.
CANCEL / EXIT SETTINGS

The setting can be cancelled or exited by pressing the button.
CONFIRM INPUT
The settings and changes must always be confirmed by pressing the button, otherwise they are lost.
SETTING THE OPERATING TIME

The operating time can be set using the or button. Setting range of the operating time min.
10 - max. 120 minutes, the input is made in 1 min. intervals. Continuous heating mode is additionally possible
for air heaters. The operating time for a heater and for an add-on unit can be set independently of each other.
EXTENDING THE OPERATING TIME

The operating time can be extended to up to 720 min, the input is made from the 120th min. in 5 min intervals.
To do this, contact the installation workshop.
VENTILATION OPERATING MODE

Ventilation mode is not possible with all heater types (see the Technical Description of the heater for details).
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
In the settings and operations described in the following it is assumed that a temperature sensor is connected
for a water heater.
In the case of air heaters the temperature sensor installed in the heater and which is provided for control
of the heater can also be used to determine the interior temperature.
ADD-ON UNIT
An add-on unit can be e.g. a second heater or parking air conditioning. Further, it is also possible to combine
a heater with a fan; the fan is then used for air distribution in the vehicle interior.
A heater and the add-on unit can be operated simultaneously or independently of each other.
WARNING:
The number of symbols and displays differs depending on the installed heater and feature options.
Page 4-61
FACTORY SETTING)
PROGRAM / PRESELECTION (FOR ALL HEATERS)
- Weekday group Mon – Fri
- Departure time 07:00
- Language DE
- Time format 24 h
- Operating time for preselection (preset) 30 minutes
AIR HEATERS
- Continuous heating operating time
- Setpoint temperature 21 °C
WATER HEATERS
- Operating time 30 minutes
- automatic operating time calculation OFF
4.19.1.4 Operation and setting / adjustment

a) MAIN MENU
Menu bar
Status area
17:30 21 °C
MENU BAR
.The following menu items can be selected.
Heating ON/OFF
Ventilation ON/OFF
Add-on unit ON / OFF

(e.g. a second heater)
Settings
Program / Preselection
Page 4-62
WARNING:
The symbol for the ADD-ON UNIT menu item must be activated in the Workshop menu; contact
the installation workshop.
The symbol for the VENTILATION menu item is now displayed, if the heater supports this
function.
Only the and symbols are displayed in vehicles in ADR mode.
If the heater supports the VENTILATION function the symbol is also displayed.
STATUS AREA
If no menu item is activated, the current time and, if an (optional) temperature sensor is connected,
the temperature in the vehicle interior are displayed in the status area.
START DISPLAY:
- Time, e.g. 17:30
- Temperature in the vehicle interior, e.g. 21 °C.
If a menu item is activated (heating, ventilation, addon unit, settings or program / preselection),
different information is displayed in the status area; this appears and described in the relevant sections.
SUBMENU
Menu bar
W 107 min X Input area
Display:
e.g. HEATING ON / Operating time 107 min.
In the submenu, the symbol of the selected menu item appears in the middle of the display.
The corresponding set value is displayed flashing in the entry area and can be set using the or
button and confirmed with the button.
b) START DISPLAY AFTER SWITCHING ON

If no menu item is activated, the Start display appears with a flashing heater symbol in
the Menu bar, with the current time and the actual temperature in the status area.
Other possible actions are:
17:30 21 °C - HEATING IMMEDIATELY with LONGPRESS.
- HEATING ON with SHORTPRESS, in addition confirm and if applicable set the
temperature setpoint and operating time see page 4-65.
- select a new menu item.
Page 4-63
c) DISPLAYS FOR ACTIVATED MENU ITEMS

HEATING ON
- Heating OFF.
60 min 21 °C
VENTILATION ON
- Ventilation OFF.
60 min 21 °C
ADD-ON HEATER HEATING ON

- Add-ON UNIT HEATING OFF.
90 min
ADD-ON HEATER VENTILATION ON

- Add-ON unit ventilation OFF.
90 min
d) HEATING IMMEDIATELY WITH LONGPRESS (WITHOUT SETTINGS)
Press the LONGPRESS button for longer than 2 seconds.

Heater ON.
30 min 21 °C
Display for air heaters in continuous heating mode (factory setting).
∞ 21 °C
WARNING:
After switching on, “On” is displayed for 2 sec and then the remaining operating time or for air
heaters. Set values are copied from the previous heating mode. If LONGPRESS is pressed during
Page 4-64
heating mode the display switches to the HEATING submenu SET TEMPERATURE SETPOINT – (only
for air heater) and SET OPERATING TIME.
During heating mode it is possible to switch to another menu item. Under the VENTILATION menu
item, check the operating time and if necessary adjust.
e) HEATING OFF WITH LONGPRESS

Display ON, the HEATING menu item is displayed.
Press the LONGPRESS button for longer than 2 seconds.
Off 21 °C Heater OFF.
After the HEATING OFF the Start display appears. If the vehicle lighting is OFF the
display lighting goes out after 10 seconds.
17:30 21 °C
WARNING:
With HEATING OFF with LONGPRESS all active functions are ended. The following actions are
possible during the HEATING OFF display:
Use the or button to select a menu item.
SHORTPRESS button, the Start display appears, if the SHORTPRESS button is pressed
again, display OFF.
SHORTPRESS button, the HEATING submenu is displayed.
f) HEATING ON WITH SHORTPRESS AND WITH SETTINGS

Display ON, the Start display appears.
Press the SHORTPRESS button for less than 2 seconds.

17:30 21 °C
WARNING:
The following settings and confirmations (temperature setpoint and operating time) are always
required.
SET TEMPERATURE SETPOINT – FOR AIR HEATERS ONLY
If applicable, use the or button to set the temperature setpoint.
Temperature setpoint setting range:

W 21 °C X
8 °C - 36°C in 1 °C increments (46 °F - 97 °F in 1 °F increments).
Press the button to confirm the temperature setpoint.
Page 4-65
If necessary, use the or button to set the operating time.
Operating time setting range:

60 min
Min 10 – max 120 min in 1 min. increments, continuous heating mode is possible for
air heaters.
Press the button to confirm the operating time.
Heater ON
60 min 21 °C
∞ 21 °C
WARNING:
heaters. During heating mode it is possible to switch to another menu item.

Under the VENTILATION menu item, check the operating time and if necessary adjust.
The changed operating time is offered again the next time the system is started.
g)HEATING OFF WITH SHORTPRESS

Display ON, the HEATING menu item is displayed.
Off 21 °C Heater Off.
After the HEATING OFF the Start display appears.

If the vehicle lighting is OFF the display lighting goes out after 10 seconds.
17:30 21 °C
WARNING:
The heater switches off, an active add-on unit remains in operation.
The following actions are possible during theHEATING OFF display:
SHORTPRESS button, the Start display appears, if the SHORTPRESS button is pressed
again.
SHORTPRESS button, the HEATING submenu is displayed.
Page 4-66
h) CHANGE THE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT AND / OR THE OPERATING TIME DURING OPERATION
Display ON, the HEATING / VENTILATION / ADD-ON UNIT HEATING or ADD-ON VENTILATION menu item
is displayed.
WARNING:
The temperature setpoint set before switching on the heater or confirmed temperature setpoint and
the current remaining operating time (lower limit 10 min) are displayed as set values. The operating
time and the temperature setpoint are changed once. Both set values must be confirmed.
SET TEMPERATURE SETPOINT – ONLY FOR AIR HEATERS, NOT FOR THE VENTILATION FUNCTION
Use the or button to set the temperature setpoint.

W 21 °C X
8 °C - 36 °C in 1 °C increments (46 °F - 97 °F in 1 °F increments).
The temperature setpoint is changed once.
Use the or button to set the operating time.

60 min Min 10 – max 120 min in 1 min. increments, continuous heating mode is possible
for air heaters.

The operating time is changed once.
60 min 21 °C
Display for air heaters in continuous heating mode.
∞ 21 °C
ch) SET VENTILATION ON WITH SHORTPRESS AND IF APPLICABLE SET THE OPERATING TIME
Use the or button to select thel ventilation symbol in the Menu bar.
Off 21 °C
Confirm the VENTILATION menu item by pressing the button.
WARNING:
The following setting or confirmation is absolutely necessary.
Page 4-67
If necessary, use the or button to set the operating time.

30 min Min 10 – max 120 min in 1 min. increments, continuous VENTILATION mode possible
for air heaters.
The operating time is changed permanently.
30 min 21 °C
Display for air heaters in continuous VENTILATION mode.
∞ 21 °C
WARNING:
heaters.
During ventilation mode it is possible to switch to another menu item.
Under the HEATING menu item, check the operating time and if necessary adjust.
If the symbol is not displayed the VENTILATION function is not activated or is not available
for the heater.
i) VENTILATION OFF WITH LONGPRESS

Display ON, the VENTILATION menu item is displayed.
Press the LONGPRESS button for longer than 2 seconds
After the VENTILATION OFF display the Start display appears.

17:30 21 °C
WARNING:
With VENTILATION OFF with LONGPRESS all active functions are ended.
The following actions are possible during the VENTILATION OFF display:
Page 4-68
SHORTPRESSbutton, the Start display appears, if the SHORTPRESS button is pressed

again, Display OFF.
j) VENTILATION OFF WITH SHORTPRESS

Display ON, the VENTILATION menu item is displayed.
After the VENTILATION OFF display the Start display appears.

17:30 21 °C
WARNING:
The heater switches off, an active add-on unit remains in operation.
The following actions are possible during the VENTILATION OFF display
- Use the or button to select a menu item.
- SHORTPRESS, button, the Start display appears, if the SHORTPRESS button is pressed
again, Display OFF.
- SHORTPRESSbutton, the VENTILATION submenu is displayed.
4.19.1.5 Control of additional equipment - second heating device
a) ADD-ON UNIT ON – E.G. ACTIVATE THE HEATING FUNCTION FOR A 2ND HEATEr
Use the or button to select the symbol in the Menu bar.
Off 21 °C
Confirm the ADD-ON UNIT menu item by pressing the button.
Use the or button to select the symbol.
Confirm the HEATING function using the button. .
WARNING:
The following settings or confirmations are absolutely necessary.
Page 4-69
Use the or button to set the temperature setpoint.

W 21 °C X
8 °C - 36 °C in 1 °C increments (46 °F - 97 °F in 1 °F increments).

W 90min X
Min 10 – max 120 min in 1 min. increments, continuous heating mode is possible for
air heaters.
Heater ON.
90 min
WARNING:
heaters.
During heating mode it is possible to switch to another menu item.
Under the VENTILATION menu item, check the operating time and if necessary adjust.
If the symbol is not displayed the ADD-ON UNIT function is not activated or is not available
for the heater.
The add-on unit, e.g. a 2nd heater, can be operated simultaneously with the 1st heater yet with a
different operating mode and with different values for the temperature setpoint and the operating
time.
Page 4-70
b) ADD-ON UNIT ON – E.G. ACTIVATE THE VENTILATION FUNCTION FOR A 2ND HEATER

Off 21 °C
Confirm the ADD-ON UNIT menu item by pressing the button. .
Confirm the VENTILATION function by pressing the button.
WARNING:

for air heaters.

Heater ON.
60 min
Display for air heaters in continuous VENTILATION mode (factory setting).
WARNING:
heaters.
During ventilation mode it is possible to switch to another menu item. Under the HEATING menu item,
check the operating time and if necessary adjust. If the symbol is not displayed the ADD-ON
UNIT function is not activated or is not available for the heater.
operating mode and with different values for the temperature setpoint and the operating time.
Page 4-71
b) ADD-ON UNIT ON – E.G. ACTIVATE THE VENTILATION FUNCTION FOR A 2ND HEATER
Display ON, the Start display appears. Use the or button to select the
symbol in the Menu bar.

Off 21 °C
Confirm the ADD-ON UNIT menu item by pressing the button.
Confirm the VENTILATION function by pressing the button.
WARNING:

for air heaters.

Heater ON.
60 min
Display for air heaters in continuous VENTILATION mode (factory setting).
WARNING:
After switching on, “On” is displayed for 2 sec andthen the remaining operating time or for air
heaters.
During ventilation mode it is possible to switch to another menu item. Under the HEATING menu item,
check the operating time and if necessary adjust.
If the symbol is not displayed the ADD-ON UNIT function is not activated or is not available for
the heater.
different operating mode and with different values for the temperature setpoint and the operating
time.
Page 4-72
c) ADD-ON UNIT OFF WITH LONGPRESS
Press the LONGPRESS button for longer than 2 seconds

Add-on unit OFF.
Off 21 °C
After the ADD-ON UNIT OFF display the Start display appears.
17:30 21 °C
WARNING:
With ADD-ON UNIT OFF with LONGPRESS all active functions are ended.
The following actions are possible during the ADD-ON UNIT OFF display:
- SHORTPRESS button, the Start display appears, if the SHORTPRESS button is pressed again,
Display OFF.
- SHORTPRESS button, the HEATING submenu is displayed.
d) ADD-ON UNIT OFF WITH SHORTPRESS

Display ON, the ADD-ON UNIT – HEATING menu item is displayed.
Off 21 °C Add-on unit OFF.
After the ADD-ON UNIT OFF display the Start display appears.
17:30 21 °C
WARNING:
The following actions are possible during the ADD-ON UNIT OFF display:
- SHORTPRESS button, the Start display appears, if the SHORTPRESS button is pressed
again, Display OFF.
- SHORTPRESS button, the HEATING submenu is displayed.
Page 4-73
4.19.1.6 General information on programming the preset time
The programming of the preset time is carried out in menu item .

The EasyStart Timer can be used to program 3 preset times. The 3 preset times can either all take place on
one weekday or can be distributed between different weekdays.
3 weekday ranges are available to choose from, these can each be started daily with a preset time.
Weekday ranges
Sat. - Sun. 2x HEATING / VENTILATION
Mon. - Fri. 5x HEATING / VENTILATION
Mon. - Fri. 7x HEATING / VENTILATION
If the system is activated with programmed weekday range, all weekdays are worked through consecutively;
after that renewed programming is required.
Example:
If the EasyStart Timer with a programmed weekday range Mon – Fri is activated on Sunday, the heater heats
or ventilates from Monday to Friday with the set defaults (5x HEATING / VENTILATION).
If the EasyStart Timer with a programmed weekday range Mon – Fri is activated on Wednesday, the heater
heats or ventilates on Thursday and Friday, the heater is not operated on Saturday and Sunday.
From Monday to Wednesday of the following week the operation is continued with the set defaults
(5x HEATING / VENTILATION).
After a weekday range has been worked through renewed programming is required.
WARNING:
If the symbol is not displayed in the Menu bar, the heater is in ADR mode; preselected heating
mode is not possible here.
When programming the EasyStart Timer, note the operating mode as described in the following.
DEPARTURE TIME OPERATING MODE (FACTORY SETTING)

Under the following conditions the preselected heating mode is not started on the current day.
- The current day and the preselected day are identical.
- The current time lies within the time period, departure time minus operating time.
Example:
Current day / preselected day: Thu
Current time: 18:45
Departure time: 19:00
Operating time: 30 minutes
Duration: 18:30 to 19:00
The current time lies within the time period, the heater is not switched on.
The program will be run during the next week.
START TIME OPERATING MODE

In Start Time operating mode the heater is started on the preselected day and when the set time is reached.
AUTOMATIC OPERATING TIME CALCULATION (for water heaters only)

For water heaters and a temperature sensor connected to the EasyStart Timer the heating start is calculated
automatically depending on the measured room temperature and the selected heating level (ECO or HIGH).
Page 4-74
The operating time can lie between 10 and 60 minutes; operation is always ended 5 minutes after the
programmed departure time.
This can result in a minimum operating time of 15 minutes and a maximum operating time of 65 minutes.
The operating time set in the Program / Preselection menu is ineffective in this case.
In all other configurations the start takes place according to the preset operating time.
WARNING:
- The ECO and HIGH heating levels are only effective in conjunction with a programmed preset time.
- The preset times are always departure times, even if the operating time calculation is deactivated.
- It is not possible to program more than 3 preset times.
- The max. operating time of 65 minutes for the automatic operating time calculation is a factory
setting. This can be reduced to 15 minutes if necessary by the installation workshop.
- If the automatic operating time calculation function is activated for water heaters, the operating time
for determining the time period is 60 min.
a) PROGRAM PRESET TIMES

1 2 3 Display, if no preselection is activated.
Display, if a preselection is activated e.g. P2.

Confirm the PROGRAM menu item by pressing the button.
1 2 3
WARNING:
If the symbol is marked with , a or several program memories is/are already activated.
Activated program memories are marked in the display with a .
b) EASYSTART TIMER SETTINGS

SELECTING THE PROGRAM MEMORY
The P1 program memory is displayed, if applicable, use the or button to

1
select the next program memory P2, P3 or P1 again.
Mo. - Fr. 21 °C
Program memory P1 display, factory setting.
07 : 00 30 min.
Program memory P2 display with programmed preselection.

2 Press the button to confirm the selected program memory.
Mi. 21 °C
06 : 30 60 min.
Page 4-75
ACTIVATING / DEACTIVATING THE PROGRAM MEMORY
2 Use the or button to select the “On”
On Off
or “Off” setting.
2
On Off
Confirm the “On” or “Off” setting with the button, the program, e.g. P2 is
2
activated or deactivated.
Mi. 21 °C
06 : 30 60 min.
WARNING:
After editing the program, press the button to return to the PROGRAM / PRESELECTION
menu item or wail until
- if the vehicle lighting is ON the PROGRAM / PRESELECTION menu item is displayed,
- if the vehicle lighting is OFF the display lighting goes out.
Do not press the button, as otherwise the “On” setting switches to “Off” and vice versa.
EDITING THE PROGRAM MEMORY
2 Use the button to confirm the selected program memory, e.g. P2.
Off On Use the or button to select the symbol.
Press the button to confirm the setting.
SELECTING THE WEEKDAY GROUP / WEEKDAY
2 Use the or button to select the weekday group Mon – Fri, Sat – Sun,
Mon – Sun or a weekday Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun.
Mi.
Page 4-76
SETTING THE DEPARTURE TIME / START TIME
2 Use the or button to set the hours.
06 : 00
2 Use the or button to set the minutes.
06 : 30
SELECTING THE OPERATING MODE
2 Use the or button to deselect the symbol or the symbol.
2 Confirm the HEATING or VENTILATION function by pressing the button.
2 Use the or button to set the temperature setpoint.

21 °C
8 °C – 36 °C in 1 °C increments (46 °F – 97 °F in 1 °F increments).
Page 4-77
SELECTING THE HEATING LEVEL

only for water heaters with automatic operating time calculation
ECO heating level = normal heating, approx. 20 °C.
HIGH heating level = convenient / comfortable heating, approx. 23 °C.
2 Select ECO heating level or HIGH heating level using the or button.
ECO
2 Press the button to confirm the heating level.
HIGH
2 Use the or button to set the operating time.
60 min Operating time setting range:

Min. 10 – max. 120 min. in 1 min increments.
WARNING:
In the case of water heaters with automatic operating time calculation the operating time is limited
to max.65 min. The operating time cannot be set.
For air heaters and preset mode the operating time is limited to 120 min. Continuous heating mode is
not possible.
ACTIVATING THE PROGRAM MEMORY
2 Press the button to confirm the “On” setting.
On Off
2
Mi. 21 °C
06 : 30 60 min.
WARNING:
After editing the program, press the button to return to the PROGRAM / PRESELECTION menu
item or wail until,
Page 4-78

DEACTIVATING THE PROGRAM MEMORY
2 Use the or button to select the “Off” setting.
On Off Press the button to confirm the “Off” setting.
WARNING:
The settings remain saved. After editing the program, press the button to return to the
PROGRAM / PRESELECTION menu item or wail until,
EDIT THE PROGRAM MEMORY AGAIN
2 Use the or button to select thel symbol.
Off On Use the button to confirm the setting and continue as described on page 4-77,
4-78 and 4-79.
C) SETTINGS THE TIME, THE WEEKDAY AND THE TIME FORMAT

SETTING THE TIME

Mo. 10:30
Confirm the SETTINGS menu item by pressing the button.
Confirm the SET THE TIME by pressing the button.
Use the or button to set the hours.
Use the or button to set the minutes.
Page 4-79
06 : 30
WARNING:
Do not press the button, as otherwise SET THE TIME appears in the display again.
After making the setting, press the button to return to the SETTINGS menu item or wail until
- if the vehicle lighting is ON the SETTINGS menu item is displayed,
SETTING THE WEEKDAY


Mo. 10:30
The SET THE TIME symbol is displayed.
Use the or button to select the Weekday symbol.
Use the or button to select the weekday.
Mo. Press the button to confirm the weekday.
WARNING:
Do not press the button, as otherwise SET THE WEEKDAY appears in the display again.
Page 4-80
SETTING THE TIME FORMAT


Mo. 10:30
The SET THE TIME symbol is displayed.
Use the or button to select the TIME FORMAT symbol.
Use the or button to select the time format.
12 h
Press the button to confirm the time format.
24 h
WARNING:
Do not press the button, as otherwise SET THE TIMEFORMAT appears in the display again.
Page 4-81
4.19.1.7 Occurrence of faults and their solutions

IN THE EVENT OF A FAULT THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS ARE POSSIBLE:
DISPLAY DESCRIPTION REMEDY / CUSTOMER
- The independent heater timer cannot be Warm up the display with the
set due to a low cab temperature engine-dependent heating to the working
(below -19 °C). temperature, and then set the time and
weekday.
- Automatic detection is active. Wait until the automatic detection has
- The EasyStart Timer has been finished, then set the time and weekday.
INIT disconnected from the power supply
and then reconnected.
- No communication. Check and if necessary renew the heater

fuse.
Visit your vehicle workshop.
NO SIGNAL
- 1st heater fault. Visit your vehicle workshop.
Error
- 2nd heater fault. Visit your vehicle workshop.
Error
- Voltage too low. Charge battery, if necessary visit your

vehicle workshop.
- Temperature sensor is defective Visit your vehicle workshop.
18:30 – °C
In case of malfunction:
Check the air vents for clogging.
Switch the heating off and on repeatedly.
If the heater fails to start, a new start follows automatically. When the second attempt fails too, emergency
shutdown follows.
Make sure the fuses of the independent heater F16 and F17 non the fuse panel have not been blown
and contact a TATRA TRUCKS authorized service dealer to detect the cause.
Page 4-82
Heater operation without pre-selection

Heater switching-off:
Press the LONGPRESS button to switch off the heater.
When switched off, the start screen is displayed, followed by the heater cooling fan run-out.
The fan runs down in about 3 minutes automatically.
WARNING:
If you are unable to remedy the error or fault, please contact an authorised TATRA TRUCKS servis.
Page 4-83
4.20 Ventilation, dependent heater and cooling system

WARNING:
The ventilation, dependent heater and cooling system is working with the engine running and the fan
turned on only.
It cares of the optimum cab's interior temperature all the year round.
The cooling and the heating may be used at the same time!
When these systems are combined correctly, the required temperature and the air moisture can be achieved
under any ambient conditions.
Especially in the winter period, when the heating is used to achieve the required temperature and the
air-conditioning to dry the air, you will see a great advantage of this system.
Hereby you avoid the window glasses defogging inside the driver's cab.
To assure a proper function and a full output of the air-conditioning, it is necessary to put it shortly
into operation once a week at least, even in winter.
At low ambient temperatures (round 0°C and less), it is necessary to warm the engine before turning on the
air-conditioning. With the air-conditioning on, one vent hole at least into the cab´s interior must be open to
avoid the defrosting of the evaporator.
It's normal when water drips under the vehicle. It indicates a proper function of the air-conditioning system.
The condensed water creates when outside temperature is high and the air is very humid.
If in doubt that your heating and air-conditioning system does not achieve the optimum output, do not
operate the vehicle any more and approach some TATRA authorized service to locate a cause of the
defect as soon as possible.
They have got the genuine spare parts and the needful equipment for repair at disposal.
Never attempt to correct the malfunctions by yourself.
4.20.1 Dust and pollen filters in the climate control system

The ventilation, engine-dependent heating and cooling systems (i.e. the climate control system) use pollen
and dust filter.
Pollen and dust filter is located in the intake channel under the front tilting bonnet (Fig. B 3344).
Dust and pollen filter

The dust and pollen of the ventilation and heating system
(climat control) is situated in the intake duct under the front
hood.
Filters in the intake duct prevents dirt and dust from
entering the distribution box and the driver's cab, protects
the components located in the box against contamination
or clogging.
- Keep the filter clean.

- Remove dirt, if any. B 3344
For details on inspection, cleaning and replacement of the pollen and dust filter see the Chapter 6 "vehicle
maintenance".
Page 4-84
4.20.1.1 Control panel of the ventilation, dependent heater and cooling system
Climate control panel 1 is located on the left of main
instrument panel and it is used to control the ventilation,
engine-dependent heating and cooling (climate control
system).
It also allows you to diagnose certain faults.
3 1 2
B 3726
Description of control buttons on the A/C control panel

1 - increase set temperature button 12
2 - increase blower speed button
3 - decrease set temperature button
4 - decrease blower speed button
5 - air distribution to “face” button
6 - air distribution to “face and feet” button AUTO
7 - air distribution to “windshield and feet” button

8 - air distribution to “windshield” and windshield defrost
button 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
9 - show outside temperature button B 1271
10 - button to toggle between “AUTO” and “ECON" mode

11 - button for switch ON/OFF air recirculation
Control desription
When the ignition key is turned in position “I”, the display
indicates the last set values being stored.
If the vehicle position (side-marker) lights are turned off,
the display brightness is the greatest. A
After turning on the position (side-marker) lights, the B C
brightness of the display is reduced to a half and the
control push buttons light up simultaneously. AUTO
B 1226
Page 4-85
Automatic mode
Press "AUTO" button. Display will show "AUTO" over air
distribution icon as well as over blower icon.
By temperature increase/decrease buttons set requested AUTO AUTO
temperature. Set temperatures will be shown on the

display.
System will set automatically air distribution, blower speed, AUTO
recirculation flap and controls compressor in a way to
achieve requested temperature as quick ass possible.
After requested temperature is reached system will
maintain it until new temperature is set by user.
B 1272
Manual air distribution setting

If the automatic air distribution does not suit you, press the
button for choosing the type of air distribution which suits
you best.
MANUAL AUTO
This will switch the system to manual air distribution
adjustment mode.
This adjustment will be kept until another change is made.
AUTO
Display will show "MANUAL" over air distribution icon while
"AUTO" will remain over blower icon. Maintaining the
adjusted temperature and blower speed will further be
controlled automatically.
B 1274
Blower speed manual adjustment

If the automatic set blower speed does not suit you, move
the blower speed button up or down and set the most
suitable blower speed.
AUTO MANUAL
This will switch the system to manual blower speed
adjustment mode, which will be set until another change is
made.
AUTO
Display will show "AUTO" over air distribution icon and
"MANUAL" over blower icon. Maintaining the adjusted
temperature and blower speed will further be controlled
automatically.
B 1275
Air distribution and blower speed manual adjustment

If the automatic air distribution and blower speed does not
suit you, press the button for choosing the type of air
distribution which suits you best and move the blower
speed button up or down and set the most suitable blower MANUAL MANUAL
speed. This will switch the system to manual air distribution

and blower speed adjustment mode, which will be set until
another change is made. AUTO
Display will show "MANUAL" over air distribution icon and

"MANUAL" over blower icon.
Maintaining the adjusted temperature will further be
controlled automatically. B 1276
If you wish to return to fully automatic mode, press the "AUTO" button. The "AUTO" "AUTO" sign will
appear on the display.
Page 4-86
Windshield demisting
Activate the automatic windshield demisting by pressing
the air distribution button "windshield" for 5 seconds.
The windshield demisting icon will appear on the display.
AUTO AUTO
The system sets the air distribution onto the windshield, the
highest heating temperature, turns the air-conditioning
compressor on and switches the recirculation lid to outside
air suction mode. AUTO
After 2 minutes the system will automatically switch to the

originally set values.
B 1278
Recirculation lid adjustment

The recirculation lid switches automatically to the inner
circuit under these conditions:
1. The outside temperature is above 25°C.
2. The temperature inside the cab is lower than the outside
temperature.
3. The compressor must be on.
AUTO
After 30 minutes of the closed inner circuit the system

automatically switches to outside air suction so that the
circulation of air in the cabin is ensured. B 1280
If you need a manual inner air suction adjustment, press
the air recirculation button.
The recirculation icon will appear on the display.
Outside temperature display

Press the outside temperature button and the outside
temperature in °C and the "EXT" icon will be displayed for
4 seconds.
AUTO AUTO
EXT
AUTO
B 1281
Page 4-87
Black ice warning

If the outside temperature is reaching zero, the icing icon
will be displayed , which warns you of possible black
ice. AUTO AUTO
Adapt driving to ground conditions to avoid an

accident.
AUTO
B 1282
Air-conditioning compressor switch off

The system automatically controls the compressor
switching on and off according to need.
If you wish the compressor not to be on, press the “AUTO”
AUTO AUTO
button until the “ECON” sign appears, which means that E
C
O
the compressor is off. N
The system maintains the inner temperature only with the

AUTO
outside air sucked in, which can lead to inefficient cab
cooling (especially in the summer).
That is why we recommend that you keep the system in
“AUTO” mode (with the compressor on).
B 1283
When the compressor is off (ECON), every 30 minutes the
system automatically switches on the compressor for a few seconds to lubricate the whole system.
You may switch the compressor on again pressing the “AUTO” button.
Alarm indication
If the system recognizes any fault, this is signaled by
a flashing fault code and the “SERVICE” icon.
Some system functions may be limited, therefore contact
S AUTO AUTO
an authorized service as soon as possible and have the air E
R
V
I
conditioning system checked and faults removed. C
E
Note: AUTO
In case of malfunction of any temperature sensor, it is

recommended to switch from the automatic mode
(AUTO) to manual control of the A/C system.
B 1284
Page 4-88
4.21 Selective catalytic reduction (SCR)

The TATRA FORCE vehicles are equipped with EURO 5 range engines using SCR technology (selective
catalytic reduction).
The SCR is a method of additional exhaust gas treatment using an additive called AdBlue that is injected into
exhaust gas before they pass through the catalytic converter.
Nitrogen oxides in the catalytic converter are converted into harmless nitrogen and water steam – matters that
occur in environment naturally.
When refueling, add also AdBlue additive to a special tank.
A magnetic ring (adapter) is located in the AdBlue tank
hole to release the pumping column only when a delivery
nozzle is hung on.
In addition the delivery nozzle designed for AdBlue
medium dosing is provided with a magnetic safety lock to
prevent from unwanted filling into other than AdBlue tanks.
WARNING:
When adding AdBlue, use extreme care to avoid dirt
penetration into the tank along with AdBlue.
Clean the surface around the fuel tank filling neck B 3751
before any adding of liquid. Use absolutely clean
containers (plastic, aluminum, stainless) and funnel when adding AdBlue from containers.
Containers must neither contain nor be contaminated with petroleum products!
For EURO 5 level, the consumption of AdBlue additive corresponds to 5-6 % of fuel consumption.
(about 50-60 litres of AdBlue additive falls to 1,000 litres of fuel).
WARNING:
The vehicles runs longer with empty AdBlue tank but it does not meet EURO 5 standard.
An engine operated without the AdBlue won’t break, but it will not perform at the EURO 5 emission
level. If the driver does not rectify the situation, the engine power is reduced. After the AdBlue is
refilled, the entire catalytic process will start again.
WARNING:
The warranty period for AdBlue is approximately 12 months at temperatures between -5 °C and 25 °C.
At temperatures above 40 °C, AdBlue lifetime is reduced to 1 month.
Note:
No engine power limitation applies to the vehicles listed in the relevant exceptions pursuant to the Decree of
the Ministry of Transport and Communications (e.g. Fire Brigade) when operated with an empty AdBlue tank
or SCR system malfunction.
Note:
A sampling probe is installed in the AdBlue tank cap.
(designed for servicing purposes and inspection
authorities).
B 0827
Page 4-89
4.21.1 Indicator lamps function

The control unit UDA2 is located on the left behind the cab.
The control unit UDA2 communicates with two indicator

lamps 1, 2 (Fig. B 3431) to send error codes to the driver or
servicing personnel.
B 3752
1 Indicates AdBlue level in the tank

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
2 Malfunction indication in the system
System readdiness indication
a) Indicator lamp 1 indication
Indicator lamp 1 is used to indicate either low level or

B 3431
empty AdBlue tank.
If the level is above “low“ level, the lamp is OFF to indicate that everything is OK.
If the level reaches the lower limit, the lamp will not turn on.
This is the same function as that of a normal fuel tank.
If the tank is empty, the indicator lamp blinks and the system ceases dosing the fuel.
Tank level Indicator lamp activation

Full (60 l) OFF
Low (below 10 l) ON
Emptya) flashes
a.About 8 liters of AdBlue remains in the tank - so-called permanent (inexhaustible) volume.
b) Indicator lamp 2 indication

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
The indicator lamp 2 is used to indicate errors in the
system.
When the ignition is turned on, the indicator lamp 2
lights and indicates that the system is powered.
After starting the engine, the indicator lamp 2 goes
out and indicates that the system is ready
to start the dosing.
B 3431
Page 4-90
If the indicator lamp does not go out after starting the engine or it comes on during the operation, it indicates
an error in the system.
When the control unit function is activated by means of the “test equipment”, the indicator lamp 2 comes
on to indicate a system transfer into a test regime.
The indicator light 2 turns on:

- when the ignition key is turned on and engine is not running,
- if UDA2 loses power or if an overall electrical fault of UDA2 occurs;
- when an error is detected;
- when the Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system is shut down when operating with the unified F34
fuel - catalyst replaced with a muffler.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out:

- within 10 seconds after the engine start if no fault is detected;
- after fault removal, either after 24 hours or 3 sequences of fault-free operation, or immediately-depending
on the fault type;
- after Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system activation - muffler replaced with the catalyst.
Page 4-91
4.21.2 Deactivating the Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system when operating with the unified
F34 fuel
If the vehicle is operated with the unified fuel designated pursuant to the F34 military standards, adjustments
to the vehicle exhaust system need to be made. The catalyst must be replaced with a muffler in the exhaust
system (see Sec. 5.31: "Modifying the exhaust system to operate with the unified F-34 fuel").
After replacing the catalyst with a muffler, the Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) must be shut down.
To activate and deactivate the SCR system, press the
switch 6 simultaneously with the safety knob on the

switch.
SCR system deactivation
- Press the switch 6 on the dashboard. This turns off

the Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system.
After pressing the switch 6 , the indicator lamp 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

lights up.
10
The indicator lamp 1 has no function now. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B 3727
SCR activation
- After reinstalling the muffler instead of the catalyst, push the switch 6 to its basic position.
Both indicator lamps 1 and 2 are now functional.
Page 4-92
4.22 Fuel tank

The fuel tank is located on the vehicle behind the cab.
If the vehicle is equipped with two fuel tanks, the fuel tanks
are interconnected.
Each tank is provided with a lockable filling neck.
A drain plug is in the bottom.
Always fill up the tank after operation to eliminate water
condensation on tank inner walls, namely in winter months.
Do not top up the fuel tank fully, just to the lower part of the
filling neck.
Heat dilates diesel fuel and it can overflow from the tank. A 6323
4.23 AdBlue tank

The AdBlue tank is located on the vehicle left side.
The filler cap of blue color is secured with a lock.
The tank filler hole is provided with a mechanical

encryption to prevent from connecting of inappropriate
devices, eliminating that any other product than AdBlue
gets into the tank.
When filling the tank, it is essential to completely insert and
hold the nozzle/gun in the filling hole so as to ensure
sufficient air volume above the AdBlue level.
B 3751
It is recommended to check the AdBlue level in the tank
upon each refueling.
Should AdBlue contamination be found out, do not start the vehicle in any case and contact an authorized
TATRA TRUCKS repair shop immediately.
To ensure proper vehicles use and compliance with applicable regulations, the use of AdBlue is absolutely
necessary. A failure to use AdBlue can be considered as an offense.
When refilling the AdBlue tank, it is absolutely necessary to pour 20 litres of AdBlue back into the tank as
a minimum.
Page 4-93
4.24 Vehicle equipment
4.24.1 Front hitches

The vehicle has two hitches in the front.
The front hitches (pintle hooks) are designed for rescue,
emergency towing and anchoring the vehicle on/in the
means of transport (on a flat bed, freight car, etc.), lifting
the vehicles with a crane or mounting an electric winch.
B 3753
4.24.2 Trailer coupling*

To tow (or recover/rescue) another immobile vehicle or
trailer, the vehicle is equipped with a automatic
(mechanical) towing hitch , which is mounted at the
vehicle rear.
B 2498
4.24.3 The hitch on rear cross member (towing hook)*

Some vehicle versions can be equipped with a hitch
(towing hook) at the rear of the chassis.
This hitch (towing hook) may only be used for vehicle
emergency rescue, or as a tie-down point for the vehicle
during transport.
WARNING:
Do not connect trailer to the towing hook.
A 5648
Page 4-94
4.24.4 Connecting air hoses with coupling heads

To tow immobile vehicles (or vehicles with damaged air system), the vehicle is equipped with two air coupling
hoses (filling and control) with coupling heads.
Air coupling hoses are a part of the vehicle equipment and are stored in the toolbox.
The protective cover of the air coupling head is marked with red color, the cover of the control coupling head
has a yellow color.
After connecting the air hose with the filling coupling head, the air is automatically supplied from the air
system of the towing vehicle to the towed vehicle air systems.
4.24.5 Connecting an external air supply

The 4x4 and 6x6 vehicle versions are equipped with a
compressed air supply (quick-release coupling, at the
boarding stairs on the driver's side) to connect an external
air source.
B 1778
Some vehicle versions (e.g. 8x8) can be equipped with

a fitting for external air source connection on the front
bumper.
1 - Connection of filling air pressure
To connect an external air source or for connection
to another vehicle (to tow the vehicle).
2 - Connection of controlling air pressure
The fittings are designed to connect with another
vehicle to control the braking system of the towed
vehicle.
1 2
B 2523
- Unscrew the cap 1 and screw in a hose with pure pressured air as dirt or condensate might result in defects
in the brake and suspension systems.
A coupling head (provided in the vehicle outfit) may be mounted to the fitting 1 to connect to another vehicle.
- Fitting 2 is provided to control the braking system of towed vehicle.
Before using, remove any debris from the connection or port fitting for an external air source.
Connect a hose with pure pressured air as dirt or condensate might result in defects in the braking and
suspension systems.
Page 4-95
4.24.6 Air tank

Air release from the brake system
All air tanks on the vehicle are equipped with a drain valve.
- Displace the drain valve lever on all air tanks to release
air from the brake system.
- Release remaining air by repeated flooring the brake
pedal.
WARNING:
Drain off condensate daily, always after operation.
It could freeze up in the air system, namely in winter
period. A 5646
4.24.7 Wheel ckocks*

Your vehicle may be equipped with one or more wheel
chocks to secure the wheels against movement.
WARNING:
Check that the chocks are properly secured
in the holders and the latch works.
CAUTION!
Never park on a slope without checking that the
vehicle is locked properly.
If the driver is not sure, wheels must be supported with
chocks and parking brake must be applied.
B 2524
4.24.8 Fuel canisters*

Some of the vehicle versions can be equipped with one or
more fuel canisters.
B 2525
Page 4-96
B 3476
5 Vehicle operation
Page 5-1
Vehicle operation 01-0565-ENG/01
5.1 Running in
During the first hours of operation, significantly greater internal friction occurs inside the engine than later,
when all the engine moving parts are adapted to each other.
Properly performed running in (until covering of 2,500 - 3,000 km) of a new vehicle will have great influence
upon its further reliability.
Therefore, meet the following recommendations:
- Meet all instructions specified in the "Operation Manual".
- Please study the Warranty conditions that are included in the vehicle accompanying documentation and
TATRA Claim Rules that are provided in the Service Booklet.
- Do not forget to place an order with your TATRA authorized service station in time to have the Technical
Servicing carried out during the vehicle Running-in - after covering of 2,500 - 3,000 km.
5.1.1 Instructions for running

Engine
- Avoid driving at full throttle.
- Before covering 2,500 km, drive up to 3/4 of the maximum speed of an engaged gear (engine speed within
the range of 1,000-1,500 rpm).
- Avoid high engine speed.
- During the running-in period, avoid towing a trailer, if possible.
- Until the vehicle travels 5,000 km, run the engine at full throttle only for short distances.
Brake lining
Bedding-in the brake lining
- New brake pads have not optimum friction characteristics during running-in (brake bed-in process) for about
2,500-3,000 km.
- This is caused by shape inequalities of friction surfaces.
- During running-in, intensive brake load should be avoided, for example, sudden braking especially at high
speed, braking and starting the vehicle in extreme conditions (on steep slopes above 15%).
- These guidelines apply to vehicle operation after every change of brake pads.
During and after running-in:

WARNING:
Never spray pressurized water on hot brakes after intense driving due to the heat stress in the
materials!
Recommendation:
After an intense thermal load on the brakes, the brakes should be cooled by slower driving before
parking and engaging the parking brake.
Page 5-2
31-10-2017 Vehicle operation
DURING AND AFTER ENGINE RUNNING-IN:

- Never crank a cold engine to high speed, particularly at temperatures below freezing point, both at standstill
and while driving.
All data on the ground speed, or the engine speed, is only valid for the engine warmed to the operating
temperature.
Never drive with the engine at too high speed, early change into a higher gear saves fuel, reduces
noise and saves the environment.
- Do not drive at too low engine speed.
- If the engine is no running smoothly, change into a lower gear.
For vehicle equipped with a speedometer, the maximum permitted engine speed is indicated at the beginning
of the red zone on the speedometer scale.
The speedometer pointer should not get inside the red zone.
WARNING:
The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for defects caused by incorrect vehicle running in.
Page 5-3
5.2 Technical servicing

Individual levels of technical servicing during operation are specified in the Service Booklet and the
performance thereof is governed by the quantity of consumed fuel or mileage covered.
Therefore, always record the refueled quantity.
5.3 Before the ride

Check the following before the ride:
- Oil or fuel spots under the vehicle;
- The tread depth of tires;
- The tread of each tire for even distribution of wear pattern;
- The wheel attachment and tire pressures;
- The fluid level in the screen washer tank;
- Function and cleanliness of the sealing surfaces of the automatic dedusting valve;
- Condition and tightness of rubber joints on the engine intake manifold after the air cleaner;
- The oil level in the tank of the powersteering hydraulic circuit;
- Oil level in the tank of the winch hydraulic circuit;
- Winch equipment and accessories (e.g. cable, cable eye, remote control, cable guide rollers, etc.);
- The trailer coupling for proper attachment and operation;
- The connection and operation of the trailer lighting and brakes;
- If the load is properly secured;
- Adjust the seat and the rear-view mirrors;
- Steering wheel setting;
- Adjust and fasten the seat belt;
- The correct operation of lights and instruments;
- The engine oil level;
- The AdBlue level;
- The fuel level;
- The documents needed for vehicle operation.
5.4 After the ride

- With respect to the possibility of measuring the oil level in the tank, leave the engine running at idle speed
for 5 min. You will avoid thermal tension in the engine. Stop the engine afterwards!
- Secure the vehicle with the parking brake and set the shift selector lever to neutral “N".
- Check the air suspension for deviation of any bellows spring.
- Switch OFF the battery disconnector!
- Drain off the deposited condensate from the air tanks, if any.
WARNING:
The tachograph and heater timer is connected to the batteries permanently (even after circuit opening
by the battery disconnector).
For this reason, to avoid battery discharging, it is necessary to disconnect the battery plus terminal if
the vehicle is out of operation for longer than 10 days.
When putting the vehicle into operation, do not forget to connect the plus terminal and re-adjust the
heater timer and tachograph (electronic speedometer).
Page 5-4
5.5 Refuelling diesel and refilling AdBlue

a) Diesel
Your vehicle can run on diesel fuel compliant with EN 590.
The vehicle manufacturer also permits the use of F-34 unified fuel without service life limitation.
Note:
For the operation on F34 unified fuel, the exhaust system must be adjusted, see Chap. 5-35. "Modifying the
exhaust system to operate with the unified fuel F-34").
WARNING:
The fuel is highly flammable and can cause a fire or explosion with a subsequent serious injury.
- Keep fuel away from sparks and open flames.
- Always clean the vehicle and ground to remove spilled fuel as required.
- Turn off the independent hot-air when refuelling.
The tank opening for diesel is on the fuel tank.

Make sure that the tank is as full as possible to prevent condensation (especially in winter).
Note:
If the vehicle is equipped with a twin fuel tank, the fuel tanks must be refueled separately.
WARNING:
The use of improper or contaminated fuel can cause serious damage to the fuel system or engine.
- Use only the specified fuel.
- Before opening and filling, clean the surface around the fuel tank filler.
- Be careful nothing except pure fuel gets into the tank.
Fuel additives
Fuel additives, called "flow improvers" (petrol and similar products) must not be added in diesel fuel.
If the diesel fuel quality is low, the coarse fuel filter needs to be drained more often than specified in the
Service Booklet.
WARNING:
It is forbidden to add gasoline or other similar agents to the diesel fuel.
Winter diesel
In winter petrol stations offer a different type of oil than in summer. Using a "summer diesel fuel" at
temperatures below 0 °C can result in operational problems because the diesel fuel thickens due to paraffin
development.
If outside temperatures are persistently low, only fill up with winter diesel produced by a reputable oil
company. During the winter months the oil companies often use additives, to prevent blockages caused by the
precipitation of paraffin crystals (wax deposits).
Page 5-5
Top up the fuel tank after driving in winter! Moisture

condenses on the free (empty) tank areas, building up into
ice. The ice in the fuel system impairs the fuel supply and
can clog the coarse fuel filter.
Note:
Additives which are used to prevent precipitation of paraffin
crystals have a purely preventative effect.
They cannot dissolve the paraffin crystals once they have
been precipitated.
Always carry a spare fuel fine filter in the vehicle so that
you can replace it if it becomes blocked in any way
A 6323
(for example, by paraffin crystals).
b) AdBlue
The SCR consumes AdBlue. The AdBlue usage depends on:
- Vehicle configuration;
- Driving;
- Driving style;
- Load;
- Ambient temperature.
The tank opening for AdBlue is on the AdBlue tank, the filler cap for AdBlue has a blue colour. Having
refuelled diesel, also fill up the AdBlue tank with AdBlue. Insert the dedicated AdBlue filler gun fully into the
neck of the tank so that the magnet in the neck releases the AdBlue delivery. Filling up the AdBlue tank using
a dedicated filler gun results in a maximum fill volume of 80%.
Under certain conditions, during light duty operation, a little or no AdBlue may be used.
In the absence of a warning symbol, it can be assumed that the system is functioning correctly.
WARNING:
The use of improper or contaminated AdBlue can cause serious damage to the SCR system.
- Use the specified AdBlue liquid only.
- Before opening and filling, clean the surface around the AdBlue tank filler hole.
- Be careful nothing except pure AdBlue liquid gets into the tank.
Note:
There remains a small quantity of AdBlue in the AdBlue tank, even if the level gauge indicates that it is empty.
Any spilled AdBlue can simply be removed with clean water. Dried AdBlue leaves a white deposit which can
be removed with clean water as well.
Note:
It is a criminal offence not to use AdBlue according to the vehicle's specifications to reduce pollutant
emissions. It can invalidate favourable conditions for purchase or operation of the vehicle obtained in the
country of registration or the country in which the vehicle is used.
Page 5-6
5.6 Starting the engine

5.6.1 Starting the vehicle with the TATRA gearbox
5.6.1.1 Starting a cold engine

a) Starting a cold engine (at ambient temperature below -15 °C)
Starting a cold engine as follows:
1. Make sure the parking brake is engaged
2. Gearshift lever is in N position ("neutral").
3. Make sure the battery disconnector is switched on.
4. If the vehicle has not been operated for a longer period
of time, fill the fuel with the electric pump first, switch
3 on the right main instrument panel.
B 1372
5. Before starting, turn off the independent hot-air heater.

WARNING:
If your vehicle is equipped with EBERSPÄCHER*
independent hot-air heater, turn it off before the start
(cold or hot) (i.e. even before turning the key to
position I) using the button 3 on the heater control
panel. The start itself can be made as late as after the
heating delay (in about 3 minutes).
The independent hot-air heater can be turned on again
after the start and with the engine running by pushing
B 3411
the button 3 on the heater control panel.
6. Insert the key into the ignition box.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
7. Turn the ignition key to position I, the charging 19 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
and lubricating 20 indicator lamps will

illuminate.
The indicator lamps of engine pre-heating 18 ,
engine failure 22 , engine overheating
21 will blink shortly. B 3431
8. When starting cold engine at ambient temperatures lower than 15 °C the engine preheating indicator
lamp 18 will come on.
9. Initiate engine starting only when the indicator lamp 18 flashes slowly.
Page 5-7
10. Turn the ignition key to II position to start the engine when the accelerator pedal is pressed down.
11. Do not rev up cold engine to high speed.
12. After the engine starts, immediately release the key, it automatically returns to I position.
Do not start for longer than 5 seconds.
13. If the engine does not start, return the ignition key to the 0 position, wait 30 seconds, and repeat the
entire starting attempt again.
14. After starting the engine, check whether the indicator lamps are off (see Chap. 5.7).
b) Starting the engine in extremely low temperatures (below -15 °C)

1. To start the engine in extremely low outdoor temperatures (below -15 °C), it is recommended (when the
engine is stopped, still at operating temperature) to completely set the starting fuel supply in advance by
turning the idle handle 1 as per Fig. A 7407 clockwise (to the max. value).
WARNING:
Starting the engine in extremely low outdoor temperatures (below -15 °C), it is necessary to fully
depress the accelerator and keep it in this position throughout the entire engine starting, including
breaks between start attempts.
2. When starting the engine, fully depress and hold the accelerator pedal (do not release the accelerator
pedal until the engine starts). If a starting supply has been preset (to the maximum), fully rotate the
engine idle handle 1 as shown in Fig. A 7407 counterclockwise (to the minimum) to set the idle speed.
3. Insert the key into the ignition box.
4. Turn the ignition key to position I (if the key would not turn, rotate the steering wheel in both directions to
unlock the steering lock), the charging 19 and lubricating 20 . Indicator lamps will illuminate.
The indicator lamps of engine pre-heating 18 , engine failure 22 and engine overheating 21
will blink shortly.
5. Initiate engine starting only when the indicator lamp 18 flashes slowly.
6. Turn the ignition key to II position to start the engine when the accelerator pedal is permanently pressed
down.
7. If periodic fuel deflagrations (inflammations) are audible during cranking in the engine cylinders, which
progressively increase the engine starting speed, you can continue cranking for max. 60 seconds. If the
engine fails to start after this period, set the ignition key to the 0 position.
Wait for 120 seconds as a minimum and repeat the entire start attempt again.
9. Do not rev up (started) cold engine to high speed.
WARNING:
Starting the engine in extremely low outdoor temperatures (below -15 °C), it is necessary to fully
depress the accelerator and keep it in this position throughout the entire engine starting, including
breaks between start attempts.
WARNING:
Page 5-8
When a sound of the engine cranking after turning the ignition key to position II (start) cannot be
heard, stop the start trial immediately, move the ignition key to position “0” and repeat the whole start
attempt once again.
If you hear engine cranking with the starter, start until the engine starts, however, for 60 seconds as
a maximum (see the conditions specified in section (b), point (7)). If you fail to start the engine, set the
key to position 0 and repeat the whole process in 120 seconds again. When starting the engine heated
up already, do not floor the accelerator pedal to avoid excessive smoke level.
If the engine is not turned on even after repeated attempts, check the fuel system low-pressure
branches for leaks, and bleed the fuel system, if needed (See Chapter 6- Vehicle maintenance)
WARNING:
Pay extreme attention when starting the engine with the cab lifted!
WARNING:
With the engine running, disconnect neither the battery disconnector not the terminals to avoid
damage to the alternator or some electric consumers.
5.6.1.2 Start warned-up engine

At an ambient temperature above 0 °C or with a hot (warm) engine, start the engine as follows:
1. Make sure the parking brake is engaged
2. Gear shift controller is in N position ("neutral").
3. Make sure the battery disconnector is switched on.
4. ) Insert the key into the ignition box.
5. Turn the ignition key to position I, the charging 19 and lubrication 20 indicator lamps will light
up. The indicator lamps of engine pre-heating 18 , engine failure 22 and engine overheating
21 will blink shortly.
6. The glowing is not activated when starting hot engine at the cylinder head temperatures above 16°C and
the engine pre-heating indicator lamp starts flashing slowly immediately.
7. Turn key in the ignition box to position II to start the engine.
Note:
For environmental reasons, start the engine without the accelerator pedal depressed, or slightly depressed
only.
Do not start for longer than 5 seconds.
9. If the engine does not start, return the ignition key to the 0 position, wait 30 seconds, and repeat the
entire starting attempt again.
Note:
The position is not arrested. To restart the engine, return the ignition key to 0 position - this prevents to start
the already running engine that could damage the starter.
10. After starting the engine, check whether the indicator lamps are off (see Chap. 5.7 "After starting the
engine".
Page 5-9
WARNING:
When a sound of the engine cranking after turning the ignition key to position II (start) cannot be
heard, stop the start trial immediately, move the ignition key to position 0 and repeat the whole start
attempt once again.
If the engine cranking can be heard, start the engine with the starter key but carry this out for 5
seconds as a maximum. If you fail to start the engine, set the key to position 0 and repeat the whole
process in 30 seconds again. When starting the engine heated up already, do not floor the accelerator
pedal to avoid excessive smoke level.
If the engine is not turned on even after repeated attempts, check the fuel system low-pressure
branches for leaks, and bleed the fuel system, if needed (See Chapter - Maintenance).
WARNING:
Pay extreme attention when starting the engine with the cab lifted!
WARNING:
Page 5-10
5.6.2 Starting a vehicle with the ALLISON transmission

The procedure of starting a cold or warm engine with the ALLISON transmission is the same as when starting
an engine with the manual gearbox TATRA, except for "N" to be shifted into with the Allison transmission
before starting.
Note:
If the shift selector lever is not in position N (neutral), the respective circuit will not allow to start the engine.
WARNING:
Be sure, that shift selector lever is in "N" position.
If the shift selector lever is in the "N" position, "N" is
shown at the display. If the shift selector lever is not in
the "N" position, “Select Neutral” is shown at the
display.
If the shift selector lever is not in the "N" position, the R
N
+
D M
engine start is prohibited. In this case, move the shift L
-
selector lever to position N, turn the key to position “0”

and repeat the starting procedure.
B 3012
5.6.2.1 CHECK TRANS transmission indicator lamp during engine starting
- After starting the engine indicator lamp 2 CHECK TRANS illuminates briefly for a bulb check.
After a few seconds it should turn off. If the indicator lamp 2 CHECK TRANS does not illuminate
briefly after the ignition is turned on, or if the indicator lamp 2 CHECK TRANS remains steadily on
after ignition and engine start, have the vehicle and transmission system checked by a qualified TATRA
TRUCKS technician.
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) monitors the transmission’s electronic controls; and when a problem
condition is detected, it:
- restricts shifting;
- illuminates the indicator lamp CHECK TRANS1) on the instrument panel;

- registers a diagnostic code.
Continued illumination of the indicator lamp CHECK TRANS during vehicle operation (other than
start-up) indicates that the Transmission Control Module has signaled a diagnostic code.
Note:
If the indicator lamp CHECK TRANS is steadily illuminated due to an active diagnostic code, the shift selector
blanks the SELECT and only shows a range the transmission has locked into in the MONITOR window of the
selector, seek immediate attention from a qualified Allison Transmission technician. Perform service as soon
as possible in order to minimize the potential for damage to the transmission or vehicle.
The transmission can be operated for a short time in the current attained range in order to get the vehicle to
a safe location for service assistance. If the vehicle engine is turned off, prepare for the possibility that at
1)Forsome problems, diagnostic codes may be registered without the TCM activating the CHECK TRANS light. Your
authorized TATRA TRUCKS service outlet should be consulted whenever there is a transmission-related concern. They
have the equipment to check for diagnostic codes and to correct problems.
Page 5-11
engine restart the transmission may be locked in N (Neutral) and will not accept operator requests to change
range if a diagnostic code that causes a CHECK TRANS light is active at time of engine restart.
Cold weather starting

Follow the normal starting procedure described in section 5.6.1.1 "Starting a cold engine".
At low temperatures, the engine may idle for longer but only until the control unit detects the specified
minimum oil pressure.
5.7 After starting the engine

- Immediately after starting the engine, check whether the
charging 19 , lubrication 20 indicator lamps 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
went out.
Do not operate the cold engine to high speed.
- Check engine oil pressure during the ride.
Under working temperature and speed 1,800 rpm, oil
pressure varies between 3 and 5 bar.
If the engine is cold, oil pressure may achieve even
greater values.
WARNING: B 3431
If the indicator lamp 20 lights up, it indicates

insufficient oil pressure in the engine lubrication system. If the pressure drops even with sufficient oil quantity
in the engine oil tank or if indicator lamp 20 lights up at higher engine speed, shut down the engine and
find a specialized repair shop TATRA TRUCKS for inspection.
Page 5-12
5.7.1 Engine speed control

The engine idle speed has been factory set to the value of
600 ± 50 rpm on the pump directly.
Use handle 1 to control the speed as follows:

- Turn counterclockwise to reduce speed to a preset value.
- Rotate clockwise to increase the speed.
Check the engine speed on the tachometer.
WARNING: 1 2
A 7407
To assure a safe vehicle´s operation, the engine idle
speed must not exceed 650 rpm to avoid the putting of the exhaust brake out of function.
The engine idle speed can also be controlled from the vehicle body/superstructure.
Note:
The vehicle is equipped with a secondary engine idle speed control.The engine speed control from the
body/superstructure is described in a separate publication; see the Body/Superstructure Operation Manual.
Long idling of the engine

Long idling of the engine (at idling speed) is not suitable for a proper engine function very much.
If the engine has been idling for a longer time, there are much more deposits (fuel and oil condensates) being
formed due to a low quality combustion process.
As a result, these condensates escape through connections of the exhaust manifold out of the engine. This is
a physical phenomenon.
These deposits partially disappear during next standard engine operation with higher loads and temperatures.
If the engine has been idling for a long time (approx. for a few hours), it is always recommended after approx.
5 hours to raise the engine idle speed to 2,100 rpm for 5 minutes in spite of using the engine in a
non-standard way.
5.7.2 Prior to move-off
After starting the engine you can leave the parking site only after both signal lamps 25 and 26
have gone out and after the audible warning indicating the insufficient air pressure in the brake circuits has
become quiet.
WARNING:
If there is a sufficient air pressure in the service brake circuit when starting the engine,
the 25 indicator lamp will light up and go out (indication of correct 25 lamp bulb condition).
If there is an insufficient air pressure in the service brake circuit when starting the engine,
then the indicator lamp 25 will light up and go out once the air circuit is pressurized properly.
Page 5-13
5.8 Engine shut-off

WARNING:
Allow the engine to idle for about 5 minutes after its extreme heat load before shutting it off. The
vehicle's engine is heat-loaded very much e.g. after a full-load operation while running a long or
a steep uphill.
- Park vehicle.
- Make sure the parking brake is engaged .
- Before stopping the engine, make sure the transmission
is in neutral N.
WARNING:
Before stopping the engine, always engage the parking
hand brake and put the gear shift controller to neutral.
- Shut off all lights and switches.
- Before turning off the engine after the operation, let the
B 3477
engine idle for about 5 minutes if it has previously been
run at full power or engine brake was applied. This allows
for cooling of pistons, bearing cylinders, tubes and the other engine components. The engine is loaded
hardly, for example, when climbing a long or steep hill loaded.
- Turn the key in the ignition box from I to 0 position to shut down the engine.
- If you need to stop engine shortly after the start, when
there is not enough pressure in the air system, you can
stop the engine by pulling the engine stop drawbar 2.
However, then turn the ignition key to the 0 position.
- After turning the ignition key to the "STOP" position, the
steering wheel locks and you can remove the key.
- Switch OFF the battery disconnector.
WARNING:
Do not stop a heated engine at the oil operating
temperature immediately after the end of driving. Let it 1 2
A 7407
run at idle for about 5 minutes to cool the engine down.
WARNING:
Page 5-14
5.8.1 Engine temperature during operation

The engine is equipped with the electronic cooling control that has the following functions on the move:
- It controls a function of the cooling system and maintains the optimum engine oil operating temperature in
relation to the cylinder heads temperature and the engine oil temperature.
- It indicates a malfunction in the electronic cooling system and when a defect occurs, it brings the engine
cooling system to the maximum output.
- It indicates the reaching of a limit safe temperature of cylinder units and should the driver not shift into
an appropriate gear while driving under rough terrain conditions, it reduces the engine power-output
by the reducing the fuel delivery.
A driver is informed about a correct function of the cooling

control and temperature engine regimes by two indicator 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
lamps 21 and 22 .
If the electronic cooling control works properly and the
engine and oil temperatures are within the permissible
range, the indicator lamps 21 and 22 do not
light during driving.
The engine control system is OK when the engine failure,

B 3431
engine overheating and engine preheating indicator lamps
flash briefly once the key in the ignation box is turned I
position.
21 - warning lamp for engine overheating

It lights up steadily if the permitted oil temperature is exceeded.
Slow blinking indicates exceeding the permissible cylinder head temperature.
Rapid flashing indicates exceeding the permissible cylinder head temperature and oil
temperature.
If this signaling occurs, gear down to change the driving mode. If the indicator light does not go out
after a few seconds, stop the vehicle, let the engine idle for about 5 minutes, turn off the engine,
wait until the engine cools down and check the engine oil level. Top up if needed. After cooling
down the engine, you can continue driving, checking the indicator light 21 while driving.
If it lights again, visit an authorized TATRA TRUCKS service.
22 - indicator lamp- engine failure

Indicates a serious engine failure by flashing. You can continue driving but make sure the
malfunction is repaired by an authorized TATRA TRUCKS service centre as soon as possible. In
some cases, the engine overheating warning lamp can flash or be lighting permanently at the same
time.
Indicates a serious engine failure by lighting steadily. You can continue driving with caution.
After completing the journey, visit an authorized TATRA TRUCKS service.
WARNING:
Allow the engine to idle for 5 minutes before shutting it off after a full-load operation. This prevents an
excessive heat build-up and allows an adequate cool-down for the engine components.
Page 5-15
Recommendation:
We recommend making the following steps after the engine 1 2 3 4
failure 22 indicator lamp:
- Put the ignition key to STOP position.
- Disconnect and fix inlet cable from connector "30" of the
starter leading to pre-heating contactor or disconnect the
cable eye from the contactor 2 and connect it under the
bolt nut 1, disconnect also the cable eye from the
contactor 3 and connect it under the bolt nut 4. B 2582

- Start the vehicle.
- Pass the vehicle to the nearest repair shop.
The reason for these measures is the protection of batteries from discharging when the pre-heating contactor
is blocked in the closed position.
5.8.2 Speed limiter

To increase the traffic safety as required by regulations in
respective countries, some vehicles engines are fitted with 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
the electronic speed limiter reducing an amount of the fuel 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
supplied to the engine after the speed of 85 km/h has been
achieved.
Be careful when overtaking in this speed range. After the
speed is reduced to a legal speed, the feedback control is
turned off automatically.
After turning the ignition key to position I, the speed limiter
indicator lamp 14 goes on.
B 3431
If the speed limiter system works properly, the indicator

lamp goes out after about 3 seconds.
If the indicator lamp lights permanently, there is a defect in the speed limiter system (a circuit of the speed
limiter proportional valve has been broken or short-circuited).
The WABCO limiter indicator lamp DOES NOT INDICATE exceeding of limited speed 85 km/h.
Indicator lamp illumination while driving indicates speed limiter system malfunction (tachograph speed signal
is missing).
Wabco speed limiter indicator lamp lights up fully.
When the indicator lamp illuminates during the ride, the limiter system needs to be repaired in an authorized
repair shop.
WARNING:
The driver is not allowed to make any adjustments to the speed limiter.
Note:
Where fitted. No engine power limitation applies to the vehicles listed in the relevant exceptions pursuant to
the Decree of the Ministry of Transport and Communications (e.g. Fire Brigade).
Page 5-16
5.9 Driving
Please note it is forbidden to gear to neutral when driving down the hill in accordance with the Public
Notice regarding on-road operation!
A failure to meet this rule may be hazardous to traffic users and results also to excessive wear to
transfer case synchronizer components, resulting in reduced reliability and guaranteed service life of
the vehicle.
It is permissible to shift into neutral only when approaching a vehicle, e.g. due to stop before
a crossing, at maximum speed up to 60 km/h.
5.9.1 Manual gearbox TATRA
5.9.1.1 Gear shifting in vehicles with in-built 14 TS 210 L or 14TS 180T transmission units*
C - crawler
Extremely slow vehicle operation in forward direction.
To be used under extreme off-road conditions, such as
driving away from a soft ground to an improved road,
"sinking" of the vehicle in unimproved terrain, etc. CL and
CH modes may be used.
If you drive C or reverse speeds, push to deviate the
gearshift lever to the left and overcome the selector plane
backstop.
Proceed in a similar way to select the 5th and 6th speeds,
move the gear shift lever to this level to overcome the
resistance of the 5-6 line (a shift in the auxiliary gearbox A 6398
occurs during the motion).

Except for C and reverse speeds, the remaining speeds are synchronized, which is why gear shifting should
be performed by flooring the clutch pedal just once.
Use intermediate throttle application when gearing down from the 1st to C speed during the ride.
The gearshift lever includes also a smaller preselector switch to engage the normal (High-H) or reduced range
(Low-L).
Change gears in time to keep the engine speed within the optimum range (1,100 - 1,500 rpm).
This driving mode will prolong the engine service life as the engine is enabled to achieve the maximum
torque.
To avoid pre-mature clutch wear, always engage the first speed (1L) when driving away under load.
Starting at higher gears will have detrimental effect to the clutch service life!
Select normal H or reduced L range using the pre-selector switch on the gearshift lever.
The pre-selected range will automatically be engaged upon the first clutch flooring.
When gearing down, never skip a speed.
Even when gearing down from 6H to 5L, there is a risk of exceeding of the maximum permitted speed,
i.e. 2,400 rpm, and subsequent damage.
Page 5-17
Gear shifting scheme on the gearshift lever

H - (High range) Normal constant mesh
L - (Low range) Reduced constant mesh
R - Reverse shift
C - (Crawler shift) Special slow forward speed
1 - 6 - First through sixth speed (in text marked 1 through
6)
- When shifting to a respective plane, the hand has
to overcome the spring or pneumatic resistance
applied to the gear shift lever
A 6398
Scheme of selector planes on the gear shift lever

1 - Gear selecting shift
2 - Neutral plane
3 - Arrested position
4 - Gear shifting in the transfer case
5 - Selecting plane
A 6569
The 14-speed transmission unit has different gear ratios and gear shifting system.
We recommend not using the customs obtained with 10-speed manual gearbox TATRA units.
WARNING:
- Basically, you do not engage each of the speeds indicated on the gearshift lever, you just pre-select
them. The shifting itself is effected pneumatically by the gearshift booster located on the gearbox.
You can feel in your hand that the gearshift lever overrides or pushes in certain shifts.
- The speeds engaged and neutral are mechanically arrested in their position.
- R and C gears are not synchronized in the transmission.
Recommendations
Having checked the air pressure, check the instrument (pressure gauge) on the dashboard and, before the
departure, test the auxiliary gearbox functioning by moving the gearshift lever in the selector shift (see Fig.
A 6569, text 4 - 5 speed and 5 - 4 speed).
Perform this gear shift inspection with the clutch pedal floored fully.
Operation under winter conditions, i.e. at temperatures -25°C and lower:
1. Gear to 5th and 6th speeds only after partial warm-up of the gearbox assembly by previous driving
about 15 minutes at other gears (R, C, 1, 2, 3 and 4).
2. Check the auxiliary gearbox function also after partial warm-up of gearbox assemblies by driving
according to previous point 1.
A failure to follow the recommendation mentioned above will result in increased wear of gearbox
synchronizer components and reduces reliability and guaranteed service life of your vehicle.
Page 5-18
Perform this test regularly, and contact an authorized repair shop in case of any change in the functioning.
When changing gears 4-5 and 5-4, two gear shifts are performed in the gearbox unit subsequently.
To assure correct gearing and so achieve the required service life and reliability of the gearbox unit, it is
necessary to perform the subsequent gearing after the previous one is completed.
To avoid mistakes or incorrect gear shifting, the gearbox unit is equipped with pneumatic blocking to prevent
you from gear shifting (5 when gearing up and 4 when gearing down), if gearing in the auxiliary gearbox has
not been completed yet. However, it is possible to disengage the speed engaged previously.
If incorrect handling with the gear shift lever results in gearing blockage, i.e. required sped cannot be
engaged, override the blockage by moving the gear shift lever in the entire selector shift (see Fig. A 6569),
with the clutch pedal floored. If needed, perform this operation repeatedly until releasing. At the same time,
always check the air pressure on the pressure gauge on the dashboard.
The required minimum value is 7 bars.
Operation conditions:
- Floor the clutch pedal upon every gearing fully.
- When gearing down, never skip a speed to avoid excessive engine speed and subsequent damage.
H - L RANGES
H and L gears ensure so-called "halving" of individual gears engaged.
There is no neutral position.
The ranges between the gears are "finer".
The combinations of gears CL through 6H can be used to achieve 14 forward speeds and 2 reverse speeds
(RL and RH).
No gear shifting occurs at the moment of selecting.
The shifting will perform automatically only when the clutch pedal is floored fully.
H range
Shift the small selector lever on the gear shift lever to the left.
L range
Select L range in similar way, just shift the small lever to the right to L position.
Gearing UP using H and L ranges:
CL - CH; 1L - 1H; 2L - 2H; 3L - 3H; 4L - 4H; 5L - 5H; 6L - 6H
Change gears down as follows:

6H - 6L; 5H - 5L; 4H - 4L; 3H - 3L; 2H - 2L; 1H - 1L; CH - CL
Up gears - moving off from the 1st speed

Shifting the 1st gear
The 1st speed has been designed to move off the vehicle
or a vehicle combination in common traffic under standard
climatic conditions.
The basic position of the gearshift lever (neutral) is in the
plane between 3/4 speeds. Floor the clutch pedal. Shift the
gear shift lever to 1/2 plane.
Shift forward to gear 1.
At the same time, release the clutch pedal and step on gas
as required. A 6554
Page 5-19
Gears 1 - 2
Floor the clutch pedal.
When you are in 1 and wish to gear 2, pull the lever straight
backward to disengage 1 and gear 2.
Release the clutch pedal.
WARNING:
Do not release the lever, it will shift to 3/4 plane
automatically.
A 6555
Gears 2 - 3
Shift the lever forward slightly to disengage 2.
Shift the gear shift lever to 3/4 plane.
The lever induces itself into neutral.
A 6556
Gears 3 - 4
backward to disengage 3 and gear 4.
A 6557
Gears 4 - 5
Shift the lever forward slightly to disengage 4, the lever is in
the neutral plane. Shift the gear shift lever to 5/6 plane.
The lever will resist slightly during this movement.
Overcoming this resistance you just gear in the auxiliary
gearbox.
At this moment, the shifting is accompanied with
"significant characteristic sound".
The gear shifting in the main gearbox unit is blocked at the

A 6558
moment when shifting in the auxiliary gearbox takes place.
Page 5-20
Be consistent when shifting to 5/6 plane and push the lever to the extreme position.
Wait with further movement long enough, wait for the "characteristic sound" and continue only afterwards!
The combination of the mechanical-pneumatic gear shifting with blocking always represents a time delay,
however, it is not greater than a half second in total.
Push the gearshift lever from a side permanently and shift forward simultaneously to go into 5.
Gears 5 - 6
Push the gearshift lever from a side permanently and pull
the lever backward to disengage 5 and gear in 6.
Do not relieve lateral hand pressure to the gearshift
lever to avoid spontaneous "disengaging" of 5/6 plane
(transfer case shifts), resulting in gearing down to 4.
A 6559
Up gears - moving off from C speed

Shifting the C gear
The C speed has been designed to move off the vehicle or
a vehicle combination in extremely heavy operation or to
use intentionally slow speed.
The C gear is not synchronized.
plane between 3/4 speeds.
Shift the gear shift lever to R/C plane.
The lever will resist you slightly (nothing is initiated here,
A 6560
you are just warned of potential change in the vehicle
operation, possible going into reverse).
Push the gearshift lever from a side permanently and shift backwards simultaneously to gear C.
WARNING:
You can go into reverse by shifting the lever forward.
C - 1 speed
Shift the lever forward slightly to disengage C.
WARNING:
Do not release the lever, it will shift to 3/4 plane
automatically.
Shift the other gears in the same way as described in the A 6561
text above.
Page 5-21
DOWN gears
Gears 6 - 5
Push the gearshift lever from a side permanently and pull
the lever straight forward to disengage 6 and gear in 5.
Do not relieve lateral hand pressure to the gearshift
lever to avoid spontaneous "disengaging" of 5/6 plane
(transfer case shifts), resulting in gearing down to 3.
A 6562
Gears 5 - 4
Pull the lever backwards slightly to disengage 5, the lever
will automatically shift to 3/4 plane.
Shifting in the transfer case occurs again during this
movement.
At this moment, the shifting is accompanied with
"significant characteristic sound".
The gear shifting in the main gearbox unit is blocked at the
moment when shifting in the transfer case takes place.
A 6563
Wait with further movement long enough, wait for the
"characteristic sound" and continue only afterwards!
Pull the lever backwards to gear 4.
Gears 4 - 3
forward to disengage 4 and gear 3.
A 6564
Page 5-22
Gears 3 - 2
Shift the lever backward slightly to disengage 3.
Shift backward to gear 2.
A 6565
Gears 2 - 1
forward to disengage 2 and gear 1.
A 6566
1 - C speed
Shift the lever backward slightly to disengage 1.
Engage the power train shortly and disengage again
(double-clutch)
Push the gearshift lever from a side permanently and shift
backwards simultaneously to gear C.
Release the clutch pedal..
A 6567
Reverse gear (R)

Select R gear when the vehicle is at standstill.
The R gear is not synchronized.
plane between 3/4 speeds. Floor the clutch pedal.
Push the gearshift lever from a side permanently and shift
forward simultaneously to go into reverse.
A 6568
Page 5-23
5.9.2 TATRA semi-automatic transmission - NORGREN gear shifting
5.9.2.1 Introduction
This system substitutes manual gearshifting on 14-speed manual gearbox TATRAs with electro-pneumatic
system.
The clutch is still connected with the mechanical linkage and actuated by the driver.
The driver has a feedback on the gear shifting performed.
The system permanently monitors velocity, engine speed and current gear engaged.
Based on this data and the gear ratio table, the system evaluates the driving mode and offers appropriate
gear ratios to the driver.
The system also checks the engine speed conformity with the vehicle speed and correct gear engaged.
At low velocity (C, R) the engine speed is used to assess a driving mode. The system blocks preselection of
gear ratios where maximum engine speed would be exceeded after clutch release.
These critical states are indicated acoustically.
The system allows for switching to an emergency state, which allows limited gear shifting without using the
central control unit.
C - (Crawler shift) - special slow forward speed

Extremely slow vehicle operation in forward direction. To be used under extreme off-road conditions, such
as driving away from a soft ground to an improved road, "sinking" of the vehicle in unimproved terrain, etc.
CL and CH modes may be used.
R - (Reverse shift)
Individual system elements:

- LCD display, gearshift lever, emergency gear selector, control unit, actuator (a set of pneumatic cylinders),
blocking valve and valve block.
CAUTION FOR DRIVING WITH THE NORGREN GEAR SHIFTING:

Please note it is forbidden to gear to neutral when driving down the hill in accordance with the Public
Notice regarding on-road operation!
A failure to meet this rule may be hazardous to traffic users and results also to excessive wear to the
transfer case synchronizer components, resulting in reduced reliability and guaranteed service life of
the vehicle.
Shifting into neutral is allowed only when the vehicle is coasting, e.g. to stop before a crossing.
When shifting gears at low speed, it is necessary to depress the clutch pedal and then push the shift
controller forward and hold it for about 1 second.
f there is not enough air pressure in the air system, do not tamper with the shift controller.
The gear shifting system might lock. The shift controller can only be operated after filling up the air
system to the operating pressure (until an audible blow-off sound of the air pressure regulator).
CAUTION FOR DRIVING WITH THE EMERGENCY NORGREN GEAR SHIFT CONTROLLER:
When not shifting gears while driving, do not place your hand on the emergency shift controller.
Touching might result in switching into the emergency (Fail-Safe) mode, which could cause damage
to the Norgren system, or overspeeding.
In the event of a transmission fault, where the fault cannot be identified, the emergency (fail-safe) gear
shift controller must be used. Use extreme caution when starting the vehicle in the emergency mode
(display and safety features are not working).
Page 5-24
5.9.2.2 LCD display

LCD display 8 is located on the main instrument panel.
Description
It's a monochrome graphic panel with adjustable
3 4 1 5 6
brightness.
It informs the driver about the current gear engaged, 2 7
the gear that will follow, the progress and completion of
gear shifting and, where applicable, about other monitored
values. 8
B 3430
Description of displayed fields

1 - BUTTON toggles into a menu.
1 2 3 4 5 6
In the shown menu it is used to scroll the
cursor up.
7
M 3L 2H
2 - MODE active mode (M/AE/AM/AP/AS/M/MB) - N + +
displays the currently selected driving
mode. !
3 - PRESELECTION preselected speed - displays the

offered or selected gear. 11 10 9 8
The gear to be engaged after depressing
the clutch. The preselection is not
B 2753
displayed while driving in automatic
modes. If ++ is lit above the preselection symbol,
the switch selects the two-step shift mode on the gearshift lever.
4 - MENU up and down arrows determine whether a higher or lower gear will be shifter into. One arrow
represents a half gear (by one step), two arrows represent the whole gear shift (i.e. two
steps). If "!" symbol is lit in the box, gear shifting is suspended due to a high vehicle speed.
While driving in the automatic mode, the gear-shift menu is displayed using the arrows, the
preselection does not appear in this case.
5 - ENGAGED engaged speed - displays the currently engaged gear.
6 - BUTTON toggles to the menu, serves as the ESCAPE button in the menu.
7 - Display brightness control photoresistor - controls brightness automatically between the preset min.
value and maximum in relation to illumination.
8 - BUTTON toggles to the menu, serves as the ENTER button in the menu.
9 - Fault this symbol is lit when a fault is active (see Section 5.9.3.8 "Fault conditions").
10 - PTO this symbol is lit while the PTO is on.
11 - BUTTON toggles into a menu. In the shown menu it is used to scroll the cursor down.
Page 5-25
Acoustic alarms (buzzer):
- A short beep and arrow or arrows (4) turned off indicate that gear shifting is completed and the
clutch pedal can be released.
- Symbol turned ON during gear shifting indicates early releasing of clutch pedal, earlier than gear
shifting sequence has been completed.
In such a case, clutch pedal needs to be depressed and gear shifting completion must be allowed.
- Permanent beep (buzzer on) while an error message is displayed indicates a failure and description is
displayed in the information line.
Symbol ! comes on at the same time.
If the fault persists for longer than 5 seconds, the display switches to the operating view and symbol
displays in the symbol column ! .
If the fault causes a failure to shift into a gear, STOP symbol appears and EMERGENCY GEAR SHIFT
CONTROLLER must be used. A sound alarm will start if in the neutral gear when the engine is being turned
off.
5.9.2.3 Gear shift controller

The gear shift controller is located on the gear shift panel.
A
Description
The gear shift controller is used for gear preselection and
change, and for gear-shift mode selection. The gear shift
N
controller is a single-axis controller with a central
Driving
arrestment and detection of the both extreme positions. direction
The control lever handle is equipped with N and A/M side
buttons and the front two-position preselection switch.
Button N is always positioned so that it can be controlled by
your right thumb (left hand steering).
B 2776
Control
A/M button - right button - mode selection (M/AE/AM/AP/AS/M), ), each time the button is pushed,
respective gear shift modes are switched cyclically, the current mode is shown on the gear
shift LCD display
N button - left button - neutral selection (N), press the button to select neutral (clutch depressed)
preselection + - move forward - gear up selection, move the lever forward to select a higher gear
preselection - - move rearward - gear down selection, move the lever back to select a lower gear
Page 5-26
Presection switch
The preselection switch 1 located in the front on the gear 2
shift controller 2 can be used in all modes. 1
- If the switch is in position 0 (towards the passenger),
then move the gear shift controller (forward or backward)
to change the preselection in half-speed steps.
- If the switch is in position I (towards the driver), then
move the gear shift controller (forward or backward) to
change the preselection in full-speed steps.
B 2777
When you switch to position 0 (to the passenger) only one

arrow symbol is displayed on the LCD.
One arrow represents a half gear, i.e. one step.
2H
N
!
When you switch to position I (to the driver) two arrow 123 456 3L
symbols will be displayed on the LCD.
Two arrows represent one full gear, i.e. two steps.
B 2755
5.9.2.4 Emergency gear shift controller

The emergency system consists of a button panel and
respective electrical circuit controlling the air valves.
The emergency system shall be used in case of a serious 1
failure to the main control unit or important peripherals.
For more about the use of emergency gear shift controller
refer to the chapter 5.9.3.3: “Emergency gear shift 2
controller”.
B 2756
Page 5-27
5.9.2.5 Gearshift operation

Use the right button on the gear shift controller to switch over. Each time you press the button, the gear shift
modes cyclically switch over, with the current mode displayed.
The system operates in either manual or one of automatic modes:
a) Manual mode M
b) Automatic mode AE
c) Automatic mode AM
d) Automatic mode AP
e) Special mode AS
f) Engine brake mode MB
Current mode is indicated on the LCD display by a respective letter (M, AE, AP, AM, AS, MB).
To select a mode (in stationary or moving vehicle), press the left button (A/M) on the gear shift controller
without depressing the clutch pedal.
Change is cyclical, i.e. M_AE _ AP _ AM _AS_M.
You can also get to M mode from any mode by pressing A/M button for 0.8 s.
The special mode AS is only available with the vehicle at standstill.
The engine brake MB mode is enabled automatically with the engine brake turned on.
From a safe driving point of view always make sure to check the engaged gear on the display because if
shifting has not been completed for any reason, this information appears only on the display.
Note:
It is up to the driver to choose an appropriate moment to change gear with respect to engine speed and
driving conditions.
Page 5-28
5.9.2.6 Manual mode (M)

The manual mode enables you to engage any gear.
Transmission protections are active only:
- maximum permissible engine speed;
- R and C can only be engaged if vehicle speed is 3 km/h
MN N
always, through the neutral (N). +
After engine start (in neutral), the following will show up on
driver's LCD display (left to right) MODE, PRESELECTED
SPEED, ENGAGED SPEED, i.e. in this case M, N, N.
Select a driveway speed after the clutch pedal is
depressed, by moving the controller lever forward (even
repeatedly if necessary), until an appropriate speed is B 2757
engaged.
1L will show up first, if you want to select CL, CH, move the controller lever once or twice backward
respectively. The last driveway speed selected is stored in memory after moving off, and it is then offered as
the first driveway speed upon the next start.
Two driving options are possible in M mode:

The first method is basically a standard gear shifting procedure without preselection, which means that
the clutch pedal is depressed first, then another gear is selected by moving the
controller lever. Release the clutch pedal once a gear is engaged.
The second method is based on the possibility of next gear preselection.
First, move the controller lever to preselect the desired gear and, at the appropriate
moment, depress the clutch pedal to initiate gear shifting.
A preselected gear remains preselected for about 10 s (120 s at standstill) and then
currently engaged gear is recorded in the preselection.
Preselection will work neither up nor down.
The gear which would result in engine overspeed will not be engaged, exclamation
mark will be displayed and the system waits for the vehicle to slow down.
Shifting neutral (N)

You can shift to neutral from any speed by pressing the right button N on the controller handle while holding
the clutch pedal depressed. N preselection is not possible.
With the clutch pedal depressed, while holding the controller lever in the front position, the system will
calculate and select an appropriate gear based on the ground speed.
With neutral N engaged from the speeds CL to 4H, if the vehicle speed exceeds about 60 km/h, the transfer
case will automatically shift to the high range, otherwise the transmission critical speed would be exceeded as
a result.
With neutral N engaged from the speeds 5L to 6H, the vehicle speed drops below about 20 km/h, the transfer
case will automatically shift to the low range.
Shifting the reverse gear (R)

The reverse gear (R) is the only speed that cannot be preselected, it must be shifted from neutral using the
first (classical) method with the clutch pedal depressed.
To shift into reverse, the vehicle must be at a standstill, in neutral and clutch must be depressed.
Release the clutch pedal once the reverse speed is engaged.
Page 5-29
5.9.2.7 Automatic mode

For automatic speed preselection, switch to A mode and set the automatic mode.
In all A/T modes, preselection can always be corrected manually by ± 1 by moving the gear shift controller
lever.
The mode remains selected.
Automatic modes:
a) Automatic mode AE
The automatic mode AE has been designed for normal
AE N N
vehicle operation - appropriate for driving away on a +
level ground, or drive away with empty vehicle and
empty trailer.
After engine start (transmission in neutral), the following
will show up on driver's LCD display (left to right) MODE,
PRESELECTED SPEED, ENGAGED SPEED, i.e. in this
case AE, N, N. B 2758
A driveway speed can be preselected (after depressing the

clutch pedal) by moving the controller lever forward (even repeatedly if necessary), until an appropriate speed
is engaged.
1L will show up first, if you want to select CL or CH, move the controller lever once or twice backward
respectively.
The last driveway speed selected is stored in memory after moving off, and it is then offered as the first
driveway speed upon the next start.
After a drive away, more speeds will begin to be offered in the preselection, where the speeds offered are
within the range -2/+2, i.e. two gears up or down by a half speed, or a gear down or up in full speeds
respectively. For example, from 2H speed, the system can offer 1H, 2L, 3L or 3H speeds, depending on the
current vehicle speed.
A preselected gear can be corrected by moving the gear shift controller lever forward (i.e. gear up) with no
limits, or backward (gear down) only up to the gear where engine overspeeding is prevented.
Shifting into a preselected gear is initiated when the driver presses the clutch pedal.
Once a gear is engaged, the driver should release the clutch pedal as quickly as possible, otherwise the next
gear shifting could be initiated.
A preselected gear is indicated by "start" on LCD display. Once the clutch is depressed and a respective gear
is engaged, the text "start" will turn off.
The cut-in speed is set to 1,200 rpm to shift down a half gear and to 900 rpm to shift down the whole gear.
The cut-in speed is set to 1,300 rpm to shift up a half gear and to 1,600 rpm to shift up the whole gear.
Use N button to shift into neutral both at a standstill and while driving. For a moving vehicle with gear in
neutral, the optimal gear corresponding to the current vehicle speed is always offered in the preselection.
When in neutral N and declutched, automatic preselections are not offered.
When slowing the vehicle and with the clutch pedal depressed, the system gradually, every 2 s, shifts into
a lower gear.
When accelerating the vehicle and with the clutch pedal depressed, the system gradually, every 2 s, shifts into
a higher gear.
Page 5-30
b) Automatic mode AM
The automatic mode AM is designed for driving up to
a hill, as well as for rough ground operation with
loaded vehicle and trailer.
AMN N
+
Behaves similarly to AE mode, with the only difference: the
cut-in speed is set to 1,400 rpm to shift down a half gear
and to 1,100 rpm to gear down the whole gear and 1,500
rpm to gear up a half gear and 1,800 rpm to gear up the
whole gear.
B 2759
c) Automatic mode AP
Automatic mode AP is appropriate for driving in rough
ground and heavy terrain (mud, sand, deep snow) with
loaded vehicle and trailer.
AP N N
+
Behaves similarly to AE mode, with the only difference: the
cut-in speed is set to 1,600 rpm to shift down a half gear
and to 1,300 rpm to gear down the whole gear and 1,700
rpm to gear up a half gear and 2,000 rpm to gear up the
whole gear.
B 2760
This mode does not offer gearing up by more than 1/2 gear.
d) Special mode AS
This mode is suitable for rocking the vehicle when
stuck in a difficult terrain, This means that it is
designed for slow maneuvering back and forth.
AS N N
This is a manual mode, where a gear is shifted after +
depressing the clutch pedal, just like using a normal gear
shift lever.
WARNING:
The AS mode can only be selected on a standing
vehicle using the A/M button.
B 2761
Unlike all other modes, this mode allows, with the clutch
pedal depressed, direct shifting from the forward gear 1H (1L) to the reverse gear RH (RL) (and vice versa) by
moving the gear shift controller lever forward and backward without the need to shift into neutral N.
The system waits only for vehicle slowing down below 3 km/h (when shifting reverse R); can act immediately
when shifting into a forward gear 1H(1L). When engine speed about 2,000 rpm (at 1H) is exceeded, the
system automatically switches to the manual mode M.
The A/M button can be used to switch to any mode.
Page 5-31
e) Engine brake mode MB

Activated automatically when the engine brake is
turned on.
The MB symbol on the display indicates the mode
MBN N
activated. +
Deactivated automatically when the engine brake is turned
off, by switching to the previous active mode.
When the MB mode is active, gears a half speed down
when the engine speed drops below 1,500 rpm and shifts
1/2 gear up when the engine speed exceeds 2,000 rpm.
Can neither be selected nor cancelled using B 2762
the A/M button.
5.9.3 Main user menu options

The following will then display in the main user menu:
- DIAGNOSTICS - reading and deleting the error message registry;
- CALIBRATION - system calibration;
- SETUP - display brightness; language selection; control unit and display info;
- BACK
Use 1 and 11 buttons to browse in the main menu and submenus. Press 8 (ENTER) button to confirm the
menu. If you want to go back one step, press 6 (ESC).
Access to the menu is enabled as follows:

a) with the engine started
1 2 3 4 5 6
1. turn the ignition OFF and wait until the LCD display
turns off;
7
M 3L 2H
2. turn the key in the ignition switch to position I; N + +
3. press any button 1, 6, 8 or 11 on the LCD display for !

about 2-3 seconds. The MENU appears.
11 10 9 8
b) before starting the engine
1. turn the key in the ignition switch to position I. B 2753
2. press any button 1, 6, 8 or 11 on the LCD display for

about 2-3 seconds.
The MENU appears.
Page 5-32
DIAGNOSTICS menu
The first item in the user menu - DIAGNOSTICS submenu.
Press 8 (ENTER) button A/M to display the error message
registry reading menu - FAULTS.
Here you can read and subsequently delete the error DIAGNOSTICS ESC
message registry. calibration
setup
Use 1 and 11 button to browse between individual back
messages.
Browsing takes place in cycles, i.e. from the last failure to
the first one.
B 2763
Error message display

Any error is displayed as a 6-digit number.
In the event of error/fault, immediately call an authorized

TATRA TRUCKS repair shop. SPN FMI CNT ESC
B 2764
CALIBRATION menu
This menu shows the option to perform gear-shift system
calibration.
In case of any intervention in the sensors (replacement, diagnostics ESC

installation and removal), wiring, control unit, mechanical CALIBRATION
parts of the actuator, transmission, auxiliary transmission setup
back
and setting thereof, the system calibration is required. The
calibration means new setting of limit values of linear
switches for all speed gears, including the auxiliary
transmission and hub reduction gear.
The system calibration should only be performed by an B 2765
authorized TATRA TRUCKS repair shop.
The gear-shift system calibration is conditioned with

a stationary vehicle, neutral gear and the clutch pedal
depressed throughout calibration.
ESC
CALIBRATION RUN?
B 2766
Page 5-33
ESC
CALIBRATION
ACTIVE
B 2767
ESC
CALIBRATION
OK
B 2930
SETUP menu
This menu contains four submenus:
- brightness
- language
- info diagnostics ESC
calibration
- back SETUP
back
B 2768
BRIGHTNESS submenu
Used to control the light intensity of the gear-shift display.
To change the basic display brightness, press 1 or 11
buttons to confirm and press the button repeatedly to
change LCD display brightness in cycles.
BRIGHTNESS ESC
Once the required level is preset, press 7 (ENTER) button language
to return to the main menu. info
back
Control:
Up Arrow - intensity increases
Down Arrow - intensity decreases
B 2769
8 (ENTER) button on the display - confirmation
Page 5-34
LANGUAGE submenu
Use 1 or 11 button on the display to select the language.
Press 8 (ENTER) button to confirm.
brightness ESC
LANGUAGE
info
back
B 2771
Language selection:
first language - Czech
second language - English
CESKY ESC
english
B 2772
INFO submenu
Here the information on unit version and display is obtained
(information for TATRA authorized repair shop).
brightness ESC
language
INFO
back
B 2773
BACK submenu
After confirming this menu by pressing 8 (ENTER) button,
go back to the main menu.
diagnostics ESC
calibration
setup
BACK
B 2775
Page 5-35
5.9.3.1 Fault conditions

Operation with fault
Once the system detects a fault, the operational display
changes to the display with the fault (see Fig. B 2778).
A 6-digit fault code displays under the symbol ! .
2H
N
!
123 456 3L
B 2778
After 5 seconds the display will return to the operational

status and the fault is also indicated by a fault symbol in the
left column. If more than one fault is currently active,
message ">1DTC" displays under the symbol.
M 3L 2H
N
WARNING:
If any of the error codes (failure) is indicated !
permanently, contact an authorized service to remove
defect/malfunction as soon as possible.
B 2725
HIGH SPEED
High ground speed - this state is reported if a gear which may result in engine overspeed is preselected.
This situation occurs, for example, when speeding up driving down the slope.
To resolve this, slow down or change the preselection.
During the failure occurrence, shifting into an inappropriate gear is prevented (lock-up).
WARNING:
After replacement of any system components (sensor, actuator, transmission, etc) or if the system
shows recurring failures, contact a specialized TATRA TRUCKS repair shop to perform CALIBRATION.
WARNING:
In general, if you fail to change gear correctly or if the system behaves unexpectedly, press "N"
neutral button with clutch depressed, the system should through out of gear and operate further
correctly.
If not, use the EMERGENCY GEAR SHIFT CONTROLLER - see chapter 5.9.3.3
Page 5-36
5.9.3.2 Fail-safe function

The fail-safe mode is used for the required vehicle driving
when a serious failure to the main control unit occurs.
The emergency gear shift controller can be used in 1
situations when the system shows any failures preventing
from normal operation (e.g. serious failures to the main
control unit). 2
Emergency gear shift controller

Description
Emergency gear shift controller 2 consists of a control
panel with eight buttons. It is situated on the gearshift
B 2756
panel. Proper functioning of the emergency gear
shifting is conditioned with a sufficient air pressure in
the system and the electrical power supply. All emergency gear shift control must be carried out with the
clutch pedal depressed. When shifting without a clutch pedal or with a mechanical failure in the transmission,
there is the risk of a gear shifting failure and extreme cases may result in damage to the transmission.
The emergency gear shift controller does not use any information on the shift cylinder positions. Switches only
pneumatic valves in the specified order, trying to shift into a gear even with otherwise inoperable electronics.
Shifting into a gear is not controlled, therefore releasing the clutch and driving must be performed with the
utmost attention. The emergency gear shift controller allows shifting into NL, NH, R, 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Control
Activation
- Stop and brake the vehicle. R
- Depressed clutch pedal.
a) Emergency gear shift controller (version 1)
- To enable the emergency gear shift controller, press
3 NH 4
the touch switch for about 2 seconds. When the
emergency gear shifting is activated, the LED on the 1 NL 2
touch switch turns on. B 2754
b) Emergency gear shift controller (version 2)

- To enable the emergency gear shifting, simultaneously
press the touch switches OFF and NH for about R ON OFF
2 seconds. Once the emergency gear shifting is
enabled, the LED on the touch switch OFF will light up 3 NH 4
and HL low range shifts into neutral.
Note:
When the emergency gear shift controller is enabled, the 1 NL 2
transmission control unit is disabled, which results in the
B 3765
gear shift display turning off, and the gear shift controller
deactivates.
- Release the clutch pedal very carefully.
Page 5-37
Note:
If the transmission shows a mechanical failure, the vehicle may roll away.
Deactivion
- Stop and brake the vehicle.
- Depress the clutch pedal.
- Press the touch switch OFF (or ) and hold it for approx. 5 seconds before a beep sounds.
All LEDs on the emergency controller turn off. Gear shifting will switch to the normal mode.
- Release the touch switches OFF (or ).
Note:
Turning off reactivates the transmission electronics, resulting in gear shifting display illumination and gear shift
controller activation.
Gear shifting and driving

- Depress the clutch pedal.
- Press the touch switch of the selected gear. The respective LED flashes during gear shifting, lighting
permanently once completed.
- Carefully release the clutch pedal to bring the vehicle into motion or continue driving in the new gear.
To select or change a speed range, press the neutral button of the desired NL range (low range) or NH (high
range) before shifting into the selected gear.
Note:
- When shifting gears, always depress the clutch pedal.
- Please bear in mind that the transmission may show a mechanical failure and therefore will not shift into
some gears.
- Always make sure to handle the clutch pedal knowing that the vehicle may move even while shifting into
neutral.
- The LED on the emergency gear shift controller is only indicative and not a guarantee that the selected gear
is actually engaged.
- Individual gears can be shifted as required, the emergency gear shifting controller actuator electronics will
shift into neutral during shifting.
- The L/H range, selected via the NL/NH touch switch, remains unchanged for the next gear unless changed
again.
- Shifting gears is impossible unless there is sufficient air pressure in the system.
CAUTION!
The reverse gear can be shifted only through neutral when the vehicle is stationary!
CAUTION!!!
- Emergency gear shifting must always be enabled or disabled when the vehicle is stationary!
- Uncontrolled movement of the vehicle may occur at any time!
- The activation, deactivation and emergency gear shifting must always be performed with the clutch
pedal depressed, otherwise the system will not shift into the required gear, although the button
indicates otherwise!
- The engaged gear is not indicated on the display, only on the controller panel by the illuminated
LEDs at the respective touch switches!
- Make sure to release the clutch pedal carefully, as the transmission could have shifted into a
different speed than indicated!
Page 5-38
- The transmission may show a mechanical failure, which in extreme cases can lead to the
transmission being blocked!
THE EMERGENCY GEAR SHIFTING CONTROLLER IS NOT INTENDED FOR NORMAL DRIVING, ONLY
FOR "LIMPING HOME" TO A SAFE PLACE! THEREFORE, THE MAXIMUM VEHICLE SPEED SHOULD
BE ADJUSTED TO ALLOW THE VEHICLE TO SAFELY STOP EVEN WITH A SHIFTING FAILURE!
Page 5-39
5.9.4 Automatic transmission ALLISON*
5.9.4.1 Introduction
The Allison 3000/4000 series automatic transmission is fully electronically controlled. The automatic
transmission has 5 or 6 forward gears, depending on the vehicle configuration, and 1 reverse gear.
The operation takes place via the shift selector lever.

The shift selector lever has a display located next to the
driver's seat and replaces the gear lever on manual
gearboxes.
The selector has the following functions:

R +
- engaging and disengaging the transmission; N

D M
L
- choosing a shift program; -
- display of fault codes.
B 3012
5.9.4.2 Shift selector lever

Your vehicle TATRA FORCE is equipped with an controls with Prognostics shift selector lever.
The shift selector lever is an electromechanical control that has three locked positions to prevent accidentally
selecting R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive).
Shift selector lever positions are:

- R (Reverse) - reverse
- N (Neutral) - Neutral position
- D (Drive) - Driving forward with automatic gear shifting
- L (Low range) - Driving forward at the lowest possible gear
- M (Manual select) - Driving forward with manual shifting into higher and lower gears
Functions of a shift selector lever with prognostics

1
1 - HOLD OVERRIDE BUTTON
SWITCH HOLD BUTTON 2
2 - TRANSMISSION SHIFT SELECTOR LEVER 3
3 - GEARSHIFT PANEL 4
4 - MODE BUTTON (MODE) 5 R
N
+
6
M
5 - DIGITAL DISPLAY D
L
-
6 - SELECTION DISPLAY (SELECT) 7

7 - TRANS SERVICE INDICATOR (WRENCH ICON) 8
8 - MONITOR DISPLAY
9
9 - DIAGNOSTICS BUTTON B 2900
Page 5-40
a) Prognostics shift selector levers components and functions

1 - HOLD OVERRIDE BUTTON
The hold override button is a finger-controlled button integrated into the top and front side of the shift
selector lever knob.
This button uses a detent feature with three locked positions to prevent accidental range selection.
Press the hold override button to release the detent and move the lever from the locked position.
Once D (Drive) is selected, lower forward range positions may be selected without pressing the HOLD
OVERRIDE button.
2 - TRANSMISSION SHIFT SELECTOR LEVER
3 - GEARSHIFT PANEL
4 - MODE BUTTON
Allison automatics offer primary and secondary shift schedule modes to enhance
performance or fuel economy.
The vehicle always defaults to the primary mode (MODE is not shown on graphic
display).
If equipped as such you can switch to the secondary mode by pushing the MODE
button (MODE is shown on graphic display).
The MODE button is located on the bezel face of the shift selector lever.
The button can be pressed anytime after engine start to activate the alternate shift schedule or special
function.
The MODE button preforms the following functions:
- Activates a special function programmed into the Transmission Control Module (TCM), which is
typically an alternate ECONOMY or PERFORMANCE shift schedule;
- toggles to the next Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) while in Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) display
mode;
- Clears (erases) active and inactive DTCs from TCM memory.
Note:
Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) cannot be cleared individually. All active DTCs clear first, followed by the
inactive (historic) DTCs, provided the MODE button is pressed long enough while in the DTC display mode.
5 - DIGITAL DISPLAY
A two character vacuum fluorescent bluegreen display is included on the face (SELECT/MONITOR) of
each shift selector lever.
6 - SELECTION DISPLAY (SELECT)

The upper character, called the SELECT display appropriately designates N (Neutral), R (Reverse), or the
highest gear available of the selected forward range.
7- TRANS SERVICE INDICATOR (WRENCH ICON)

(This indicator is only functional if prognostics are enabled in the TCM controls calibration)
The TRANS SERVICE (WRENCH ICON) indicator illuminates in the event a service condition relating to
a transmission clutch, fluid or filter life occurs.
The TRANS SERVICE (WRENCH ICON) indicator is located between the SELECT and MONITOR
displays on the shift selector display.
Page 5-41
8 - MONITOR DISPLAY
The lower character of the display, called the MONITOR display, designates the actual gear being.
The display of any other character in the SELECT or MONITOR display denotes a nonstandard operating
condition.
9 - DIAGNOSTICS BUTTON
The diagnostics button, when pressed, allows access to fluid level information, prognostics information,
and DTC information, depending on how many times it was pressed.
b) Backlighting
During normal vehicle operation, backlighting is provided for the range legend strip on the shift selector lever.
The digital (range) display, the MODE and RANGE buttons are illuminated on the shift selector levers.
The brightness of both is adjusted automatically, depending upon the brightness setting of the dash dimmer
switch.
Note:
Therefore, the shift selector backlighting and dimmer are functional only when both the headlights and the
ignition are turned on.
When the headlamps and dimmer are turned off, daylight conditions are assumed and the selector lighting is
restored to full brightness.
c) Selector display description for active DTCS and inhibits

RANGE SELECT blank:
With an active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC), the SELECT display on the shift selector is blank.
The MONITOR display indicates the range in which the transmission is locked.
The CHECK TRANS light is also activated.
RANGE SELECT flashing:

The flashing display indicates a requested shift is either temporarily or permanently inhibited.
The inhibit may clear if the cause of the inhibit clears within 3 seconds of the shift request.
Otherwise, the operator must reselect the desired range.
WRENCH ICON illuminated:

This indicator is only functional if prognostics are enabled in the TCM controls calibration.
This indicator is illuminated upon the detection of a service issue relating to clutch, filter, or fluid life.
The appearance of the indicator (lit steadily or flashing) varies for each of the conditions monitored by the
system.
All Segments illuminated:

If all segments of the display are on for more than 12 seconds, the Transmission Control Module (TCM) has
not completed initialization. A diagnostic trouble code is associated with this condition. It is normal for all
segments to illuminate for a brief time during initialization of the selector and controls.
SELECT/MONITOR both blanck:

This condition indicates either a lack of power to the selector or the communication datalink has failed.
Continuous blank indicates loss of power to the selector. If the blank display changes to a single or double
cateye display, other conditions exist.
Page 5-42
Refer to cateye discussions below.

- ( | ) Single Cat-Eye:
This display indicates a selector fault other than loss of power and is always accompanied by
a selector-related a diagnostic trouble code.
The single cate-yeis displayed in the SELECT location immediately after the fault isdetected.
- ( | ) ( | ) Double Cat-Eyes:
This display indicates a failure of the communication link and is always accompanied by a Diagnostic
Trouble Code. The cat-eyes are illuminated in both the SELECT and MONITOR locations after
approximately 12 seconds of blank display.
WARNING:
Without the communication datalink, the shift selector cannot display the selected transmission
range. The vehicle operation will be affected.
d) Selector display is inoperative

In the event communication with datalink is lost, limited communication between the TCM and the shift
selectors lever. This limited communication allows the operator to select D (Drive), N (Neutral), or R (Reverse)
in order to get the vehicle to a service location. Operator requests for range upshifts and downshifts will not be
recognized, and the shift selector display will not display the selected transmission range due to the lack of
the datalink signal.
WARNING:
Due to the failure of the datalink communication, however, the shift selector lever cannot display the
selected range. When this condition exists, it is advisable to slowly and carefully apply the throttle
each time a change of direction has been selected in order to verify the direction of operation before
accelerating the vehicle.
5.9.4.3 Selecting range and shift schedules

A) SELECTING RANGE
If your vehicle is equipped with the shift selector lever, make sure the vehicle is in N (Neutral) before starting
the engine.
The neutral start circuit will not allow the engine to start if the lever is not in N (Neutral).
To go to range using a shift selector lever, press the hold override button to release the lever from its detent
position and move the lever to the range you want.
You may manually select a lower forward gear below the (D) position by moving the lever to the lower range
you would like to “range hold”.
Note:
The transmission starts in 2nd gear if the Transmission Oil Temperature (TFT) sensor detects the transmission
oil is below 7°C (20°F).
When a forward range, such as D (Drive), has been selected, the transmission starts in the lowest forward
gear. Usually that would be 1st range but some vehicles may be programmed for 2nd gear start instead.
Note:
Check the digital display window in the shift selector lever to verify the selected range whenever a button is
pushed or the lever is moved to be sure the range selected is shown. A flashing or blank SELECT display
indicates the range selected was not obtained due to an active inhibit or active Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).
Page 5-43
Note:
If equipped with a HIGH IDLE switch, turn the HIGH IDLE off before shifting from N (Neutral) to D (Drive) or R
(Reverse). The shift from N (Neutral) to D (Drive) or R (Reverse) is inhibited when engine speed is above idle.
WARNING:
To help avoid unexpected vehicle movement that might cause death, serious injury, or property
damage, always have your foot on the brake, the throttle released, and the engine at idle before
making a N (Neutral) to D (Drive); N (Neutral) to R (Reverse); D (Drive) to R (Reverse); or R (Reverse) to
D (Drive) selection.
Note:
Before making any direction changes or shifting from N (Neutral) to any range, make sure the vehicle has
come to a complete stop and the engine has returned to idle.
Note:
Conditions responsible for illuminating the CHECK TRANS light will not allow any shift selector lever changes
until the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) related to the condition goes inactive.
The MONITOR display shows the range the transmission has locked in because of an active Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC). The SELECT display goes blank when the CHECK TRANS light is on.
Move the vehicle to a safe location before turning off the vehicle and seek qualified assistance if needed.
Even if the transmission is not in Neutral, the operator is still able to view Diagnostic Trouble CodeS (DTCs)
by simultaneously pressing the DISPLAY MODE/DIAGNOSTIC (DMD) button.
B) Selector display flashing (inhibits)

When appropriate, the transmission control system automatically invokes an inhibit to protect against certain
types of abusive operation, such as:
- Engine speed inhibit: prevents shift from neutral to either a forward range or reverse if the engine speed is
above 900 rpm.
- Direction change inhibit: prevents shifting the transmission from forward-to-reverse or from
reverse-to-forward if vehicle speed is more than the allowed speed threshold, or if the engine speed is
above 900 rpm.
Rocking out by shifting from D (Drive) to R (Reverse) and R (Reverse) to D (Drive) is still available to the
operator provided the vehicle speed detected is below the limit allowed for rocking out the vehicle.
When shifts are inhibited, the TCM puts the transmission in N (Neutral) and the RANGE SELECT character
flashes an R for reverse inhibit or the RANGE SELECT character flashes the highest forward range number
for a drive inhibit.
After a range inhibit has occurred the driver must reselect range to exit the inhibit after bringing the vehicle to
stop and/or returning to engine idle.
Shifts from N (Neutral) to D (Drive) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse) are also inhibited and the shift should not be
allowed.
Page 5-44
5.9.4.4 Shifting gear
Description of available rangers

Transmission
shift selector Available range Utilization
lever position
R Reverse gear Vehicle reversing
N Engine starting and stationary operation
Neutral
(PTO activation)
D Driving forward with automatic gear Normal driving
shifting
L When pulling away in mud, deep snow, driving
Slowly forward
uphill and braking on very steep slopes
M Road conditions, load or traffic conditions
Driving forward with manual gear shifting
requiring a reduction in the number of gears
Reverse gear
Completely stop the vehicle and let the engine return to idle before shifting from a forward range to
R (Reverse) or from R (Reverse) to a forward range.
If position R is chosen the vehicle will also be immediately set in motion.
Therefore depress the brake pedal before selecting position R.
The letters RR appear in the display.
Neutral
No gear is engaged in the N position. The vehicle is not locked in this position and can therefore roll. Use the
parking brake to lock the vehicle. The letters NN appear in the display.
For vehicles equipped with the shift selector lever, the vehicle will not start unless N (Neutral) has been
selected. If the vehicle starts in any range other than N (Neutral), seek service TATRA TRUCKS immediately.
Before turning off the engine, always choose N (neutral).
Drive (Driving forward with automatic gear shifting)

If position D is chosen, the vehicle will immediately be set in motion (if the air system is pressurised and if
the parking brake is not on.) Therefore depress the brake pedal before selecting position D.
In this position the gearbox shifts automatically.
In the selector display, the upper number displays the highest gear to which the gearbox will shift.
The lower number displays the current engaged gear.
Low range (Slowly forward)

At position L the vehicle will only 1st gear
First range provides the vehicle with its maximum driving torque and engine braking effect.
’Use first range when:
- Pulling through mud and deep snow.
- Maneuvering in tight spaces.
- Driving up or down steep grades.
If the engine speed increases to the limit, the transmission will shift to a higher gear to protect the engine from
overturning
Page 5-45
Manual select (driving forward with manual shifting)

After selecting into M, the transmission is manually operated by moving the selector lever forwards or
backwards.
Lower ranges provide greater engine braking for going down grades (the lower the range, the greater the
braking effect). Occasionally, it may be desirable to restrict automatic shifting to a lower range because of:
- Road conditions;
- Road;
- Traffic conditions, etc.
The digital display shows the range chosen. Even though a lower range is selected, the transmission may not
downshift until vehicle speed is reduced (this prevents excessive engine speed in the lower range).
Shift program selection

By pressing the “MODE” key briefly once, another shift program can be selected from stationary and driving
position. There are two options:
- Normal program
This program is chosen automatically when the vehicle ignition has been turned off. The indicator lamp
next to the “MODE” key is not on. This program allows the transmission to shift gears as and when
necessary so that driving at higher speeds is possible. This may be advisable on unpaved terrain.
- Economy program
The indicator lamp next to the “MODE” key is on. This program will, in general, shift gears at lower engine
speeds. This results in a more economical fuel consumption.
5.9.4.5 Cold weather starts
If the transmission oil temperature is below 7 °C (20 °F), the transmission is programmed to start in 2nd gear.
If the transmission oil temperature is below 10 °C (50 °F) follow these procedures when making directional
shift changes:
- To shift from forward to reverse, select N (Neutral) and then R (Reverse).
- To shift from reverse to forward, select N (Neutral) and then D (Drive) or another forward range.
Note:
During cold oil conditions, always place the transmission in N (Neutral) prior to any direction changes.
Note:
Failure to follow these procedures during cold oil conditions, may cause the 3 CHECK TRANS light to
illuminate and the transmission to be restricted to N (Neutral).
Transmission oil is preheated operate the transmission in N (Neutral) with the engine running at idle for
a minimum of 20 minutes before attempting range operation.
WARNING:
Transmission malfunction or damage may occur if you operate the transmission with the oil
temperature below the minimum oil temperature specification limit - 35 °C (-31 °F).
Page 5-46
5.9.5 High fluid temperature

The transmission is considered to be overheated when sump temperature is 121 °C (250 °F).
Typical continuous sump temperature is 93°C (200°F).
If the transmission overheats during normal operation, make sure the transmission fluid level is correct.
If the engine temperature gauge indicates a high temperature, the transmission is probably overheated.
Stop the vehicle and check the cooling system. If it appears to be functioning properly, run the engine at
1200–1500 rpm with the transmission in N (Neutral). This should reduce the transmission and engine
temperatures to normal operating levels in 2 or 3 minutes.
WARNING:
The engine should never be operated for more than 10 seconds at full throttle with the transmission in
range and the output stalled. Prolonged operation of this type will cause the transmission fluid
temperature to become excessively high and will cause severe overheat damage to the transmission.
If the transmission and engine temperatures do not decrease, reduce the engine rpm. If the engine
temperature indicates a high temperature, an engine or radiator problem is indicated. If high temperature in
either the engine or transmission persists, stop the engine and contact the nearest TATRA TRUCKS Service
dealer.
5.9.6 Fault warning
If the transmission fault warning symbol 3 in the main instrument panel lights up, there is a fault in
the transmission (shifting gears), or the temperature of the transmission oil is too high. The accompanying
fault code can be read in the selector display function. Read the following recommendations first or consult
a TATRA dealer if necessary.
Transmission
The electronics of the transmission will block the functions of the selector and the transmission will select
a 'safe gear' for the transmission. It is important to drive the vehicle to a safe place as soon as possible and
switch off the ignition. It will no longer be possible to shift the transmission to neutral. The electronics of the
transmission will prevent this. After approximately 30 seconds, try starting the engine again and engage
a gear. If the fault is one whereby the transmission must in no circumstances be shifted, the electronics will no
longer shift the transmission. Driving is therefore no longer possible! If the fault is one whereby the
transmission may still be shifted, the warning in the main display will disappear. It is now possible to drive the
vehicle again, though the fault will still need to be remedied. In this situation, however, it is no longer possible
to shift gears.
Transmission oil temperature
If the transmission fault warning symbol 3 or transmission oil overheating symbol 4

in the main instrument panel comes on during driving, this could be an indication that the transmission oil has
reached its maximum temperature. In this situation, the electronics of the transmission limit transmission
shifting to the first four gears. It is important to drive to a safe place as soon as possible and let the engine idle
in neutral at an increased idling speed. As a result, the cooling system of the engine will try to cool the
transmission oil.
If after approximately two minutes the warning in the master display has not disappeared, turn off the engine
and contact the nearest TATRA TRUCKS Service dealer.
Page 5-47
5.9.7 Rocking out

WARNING:
To help avoid injury or property damage caused by sudden movement of the vehicle, do not make
shifts from N (Neutral) to D (Drive) or R (Reverse) when the throttle is open. The vehicle may lurch
forward or rearward and the transmission can be damaged. Avoid this condition by making shifts
from N (Neutral) to a forward range or R (Reverse) only when the throttle is closed and the service
brakes are applied.
WARNING:
DO NOT make N (Neutral) to D (Drive) or directional shift changes when the engine rpm is above idle.
Also, if the wheels are stuck and not turning, do not apply full power for more than 10 seconds in
either D (Drive) or R (Reverse). Full power for more than 10 seconds under these conditions causes
the transmission to overheat. If the transmission overheats, shift to N (Neutral) and operate the engine
at 1 200 - 1 500 rpm until it cools (2 - 3 minutes).
If the vehicle is stuck in deep sand, snow, or mud, it may be possible to rock it out using the following
procedure:
1. Shift to D (Drive) and apply a steady, light throttle (never full throttle).
2. When the vehicle has rocked forward as far as it will go, apply and hold the vehicle service brakes.
3. When engine has returned to idle, select R (Reverse).
4. Release the vehicle service brakes and apply a steady, light throttle (never full throttle) allowing the
vehicle to rock in R (Reverse) as far as it will go.
5. Apply and hold the vehicle service brakes and allow the engine to return to idle.
This procedure may be repeated in D (Drive) and R (Reverse) if each directional shift continues to move the
vehicle a greater distance.
5.9.8 Shift selector lever and diagnostics

Diagnostic features are provided with the transmission control system to assist in troubleshooting of
malfunctions and/or the monitoring of specific operating parameters.
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) of your Allison automatic monitors the transmission’s electronic
controls; and when a problem condition is detected, it:
- restricts shifting;
- illuminates the CHECK TRANS1) light on the instrument panel;

- registers a diagnostic code.
Continued illumination of the CHECK TRANS light during vehicle operation (other than start-up)
indicates that the TCM has signaled a diagnostic code.
MODE button
Transmission primary and secondary shift schedule modes to enhance performance
or fuel economy. The vehicle always defaults to the primary mode (MODE is not
shown on graphic display). You can switch to the secondary mode by pushing the
MODE button (MODE is shown on graphic display).
1)For
some problems, diagnostic codes may be registered without the TCM activating the CHECK TRANS light.
Please contact an authorized TATRA TRUCKS service dealer.
Page 5-48
OIL LEVELS
The transmission fluid cools, lubricates and transmits hydraulic power, so it is important that the proper fluid
level be maintained at all times.
If the fluid level is too low, the converter and clutches do not receive an adequate supply of fluids.
If the fluid level is too high, the fluid can aerate causing the transmission to shift erratically or overheat.
CHECKING OIL LEVELS

Use the following procedure to display oil level information.:
a) To enter the oil level function
Fluid level checks using shift selectors:
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, shift to N (NEUTRAL) and apply the parking
brake.
2. On the shift selector lever press the 9 DIAGNOSTICS button one time.
3. The oil level reading will be delayed until the following conditions are met:
- Engine must be at idle (500 - 800 rpm).
- Transmission is in N (NEUTRAL).
- Output speed must be zero.
- Oil temperature must be between 40 °C and 104 °C (104 °F and 220 °F).
- Vehicle has been stationary for two minutes to allow the oil to settle.
The shift selector displays the oil level data as follows:

CORRECT OIL LEVEL
The oil is within the correct oil level zone when OK is shown.
LOW OIL LEVEL

The display shows the number of quarts the transmission oil is low.
HIGH OIL LEVEL

The display shows the number of quarts the transmission oil is overfilled.
Page 5-49
b) Delayed oil level check

If the oil level check cannot be completed, one of the following Oil Level Display faults will be shown:
c) To exit the oil level function
For a shift selector lever press the 9 DIAGNOSTICS button until you return to
range display.
PROGNOSTIC FEATURES
5th generation electronic shift selector lever display prognostics in text form to provide
at-a-glance status of oil life, filter life and transmission health.
The WRENCH ICON will illuminate briefly after you turn the key to the run position on your
Allison equipped vehicle to indicate that prognostics are enabled. If the WRENCH ICON
remains on or flashes, this indicates there is a service issue relating to clutch, filter or oil life.
Oil life monitor

The status of the oil life is displayed as a percentage (OIL LIFE 100%) until oil is due
for a change.
Filter life monitor

The status of filter life is displayed as OIL FILTERS OK and alerts when filters are
due for a change with REPLACE FILTERS.
Transmission health monitor

The status of transmission health is displayed as HIGH to LO.
Page 5-50
ACCESSING PROGNOSTICS
When you are alerted via the WRENCH ICON on the shift selector that service is due, you can check the
status by toggling through the shift selector display as follows.
Be sure to park the vehicle on a level surface, shift to N (Neutral) and apply the parking brake before
accessing prognostics through the shift selector.
Oil life monitor
For a shift selector lever press the 9 DIAGNOSTICS button two times.
The percentage of the oil life remaining is displayed. New oil is shown as OIL LIFE
100%.
Filter life monitor
For a shift selector lever, press the 9 DIAGNOSTICS button three times.
Acceptable filter life status is shown as FILTERS OK, unacceptable filter life status is
shown as REPLACE FILTERS.
For a shift selector lever, press the 9 DIAGNOSTICS button four times.
When TRANS HEALTH OK is shown, clutch maintenance is not required. When

TRANS HEALTH LO is displayed, clutch maintenance is required.
Page 5-51
RESETTING PROGNOSTICS
Oil life monitor
For either a shift selector lever, press and hold the MODE button for approximately 10
seconds while in Oil Life Monitor mode
or
for either a a shift selector lever, perform the following shift sequence with the ignition
on, but the engine off. Do not stop the sequence for more than three seconds once you
have started.
N-D-N-D-N-R-N
Filter life monitor

For either a shift selector lever, press and hold the MODE button for approximately 10
seconds while in Filter Life Monitor mode
or
for either a shift selector lever, perform the following shift sequence with the ignition on,
but the engine off. Do not stop the sequence for more than three seconds once you
have started.
N-D-N-D-N-R-N

This must be reset manually using Allison DOC® for PC diagnostic program after correcting a clutch system
issue.
EXIT PROGNOSTICS
For a bump lever shift selector, press the DIAGNOSTICS range button 9 until
back to range display.
Diagnostic codes
1) To enter the diagnostic code function:
1. Stop the vehicle, turn off the engine off. Apply the parking brake.
2. To view the state, press the DIAGNOSTICS button 9 on the shift selector
lever five time.
3. Up to five codes may be recorded in memory.

4. Each code remains in the display until the MODE button is pushed, then the next code is shown. Active
codes are shown first, newest to oldest, followed by any inactive codes still in the memory.
Page 5-52
Active codes: Inactive codes:
For a detailed list of diagnostic transmission codes for 5th generation electronic shift selector lever, see
Chapter 6.10.10 “Diagnostic transmission codes (ALLISON)”.
2) To exit the diagnostic code function

Any of the following methods may be used.
1. For a shift selector lever, press the 9 DIAGNOSTICS range button until back to range display.
2. Wait approximately 10 minutes and the system will automatically return to normal operating mode.
3. Turn off the vehicle engine ignition switch.
Drive the vehicle and check for code recurrence. If codes continue to recur, bring the vehicle to an authorized
TATRA TRUCKS or Allison transmission service outlet to diagnose and repair the problem causing the codes.
Page 5-53
5.10 Two-speed transfer case gear shifting

Version No. 1
(vehicle equipped with the TATRA manual gearbox, manual gearbox TATRA (including the NORGREN
system))
WARNING:
Select between "slow" or "quick" gears only on the
vehicle at standstill secured with the parking brake
and shift selector lever into the neutral position.
If these conditions are not met, it is not possible in
the transfer case to shift to a "slow" or "quick" gear.
Shifting procedure
- The basic shifting switch 13 position means a
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
"quick gear" engaged in the transfer case.
- If the engine is running during shifting, depress the clutch
10
pedal.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
- To engage the gear with the engine at standstill, the
B 3656
ignition key must be in position I.
- To shift to a "slow" or a "quick" gear, use always the shifting switch 13 .

After shifting into a "slow" (crawl speed) gear the indicator lamp goes on in the switch, however, only with
the low beam or high beam on.
Version No. 2
(vehicle equipped with the ALLISON transmission)
WARNING:
Select between "slow" or "quick" gears only on the vehicle at standstill secured with the parking
brake and shift selector lever into the neutral position. If these conditions are not met, it is not
possible in the transfer case to shift to a "slow" or "quick" gear.
Shifting procedure
- The transfer case is in the "quick gear" mode in the basic position of the shifting switch 13 .
- Changing gears is possible while the engine is running.

If you want to change gears when the engine is off, the key in the switch-box must be in position I.
- To shift to a "slow" or a "quick" gear, use always the shifting switch 13 .

After shifting into a "slow" (crawl speed) gear the indicator lamp goes on in the switch, however, only with
the low beam or high beam on.
Page 5-54
5.11 Brake system

The vehicle brake system is fitted with the automatic brake pressure control, PERROT brake units with the
automatic adjustment of the clearance between the brake lining and brake drum and the Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS). Pneumatic instruments are fitted with noise dampers to meet the noise regulations.
5.11.1 Service brake

The double-circuit service brake system is controlled by the brake pedal and acts on all wheels.
Service brake control

The service brake is controlled by the brake pedal and its double-circuit system acts on all wheels, including
any trailer.
In case of emergency (failure of the service brake), the vehicle can be stopped using the emergency brake,
only with lower efficiency - the braking distance is longer.
5.11.2 Emergency and parking brake

Emergency brake
If the service brake fails, the emergency brake may be used for emergency braking by suspension cylinders of
the rear axle(s) and trailer braking.
Parking brake
The parking brake uses the same system as the emergency brake and operates on the rear axle of the
vehicle and on the trailer.
Emergency and parking brake control

It is controlled by the manual brake valve situated in the
right of the instrument panel when viewed from the driver´s
I
seat. 1
II
Parking brake position:
I - vehicle brake released
II - maximum emergency braking intensity III
When changing the brake lever from position I to
position II, braking intensity increases. IV
The brake lever automatically returns from position II B 3464
to position I.
In this position, emergency and parking brakes act on the rear axle(s) wheels and the second front axle
(for vehicles 8x8). If the trailer is hitched, the emergency brake also acts on the trailer brake system. This
position is used for starting uphill.
III - parking brake engaged
In this position the indicator lamp 27 on the instrument panel lights and both the tow vehicle and trailer
are braked.
IV - check position
Push the lever down and backwards. In this position the trailer brake system is released.
Page 5-55
The brake lever must always be in position III when parking, engine starting, engine running in the vehicle at
rest and when gearshifting in the transfer case!
The lever fits into locked position when shifting from position I to position III.
Lift the lock ring when shifting from position III to position I.
Push and shift the lever to shift from position III to position IV.
Position IV is with no arrestment, and the lever returns to position III after releasing automatically.
In case of the service brake failure, the vehicle can be braked with the emergency brake, however,
with a reduced braking efficiency - the braking distance is longer.
Releasing the brake

Lift the locking ring and shift the parking brake lever from position III to position I. Indicator lamp 27 goes
out.
To apply the brake

Move the parking brake lever from position I to III overcoming the "bump stop" point. Make sure that the
parking brake lever is properly locked in position III. The indicator lamp 27 will turn on. Before leaving
the vehicle, make sure the parking brake operates reliably by setting the parking brake lever to the "Test"
position.
Starting uphill
To avoid reversing the vehicle when starting uphill, it is recommended to pull the parking brake to point II of
the flexible space II, but not beyond. Once the parking brake lever brake is released, it automatically returns to
position I.
Test
Pull the parking brake lever and move it from position III to position IV. In this position, the trailer brakes will
release and the whole vehicle combination is braked by the towing vehicle only. So it is possible to check that
the towing vehicle itself is able to hold the entire vehicle combination.
Once you release the parking brake, it returns automatically to position III, that means the position of a parked
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before parking the set and putting the parking brake to position III, the driver has to put the parking
brake lever to the checking position IV to check the braking effect of the parking brake of the towing
vehicle with the trailer brake released to make sure that the whole set shall be held in a slope by the
brakes of the towing vehicle only. A failure may result in injury or death.
During and after running-in:

WARNING:
Never spray pressurized water on hot brakes after intense driving due to the heat stress in the
materials!
Recommendation:
After an intense thermal load on the brakes, the brakes should be cooled by slower driving before
parking and engaging the parking brake.
Page 5-56
5.11.3 Engine brake

It has been designed to fluently slow down the ride when
riding down longer downgrades.
The relief exhaust brake can be switched on in two

ways:
1. Push the lever in the steering wheel rotation
clockwise with the speed engaged and accelerator and
clutch pedals released
or
2. Turn on the switch 17 (preselection) to activate

A 5941
the exhaust brake dependence function on the service
brake. The exhaust brake is switched on after operating the service brake pedal.
The engine brake turns on when a trigger was issued to turn it on while the engine speed is above 850 rpm
and neither the accelerator nor clutch pedals are depressed. A trigger to turn on the engine brake can be
given by closing the engine brake switch 17 , or depressing the brake pedal (this must be enabled with
a switch 17 on the instrument panel.
If the engine brake switch is closed for at least 2.5 s, the engine fan also turns on at full power along with the
engine brake to increase the engine braking power.
The engine brake off automatically when the accelerator or clutch pedal is floored or if engine speed drops
under 825 rpm.
3. Aautomatically switch on / off the engine brake

The engine brake automatically switches on when the engine speed is exceeded 2,250 rpm and automatically
shuts off when the engine speed drops below 2,150 rpm (regardless of the pedals and the engine brake
switch 17 ).
If engine speed increases when braking using the engine brake, it is necessary to slightly apply the service
brake and gear up.
Vehicle equipped with a semi-automatic gearbox TATRA - NORGREN system

"MB" symbol is displayed 8 when the exhaust brake is
turned ON.
Once the engine brake is deactivated, MB symbol
disappears. 3 4 1 5 6
2 7
B 3430
Page 5-57
5.11.4 Brake system indicator lamps
27 Parking brake indicator lamp

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Lighting when the parking brake is engaged. 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
26 Emergency brake circuit air overpressure

indicator lamp
Indicates a drop in the air overpressure during
driving.
A drop in air pressure in individual circuits can be
caused by a driving mode or a failure. In case of
a failure, remove the cause thereof immediately. B 3431
25 Service brake circuits overpressure indicator

lamp
Indicates a drop in the air overpressure during driving. A drop in air pressure in individual circuits
can be caused by a driving mode or a failure. In case of a failure, remove the cause thereof
immediately.
5.11.5 Brake lining indicator lamp of disc brakes**

Wheel brake system
Some vehicle versions may have axles equipped with disc brakes and brake pad wear indication.
The wear of the brake pads is indicated by the indicator lamp 28 on the dashboard and LED on the
control module located under the dashboard storage compartment.
28 Brake fault indicator lamp

When it turns on while driving, the light indicates the brake pad wear of the disc brakes when it
exceeds the permissible limit. At the same time, the red LED on the control unit panel of the
respective wheel blinks.
Please adapt your driving speed. Make sure to bring the vehicle to an authorized TATRA TRUCKS
service dealer to replace the brake pads as soon as possible.
WARNING:
We recommend replacing the brake pads in an authorized TATRA TRUCKS service dealer.
Page 5-58
Brake lining wear assessment unit

The wear assessment control unit is used to continuously
detect wear of the brake linings and is located near the
vehicle power generator under the unscrewed cover 2
at the bottom of the instrument panel in front of the
passenger.
The WSM control unit monitors, processes and evaluates 1

the values of the electronic potentiometer located directly
on the disc brake caliper and thus senses the brake lining
wear (thickness) associated with the brake piston rod
extension.
2 B 3251
If the brake lining is worn (to the minimum limit), the brake
failure indicator lamp 28 on the dashboard lights up, 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
and the LED flashes on the respective wheel plate located
on the WSM control unit.
B 3431
WSM plate
The WSM plate shows the chassis ground plan graphics.
A diode indicating the brake lining wear is affixed to the
plate on each wheel.
The plate is universal, showing 4x4, 6x6 and 8x8 vehicle
versions.
B 3335
Page 5-59
5.11.6 Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

The ABS is antilock brake system.
Description
The ABS ensures proper brake system stability and good steering with the shortest possible stopping
distance. Preventing wheel lock will retain the vehicle steering characteristics.
To achieve the shortest braking distance possible, floor the brake pedal fully irrespective of the road condition.
Control the driving direction by slight steering wheel movements.
Please note if the vehicle is equipped with the ABS, but not the trailer, the directional stability and steering
characteristics will not be as good as if both vehicles had the ABS.
WARNING:
The ABS does not relieve the driver of their obligation to adapt their driving style and road traffic
conditions.
The antilock system protects against neither the consequences of driving with a short distance from
other vehicles nor speeding when cornering.
In some cases (but not always) the vehicle stopping distance is shorter when using the ABS.
Ignoring these facts can lead to very dangerous situations for the driver, as well as for other road
users.
- Do not adapt your driving style knowing that the vehicle is equipped with the ABS.
- Do not brake later or more intensively. This results in unnecessary tire wear. This might also result
in hazard to yourselves and other road users.
CAUTION!
Please note that tire adhesion to the road is less when driving on slippery surfaces, thereby extending
the braking distance, even in vehicles equipped with ABS.
The ABS function reduces the risk of accidents caused by buckling of vehicle combination, even if the
trailer is not equipped with ABS.
WARNING:
The ABS control does not work at low speeds.
ABS will not compensate any driving mistakes (e.g. too short following distance, inadequate speed,
too fast driving through curves) and braking distance may not be expected.
ABS serviceability is partially limited with the front axle differential locked and front drive switched
on.
Page 5-60
5.11.7 Vehicle and trailer ABS indicator lamp

ABS vehicle indicator lamp
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
ABS indicator (warning lamp) 11 lets drivers know the 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
status of the system. This indicator lamp is also used to
display blink code diagnostics.
11 ABS vehicle indicator lamp

The indicator lamp 11 lights up after turning the key
in the switchbox to position I.
If there are no defects in the ABS system, the
indicator lamp goes out after 3 seconds. B 3431
If the indicator lamp lights and does not go out even after exceeding the speed of 7 km/h, there is a failure
in the ABS system only, not in the whole brake system and/or there is a failure stored in the ABS memory
from the prior drive. You can go on driving, but remember that ABS is out of operation.
Have the defect corrected at the authorized service.
ABS trailer indicator lamp*

If a trailer is coupled, ABS will also be activated after putting the ignition key to position I. The second part of
trailer ABS indicator lamps 12 and 13 will light up.
12 ABS trailer indicator lamp*

Informs of a trailer ABS system failure.
If a trailer with ABS is coupled, then the indicator lamp 12 goes on after turning the ignition key to
position I.
If the ABS works properly, the indicator lamp goes out after about 3 seconds.
If it lights permanently or lights up during a ride, there is a defect in the trailer ABS system, not in the
whole trailer braking system (brakes operate without ABS).
Have the defect identified and removed in an authorized service TATRA TRUCKS.
13 ABS INFO indicator lamp*

Informs of whether a trailer is equipped with ABS.
The indicator lamp illuminates when the vehicle and trailer ABS systems are not interconnected, or
if the trailer is not equipped with ABS.
Page 5-61
5.11.8 ABS switch for driving off road

For safe driving in off-road conditions, some vehicle
applications are equipped with ABS braking system
designed for off-road operation.
WARNING:
To be switched on only when driving in terrain by
pushing 14 switch.
ABS function after switching on:

- ABS system is disconnected at the speed below 15 km/h.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
- Blocking phases are called intentionally at the speed of
15-40 km/h to ensure safe braking when driving off-road.
- ABS system has normal function at the speed above 10
40 km/h. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B 3727
5.11.9 Test of brake circuit bulb
Switch 15 is designed to check the bulb in the indicator lamp 25 .
Page 5-62
5.12 Power-steering function

The powersteering system comprises two hydraulic
circuits. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Failure indication in individual circuits

There are two indicator lamps indicating failures in
individual circuits in the powersteering system.
- If there is no failure in the powersteering system, the 1st

circuit indicator lamp 15 must go out upon engine
B 3431
starting and the 2nd circuit indicator lamp 16 must
go out when the vehicle starts moving
(at min. speed of 10 km/h).
- If the indicator lamp 15 is on during the ride it indicates failure in the 1st circuit (e.g. a failure of the
servopump on the engine, oil leakage from the 1st circuit).
- If the indicator lamp 16 is on after minimum speed required is achieved, it indicates a failure in the 2nd
circuit (e.g. oil leakage from the 2nd circuit).
- If the indicator lamp 3 is on, it indicates a pressure drop in the hydraulic control of the rear axle
steering below a safe value*.
Have all failures occurred in the steering system repaired in an authorized repair shop immediately.
Page 5-63
5.13 Differential locks
5.13.1 Using differential lock - version No.1

General information
Differential locking is possible:
- between the rear/front axles: front-wheel drive and the inter-axle differential lock(s),
- on the front and rear axles: front and rear axle differential lock(s).
WARNING:
- Never engage the differential lock when there is wheel slip.
Engaging the differential lock while there is wheel slip on one of the axles can lead to damage to the
differential and/or differential lock.
WARNING:
- Disengage the differential lock as soon as firm ground is reached. If the warning lamp stays on,
drive forward and then reverse a short distance to release the locking mechanism.
Driving on firm ground with the differential lock engaged can lead to damage to the differential and/or
axle shafts.
WARNING:
Never lock axle differentials when driving on firm surfaces!
WARNING:
Only use the differential lock with the steering wheel in a straight line of vehicle driving direction.
A differential lock may only be used when driving on soft ground or on a slippery road surface, and never
on firm ground.
Front-wheel drive and inter-axle differential lock(s)

To be used under the following conditions:
- with the vehicle stationary:
- steered wheels turned in the straight vehicle direction
- in a moving vehicle:
- accelerator pedal released
- clutch pedal is depressed
Front and rear axle differential lock(s)
- inter-axle differential lock engaged
Page 5-64
5.13.1.1 Enganging the front axle drive and inter-axle differential lock
WARNING:
Do not engage the front wheel drive while driving on a dry asphalt or concrete road!
The inter-axle differential lock is automatically engaged when the front axle drive is engaged.
1. Push switch 2 on the gearshift lever panel to

switch on the front drive.
2. The engagement is signalized by indicator lamp 10
lit up.
B 3728
1. Put switch 2 to the basic position to switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
off the front drive. 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
2. Indicator lamp 10 goes out.
3. If the drive does not turn off immediately, reduce and

increase the engine speed rapidly and repeatedly until
this indicator lamps 10 goes out.
B 3431
Page 5-65
5.13.1.2 Locking the axle differentials

WARNING:
Never switch the locks while driving on firm road or in curves! Do not curve with locks switched on, if
possible. Damage to vehicle may occur.
The axle differentials cannot be locked if the front axle drive is not turned on.
1. First, turn ON the front wheel drive with the inter-axle

differential lock using the switch 2 .
2. Switch ON the axle differential locks by pressing the

switch 1 simultaneously with pressing and
holding the safety knob on the switch.
3. The locking is signalized by the indicator lamp 9

and acoustic signal.
B 3728
1. Release the button 1 to disengage the locks

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
immediately after overcoming a difficult stretch. 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
2. The indicator lamp 9 goes out and acoustic

signaling stops.
3. Disengage the front-wheel drive and inter-axle
differential lock as required (see chapter 5.13.1.1).
B 3431
Page 5-66
5.13.2 Using differential lock - version No.2
General information
Differential locking is possible:
- between the rear/front axles: front-wheel drive and the inter-axle differential lock(s);
- on the rear axles: rear axle differential lock(s);
- on the front axles: front axle differential lock(s).
WARNING:
- Never engage the differential lock when there is wheel slip.
Engaging the differential lock while there is wheel slip on one of the axles can lead to damage to the
differential and/or differential lock.
WARNING:
- Disengage the differential lock as soon as firm ground is reached. If the warning lamp stays on,
drive forward and then reverse a short distance to release the locking mechanism.
Driving on firm ground with the differential lock engaged can lead to damage to the differential and/or
axle shafts.
WARNING:
Never lock axle differentials when driving on firm surfaces!
WARNING:
Only use the differential lock with the steering wheel in a straight line of vehicle driving direction.
A differential lock may only be used when driving on soft ground or on a slippery road surface, and never
on firm ground.
Front-wheel drive and inter-axle differential lock(s)

Rear axle differential lock(s)
Page 5-67
Front axle differential lock(s)

- rear axle differential lock engaged
- rear axle differential lock engaged
5.13.2.1 Inter-axle differential lock operation

WARNING:
Do not engage the front wheel drive while driving on a
dry asphalt or concrete road!
The inter-axle differential lock is automatically engaged

when the front axle drive is engaged.
1. Push switch 3 on the gearshift lever panel to

switch on the front drive.
Note:
B 3728
The engagement is signalized by indicator lamp 10 lit
up.
2. When driving on a hard surface, disengage the

front-wheel drive and inter-axle differential by pressing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
the switch 3 into the basic position. Indicator
lamp 10 goes out.
Note:
If the indicator lamp 10 stays on, drive forward and
then reverse a short distance to release the locking
mechanism.
B 3431
Page 5-68
5.13.2.2 Locking the axle differentials

WARNING:
Never switch the locks while driving on firm road or in curves! Do not curve with locks switched on, if
possible. Damage to vehicle may occur.
The axle differentials cannot be locked if the front axle drive is not turned on.
LOCKING THE REAR AXLE(S) DIFFERENTIALS

1. Engage the front-wheel drive and inter-axle differential
lock using the switch 3 .
2. Engage the rear axle differential locks using the switch

2 .
Note:
The locking is signalized by the indicator lamp 9 and
acoustic signal.
B 3728
3. Immediately after overcoming a difficult terrain

segment, disengage the rear axle differential locks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
using the switch 2 .
The indicator lamp 9 goes out and acoustic

signaling stops.
4. Disengage the front-wheel drive and inter-axle
differential lock as required (see chapter 5.13.2.1).
B 3431
Page 5-69
LOCKING THE FRONT AXLE(S) DIFFERENTIALS

1. Engage the front-wheel drive and inter-axle differential
lock using the switch 3 .
2. Engage the rear axle differential locks using the switch

2 .
Note:
The locking is signalized by the indicator lamp 9 and
acoustic signal.
B 3728
3. Press the button 1 to engage the front axle

differential locks.
4. Immediately after overcoming a difficult terrain
segment, disengage the axle differential locks by 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
releasing the button 1 .
5. Disengage the rear axle differential locks using the

switch 2 as required.
The indicator lamp 9 goes out and acoustic

signaling stops.
6. Disengage the front-wheel drive and inter-axle B 3431
differential lock 3 as required (see chapter

5.13.2.1).
Page 5-70
5.14 Tipping the vehicle body and trailer platforms*
5.14.1 Body tipping

Lifting the tipper body
When lifting the body, proceed as follows:
1. The parking brake must be in the parking position.
2. Start the engine and check the air system working pressure. Let the engine run at idling speed (engine
speed is below 700 rpm).
The indicator lamps 25 and 26 go out.
3. Engage "normal" H range. With "reduced" L range, body tipping takes longer time.
Note:
If you use a manual transmission TATRA, depress the clutch.
4. Floor the clutch pedal and turn on the PTO using the switch 15 on the instrument panel. This will put
the tipping drive pump to the standby position.
5. Release the clutch pedal to turn on the pump drive, indicator lamp 4 will come on.
6. Slightly lift the tipping handle and move it towards "TIP" direction - away, the tipper body begins to lift.
- The tipper body will start lifting and indicator lamp
13 will come on.
- Control the lifting speed by the engine speed. TIP
- You may interrupt tipping in any position by shifting N

handle to the central position.
- Traveling during tipping is possible.
LOW
- Body tipping is locked in the extreme position
automatically.
WARNING:
When using the PTO, do not exceed engine speed
above 1,400 rpm or vehicle speed above 10 km/h. C 0089
When exceeding the engine speed 1,400 rpm or the

vehicle speed 10 km/h, the PTO is switched off.
Driving with the PTO engaged (where fitted)

Driving with the PTO engaged is permitted, provided that the maximum PTO speed is not exceeded.
It is not allowed to change gears with the PTO engaged. When using the automatic transmission ALLISON is
not possible at all.
Note:
If the parking brake can be put into the drive position with the PTO turned on, the vehicle can be driven.
The PTO can only be turned on when the vehicle is stationary.
Page 5-71
Lowering the tipper body

1. The vehicle must be at standstill.
2. Keep the engine at idling speed.
3. To lower the tipper body, move the tipping handle
TIP
toward the "LOW" position - to yourself.
4. Once the tipper body is lowered down to the frame, N
leave the tipping handle in the lowering position
(LOW).
LOW
5. After tipper body seats on the frame, indicator lamp
13 will go out.
Note:
If you use a manual transmission TATRA, depress the C 0089
clutch.
6. Depress the clutch and turn off the PTO using the switch 15 .
If you use the manual transmission, depress the clutch for 2 to 3 seconds (the transmission PTO will
stop).
7. When the PTO from transmission is deactivated, the PTO indication on indicator lamp 4 is disabled.
WARNING:
Once the tipper body is lowered, leave the tipping handle in the lowering position "LOW".
Page 5-72
5.14.2 Trailer platform tipping

Lifting the trailer platform
When tipping the trailer platform, proceed as follows:
1. The parking brake must be in the parking position.
2. Start the engine and check the air system working pressure. Let the engine run at idling speed (engine
speed is below 700 rpm). The indicator lamps 25 and 26 go out.
3. Engage "normal" H range. With "reduced" L range, body tipping takes longer time.
Note:
4. Floor the clutch pedal and turn on the PTO using the switch 15 on the instrument panel. This will put
the tipping drive pump to the standby position.
5. Release the clutch pedal to turn on the pump drive, indicator lamp 4 will come on.
6. On the instrument panel, turn on the trailer platform tipping switch 7 and the indicator lamp 12
illuminates indicating a trailer platform raised.
7. Slightly lift the tipping handle and move it towards
"TIP" direction - away, the tipper body begins to lift.
- The tipper body will start lifting and indicator lamp
TIP
13 will come on.
N
- Control the lifting speed by the engine speed.
- You may interrupt tipping in any position by shifting
LOW
handle to the central position.
- Traveling during tipping is possible.
- Body tipping is locked in the extreme position
automatically.
C 0089
WARNING:
When using the PTO, do not exceed engine speed above 1,400 rpm or vehicle speed above 10 km/h.
When exceeding the engine speed 1,400 rpm or the vehicle speed 10 km/h, the PTO is switched off.
Page 5-73
Lowering the trailer platform

When lowering the trailer platform, proceed as follows:
1. The vehicle must be at standstill.
2. Keep the engine at idling speed.
3. To lower the tipper body, move the tipping handle
TIP
toward the "LOW" position - to yourself.
4. Once the tipper body is lowered down to the frame, N
leave the tipping handle in the lowering position
(LOW).
LOW
5. After trailer platform tipping seats on the frame,
indicator lamp 13 will go out.
6. On the instrument panel, turn off the trailer platform

C 0089
tipping switch 7 and the indicator lamp indicating
a trailer platform raised turns off.
Note:
7. Depress the clutch and turn off the PTO using the switch 15 .
If you use the manual transmission, depress the clutch for 2 to 3 seconds (the transmission PTO will
stop).
8. When the PTO from transmission is deactivated, the PTO indication on indicator lamp 4 is disabled.
WARNING:
Once the tipper body is lowered, leave the tipping handle in the lowering position "LOW".
Page 5-74
5.14.3 Operation of three-sided tipper

Body tipping to the side
1. When tipping to the sides, unlock a respective
drop-side using the lever located on the body front,
moving it from position A to position B.
2. When tipping to the rear, the tailgate will automatically
unlock and the front wall will swing on the upper
hinges
A 5948
Body tipping backwards

1. Before tipping, do not forget to pull out both locking
pins on the opposite side, and insert both pins on the
side, where tipping is done.
2. Before tipping to the rear, relocate both lock pins to the
rear body eyes.
A 5953
Getting on the tipper body

CAUTION!
When getting on/off the tipper body, use extreme care, the surface becomes slippery when wet.
Page 5-75
5.14.4 Locking an empty tipper body to prevent spontaneous tipping.

CAUTION!
The safety strut/brace has been designed to lockan empty tipper body! In any work is done on the
chassis when the body is in a raised position, it must be secured to prevent from spontaneous tilting
down.
Unlocking of safety strut

1. Before tipping the body, release the safety strut 1 from
its holder by removing the locking pin 2.
2. Lift the tipper body until the strut jumps over the
stopper, then lower the tipper body slightly so that the
strut leans into the frame stopper.
2
WARNING:
The strut must be self-tilting when unlocked (must rest 1
to the frame top without any assistance).
Otherwise, it is necessary to release the strut hinge.
C 0109
Locking an empty body with a safety strut

1. Raise the body to the position where the safety strut overcomes both stoppers, which are a part of the
frame.
2. Set the body to the STOP position and then lower it slightly to ensure that the strut is locked by the frame
stoppers.
Locking the underride barrier on the body

1. Lift up the tipper body slightly. 1
2. Lift the released strut 1 and lock it in lifted position
using the lock pin 2.
3. Lower the tipper body down to the frame and lock the
strut in the holder by means of lock pin 2. 2
CAUTION!
During repairs on the chassis with lifted tipper
body, it must be secured against spontaneous tipping
using the safety strut.
C 0108
Use extreme care when lowering the tipper body to
avoid pinching of any persons between the body and chassis!
Staying under unsecured tipper body may result in injury or death.
Operator may not leave the tilting control lever unattended to be able to immediately intervene in case
of emergency.
Safety cables connected with the frame are important part of the tilting mechanism securing the tipper body
against rollover. Replace a cable if damaged.
Page 5-76
5.15 Loading and unloading

Observe the following principles when loading and unloading:
1. Engage the vehicle parking brake and set the gearshift lever to neutral N.
2. Never exceed the permissible load of axles and total permissible load.
3. Vehicle stability must be ensured.
4. Keep the engine running while loading.
When loading to maximum weight quickly, negative wheel camber will occur.
5. If any brake indicator lamp turns on after loading, increase engine speed to add air to the brake system
circuits.
WARNING:
Do not drive away before the indicator lamps 25 and 26 turn off.
6. If an excessive cargo is to be loaded on the vehicle, turn the switch 12 to the upper position before
loading to allow the suspension bellows to be inflated faster.
7. Check fastening of the cargo before driving.
Page 5-77
5.16 Handling with the underride barrier*

Before driving in difficult terrain, do not forget tilt the
underride barrier to the upper position B to avoid
deformation thereof.
Unlocking the underride barrier II
1. To help unlock the handle 1, release the underride
barrier 2 and hold it.
2. Turn the handle 1 to position II (horizontally). I
Note:
Hold the rear underride barrier to avoid falling under its own
2
weight and set it into the upper position.
After releasing the handle 1, make sure that there is no 1
danger (vehicle is stopped, access is ensured and there is
no risk of collision). C 0106
Locking the underride barrier

1. Set the handle 1 to the vertical position.
A - Use on public transport roads

The rear underride barrier must be absolutely secured B
in the lower position.
B - Off-road use
The rear underride barrier must be absolutely secured
in the upper position.
C 0107
Page 5-78
5.17 Vehicle height setting

Rubber suspension bellows allow for adjusting of vehicle
height, both to improve off-road driving or fording properties
and undercrossing obstacles
or
for example, for loading/unloading the superstructure on
the vehicle.
Use switch 12 on the left part instrument panel

to control the equipment.
When the vehicle height setting switch 8 is turned on,
B 3480
indicator lamps 10 or 11 will turn on.
The switch 12 has three position:

Upper position A - inflating the air suspension bellows
A
Used in off-road operation, to overcome obstacles, at
reasonable speed.
- To increase the vehicle clear height tilt switch 12 to B
the top position A. When inflating the air suspension
bellows, the indicator lamp 10 will light up. C
- After overcoming rough terrain or after fording turn the
B 2677
switch 12 to the middle basic position and the
indicator light 10 goes out.
Lower position (C) - underinflating the air suspension bellows

It is used for a short time only for the time necessary to reduce the overall vehicle height.
- After underruning an obstacle set the switch 12 to the lower position C. When underinflating the air
suspension bellows, the indicator lamp 11 will light up.
- After underruning an obstacle turn the switch 12 to the middle basic position and the indicator light
7 goes out.
Central position (B) - basic
Used for normal on&off-road operation. No indicator lamp (10 or 11 ) is on.

WARNING:
Should the (vehicle height setting) switch 12 remain in the lower position "C" and ignition key be
turned to position "0", the vehicle will lift (if air pressure is sufficient) to the home (driving) position.
Page 5-79
5.18 Discharging air from bellows springs (suspension bellows)

Air from rubber suspension bags can be discharged via an
air outlet valve or using a switch of the vehicle height 1
setting.
a) Air discharge valve 2

This valve is used to discharge air from suspension 8 3
bellows during railway, air or water transport of the vehicle.
7
6 5 4 B 1520
Each vehicle version is equipped with an air discharge

valve, which may be located under the battery box 8
(Fig. B 1520) or in the rear of the chassis (inside the frame)
(Fig. B 1674).
Valve position:
Position I - valve closed (OFF) (while driving)
Position II - valve open (ON) (when discharging bellows)
When the railway, marine, air or low-bed trailer

transport is used, the vehicle must be transported in I II
a lowered position. Discharge the air from the axle air A 6462
suspension bellows through the air drain valve. The air

drain valve must be open (position II) when transporting the vehicle.
b) Vehicle height setting switch

While driving, you can discharge air from the air
suspension bellows using the vehicle height setting switch
12 .
It is used only for a short time necessary to reduce the
overall vehicle height.
B 3480
Page 5-80
5.19 Power take-off (PTO)
5.19.1 Clutch PTO*
5.19.1.1 PTOs with forced cooling

Controlling the clutch PTO with forced cooling
Switching ON the PTOs
Use the switch 16 with an indicator lamp to switch

on/off.
- Use the parking brake to break the vehicle.

- Shift the gearshift lever to neutral N.
- Press button 16 to switch the PTO on; do not start B 3480

the engine.
After switching the PTO on, a indicator lamp in switch
16 will light up.
- Start the engine.

- Check pressure in the pneumatic system; there must be a maximum pressure value.
Indicator lamps 25 and 26 must not be on.
WARNING:
Turn on the PTO only at minimum idle speed (500 rpm). It is not possible to turn on the PTO at
maximum idle speed (600 rpm).
If it is not possible to turn on the PTO according to the above instructions, turn it on as follows:
- Start the engine (or let it run at idle speed) and check pressure in the pneumatic system; there must be a
maximum pressure value. Indicator lamps 25 and 26 must not illuminate.
- Push the switch 16 with the engine running at idle

to turn on the PTO.
After switching the PTO on, a indicator lamp in switch 16
will light up .
- You can control the PTO speed through the engine speed
as follows:
- using the adjusting screw 1 (Fig. A 7407 or
- using the secondary (remote) control from the vehicle 1 2
A 7407
superstructure.
The speed ratio is 1:1; (1.25:1).
Page 5-81
Switching OFF the PTOs
- Depress the switch 16 into its initial position to turn off the PTO; the indicator lamp 16 goes out.
Note:
The depressed clutch pedal does not have any influence on turning the PTO from the clutch on and off.
Note:
Please observe the instructions of superstructure manufacturer with respect to specific engagement of
superstructure drives during the power take-off control.
Cooling of PTO
Simultaneously with turning on the clutch PTO, the transmission PTO is turned on, driving the pump 5, which
provides cooling of the PTO (see the diagram in Fig. A 4913).
Note:
As required by the customer, PTO can be mounted without forced (pump) cooling.
When a certain oil temperature in the PTO circuit is reached, the cooling fan 10 at the oil cooler 9 located on
the right side behind the cab will turn on automatically (Fig. A 4913).
Clutch PTO cooling scheme

1 - PTO oil filler cap
2 - PTO oil inspection hole
3 - PTO oil drain plug
4 - Clutch PTO
5 - Hydraulic pump (on the transmission
PTO)
6 - Engine rear noise cover
7 - Oil cooler drain plug
8 - Oil cooler breather plug
9 - PTO oil cooler
10 - Cooling fan
11 - Dipstick
A 4913
Page 5-82
5.19.1.2 PTOs without forced cooling*

Controlling the clutch PTO without forced cooling
Use the switch 16 with an indicator lamp to switch

on/off.
- Press switch 16 to switch the PTO on; do not start

B 3480
the engine.
After switching the PTO on, a indicator lamp in switch 16 will light up.
- Start the engine.

- Check pressure in the pneumatic system; there must be a maximum pressure value. Indicator lamps
25 and 26 must not be on.
WARNING:
Turn on the PTO only at minimum idle speed (500 rpm). It is not possible to turn on the PTO at
maximum idle speed (650 rpm).
If it is not possible to turn on the PTO according to the above instructions, turn it on as follows:
- Start the engine (or let it run at idle speed) and check pressure in the pneumatic system; there must be a
maximum pressure value. Indicator lamps 25 and 26 must not illuminate.
- Push the switch 16 with the engine running at idle to turn on the PTO.
After switching the PTO on, a indicator lamp in switch 16 will light up.
as follows:
- using the adjusting screw 1 (Fig. A 7407 or
- using the secondary (remote) control from the vehicle
superstructure.
The speed ratio is 1:1; (1.25:1).
1 2
A 7407
Page 5-83
Switching OFF the PTOs
- Depress the switch 16 into its initial position to turn off the PTO; the indicator lamp 16 goes out.
Note:
The depressed clutch pedal does not have any influence on turning the PTO from the clutch on and off.
Note:
Page 5-84
5.19.2 Transmission power take-off (PTO)*
5.19.2.1 Vehicle with the TATRA manual gearbox or with semi-automatic manual gearbox TATRA -
NORGREN)
Use the switch 15 to turn the PTO on/off.

- Engage the parking brake.
- Start the engine and check the air pressure in the
pneumatic system – it must be of a maximum value.
Indicator lamps 25 and 26 must not illuminate.
B 3480
- Push the switch 15 with the clutch pedal

depressed and with the engine running at idle to turn
on the PTO.
- After the clutch pedal is released, the indicator lamp 4
will light up, indicating PTO switched on.
WARNING:
Never engage the PTO while driving! Should you need
to move with the vehicle with the PTO engaged, shift to
the gear speed before the PTO engagement. B 3431
as follows:
- using the adjusting screw 1 (Fig. A 7407) or
superstructure.
Select H or L range (by the pre-selector lever) before

switching on PTO.
Switching OFF the PTOs 1 2

A 7407
- Use the handle 2 to reduce the idle speed to the setpoint.
- If you wish to switch off PTO, floor the clutch pedal and press the switch 15 to the basic position.
- The indicator lamp 4 goes out.
WARNING:
Do not switch on PTO during the ride! If you need to drive with PTO switched on, select the first gear
before. If you change speed during the ride with PTO switched on, the transmission synchronization
equipment is loaded extremely.
Page 5-85
5.19.2.2 Vehicle with the ALLISON transmission*

If the vehicle is equipped with a PTO, it can only be turned
on in the N (Neutral) position. The PTO can not be
activated in D (Drive) mode.
Use the switch 15 to turn the PTO ON/OFF.

- Shift selector lever to neutral (N).
- Start the engine and check the air pressure in the
pneumatic system – it must be of a maximum value.
B 3480
Indicator lamps 25 and 26 must not illuminate.
- Run the engine at idle speed (engine speed is approx.

600 rpm).
- Push the switch 15 . PTO speed is controllable by

the engine speed.
After the PTO is switched on, the indicator lamp 4

will light up indicating PTO switched ON.
WARNING:
If the parking brake is not engaged, it is not possible to
activate PTO. B 3431
as follows:
- using the adjusting screw 1 (Fig. A 7407) or
superstructure.
Switching off the PTOs

- The vehicle must stand.
- Keep the engine idle.
1 2
A 7407
- Press switch 15 to the basic position to disengage
PTO.
- The indicator lamp 4 goes out.
Driving with PTO on

- Insert the "turtle" in the transfer case.
- Turn on the PTO in the N (Neutral) mode.
- Engage L (Low range) at a steady speed of less than 7 km/h.
- Engage D (Drive) at the desired speed higher than 7 km/h.
Driving with the PTO enabled is permitted provided that the maximum PTO speed is not exceeded.
Page 5-86
5.19.3 Superstructure PTO control

a) A vehicle with the TATRA manual gearbox or with semi-automatic gear box TATRA - NORGREN
The PTO control from the superstructure remains the same as from the cab - using the switch "engage clutch
- turn on the PTO - release the clutch", connected to the chassis wiring at the vehicle rear.
Note:
b) A vehicle with the ALLISON transmission

The PTO control from the superstructure remains the same as from the cab - using the switch "turn on the
PTO - turn off the PTO", connected to the chassis wiring at the truck rear.
Note:
Page 5-87
5.20 Switching off the rear axle steering*

The ETS is an electro-hydraulically controlled speed-sensitive rear axle steering system. This system reduces
the turning radius and tire wear to a minimum.
Unlike a mechanically driven axle, the ETS is not equipped with any steering lever transmission, but
electro-hydraulic speed-sensitive steering using a cylinder mechanism.
Speed sensitivity
At speeds up to 25 kph the trailing axle is fully involved in the steering (along with the front axle) when driving
forwards and reversing. Above 25 kph, its share in steering gradually decreases until a speed of 45 kph is
reached. Above 45 kph the trailing axle is fixed exactly in the central position. At higher speeds, thus the
maximum directional stability is ensured.
Rear axle steering control

To deactivate rear axle steering, use push switch with
a lock button 4 ETS (e.g. in case of failure).

Function of push switch with a lock button - see chapter
4.15.11 "Push switch with a lock button".
WARNING!
Activate rear axle steering, deactivate only if the
wheels are in straight direction.
B 3728
a) Deactivation of rear axle steering

- Press button 1 to unlock switch 2, then press bottom of
switch B; by this, rear axle steering will be deactivated.
1 A
Rear axle steering wheels will adjust for driving in straight
direction. In this position, steering of rear wheels is
blocked (deactivated).
2
b) Activation of rear axle steering B
- When switching on the rear axle steering, only switch the
top of switch A. B 2290
Page 5-88
5.21 Central tire inflation system (CTIS)*
5.21.1 Introduction
WARNING:
The operator must fully understand the operation of the central tire inflation system. Please read the
entire contents of this chapter prior to the use of the CTIS. Failure to comply could result in damage to
equipment or injury to personnel.
- The central tire inflation system has been designed to control the air pressure in tires. Tires can be
under-inflated during the ride to increase the go-anywhere ability and inflated again to the original value, or
one or more tired can be inflated separately in case of puncture to finish the ride in emergency.
- The central tire inflation system is used in a soft, muddy and sandy terrain, when driving on greater snow
layer or on firm grassy terrain when climbing a steeper hill.
CAUTION!
When driving in the „on-road operation“ mode, where the maximum speed may reach up to 90 km/h,
tires must be inflated to the specified pressure and wheel shut-off valves must be in position OFF.
A failure to follow this instruction may result in property damage, injury or death of persons.
Tires inflation and underinflation control

- It is controlled electro-pneumatically through electric
switches 1 for tire front axle(s) and 2 for tire

rear axle(s).
B 3480
Each switch has three positions:

Position A - Tire deflation
Pressing switch to position A. A
Pressing the switch to release the air from
the tires.
Position B- Switch OFF (basic position) B
Wheel valves must be closed.
Position C- Tire inflation
Pressing switch to position C. C
Press the switch to inflate the tires.
The wheel valves must be open while inflating and B 2677
deflating.
Page 5-89
Check the pressure in tires using the pressure gauge 3 on

the instrument panel.
For vehicles 6x6 and 8x8 version

- The red pointer shows the pressure tires in rear axles.
- The white pointer shows the pressure tires in front
axle(s).
For vehicles 4x4 version
- The red pointer shows the air pressure in the both
axles tires.
B 3806
- The red pointer is not function.
WARNING:
Minimum tire pressure must not drop below 1.3 bar (130 kPa) (for the front and rear axle(s)) at a speed
of max. 5 km/h. This might cause tire slipping out of the wheel disk. Drive at speed corresponding to
the air pressure in the tires. A failure to follow this instruction may result in property damage, injury or
death of persons.
Basic technical data

The table shows the vehicle speed ((km/h), depending on
the tire air pressure (kPa) and the type of terrain. The
shown air pressure values apply to a laden vehicle.
Note:
This label/plate is located inside the cab at the area
above the driver.
Technical data on the label/plate corresponds to
a specific vehicle version.
B 3595
Description of the label

Symbol of
King of terrain Description
terrain
Road traffic Asphalt or concrete road
Easy traffic Slightly improved road, country road, forest road, dry solid terrain
Heavy traffic Sand, snow, muddy terrain
Emergency
! MIN. (Extreme conditions)
Mud, getting stuck
Page 5-90
- When inflating the tires during the ride, the vehicle speed may not exceed the values indicated on the label
and the maximum speed may not exceed 50 km/h.
- When inflating a vehicle at standstill, the engine optimum speed is 1,600 rpm.
5.21.2 Tire inflation and underinflation

When inflating the tires to press the the lower part
1 2
(position C) switch 1 or 2 .
3
When inflating tires must be engine started.
The respective wheel shut-off valve 3 is open - ON
position.
When deflating the tires to press the upper part (position
A) switch 1 or 2 .
The respective wheel shut-off valve 3 is open - ON
position. B 3679
WARNING:
With the wheel shut-off valves 3 closed (OFF position), switches 1 or 2 must be in the central
position B.
WARNING:
If the air pressure in the braking system drops under the minimum value, the tire inflation system is
out of operation (brake system priority).
To apply the underinflation fully, keep the following rules before entering a difficult terrain:
- Open the gate valves 3 on wheels (ON position). The minimum pressure in tires when driving through a
muddy or sandy terrain may not drop below 1.3 bar (130 kPa) (for front and rear axle(s)) at max. driving
speed of 5 km/h.
- However, it is always necessary to watch deformation of individual tires and underinflate only to the extent
that tire sides do not break.
- When passing through, keep an uniform vehicle speed. If the vehicle gets ditched, do not try to continue
driving forward but try to reverse in the track grooves.
- Having passed a difficult terrain, inflate the tires to the specified pressure as soon as possible (see label)
and close the gate valves 3 (OFF position). Driving on under-inflated tires will reduce their service life,
namely at greater speed.
- That is why it is necessary to follow the speed specified in the label and engage lower gears to increase the
engine speed and so the blower output.
- When inflating the tires during the ride, the vehicle speed may not exceed the values indicated on the label
and the maximum speed may not exceed 50 km/h.
- When inflating a vehicle at standstill, the engine optimum speed is 1,600 rpm.
WARNING:
In periods when frequent tire underinflating is not assumed, close valves 3 (OFF position - on all
wheels) during operation to avoid potential air leaks from tires if the vehicles is not operated for
a longer period of time. In case of a smaller tire puncture, open valve 3 (ON position on the damaged
tire), it can be inflated while driving. The other valves 3 are closed (OFF position).
Page 5-91
5.22 After operation

CAUTION!
Do not park vehicle on a steep incline. Serious injury or death may result..
- Lift foot off of accelerator pedal. Allow automatic downshifting of transmission to slow vehicle.
- Push down on service brake pedal until vehicle comes to complete stop.
- Align front tires in straight-ahead position.
- Secure the vehicle with the parking brake
CAUTION!
The vehicle service brakes, parking brake, or emergency brake must be applied whenever N (Neutral)
is selected to prevent unexpected vehicle movement.
- Turn OFF all lights, heating and other equipment.
- Allow the engine to run at idle speed for 5 minutes as a minimum before shutting off after a full load
operation, or after using the relief exhaust engine brake. This helps the pistons, cylinders and turbocharger
components cool down and in this way heat stress in all engine parts drops.
- Turn the key in the switchbox f to position 0 to shut down the engine.
- Chock wheels.
- Switch OFF the battery disconnector!
- Discharge deposited condensate from air tanks.
- Check the combined suspension of axles for deviation of
any bellow spring.
WARNING:
The speedometer is connected to the batteries
permanently (even after circuit opening by the battery
disconnector). For this reason, to avoid battery
discharging, it is necessary to connect the vehicle to a
power supply by means of the preservation charging
socket, if the vehicle is out of operation for longer than
10 days. This will compensate the battery A 5646
self-discharging process and minimum consumption
of the consumers mentioned above, or disconnect the battery "+" terminal. When putting the vehicle
into operation, do not forget to connect the positive terminal and readjust the speedometer.
Note:
If the cab temperature drops below 19°C, it is first necessary to heat the independent hot-air heater timer to
the temperature when the LCD is legible and then to reset the independent hot-air heater timer.
CAUTION!
If you need to leave the vehicle while the engine is running, the vehicle may suddenly start moving,
resulting in injury or death.
If the engine must be left running, DO NOT LEAVE the vehicle until all of the following is performed:
- Properly pull the parking and emergency brakes.
- Move the gearshift lever to the N (Neutral) position.
- The engine must idle.
- Secure the wheels with wedges and take necessary steps to prevent the vehicle from moving.
WARNING:
When in neutral (N), it is always necessary to use a service, parking or emergency brake to prevent
unexpected vehicle movement.
Page 5-92
5.23 Trailer operation

Only a trailer with the dual-circuit braking system, 24 V electric system and ABS can be coupled to
TATRA FORCE EURO 5 vehicles fitted with the ABS system.
WARNING:
If the vehicle is equipped with ABS, the operation of the vehicle with a trailer NOT EQUIPPED WITH
ABS is forbidden. The only solution is the additional ABS installation in the trailer.
5.23.1 Before connecting a trailer

- Make sure the trailer against spontaneous movement using the parking brake or scotch block under the rear
wheels.
- The front axle of the trailer with the fifth wheel must be rotating freely and released.
- Check the trailer towing fork and eye for damage and proper fitting.
- Check the rubber sealing of pneumatic quick-release couplings and air brake hoses for damage and replace
them, if needed.
- Unfold the coupling hose covers, clean the contact surface and apply a thin oil layer.
- Check the trailer electric system and ABS sockets on the vehicle.
- Check the trailer attachment fastening bolts at the end cross member for proper fitting.
CAUTION!
When handling with the trailer, make sure there is a sufficient distance of the trailer body from the
vehicle and keep the hitch distance from the vehicle contour 500 mm as a minimum.
Use protective gloves and pay extreme attention when coupling the trailer.
When reversing with the vehicle to the trailer shaft if possible do not move between the vehicle and
the trailer.
5.23.2 Recommendations for trailer operation

- Check the trailer brake system for function (specified stroke and return movement of piston rods of brake
cylinders after brake releasing).
- Beware of the total height and mainly length of the vehicle combination.
The trailer’s turning radius is smaller than that of the vehicle.
- First load the towing vehicle and then the trailer.
- To park the vehicle combination, engage the vehicle’s parking brake and the trailer’s parking brake.
When parking on a slope, use chocks to pad up the wheels.
- While reversing, be sure to avoid trailer’s wheels running across.
- Keep the specified allowable weights of the vehicle combination.
Page 5-93
5.23.3 Trailer coupling
5.23.3.1 Trailer coupling with automatic unlocking (RINGFEDER, type 4040 / G150 automatic trailer
hitch)
Coupling
A B
1. Check whether the trailer is secured with the parking
brake and wheels chocked properly.
2. Pull the lever B up; the locking indicator pin A shoots
out.
3. Note the drawbar position and reverse the vehicle until
the drawbar engages. Coupling is effected
automatically.
4. After coupling, always check that locking is effected
properly.
B 2499
5. Locking indicator pin A in unlocked position:

coupling unsafe!
A
B 2493
6. Locking indicator pin A fully level with the front:

coupling safe. A
7. If the locking indicator pin A is not fully level with the
front, the coupling is not safe and you must couple the
trailer again.
8. When coupling, check the coupling head rubbers of
the air pipes of both the truck and the trailer vehicle for
any damage.
9. Connect the brake pipes and the cables for the lighting
and ABS.
B 2494
Uncoupling
1. Put wheel chocks in front and behind the trailer's rigid axle wheels.
2. Be absolutely certain that the trailer is braked.
3. Detach the brake pipes and cables for lighting and ABS.
4. The trailer vehicle coupling can only be opened in the centre position or the two outer positions of the
coupling jaw. (If the coupling jaw is crooked, the coupling pin cannot be unlocked!).
5. Pull the lever B up; the lock indicator pin A pops out. This will lift the pintle and the tow bar can be shifted
out of the hitch head.
6. Step out of the space between the vehicles.
7. Move the vehicle out of the trailer.
8. Remove the trailer eye to release the hitch mechanism again, the hitch will close and lock.
9. The indicator pin will align with the front part A.
Page 5-94
5.23.3.2 Trailer connection with manual unlocking (non-automatic ROCKINGER RO 225 G110 trailer)*
Coupling a trailer
1. Check whether the trailer is secured with the parking
brake and wheels chocked properly. II
2. Pull the lock head 1 in the direction of the arrow. 1
3. Move the hand lever 2 up to position II to unlock the
I
trailer.
This will lift the coupling pin.
4. Carefully reverse to the drawbar until the towing rod
reaches the hitch towing head.
2
5. Once the trailer's eye touches the towing head, the
coupling pin is engaged and the hand lever
automatically moves to position I to secure it. B 3590
6. Always check the locking after connection.

7. Then check that the lock head 1 is properly engaged.
The lock head 1 must not protrude (in the unlocked
position): the connection is not safe!
The lock head 1 must be inserted and aligned with the
front: the connection is safe (see Fig. B 3591).
8. If the lock head 1 is not fully inserted into the front, the
connection is not secure and the trailer must be
re-coupled.
9. When connecting, check the rubber gasket of coupling
heads, air hoses of the vehicle and trailer for damage.
10. Connect the brake hoses and electrical cables for B 3591
lighting and ABS.
CAUTION!
Assistance of another person is required to connect the hitch to the automatic towing device. It is
necessary to brief an assistant and agree on clear signaling. While connecting, the assistant is
between the vehicle and trailer, which is why it is necessary to take extreme care. A failure may result
in injury or death.
Trailer uncoupling
1. Support the wheels of fixed axle with chocks (from both sides).
2. Carefully make sure the trailer brake is actually engaged.
3. Disconnect the brake hoses and electrical cables for lighting and ABS.
4. Release the hitch. Pull the lock head 1 in the direction of the arrow.
Move hand lever 2 up to position II.
This will lift the pintle and the tow bar can be shifted out of the hitch head.
5. Exit from the space between the vehicle and the trailer or between the vehicles.
Move the vehicle out of the trailer/vehicle.
6. Remove the trailer/vehicle towing rod to release the hitch mechanism.
7. Release the lock head 1 and return the hand lever 2 to its original position, check that it is properly closed
and locked.
8. Make sure the air coupling heads and electrical sockets are closed with the lids.
Page 5-95
Closing the hitch manually

- Lift the coupling pin using a suitable tool (e.g. mounting lever).
CAUTION!
Do not put your hands on the hitch head. Risk of accident when closing automatically!
5.23.4 Connecting the brake lines of a trailer

The vehicle has automatic coupling heads which are used
to connect the air pipes. Connect the air pipes with these
connectors. These coupling heads have safety lugs which
make it impossible to connect the air pipes incorrectly. The
coupling heads on the trailer vehicle must of course have
corresponding safety lugs.
In case of a mistake while connecting the air lines, the air
brakes on the trailer vehicle do not release.
WARNING:
Depending on the type of trailer, a trailer with empty air
reservoirs does not brake automatically. B 2495
This makes it possible to drive away with an unbraked
trailer.
This can lead to very dangerous situations.
- Connect a trailer correctly.
- Be sure the air reservoirs are filled before driving off.
- Before starting a journey check if the trailer brake operates.
When the red coupling head is properly connected, the brake system of the trailer vehicle starts filling.
This can be noticed quite clearly. At the same time there is a marked drop in pressure in the air reservoirs
of the vehicle.
red = emergency line coupling head

yellow = service line coupling head
CAUTION!
If the yellow and/or red air lines have not been connected, the trailer cannot brake.
This can lead to very dangerous situations.
- Always connect the yellow and red air lines correctly.
Page 5-96
5.23.5 Connecting the ABS connector of a trailer

ABS: Anti-lock Braking System
A trailer with ABS is fitted with an anti-lock braking system.
The ABS system is connected using a special plug into a

special socket for the ABS on the vehicle.
If the plug is not connected, yellow indicator light 13

appears on the instrument panel.
B 2496
5.23.6 Connecting the trailer lighting

A 7-pin socket is provided for connecting the lighting of the
trailer vehicle. Furthermore, there is an additional 7-pin
socket on the truck, which can be used for connecting
accessories which are fitted on the trailer.
The two sockets have different designs to rule out the
possibility of making incorrect connections.
If the trailer has a 24V electrical system, it can be
connected to the electrical system of the vehicle without
having to take any special measures.
Note:
Be aware of the maximum power drawn by the trailer lights. B 2497
When the current is too high, there is a risk of blown fuses

and possible loss of vehicle and/or trailer lighting..
5.23.7 Coupling with trailer

1. First, connect the hose to the filling head 3 (red). Floor
the brake pedal shortly to check whether pressured air
leaks from the control head 5 (yellow) to reassure
proper functioning of the trailer braking valve.
1 2
2. No sooner than now connect the hose to the control
head 5 (yellow). Make sure the hoses are connected 3
with heads properly.
3. Plug the electric wiring plug in the socket 1. 5
4. Connect the trailer supplementary lighting plug to the 4
socket 2. 1
B 2487
5. Connect the trailer ABS coupling cable to socket 4.
Page 5-97
5.23.8 Uncoupling the vehicle from a trailer

1. Disconnect the electrical cables for lighting 1, 2 and ABS system 4.
2. Disconnect the brake hoses - the filling head 3 (red) and the control head 5 (yellow).
CAUTION!
Disconnect the air supply line quick-release coupling 3 first (red).
This will activate the trailer brake. Only after that disconnect the brake pressure line quick-release
coupling 5 (yellow).
3. Make sure the brake caps (the filling and control heads), the trailer platform tilt control and the electrical
sockets are covered with lids.
5.23.9 Trailer coupling indicator lamps

Information on the trailer coupling indicator lamps (see chapter 5.11.4 "Brake system indicator lamps" and
capter 5.11.7 “Vehicle and trailer ABS indicator lamp”).
Page 5-98
5.24 Spare wheel lifting equipment
5.24.1 Spare wheel lifting equipment - mechanical version*

Spare wheel replacement
6
- A spare wheel can be replaced after unlocking and 5
folding the arm with a spare.
CAUTION!
Use protective gloves for handling with spare wheel. 4
Do not stay under spare wheel suspended.
Keep correct winding direction when winding a rope 1
on the lifting equipment drum.
The cable must be wound uniformly in layers, with no 2 3
crossing. Check the cable for wear and damage.
Replace cable with a new one immediately, if damaged. B 1755
1
Spare wheel lowering

- Shift the gearshift lever to neutral and chock the wheels.
- Make sure the cable 5 enlacing the spare wheel 3 is properly anchored in snap-hook.
- Use the wheel nut wrench from the outfit to unscrew both spare wheel mounting bolts and remove the
packing piece 4.
- Fit the crank 1 from the vehicle outfit on the worm gear shaft of the lifting device 2.
- Lift the spare wheel 3 slightly (by rotating the crank/lever counterclockwise).
- Deflect the holder arm 6 with the spare wheel 3 clockwise and lower the wheel to the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not stay in the wheel route when lowering and lifting! Pay extreme attention when working with
spare wheel on the road. The arm with the spare wheel reaches far from the vehicle when lowered on
the ground.
Spare wheel lifting

- Attach a replacement wheel to the swinging arm by means of a fixing wire and snap.
- Rotate the crank counter-clockwise to raise the spare wheel and stabilize its position using an assembly
lever at the same time, until the wheel disc fits onto the guiding pieces on the base holder.
- Fit the packing piece 4 and tighten both mounting bolts.
- Store the assembling lever, tubular spanner control crank-handle and back to the toolbox.
WARNING:
If the vehicle is operated without a spare wheel, lock the lifting swivel arm in the transport position
using a clamping strap.
Page 5-99
5.24.2 Spare wheel lifting equipment - hydraulic version*

CAUTION!
3
Use extreme caution when handling with the spare
wheel. Do not stay in the wheel route when lowering
and lifting!
Pay extreme attention when working with spare wheel 1
on the road. The arm with the spare wheel reaches far
from the vehicle when lowered on the ground.
If you stay on the road with the vehicle when changing
wheel, take on a vest and place a warning triangle at a
prescribed distance behind the vehicle. To ensure your
personal safety, secure the vehicle adequately in
accordance with applicable regulations. 2
When replacing a wheel on the road, be very careful to
avoid danger to road traffic and your safety.
B 1945
Spare wheel lowering

6 7
- Shift the gearshift lever to neutral and chock the wheels. 5
- Make sure that there is no obstacle in the path of the arm 4
with the spare wheel lowering!
- Release the tiedown strap 5. 1
- Unscrew two bolts 6 locking the arm 7 with the spare 3
wheel from the spare wheel holder 2. Use the wrench 4 2
from the vehicle toolkit to dismantle the bolts 6. I
- The hydraulic control unit designed for tilting and lifting
the spare wheel (hydraulic pump) 3 is located behind the
II 1
B 1943
cab on the vehicle left.
- The hydraulic pump 3, move to position I "lowering" according to the figure.
- Fit the assembly lever (from the vehicle toolkit) to the socket on the hydraulic pump controller 3 and slowly
start pumping to lower the arm with the spare wheel 7 until it seats on the ground.
- Once the wheel seats to the ground, unscrew three nuts 1 attaching the spare wheel to the arm.
- To replace a wheel, carefully roll the spare wheel out of the spare wheel holder arm.
Spare wheel lifting
- Attach the wheel using three nuts 1 to the spare wheel holder arm 7.
- Set the controller on the hydraulic pump 3 from position I ("lowering") to position II "lifting" according to the
figure.
- Fit the assembly lever (from the vehicle toolkit) to the socket on the hand pump 3 controller and slowly start
pumping to raise the spare wheel arm 7 to the upper position.
- While lifting the arm, the tire must not come to a contact with the vehicle body.
- After lifting the arm with the spare wheel 7, bolt the arm using two bolts 6 to the spare wheel holder 2.
- Secure the spare wheel and tilting arm with the tiedown strap 5.
- Leave the controller on the hydraulic pump 3 in position II "lifting".
WARNING:
Secure the spare wheel holder arm with bolts 6 in the upper transport position and, when operating
Page 5-100
the vehicle, without the spare wheel. Make sure that the spare wheel tilting arm is secured against
tilting with the bolts 6.
5.25 Wheels and tires

The check is to be carried out when the tires are cold.
- Check if tires, including a spare wheel, have the right air pressure.
- Check the condition of tires, how much they are worn, the depth of the tread pattern (follow legal
regulations).
- Check the tread pattern for any external objects.
- Check the tires for any mechanical damage.
- The driving speed, driving safety and the vehicle's driving characteristics, as wells as the durability of the
tires depend on the right tire air pressure.
- If the tire pressure is too low, driving safety and driving ability of the tire is decreased.
If the tire pressure is constantly decreasing, you must check if there are not any external objects in the tires
and if there is not any air leakage from wheels or valves.
- After a fast ride, tire pressure in warm tires may increase by up to 100 kPa (1.0 bar). In no case deflate the
tire. In winter, this requirement is to be observed when the air pressure is checked in heated or warm
facilities.
5.25.1 Instructions to extend the tire service life

- Drive with tires inflated properly.
If they are underinflated, the wear is faster on the outer
side of the tread.
If they are overinflated, the wear is faster on the middle of
the tread.
- Do not overload the tires (e.g. by incorrect load
distribution, exceeding maximum load weight).
- Tire wear increases with higher driving speed.
- Avoid crossing the curbstone edges.
If necessary, cross them perpendicularly and at lowest
A 5502
speed possible.
- Check the geometry of the front steerable axle and rear axles regularly.
- Take care that stones are not wedged between twin wheels of rear axles.
Page 5-101
5.25.2 Pressure and inflation check

Most TATRA FORCE vehicle models are fitted with a label
showing the tires inflation pressures related to the tires
specified and the gross vehicle weight.
This plate is located inside the cab on the gearshift panel
side wall next to the driver's seat or on the driver's door
side plate.
B 3749
Some TATRA FORCE vehicle modifications (equipped with

the CTIS) have a label which specifies tire inflation values
depending on the type and nature of the road surface to
enable comfortable and smooth ride.
This label is fitted to the instrument (ceiling) panel before
the driver.
B 3595
5.25.3 Tire inflation from an external source

Tires can also be manually inflated independently of the CTIS. Standard valves for manual inflation are
mounted on each wheel. The valves lead into the duct directly connected to the tire. The manual inflation
valve goes directly outside the wheels and is therefore easily accessible by the vehicle operator.
The tires can be inflated to the recommended pressure

also independently (through the hose from the vehicle 1 2
equipment), from tire inflator 5 from the workshop
compressed air distribution system or a compressor.
3
- In case the vehicle is equipped CTIS (inflating and
deflating tires) must then be turned OFF and valves 3 on
wheels must be closed (OFF position).
B 3679
Page 5-102
Tire filling from tire inflator

The tire inflator 5 is located on the vehicle right side at the air dryer 4 to inflate the tires.
- Activate the parking brake.

- Shift into neutral N. 1
- Clean the tire inflator cap 5 properly.
- In case the vehicle is equipped CTIS (inflating and 2
deflating tires) must then be turned OFF and valves 3 on 8 3
wheels must be closed (OFF position).
7
- Dismantle the cap from the inflator 5 outlet and screw an
inflating hose instead (provided in the outfit).
- Unscrew the valve cap on the wheels. 6 5 4 B 1520
- Start the engine.
- Control the inflating rate by engine speed.
- After inflating tires, reinstall the valve cap and fit the cap on the tire inflator.
- The compressed air from the tire inflator can also be used to clean the equipment.
Always check the tire pressure before a ride (after operation it may be increased by up to 20% due to tire
heating up).
Page 5-103
5.25.4 Replacing a wheel

CAUTION!
When replacing a wheel, put the vehicle out of the road so that it does not form a traffic obstacle and
to avoid injury to the vehicle crew. This operation requires cooperation of two persons.
Use protecting gloves when replacing a wheel.
Park the vehicle on a flat, hard surface to assure stability of a hydraulic jack. A failure to follow this
instruction may result in an injury or death of persons.
- When replacing a wheel on road, always use warning devices (warning lights, warning triangle, wear an
alert jacket) and secure the vehicle properly in accordance with regulations.
Wheel removal
Study illustration of wheel assembly (below) to locate and
identify the components described in this procedure. This
task requires two personnel.
- Position tire ramp directly in front or behind flat tire
(position 1).
- With the aid a ground guide, drive vehicle forward or off
to position flat tire centered onto tire ramp (position 2, 3).
- Set vehicle parking brake.
Gearshift lever is in N position ("neutral").
Chock at least two wheels.
A 6599
- Locate bottle jack and wooden block from tools provide
with vehicle. Use wooden block to provide stable level platform for bottle jack. In field conditions it may be
necessary to dig and/or fill to create suitable position for lifting jack. See drawings to locate jack points to lift
axle.
- To lift the TATRA FORCE chassis featuring the front and rear axles suspended with air-filled rubber
suspension and hydraulic shock absorbers, lifting jacks should be placed under the cylindrical portion of
half-axles.
The following figures show lifting points for lifting of axle:

Jack locations for front axle.
A 2796
Page 5-104
Jack location for rear axle.
A 7702
Exceptionally, you can place the jack under the lower

holder of the hydraulic shock absorber.
CAUTION!
With respect to small contact surface between the
jack and the half-axle, proceed with extreme care
when lifting the half-axle. Serious personal injury may
occur.
A 6329
If you change a wheel on the rear axles suspended by leaf

springs, place the jack strictly under the leaf spring hanger
yoke.
CAUTION!
Never place the jack under the leaf spring. The leaf
spring hanger yoke may move out from its position
causing a serious injury.
A 4166
Page 5-105
- If the vehicle is equipped with a central tire inflation

system (CTIS), disconnect it from the wheel first. 2 3 4 5
Unscrew the valve nut 4. Unscrew the hollow screw 3
securing the inflation valve 5 to the brake drum 6.
Remove the inflation valve 5. Properly protect the inlet 1 6
channel (hollow bolt hole 3) in the brake drum 6 against
entering dirt.
- Loosen seven wheel nuts 1 that fasten the wheel 2 to the
brake drum 6.
- Jack lift the half-axle to relieve the wheel. Lift the wheel
only to a minimum height where it no longer touches the B 3676
ground.
- Deflate tire by removing tire inflation valve core from valve stem using readily available generic removal tool.
- Probe valve stem tube with length of rigid wire to verify valve stem is open and that tire is truly deflated.
CAUTION!
Tire can explode during disassembly if not completed deflated. Serious injury or death could result.
- Unscrew nine wheel nuts. Leave top-most nut loose but fully engaged with all threads for safety.
This will hold wheel in place while other nuts are removed. Retain nuts for reassembly.
CAUTION!
Wheel assembly is heavy! Two people required.
- While two people hold wheel assembly on vehicle for safety, remove last nut. Remove wheel from axle by
rocking assembly left-to-right while slowly pulling assembly off away from vehicle.
A lond crow bar between the ground and tire can be helpful.
TIP: Keep wheel upright on tread to provide easy access to front and back of wheel for next steps.
- Arrange for repair of a tire punctured in an authorized TATRA FORCE repair shop.
Wheel installation
Wheel assembly should already be completed and inflated.
- Vehicle equipped with the Central Tire Inflation System (CTIS).
Roll wheel next to axle hub. Rotate wheel assembly so CTIS (Central Tire Inflation System) wheel valve air
supply piping is in position to meet with air supply port on axle hub when wheel is installed.
- Adjust bottle jack so axle hub is just higher than top of rim opening.
CAUTION!
Wheel assembly is heavy! Two people required.
- With long cow bar under center of tire, pry wheel assembly up and onto axle hub. Push wheel assembly
back on to wheel studs. Quickly install top most nut to keep wheel assembly from falling off vehicle.
- Verify CTIS air supply piping is aligned with air supply port on axle hub. If not, remove wheel, rotate,
and reinstall.
- Inspect for damage and clean all wheel mounting studs. Start nuts by hand to assure threads are not
crossed.
- Moving in a “start” pattern, slowly tighten all mounting nuts by 6 mm to 12 mm (1/4” to 1/2”) steps.
While tightening, manually push wheel assembly back onto mounting studs.
Page 5-106
WARNING:
Do not apply excessive torque with the impact tool. Do not approach final torque using impact tool.
- After mounting nuts are beginning to tighten, verify wheel rim is completely square against axle hub.
Apply a moderate amount of torque to wheel mounting nuts with impact tool - approximately 135 Nm.
- Install the inflation valve 5 (Fig. B3676) to the brake drum 6 using the hollow bolt 3 and the valve nut 4.
Tighten the hollow bolt 3, the valve nut 4 and open the inflation valve 5.
- Lower the jack so that the whole tire sufficiently seats to the ground, and that the wheel does not spin when
using a torque wrench.
- Use torque wrench to set the final torque. Torque must be applied, with a torque wrench, in star pattern.
- Pattern should be repeated three times at 135 Nm, 320 Nm and finally at 650 ±50 Nm.
After installing the wheel, remove the jack, pad and wheel chocks to secure the vehicle against movement.
- Inflate the tires to the specified pressure.
A CTIS equipped vehicle. Run engine and use CTIS system to finish wheel inflation.
Use soap and water solution to check for air leaks at axle hub and around CTIS valve piping while CTIS
system is running.
CAUTION!
After covering 50 to 160 km, the wheel should be retightened to about 650 Nm and then, at regular
intervals during the maintenance, checked for loosening.
Page 5-107
5.26 Emergency vehicle towing - recommended precautions

Obey the following instructions when towing a broken-down vehicle:
- On principle, use a towing bar to tow the vehicle.
- Use protecting gloves when coupling.
- The towing vehicle should be loaded to the total weight.
CAUTION!
Towing a fully loaded vehicle or a coupled vehicle can cause unstable vehicle behaviour in critical
driving situations on a towing or towed vehicle.
There is a serious danger. High forces and stresses in the chassis and drive systems of both vehicles
may also lead to vehicle damage.
- Do not pull the towed vehicle when fully loaded or with a trailer (trailer) coupled.
Towing another vehicle

CAUTION!
The vehicle must not be towed at a greater angle than 20° to the vehicle axis.
The towed vehicle can be positioned asymmetrically behind the vehicle (left or right).
Towing at an angle greater than 20°to the vehicle axis may cause unstable vehicle behaviour in critical
driving situations on a towing or towed vehicle.
There is a serious danger. High forces and stresses in the chassis and drive systems of both vehicles
may also lead to vehicle damage.
CAUTION!
- Short distance towing: Release the spring brake cylinders.
- Long distance towing: Use a towing vehicle.
If the engine is not running while towing and no further action is taken, the power steering is not
working and the air is not supplied to the brake system.
As a result, steering is difficult and a greater force is required to depress the brake pedal, which
eventually leads to the automatic activation of the parking brake. There is a risk of very dangerous
situations.
Towing a vehicle over a long distance

If the vehicle is to be moved over a long distance, a towing vehicle must be used to lift the towed vehicle under
the front axle. Do not start the engine, there is a risk of engine lubrication failure
Page 5-108
5.26.1 Recommended precautions for towing with another vehicle

a) Vehicle equipped with the manual gearbox TATRA
Engine
If possible, let the engine run to assure serviceability of the braking system and power steering.
Transmission assemblies, axles

- Before towing, check and/or top up oil in the transmission
unit (transmission, transfer case).
- If the engine TATRA is damaged mechanically (cannot
crank freely) and manual gearbox TATRA is
functioning, disconnect the propeller shaft from the
transmission and shift into the highest gear so that the
transmission oil pump is working when towing the
vehicle.
A 5303
- a) transmission assembly (main transmission, auxiliary
transmission) - the transmission assembly cannot rotate - impossible to shift into neutral or there is a
significant loss of oil; or
- b) axle ring gearing, or
- c) differential it is necessary to disengage the front drive and remove the drive shafts of the rear axle(s)
before towing.
In the event of faults a, b, c, always disconnect the propeller shaft from the engine if the engine is running
while towing.
WARNING:
Always disconnect the propeller shaft before towing the vehicle. If the propeller shaft remains
connected while towing vehicle, serious damage to the transmission may occur.
b) Vehicle equipped with the ALLISON transmission

Engine
If possible, let the engine run to assure serviceability of the braking system and power steering.
Transmission assemblies, axles

- Before towing, check and/or top up oil in the transmission
unit (transmission, transfer case).
- If the TATRA engine is damaged (it cannot freely rotate)
or the ALLISON transmission does not freely rotate
(cannot shift into neutral or there is a significant loss of
oil), always disconnect the propeller shaft from the
auxiliary transmission.
- a) transmission assembly (main transmission, auxiliary
A 5303
transmission) - the transmission assembly cannot rotate -
impossible to shift into neutral or there is a significant loss of oil; or
- b) axle ring gearing, or
Page 5-109
c) differential
- it is necessary to disengage the front drive and remove the drive shafts of the rear axle(s) before towing.
- In the event of faults a, b, c, always disconnect the propeller shaft from the ALLISON automatic
transmission if the engine is running while towing (automatic transmission must be functional).
Axles equipped with reductions in wheels:

- With the wheel reductions, before towing, it is
necessary to remove central gears of all rear axle 2
reductions in the following way: 1
1. Drain the oil from reduction gears.
2. Remove:
- wheels and the drum;
- reduction gear cover 1;
- outer ring gear 2;
3. Outer ring gear 2 to save the cab.
4. Mounted back: B 3736
- reduction gear cover 1;

- wheels and the drum.
Brake system during emergency towing

- In the event of a fault (engine, compressor) when it is not possible to provide the operating pressure in the
brake system of the trailed vehicle, the brake system must be filled with air in another way. It is necessary to
interconnect the brake systems of both vehicles with a connecting hose. The air-fill quick-release coupling
of a towed vehicle is located at the driver's side boarding steps.
- In the towing vehicle, connect it to the filling head (on the rear bumper) and, on the towed vehicle, to the
filling head located at the boarding stairs on the driver's side.
On the towing vehicle the brake head must be connected with the head covered by plug to avoid the air
leakage during braking.
- In case of failure when sufficient pressure cannot be ensured to release the braking cylinders fully, it is
necessary to suppress their braking effect for emergency towing.
CAUTION!
Prior to emergency releasing of the spring-mounted braking cylinders on the rear axles, secure the
vehicle in both directions with blocks and connect it using a towing bar to a loaded vehicle with the
parking brake engaged.
A driver of the securing vehicle must be in the driver's cab. A failure may result in injury or death.
- To release the brake cylinders in emergency, unscrew the

releasing bolts 1 from the cylinders 2 clockwise until 2
releasing is achieved.
Unscrew the bolts partly only (to the distance of about
50 - 60 mm or 33 mm - measured from the brake cylinder 1
bottom).
CAUTION!
Never loosen the parking brake on a slope without
taking safety measures! Releasing the parking brake
on the slope causes spontaneous movement of the
vehicle. This may result in very dangerous situations F 0068
and serious injury or damage to the vehicle
Page 5-110
- Having repaired the defect in the braking system, screw the releasing bolts 1 back into the brake cylinders 2.
Electrical installation for emergency towing

- Turn the key in the ignition key to "0", to unlock the
steering wheel
CAUTION!
When towing, never have the ignition switch in STOP
position! Locking of steering wheel may result in
accident of both vehicles.
B 1372
Emergency power steering circuit while emergency towing

The vehicle is equipped with an additional servo pump located on the transfer case, which is disabled when
towing (driveshafts dismantled). Indicator lamp 16 is on.
CAUTION!
The power steering does not work when being towed. This causes difficult steering of the towed
vehicle.
When towing a vehicle in emergency, the towing bar can be coupled to:
Towing device in the front bumper
In case of emergency towing of a broken vehicle, connect
the towing bar onto the auxiliary hitch attachment in the
front bumper.
Note:
Before coupling the towing bar, remove all possible
accessories from the bumper (e.g. winch, etc.)
B 1447
The hitch on the rear cross member (towing hook)

Some vehicle versions can be equipped with a hitch
(towing hook) at the rear of the chassis.
This hitch (towing hook) should only be used for
emergency rescue.
WARNING:
Do not connect a trailer to the small hitch.
A 5648
Page 5-111
Rear rescue pintle hooks

The rear pintle hook 1 has two eyes:
- The upper eyes in the pintle hooks are used as towing
eyes;
- The lower eyes in the pintle hooks are used as anchor
(tie-down) eyes.
The rear hitches (pintle hooks) 1 are designed for rescue,

emergency towing and anchoring the vehicle on/in the
means of transport (on a flat bed, freight car, etc.), lifting 1 2 1
the vehicles with a crane or mounting an electric winch. B 2629
Shackles can also be attached into the pintle hooks.

WARNING:
The maximum load to one pintle hook is 1/2 of the total vehicle's maximum weight.
Page 5-112
5.27 Cranking the engine by towing

If the vehicle needs to be started by towing, it can be carried out as follows.
a) Vehicle equipped with the ALLISON automatic transmission

Vehicle equipped with the ALLISON automatic transmission cannot be towed to start the engine.
b) Vehicle equipped with the TATRA manual gearbox or a semi-automatic transmission

TATRA-NORGREN system
Tow the vehicle to crank it up only under quite exceptional circumstances if necessary and make sure all
safety measures are kept.
WARNING:
Always use a tow-bar, never use a rope to crank a vehicle by towing.
Use protecting gloves when coupling.
Before connecting, secure the vehicle in both directions with blocks and connect it using a towing bar
to a loaded vehicle with a parking brake engaged.
After the coupling with the tow-bar remove the wheel blocks.
CAUTION!
A driver of the towing vehicle must be in the driver's cab. A failure may result in injury or death.
Safety precautions for vehicle towing

- Never crank up the engine by towing if the engine,
transmission assemblies, axles, steering or
compressor is damaged.
- The towing vehicle must always be loaded to a greater
total weight than that of the towed vehicle.
- Make sure that the brake systems of both vehicles are
pressurized properly (from an external source or by
connecting the brake systems of both vehicles).
- Batteries of the impaired vehicle must be charged
B 3753
partially at least.
- Use a tow bar. Never a rope.
- Do not crank up at reverse speed.
- When cranking up by towing, drive straight only as the steering does not work.
- If the spring cylinders have been released mechanically by loosening of bolts, the parking brake will not
work!
- Fix the tow-bar in the towing hitch of the front bumper of the towed vehicle and in the towing device of the
towing vehicle.
Page 5-113
- If the towed vehicle allows so, interconnect both vehicles

with compressed air through the air supply fitting located
behind the front bumper where the red coupling head
should be screwed. Otherwise, loosen the bolts on the
spring brake cylinders as described above (see Section
6.26."Emergency vehicle towing ").
Vehicle towing procedure:

- If the vehicle has not been in operation for a longer time, B 1778
top up the fuel using the electric or manual pump.
- Put the ignition key to position I.
- Engage the 4th speed at low or high range.
- Floor the clutch and tow the vehicle with the clutch floored until required speed is achieved.
- Then, release the clutch pedal carefully and floor the accelerator pedal to turn on the engine.
- After starting the engine:
If the spring cylinders have been released mechanically, block the towing vehicle wheels with scotch blocks
in both directions before uncoupling and screw the bolts in.
The parking brake does not work after releasing the spring braking cylinders mechanically.
CAUTION!
When connecting or disconnecting the towbar from the towing vehicle, never put your hand near the
towing hitch. A failure to comply may result in serous injury to personnel.
Page 5-114
5.28 Winter operation

A good preparation, correct service and operation are essential for the vehicle to render a reliable
service in winter.
Wash the vehicle during winter frequently and thoroughly to remove aggressive dirt with salt content, if the
vehicle is parked in a heated garage.
Treat the locks of doors, fuel tank, toolkit, fuel can and superstructure against freezing.
Fuel
Desludge the fuel tank before the winter period. When temperatures drop to 0°C, use winter diesel fuel where
the manufacturer guarantees operational safety to -22 °C.
Make sure that no water penetrates into the fuel tank while refueling (snow may get in when opening the cap).
Fuel preheating in the coarse fuel filter*

The vehicle may be equipped with a fuel preheater in the coarse fuel filter. For this reason, the operational
reliability of the diesel fuel is ensured down to the ambient temperature of -25 °C.
Fuel tank
Always fill up the tank after the ride, in this way you
eliminate water condensation on tank inner walls, namely
during winter months.
A 6323
AdBlue (fuel)
The AdBlue tank is automatically heated by the coolant and AdBlue lines area heated electrically (by
resistance heating). Nevertheless, take into account the freezing point of AdBlue (just below zero), the
catalyst works only above 200 °C. When it's freezing, it may take a while before the SCR system becomes
functional.
Oils
For the information on engine and
transmission oils see Chapter 7 -
"Overview of lubricants and operating
fluids".
Use the listed oils and lubricants all year
long.
B 1122
Batteries
The batteries are subject to a greater strain during winter. Their capacity and starting ability are diminished
under low temperatures. Therefore, check the charge status of rechargeable batteries more often. If the
vehicle is put out of operation for a period longer than ten days, charge the batteries from the preservation
charging socket.
Page 5-115
Windshield wipers
In order to avoid damage to the rubber blades in winter, check whether they are not frozen to the windshield.
Pad the wipers appropriately to avoid the sticking. Clean the wipers with water and wipe dry using soft cloth
regularly.
Windshield washer
Drain the water from the windshield washer (by suction or consuming before winter) and fill it with antifreeze.
Switch on the washer pump shortly after the liquid has been refilled to expel remaining water from the system.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions.
Tires
Check all tires for capability for winter operation. Replace inappropriate ones.
Snow chains*
- Snow chains may be installed on the rear axle wheels only to assure good driving ability on snow and ice.
Always mount the chains on the wheels of one axle. The axle next to the last is the easiest one for
chain installation.
- Always use a chain size corresponding to the tire size.
- It is advisable to test the snow chain installation on the vehicle before actual use in winter conditions.
- For your safety you should have snow chains fitted on when driving on the snowy and icy roads.
- When driving with chains, maximum on-road speed permitted is 50 km/h, off-road 40 km/h.
- Tires should be properly inflated.
Never install chains on underinflated tires, even with the intent to inflate them later. Damage to the chain
and then to tires may occur. The same danger threatens when using chains with cracked or damaged links.
- When driving with snow chains, vehicle performance is changing, and therefore it is necessary to avoid
sharp jump-starting and braking.
- Snow chains require protection against corrosion.
After use, it is therefore necessary to rinse the chains (preferably hot water) and store them back into the
pack after thorough drying. After the winter season the chains should be treated with an anticorrosion agent.
- Always follow the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING:
The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for incorrect use of sow chains and resulting damage
to the tires.
CAUTION!
With the snow chains fitted on, do neither inflate nor deflate the tires while driving. A failure may
damage the tire or vehicle, or cause personal injury.
Page 5-116
5.28.1 Starting the vehicle from the external source

Should the batteries themselves not be enough to start the engine, you can increase their capacity so that you
connect a 24 VDC external source.
The vehicle can be started:
- from 2x12V batteries of another vehicle;
- from an external battery power supply designed for starting of truck engines.
CAUTION!
Due to the fact that the vehicles are equipped with the electronic device for the engine automatic
cooling control and other electronically actuated accessories, such as the ABS, speed limiter,
independent hot-air heater, etc., you must never use the network source when starting the engine by
means of the external source because electronic control units and their devices may be damaged.
The electronic devices have been designed for the over-voltage of 30 V as a maximum.
When the network source is used, the voltage peaks may exceed 40 V. Loosen the battery plugs and
use some cloth or cardboard to cover them. Wear the eye protection and rubber gloves.
If you do not observe this recommendation, damage to the vehicle or a serious injury to operators
may occur.
- Use the cable or leads specially designed for this purpose when using starting aids.
- The auxiliary start jumper cables clips must be connected to battery terminals properly.
Starting the vehicle using the battery of another vehicle

Auxiliary start procedure:
1. Vehicles must be positioned in such a distance from each other so that their batteries may be connected
using jumper cables, while any contact between the vehicle bodies is excluded.
2. Apply the parking brake and move the gear-shift lever to the neutral position on both vehicles.
3. Turn off all electrical accessories on both vehicles.
4. Prior to connect the external source, first turn the batteries cut-off switches both on the started vehicle and
on the auxiliary vehicle off.
5. Connect batteries of both vehicles using a jumper cable for the auxiliary start in the following sequence:
a) Connect the red terminal cable first to the positive (+)
pole of the discharged battery.
b) Connect the other end of the red terminal cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the battery, which is a
current supplier.
c) Connect the black terminal cable first to the negative
(-) pole of the battery, which supplies the current.
d) Connect the other end of the black terminal cable to
the negative (-) pole of the discharged battery.
WARNING:
Cable clips must not touch during battery connection.
Take care that the red positive (+) terminal does neither A 6384
touch the body nor the vehicle frame (-).
6. Make sure once more that cable clips are connected and attached properly and see that they do not touch
any movable vehicle components.
7. Switch ON the battery disconnector of the auxiliary vehicle.
8. Just before the starting, switch ON the started vehicle disconnector.
Page 5-117
8. Immediately after the engine of the started vehicle starts, turn the engine and the batteries cut-off switch
of the auxiliary vehicle off and disconnect the jumper cables (first from negative batteries terminals and
then from positive batteries terminals).
CAUTION!
Do not operate the starter motor for more than 10 seconds when starting the engine - a high current
take-off occurs during the start and both clips and cables warm up very much. To allow cooling, make
a 30 s-pause between starting attempts at least. When you do not obey these instructions, you can
acid yourself or suffer an injury due to the battery explosion and/or the electric equipment of both
vehicles may be damaged.
If the batteries are completely discharged and the engine is running, do not disconnect the jumper
cables immediately. Before disconnecting the jumper cables, the engine must run for at least about 3
minutes to prevent damage to the electrical system (high voltage!).
If the batteries are discharged fully, proceed after the engine starting as follows:
- Turn on as many electric consumers as possible (headlamps, fog lamps, fan, heater, etc.).
- After about 2-3 minutes of the engine running, disconnect the jumper cables.
- After another about 3 minutes, gradually switch off consumers except for the headlamps.
Starting with two-pin socket ZAB 24 V
The auxiliary starting procedure:

1. Both vehicles must stand in such a mutual distance
that their accumulators can be connected via an
auxiliary start cable and, at the same time, any contact 4
of both bodies must be avoided.
3
CAUTION!
Ensure vehicles are not touching one another during
the emergency starting. Failure to comply may result 2 1
in electrical shock.
2. Engage the parking brakes of both vehicles and set
B 2522
the gearshift lever to neutral N.
3. Switch off all electric consumers in both vehicles.
4. Before connecting an external power supply, turn off the battery disconnector of the started and auxiliary
vehicle (source) first.
5. Loosen the wing nut at socket 1 and fold up the socket cover.
6. First, plug the connecting cables to the socket of the started vehicle and the other ends to the external
source.
7. Switch on the auxiliary vehicle (source) battery disconnector.
8. Just before starting, switch ON the started vehicle disconnector.
9. Immediately after engine starting, switch OFF the auxiliary vehicle (source) disconnector and disconnect
the connecting cables (first from negative and then from positive terminals).
Page 5-118
WARNING:
If an auxiliary source is represented by a vehicle equipped with an alternator and its engine is running
when starting, stop the engine before turning the disconnector OFF.
cables immediately. Before disconnecting the jumper cables, the engine must run for at least about 3
minutes to prevent damage to the electrical system (high voltage!).
WARNING:
When starting, do not hold the starter longer than 10 seconds to avoid very high current consumption
and excessive heating up of terminals and cables. After cooling down, make breaks of 30 seconds
between starting cycles at least. A failure to meet these instructions may result in acid burns or injury
due to a accumulator explosion or damage to the wiring of both vehicles.
Starting with two-pin (round) socket
The auxiliary starting procedure:

1. Both vehicles must stand in such a mutual distance
that their accumulators can be connected via an
auxiliary start cable and, at the same time, any contact
of both bodies must be avoided.
WARNING:
Ensure vehicles are not touching one another during
the emergency starting. Failure to comply may result
in electrical shock.
2. Engage the parking brakes of both vehicles and set
A 6291
the gearshift lever to neutral N.
3. Switch off all electric consumers in both vehicles.
4. Before connecting an external power supply, turn off the battery disconnector of the started and auxiliary
vehicle (source) first.
5. Unscrew and open the cover at socket 4 (Fig. B 2522).
6. First, plug the connecting cables to the socket of the started vehicle and the other ends to the external
source.
7. Switch ON the auxiliary vehicle (source) battery disconnector.
8. Just before starting, switch ON the started vehicle disconnector.
9. Immediately after engine starting, switch OFF the auxiliary vehicle (source) disconnector and disconnect
the connecting cables (first from negative and then from positive terminals).
WARNING:
If an auxiliary source is represented by a vehicle equipped with an alternator and its engine is running
when starting, stop the engine before turning the disconnector OFF.
Page 5-119
cables immediately. Before disconnecting the jumper cables, the engine must run for at least about
3 minutes to prevent damage to the electrical system (high voltage!).
WARNING:
When starting, do not hold the starter longer than 10 seconds to avoid very high current consumption
and excessive heating up of terminals and cables. After cooling down, make breaks of 30 seconds
between starting cycles at least. A failure to meet these instructions may result in acid burns or injury
due to a accumulator explosion or damage to the wiring of both vehicles.
Page 5-120
5.28.2 Braking system in winter

Draining of condensate
A condensate may appear in air reservoirs if the vehicle is
operated under extreme damp weather.
To check air reservoirs whether sediments are settled in
deflect the lever of the air reservoirs drain valves every day
after finishing the vehicle's operation.
Herewith also the condensate dryer function is checked.
WARNING:
During this check, the operating pressure must be in
the brake system.
A 5646
Air dryer
The air dryer 4 is located in the braking system circuit to 1
remove the condensate formed to protect the brake system
in winter against freezing of the condensate.
The replacement of air dryer is described in chapter 6.13 2
“Brake system”. 8 3
7
6 5 4 B 1520
5.28.3 Recommendations for winter operation

When you ride in winter especially on snowy and icy road surfaces, wheel slipping may occur.
In such a case, switch on the axle differential locks and leave them engaged only when going in the straight
direction because when going round curves on icy road surface, the vehicle tends to go in the straight
direction while the locks are engaged.
Having passed the rough terrain, disengage the locks immediately.
WARNING:
Do not run the cold engine at high speed just after starting it. The engine shall warm up gradually to
the optimum working temperature thanks to the electric cooling control. A step-by-step speed
increase is also in favour for the other vehicle's components.
Page 5-121
5.29 Towing a suspended vehicle*

Towing a suspended vehicle can be used if this vehicle is equipped/designed appropriately. It is predominantly
used for 8x8 vehicles.
If a wheel or half-axle is destroyed/damaged (rear axles), a half-axle can be hung off to tow the vehicle or
continue to drive with a hung-off half-axle.
5.29.1 Hooking off the rear half-axle

WARNING:
For a 8x8 vehicle, only one half-axle on one side of the vehicle can be hung off on the rear axles. Both
half-axles can only be hung off on one the rear axle to continue driving.
WARNING:
For safety reasons, when hanging off half axles, perform these operations only on a level surface
(to prevent tipping over).
With a damaged wheel a trip can be completed with the

rear axle hung off.
WARNING:
Only one rear half-shaft can be hung off on one side of
the vehicle. Both half-axles can only be hung off on
one rear axle.
Chains and attachments are provided in the vehicle outfit
for this purpose.
WARNING:
If cargo is loaded on the vehicle, it is necessary to B 3480
remove the container/cargo or repump water from the
tanker before hanging off the rear half-axles.
- Apply the parking brake and chock the wheels if

necessary.
- Raise the rear axle with a hydraulic jack.
A 7702
Page 5-122
- Discharge the air from the vehicle's air system (make

sure to discharge the air from the axle air suspension
bellows)
- Discharge air by switching the vehicle height setting
switch 12 , or through an air vent into the open
position II.
The air valve is located in the rear part of the left
longitudinal frame in front of the rear bumper.
I II
B 1674
- Prepare a plug (M16x1.5), threaded insert and a closing

nut from the vehicle kit to seal the air supply.
- Disconnect the air supply line from the air suspension
bellows of the damaged half-axle. To hang off a half-axle
of the 1st rear axle, unscrew the nut 1 from the T-piece.
To hang off a half-axle of the 2nd rear axle, unscrew the
nut 2 from the T-piece.
- Seal the T-piece and the air supply line into the air
suspension bellows. Screw the closing nut from the
vehicle kit on the T-piece. Screw the closing insert on the
free air supply line and screw in the plug (M16x1.5) into A 7709
it.
- Check the screwed nuts.
- The wheel can be lifted using a jack nearly to the upper extreme position as required.
- Fir the chain from the vehicle outfit so that the first chain
link is on the lower pin. Fit the chain link into the lower
holder on half-axle and put the lock pin through. Lock the
journal with a split pin.
- Hang approximately the 7th chain link (must be tested) to

the upper holder on the vehicle frame.
- Then display the second rear half-axle according to the
previous procedure.
Note:
In both rear half-axles are hung off on one side, the rear
part of the towed vehicle must be hung on the rescue
vehicle.
- Reposition the air outlet valve into the closed position I.
- Pressurize the vehicle air system. (for transportation,
pressurize the air suspension bellows oft the normally
operated (not hung off) half-axles).
- Set the height adjustment switch 12 on the

A 7706
instrument panel to its basic (driving) position.
Page 5-123
- Release the hydraulic jack and store it into the toolbox.

- Engage the front drive with an inter-axle differential (for the towed vehicle).
- Drive securely to arrive to a repair point.
CAUTION!
It is possible to drive only at 5 to 10 km/h with a hung-off half-axle!
WARNING:
After the vehicle is repaired, connect the air supply line to the air suspension bellows on the damaged
half-axle.
Page 5-124
5.30 River fording

The design of TATRA FORCE vehicles may be adapted by the manufacturer TATRA TRUCKS a.s. to
overcome rivers and flooded roads, with the level height, including the water wave, up to 1,200 mm.
Each vehicle can be designed by the manufacturer for a specific fording level.
Therefore, it is necessary to check and then respect the fording level marked on the vehicle.
The maximum level for overcoming watercourses and

flooded road is specified on a label located on the
dashboard in front of the driver or the marked blue line on
the vehicle outside. The fording line is marked on both
1200
sides of the cab, near the front axle fenders.
Shallow fording
When passing a shallow ford (up to 800 mm), the
vehicles are able to overcome water obstacles without the
use of special equipment and products, providing the
necessary waterproofing.
B 2994
Deep fording
During deep fording (at a depth of 800 mm to a depth of 1,200 mm including water waves), the vehicles
are able to overcome water obstacles only with the use of special equipment and products, providing the
necessary waterproofing.
The vehicle serviceability is not jeopardized if water enters the driver's cab.
5.30.1 Fording
a) Preparation before fording
Preparation before fording (shallow fording to a depth of 500 mm)
During shallow fording (to a depth of 500 mm), vehicles are able to overcome a water barrier and therefore
no vehicle preparation is required.
Preparation before fording (for shallow fording from 500 mm to 800 mm of depth)
For deep fording (500 mm to 800 mm), the following preparation is required:
1. Relocate to the driver's cab the case with spare bulbs and fuses, set of socket wrenches, the tool-bag
and all other objects (where fitted) that might soak or get moist and be difficult to dry up.
Note:
Remove the electric winch from the tool box, if it were below the water level while fording.
Preparation for fording (for deep fording from 800 mm to 1,200 mm of depth)
For deep fording (800 mm to 1,200 mm), the following preparation is required:
1. Remove the electric winch* from the front bumper if it were below the water level while fording.
2. Relocate to the driver's cab the case with spare bulbs and fuses, set of socket wrenches, the tool-bag
and all other objects (where fitted) that might soak or get moist and be difficult to dry up.
Page 5-125
Note:
Remove the electric winch from the tool box, if it were below the water level while fording.
3. Check the insertion of the engine oil dipstick.
4. Under the front hinged bonnet the cab then sealed
enclosure:
a. A vent on the clutch fluid tank cap (e.g. plastic 3 1
rubber, etc.). Not to be carried out for vehicles with
the ALLISON transmission (the vehicle is not
equipped with a clutch fluid tank).
b. holes for drainage of condensate from air
conditioning (using paper clips, wire, string, etc.);
c. the inlet channel inlet heating system using plug 1.
2
The intake duct heater 3 under the bonnet, remove the cab B 3347
dust and pollen filter 2 and the inlet seal the plug 1.
Note:
The plug 1 is part of the vehicle equipment.
WARNING:
To prevent from possible penetration of water and dirt (e.g. mud) through the intake channel to the
A/C system, do not enter water before the intake channel hole under the bonnet is sealed and locked
by the cover. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment.
5. Use the cap 1 to seal the air intake cleaner dust
hole.
Note:
Make this adjustment when the rubber nozzle 2 of the air
intake cleaner is under the water level.
- Remove the dust extraction rubber nozzle 2 from 2
the air intake cleaner and store it with the vehicle's
equipment.
- Install the cap 1 on the air intake cleaner hole.
1
WARNING: B 3564
To prevent water or dirt (such as mud) from entering
the air intake cleaner dust hole, do not go into the
water until the hole is sealed and secured with the cap 1. Failure to comply may result in damage.
Note:
The cap is part of the vehicle equipment.
6. Check the tightness of the oil filler cap on the oil tank for the hydraulic winch circuit (if the vehicle is
equipped with a hydraulic winch).
Page 5-126
b) Before fording
Note:
The TATRA FORCE vehicle is designed for slow ride in calm water.
Perform the following before passing through a flooded area:

1. Stop the vehicle at the edge of water.
2. Survey the place you wish to pass through with the vehicle.
Use the maximum fordability limit permitted only if there is a perfect load-carrying and flat bottom.
Reassure yourself the fording site depth is not greater than 1,200 mm. Check the bottom firmness to
prevent vehicle getting stuck.
CAUTION!
Do not ford water unless depth is known.
3. If the brakes were applied frequently or in the long term before entering a ford - cool down the brake
drums / disc brakes to avoid thermal tension and possible cracking.
WARNING:
The brake drums / disc brakes must not be hot when entering water. Failure to comply may result in
damage to equipment.
4. Turn off the main headlamps (low beams and high beams) in the front bumper.
If the front headlamps were on before fording, please ensure they are cold to avoid heat tension and
subsequent possible cracking.
Recommendation:
- if the down headlamps were on wait for at least 3 minutes until they cool down;
- in the case of switched high headlamps, to wait for at least 5 minutes until they cool down.
WARNING:
Before entering the water, check the temperature of lamp glass, they must not be hot, otherwise they
may crack.
5. . Turn on the elevated headlamps* (in the area below or above the cab windshield).
6. Close the roof hatch* and door windows.
7. On the climate control panel, set the air recirculation mode 11 , set the fan speed to maximum
2 and switch the airflow to the windshield (preventing fogging).
WARNING:
Do not enter water until the internal air recirculation and maximum fan speed are set.
Note:
By switching to the recirculation mode, the air flap in the
distribution box sets into the position closing the air intake
to the cab.
8. Raise the ride height vehicle using the switch 12 .
B 3480
Page 5-127
9. For vehicles equipped with a central tire inflation

system (CTIS), slightly underinflate the tires, close the
shut-off valves 3 on the wheels. 1
WARNING: ON
Do not enter water until an appropriate pressure is set OFF
2
and wheel shutoff valves are closed.
10. As necessary, enable the front-wheel drive with 3
inter-axle differential and axle differentials closures.
11. Set gearshift lever to 1st gear.

A 7695
c) Driving through a watercourse

When driving through a watercourse, the following must be observed:
1. Cross the rivers or flooded area slowly, without changing gears, at uniform speed, with a low speed
engaged and watch water waves in front of the vehicle.
2. Unless absolutely necessary, do not stop in water.
If vehicle accidentally enters water deeper than 1,200 mm perform following:

3. Press service brake pedal and hold to stop vehicle.
4. Set gearshift lever to reverse (R).
5. Let up on service brake pedal.
6. Press down on the accelerator pedal and slowly back vehicle out of water.
WARNING:
If engine stops, immediately attempt to restart engine. If engine will not start, tow vehicle from water
with another vehicle as soon as possible. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
Page 5-128
5.30.2 Maintenance after fording

Note:
Treatment is needed after crossing of larger fords or rivers, if the fording depth is greater than 800 mm.
a) Maintenance immediately after getting out of ford

Fording in depth of 800 mm
The following steps are mandatory immediately after fording:
1. Depress the brake pedal repeatedly to check the brake functioning.
2. Pull and release the parking brake several times to get the braking components rid of water.
3. Inflate the tires to the recommended pressure as soon as possible (depending on the type of terrain) and
continue driving.
Fording in depth from 800 mm to 1,200 mm

The following steps are mandatory immediately after fording:
1. Depress the brake pedal repeatedly to check the brake functioning.
2. Pull and release the parking brake several times to get the braking components rid of water.
3. When clear of fording area, stop the vehicle.
4. Visually check the vehicle for gross contamination (e.g. engine fan blades).
5. Check the vehicle for damage to axle rubber bellows or steering deformation visually.
6. Check the heating intake duct for dirt and moisture and clean if needed.
7. Reinstall the filter element of the dust and pollen filter into the heater intake duct (only the fording depth of
1,200 mm).
8. Check the ground clearance control system for operation.
9. Inflate the tires to the recommended pressure as soon as possible (depending on the type of terrain) and
continue driving. For vehicles equipped with a tire inflation system (CTIS), inflate the tires to the specified
pressure (depending on the terrain type) as soon as possible and continue driving.
b) Maintenance after fording (after driving, working day - day mission)

After driving, working day - day mission, the vehicle should be treated properly.
1. After fording, wipe off water and sediments and thoroughly clean the outer surface and interior of the
vehicle (where water entered).
2. Check the quality of the oil tanks in the engine, transmission, transfer case, axle final drives, hub
reduction gears*, casing retarder and in the gearbox of hydraulic winch*. Unscrew drain-off plugs and
drain water entered until pure oil flows out. Check the oil fill quantity and refill oil, if needed. Check the oil
level in warmed up assemblies and top up, if needed.
WARNING:
If an emulsion has been formed from the oil fill and water entered, refill the entire content.
Page 5-129
3. Remove the cap 1 from the air intake cleaner and

reinstall the dust rubber nozzle 2.
Note:
If water entered the air intake cleaner, let the filter
element naturally dry.
2
4. Drain the water and dirt from the coarse fuel cleaner
until clean fuel starts to flow out. Refuel and bleed
the fuel system (see section 6.5.4.4 "Fuel system 1
bleeding".
B 3564
5. Drain the diesel tank through bottom drain plug until
no more water and dirty comes out.
6. Check the chassis visually as follows:
a. Check the air suspension bellows for damage.
If damaged or cracked, contact an authorized TATRA TRUCKS service dealer.
b. Check the rubber protective half-axle boots for damage/perforation.
If damaged or cracked, contact an authorized TATRA TRUCKS service dealer.
c. Check the vehicle steering for damage. Steering connecting rods and links must not be deformed.
7. Check all lamps and dry up as necessary.
8. Blow dry the electrical contacts in the sockets with compressed air and preserve the electrical contacts
with a preserving agent (e.g. Kontakt 40).
9. Check the functionality of the vehicle clearance circuit - releasing or inflating the air into the rubber
suspension bellows. Lower and raise the vehicle clearance to reach maximum and minimum positions,
after that switch the leveling switch to the middle operation position.
10. Check CTIS* function.
Lower the tire pressure by approx. 1.4 bar (140 kPa) and inflate it again to reach the prescribed value,
after that let the remaining pressure from the CTIS system out while keeping the wheel valves closed.
11. Check the toolbox for moisture and dry it up, if needed.
12. If there is water in the cab, wipe the cab floor and dry it up.
13. Drain the condensate out from all air reservoirs (by puding the ring of the drain valve).
14. Remove any thing that is blocking (the plastic rubber, paper clips, etc.) from the vents on the lid of the cab
tilting pump and A/C condensate outlets.
15. Remove the plastic rubber, insulation tape, etc. from the vent hole on the clutch fluid tank cap* (vehicle
with manual gearbox).
16. Check the contamination of hydraulic oil for cab tilt reservoir and replace if necessary.
17. Check the contamination of hydraulic oil in tank for the hydraulic winch circuit and replace if necessary.
18. After thorough drying, lubricate the following:
- steering front axle(s), chassis steering (telescopic steering spindle and spline steering spindle under
the cab);
- trailer hinge*;
- winch accessories (winch rope, pulleys, etc.)*.
19. After fording in sea (salt) water, or after operating the vehicle in coastal areas, follow instructions in the
following subsection “c”.
Page 5-130
c) Maintenance vehicles after fording in sea (salt) water and operating vehicles in coastal areas
1. After fording in sea (salt) water, wash the whole vehicle properly (including the engine and engine area)
with fresh water and dry it with compressed air.
2. If sea (salt) water leaked in the cab, clean the cab interior thoroughly.
3. After cleaning the vehicle with fresh water, check the battery case; if necessary, clean it with fresh water
and dry it with compressed air.
4. Check the vehicle surface finish and have it repaired by an authorized service dealer, if needed.
5. After thorough drying, lubricate the following:
- steering front axle(s), chassis steering (telescopic steering spindle and spline steering spindle under
the cab);
- trailer hinge*;
- winch accessories (winch rope, pulleys, etc.)*.
6. Use a preservative agent such (e.g. Kontakt 40) to protect against corrosion:
- contacts of batteries;
- contacts of electric sockets;
- wiring contacts for the NORGREN transmission*;
- contacts with the wiring electromagnetic valves (EMV).
Check preservation of the chassis (engine, transmission, transfer case, frame and inside parts of the frame
side member, etc.) at least once a year, and if necessary, apply a preservative (e.g. DINITROL 4010) again.
Note:
If the vehicle (chassis) is used within about 5 km from the coast, carry out the above steps (subsection “c”)
once a month.
Page 5-131
5.31 RAMSEY hydraulic winch
5.31.1 Discription of RAMSEY hydraulic winch

Hydraulic winch RAMSEY H 800
RAMSEY H 800 hydraulic winch is situated on the frame behind the cab. The winch is equipped with
pneumatically-controlled hydraulic brake. The hydraulic winch has been designed for rescue/recovery
purposes and load pulling.
Description of rope management at the vehicle
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
8
B 2489
Legend for Fig. B 2489:

1 - front console with the pulleys, 2 - pulley, 3 - oil tank for hydraulic winch circuit, 4 - hydraulic winch,
5 - rope auxiliary barrier, 6 - large pulley with grease niple, 7 - slider (rear rope trumpet), 8 - rope with eye,
9 - distributor
Rope control
Front rope control
To guide the rope in the front, the rope is routed out of the slider 7 and guided along the right side of the frame
via an auxiliary barrier 5 and pulleys 2 and 6 to the console with the pulleys 1 situated in the front bumper. The
console with pulleys 1 can be dismantled and stored in the vehicle equipment (no restriction to the vehicle
approach angle).
Rear rope management
For the rear rope guide, the rope is routed from the winch through the large pulley 6 and through the slider 7
(rear rope trumpet).
Page 5-132
Winch hydraulic circuit

Oil tank for winch hydraulic circuit 2 3
The winch hydraulic circuit tank 4 is located on the left side
of the vehicle.
The filter housing 3 and breather 2 are mounted on the oil 1
tank. Furthermore, it is fitted with the filler neck, cap and
dipstick 1 and the outlet plug 5.
4
5
B 2505
Control of winch
The vehicle is equipped with a cable controller designed for
winch control.
2 1
It is on a 15-m long cable and allows for winch control from
a safe distance from the vehicle or cab.
The control buttons on the controller are color-marked to

clearly indicate winch movement direction. No damage
occurs to the winch if both buttons are pressed at the same
time.
B 1652
Buttom symbols:
Position 1 - IN - rope winding
Position 2 - OUT - rope unwinding
WARNING:
Do not leave the controller plugged in if the winch is not used.
Socket for the cable controller of winch

The socket for the cable controller of the hydraulic winch is
located on the side gearshift panel next to the driver's seat.
Connects to the hydraulic winch controller.
B 2313
Page 5-133
Winch brake control air valve

The air control air valve is located in the rear part of vehicle.
The air control air valve has been designed to control the
winch brake.
I II
Air valve position:
Position I - valve closed
Position II - valve open
B 2492
5.31.2 Hydraulic winch control

CAUTION!
Pay extreme attention while working with the winch. When working with the rope, always use leather
gloves. Always agree clear signalling before start of work. No other persons may appear within the
rope reach. Do not cross the rope if tensioned under stress. When connecting the rope to the load,
make sure twice the hook is connected safely. Using the winches for lifting or transporting of persons
is strictly prohibited. Stay out from under and away from suspended loads. While the winch is in
operation (pulling) keep away from the rope. DO NOT TRY TO GUIDE THE ROPE. The rope anchor is
not designed to hold a load. A failure may result in injury or death.
Unwinding the rope

- Follow the safety regulations when working.
- When working with the hydraulic winch, secure the vehicle with the braking brake and shift into neutral "N".
- Insert a rope with the controller into the socket on the geashift panel next to the driver's seat (Fig. B 2313).
- Unwind unloaded rope from the winch.
- Unwind the unloaded rope by opening the winch drum
coupling.
- Set the air control valve to position II (Fig. B 2492) - to
disengage the drum coupling in the winch.
- Manually pull the rope to the required length.
Maximum rope unwinding is signalized by a red stripe on
the rope.
This mark may not exceed the guiding roller level.
In any case, five spires of rope must remain on the drum
A 5212
when towing!
Page 5-134
- After pulling the cable out, engage the drum coupling

using the control valve again (to position I).
Before winch activation, the winch coupling must be
engaged (inserted).
WARNING: I II
If the rope is not under load, do not unwind it from the
rope drum hydraulically. Otherwise there is excessive
brake overheating and resulting damage.
WARNING:
Never unwind an unloaded rope using the winch
controller! This might result in serious damage to the B 2492
winch brake! When handling with the rope, always use
leather gloves. The drum coupling must be fully engaged before starting the winching operation. Do
not start the winch engine before engaging the drum coupling.
Do not release the coupling under load. Do no try to sling the rope to avoid damage. Use a nylon loop.
Note:
The controller may be used to unwind the rope loaded with a burden (if the rope is loaded, the winch brake will
disengage automatically).
Winding the rope

Hang the burden properly and pull it as follows:
- Start the engine and let it run at idle speed.
WARNING:
When working with the hydraulic winch, the vehicle must have sufficient air pressure in the system.
- Depress the clutch pedal and turn on the transmission PTO by the switch 15 . Release the clutch pedal
to turn on the transmission PTO pump drive and indicator lamp 4 will turn ON.
- Use the speed control handle 1 to set the engine speed
to 1,100-1,200 rpm.
It is not advisable to use the winch at lower engine
speed! (Hydraulic circuit vibrates).
WARNING:
Never connect/disconnect the drum coupling during
the winch operation! The automatic winch brake can be
damaged seriously.
During the winch operation, the engine speed,
including the vehicle travel when recovering, may not 1 2
exceed 1,200 rpm! Check the engine for overheating. A 7407
- Check the correct rope winding on the drum while winding the rope.
- After using the winch, wind up the rope with an eye to the slider and make sure to disconnect the remote
controller from the socket in the cab.
Note:
After finishing the work with the winch, clean and lubricate the rope by a light oil. Check the rope. If the rope
starts to fray due to wear and tear, it must be replaced immediately with a new one.
Page 5-135
CAUTION!
When pulling the load, no one may move near the stressed rope to prevent any injury in case of
sudden breakage.
Safe rope winding in required working modes of the hydraulic winch:

Hydraulic winch lays the rope to layers automatically.
If a local excessive rope layering occurs due to circumstances, winding may be continued only until the
ropes exceeds the upper drum level. In such a case, interrupt winding, secure the load, unwind necessary
rope length and place it correctly to the winch drum and then continue the load towing.
Page 5-136
5.32 SEPSON hydraulic winch*
5.32.1 Description of SEPSON hydraulic winch

Hydraulic winch SEPSON H 150 PF
SEPSON hydraulic winch is situated on the frame behind the cab. The winch is equipped with
pneumatically-controlled hydraulic brake. The hydraulic winch has been designed for rescue/recovery
purposes and load pulling. It is especially suitable for recovery and pulling of damaged vehicle got stuck in
terrain.
1 2 5
3 4
B 2520

1 - oil tank for hydraulic winch circuit, 2 - hydraulic winch, 3 - large guide rollers with grease niples, 4 - slider
(rear rope trumpet), 5 - rope with eye
Rope control
Rear rope control
To guide the rope in the rear, the rope is routed from the winch through the large pulleys 3 and through the
slider 4 (rear rope trumpet).
Lateral rope control
To guide the rope on sides, the rope is routed out of the slider 4 and only through the large guide rollers 3
laterally (to the left or right side).
Page 5-137
Hydraulic winch SEPSON H 100 PS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B 2906

1 - slider (rear rope trumpet), 2 - hydraulic winch, 3 - distributor, 4 - oil tank for hydraulic winch circuit,
5 - winch cable barriers, 6 - roller with grease, 7 - bracket with guide rollers
Rope control
For the front guide of the cable - The roller guide bracket is located on the right side of the front bumper. It
can be removed and stored in the vehicle's equipment (it does not restrict
the approach angle).
Rear rope control - a slider (or rear guide rollers) is located on the right-hand side of the rear
light bracket to guide the winch cable. Auxiliary barriers 5 and rollers have
been designed to guide the winch cable along the right side member.
Page 5-138
Winch hydraulic circuit

2 3
Oil tank for winch hydraulic circuit
The winch hydraulic circuit tank 5 is located on the right 4
side of the vehicle. 1
It is equipped with a so called oil level gauge 1, filler neck 2
and oil filter 4, separate filter bleeding 3 and an drain plug
6.
5
6
B 2504
Control of winch
The vehicle is equipped with a cable controller designed for
winch control.
It is on a 10-m long cable and allows for winch control from
a safe distance from the vehicle or cab. I
Use the lever 1 to control the winch.
The control lever 1 is in the normal (zero) position, push it
forward to unspool the rope, deflect back to reel it on.
1
Symbols on the controller:
1 - control lever
Position I - rope unwinding
Position II - rope winding II
WARNING:
Do not leave the controller plugged in if the winch is
not used.
B 1328
Socket for the cable controller of the winch

The socket for the cable controller of the hydraulic winch is
located under the driver's seat.
Connects to the hydraulic winch controller.
B 2313
Page 5-139
Winch brake control air valve

The air control air valve is located in the rear part of the
right side member in front of the rear bumper.
The air control air valve has been designed to control the
winch brake.
Air valve position:

Position I - valve closed
Position II - valve open
I II
B 1675
Cable guiding and roller guide bracket

The front cable guide - the roller guide bracket is located
on the right side of the front bumper.
B 2609
The rear cable guide - the roller guide bracket is located on

the right side of the chassis.
B 2610
Additional rollers are provided to guide the cable from the

winch around the longitudinal frame member.
B 2611
Page 5-140
B 2579
5.32.2 Hydraulic winch control

CAUTION!
Pay extreme attention while working with the winch. When working with the rope, always use leather
gloves. Always agree clear signalling before start of work. No other persons may appear within the
rope reach. Do not cross the ropee if tensioned under stress. When connecting the rope to the load,
make sure twice the hook is connected safely. Using the winches for lifting or transporting of persons
is strictly prohibited. Stay out from under and away from suspended loads. While the winch is in
operation (pulling) keep away from the rope. DO NOT TRY TO GUIDE THE ROPE. The rope anchor is
not designed to hold a load. A failure may result in injury or death.
Unwinding the rope

- Follow the safety regulations when working.
- When working with the hydraulic winch, secure the vehicle with the braking brake and shift into neutral "N".
- Insert a cable with the controller into the socket on the geashift panel next to the driver's seat (Fig. B 1666).
- Unwind unloaded rope from the winch.
Unwind the unloaded rope by opening the winch drum coupling.
- Set the air control valve to position II (Fig. B 1675) - to disengage the drum coupling in the winch.
- Manually pull the rope to the required length. Maximum rope unwinding is signalized by a red stripe on the
rope. This mark may not exceed the guiding roller level. In any case, five spires of rope must remain on the
drum when towing.
- After pulling the cable out, engage the drum coupling
using the control valve again (to position I). Before winch
activation, the winch coupling must be engaged
(inserted).
WARNING:
If the rope is not under load, do not unwind it from the
rope drum hydraulically. Otherwise there is excessive
brake overheating and resulting damage.
WARNING: I II
Never unwind an unloaded rope using the winch
controller! This might result in serious damage to the B 1675
winch brake! When handling with the rope, always use

leather gloves. The drum coupling must be fully engaged before starting the winching operation. Do
not start the winch engine before engaging the drum coupling. Do not release the coupling under
load. Do no try to sling the rope to avoid damage. Use a nylon loop.
Page 5-141
Note:
The winch controller may be used to unwind the cable loaded with a burden (if the cable is loaded, the winch
brake will disengage automatically).
Winding the rope

Hang the burden properly and pull it as follows:
- Start the engine and let it run at idle speed.
WARNING:
When working with the hydraulic winch, the vehicle must have sufficient air pressure in the system.
- Depress the clutch pedal and turn on the transmission PTO by the switch 15 .
Release the clutch pedal to turn on the transmission PTO pump drive and indicator lamp 4 , will turn
“ON” on the instrument panel.
- Use the speed control handle 1 to set the engine speed
to 1,100 -1,200 rpm.
It is not advisable to use the winch at lower engine
speed! (Hydraulic circuit vibrates).
WARNING:
Never connect/disconnect the drum coupling during
the winch operation! The automatic winch brake can be
damaged seriously.
During the winch operation, the engine speed,
including the vehicle travel when recovering, may not
exceed 1,200 rpm! Check the engine for overheating. 1 2
A 7407
- Check the correct rope winding on the drum while

winding the rope.
- After using the winch, wind up the rope with an eye to the slider and make sure to disconnect the remote
controller from the socket in the cab.
Note:
After finishing the work with the winch, clean and lubricate the rope by a light oil. Check the rope. If the rope
starts to fray due to wear and tear, it must be replaced immediately with a new one.
CAUTION!
When pulling the load, no one may move near the stressed rope to prevent any injury in case of
sudden breakage.
Safe rope winding in required working modes of the hydraulic winch:

Hydraulic winch lays the rope to layers automatically.
If a local excessive rope layering occurs due to circumstances, winding may be continued only until the
ropes exceeds the upper drum level.
In such a case, interrupt winding, secure the load, unwind necessary rope length and place it correctly to the
winch drum and then continue the load towing.
Page 5-142
5.33 Recovering
Operating and safety measures for recovery/rescue operations
1. The vehicle may be operated only by a person possessing a driver license for this vehicle and made
familiar with the vehicle control operation fully.
2. Position the rescue vehicle on a flat ground, if possible, and secure it with the parking brake.
3. Position the rescue vehicle in such a way that the rope unwound from the winch guiding rollers includes
with the longitudinal vehicle axis an angle of 15° in any direction as a maximum
4. Adjust the edges of terrain unevenness in the recovering direction in such a way that the rope does not
cut in the ground.
5. Before the start of recovering operation, check the correct and safe vehicle positioning and anchoring,
and the coupling of the vehicle to be recovered.
Increase the rope tension gradually to verify that the rope is routed or anchored correctly, make sure
neither distortion nor loops occur.
6. Be careful not to overload the winch.
7. Before the start of the recovering operation, the driver must give a warning acoustic signal and make sure
that there is no one between the vehicles and that a driver of the vehicle to be recovered is ready in its
cab, if possible, with respect to circumstances.
8. Avoid jerking movement and useless motion stoppage.
9. The vehicle being recovered must be unbraked, with the transmission in neutral.
10. If there is a risk of damage to the fuel tank, canisters or other vessels containing ecologically or otherwise
hazardous substances due to the recovering operation, it is necessary to avoid spillage by discharging
the contents or removal of respective containers.
11. When handling with the rope, always use protecting (leather) gloves.
Strictly forbidden:
1. Standing near or on a vehicle being recovered.
2. Staying in the space between the recovering and recovered vehicles, walking in front of a moving
vehicle, staying near a tensioned rope at the distance lower than its length.
3. Changing gears in the recovery vehicle when working with a winch.
4. Tow a vehicle on the rope.
5. Using the winches for lifting or transporting of persons.
Recovering
Before the start of recovering, the officer supervising and organizing the recovering operation will determine
the method of recovery depending on the extent of miring of his or the other vehicle.
He will supervise and watch the driver's work when controlling the winch.
When working with the recovery winch, it is necessary first to unlock the winch hook, check the rope condition
and winch serviceability.
When performing activities associated with recovering and self-recovering, pay utmost attention and namely
keep the basic instructions included in chapter "Operating and safety measures for recovery/rescue
operations".
CAUTION!
When reeling on, the rope angle increases! Take this into account in the initial position.
Page 5-143
Natural anchor
A natural anchor is an object in the proximity of a vehicle got stuck. It may be a tree, rock, steel or concrete
structure, etc.
When anchoring to trees, attach the rope as low as possible to avoid breaking or uprooting.
To avoid tree or rope damage, support the rope with wooden boards, branches, etc.
Artificial anchor
An artificial anchor is a timber-and-earth built structure or it may be substituted with a heavier vehicle, such as
vehicle tractor, prime movers, loaded trucks, bulldozers, transporters, tanks, etc. The timber-and-earth
anchors are built as far from the recovering vehicle as possible. In winter and on hard ground, use an anchor
of smaller dimensions.
After placing an anchor, backfill the dug-out with soil.
In frosty weather, pour on water and let it freeze.
The anchoring rope must be as close to the ground as possible.
Efficiency, especially of a triangle anchor, is very dependent on the ground load-bearing capacity or freezing up.
The anchor must be aligned with the recovering and recovered vehicle.
The vehicle used as an anchor will tension the rope and brake.
Resistance of a vehicle as an anchor may be increased by placing it in a trench of maximum depth of 50 cm.
Recovering a vehicle rearward

When recovering the vehicle in rearward direction, proceed as upon normal winding.
However, the load is represented by the vehicle itself, which is why brakes must be released.
Attach the rope end to an appropriate fixed object in the field (such as a tree).
When recovering, you can help yourself by using the vehicle power, with the inter-axle differential and axle
differentials locked.
In heavy terrain, the vehicle will hardly rescue itself using the winch in backward direction as only tensile force
on the winch cable serves for recovery.
Winding must only be performed with forward gear engaged, which is why it is not possible to assist recovery
with engine power transmitted to vehicle wheels.
Recovering a vehicle forward

The forward recovery method is similar to that of normal winding, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the cable end from the rear pulley, put the cable through side pulleys (vehicle right) route it
through the front guiding pulley in the front bumper.
2. Attach the rope end to an appropriate fixed object in the field (such as a tree).
Do no try to sling the rope to avoid damage.
Use the polyester textile thimble provided in the vehicle outfit for this purpose.
3. Strain the rope carefully, gear the first low-range speed and recover the vehicle slowly together with rope
reeling on, without the use of neutral in the transfer case.
Use all-wheel drive and diff. locks to facilitate the recovering.
Using of free pulleys for recovering in both directions is recommended.
4. After vehicle recovery, clean the cable and rewind it back on the drum.
When rescuing the vehicle by its own winch in forward direction and when pulling loans towards the vehicle
front, maximum permissible tractive power on the winch cable must be lower than when pulling backwards.
In forward direction, the vehicle is usually able to rescue itself even from very difficult terrain. However, the
cable is exposed to bending stress when winding and can easily be damaged. Even after few rescuing
operations, some steel cable strands may break resulting in destruction of the whole rope.
Therefore, rescue the vehicle in the forward direction only exceptionally, if it cannot be rescued in
another manner.
Page 5-144
Use of free pulley

When recovering another vehicle under difficult
circumstances, it is sometimes not enough to use the
towing force achievable on the winch rope.
If you use so-called free pulley and textile thimble provided
in the vehicle outfit for this purpose, you can double the
towing force by a simple tackle.
Lead the rope through a free pulley and attach one end to
a fixed object in the terrain.
You can attach the vehicle to be recovered to the free
pulley holder by means of e.g. auxiliary rope, led in pair for
the sake of safety. B 1502
The vehicle is then recovered with a double towing force

than that acting on the winch rope.
Similarly you can increase the towing force when

recovering your own vehicle in the rearward direction.
In such a case, lead the rope through a free pulley,
however, do not fix its end to any object in the terrain but to
the trailer towing device on the vehicle.
Under poor adhesion conditions it is appropriate to use
a natural anchor.
When using a free pulley provided in the vehicle outfit, it is
necessary to loosen the split pin on the pulley journal,
knock the journal out, put the rope to the pulley and
reassemble.
B 1503
Textile thimble
When driving off-road with the risk of sinking, it is
appropriate to add a loose pulley and polyester SpanSet
tow straps to the vehicle equipment. Figure (Fig. A 5503)
shows the tensile force of this rope in relation to the tying
method on the vehicle.
A 5503
Page 5-145
Using a S-shaped hook and connecting shackle

Use a separate S-shaped hook e.g. to join two ropes ending with loops (la), when fixing the rope to
a stationary object on the ground using an auxiliary rope (Ib), etc.
Figure B 1069, IIa, lIb show the correct connection of ropes by means of a connecting shackle. Do not attach
the winch rope to the subject directly, if possible (Ic , IIc), as the rope is exposed to excessive stress in the
bending point and can easily be damaged. In addition, the rope end is deformed as a result.
B 1069

I - connection using a S-shaped hook
II - connection using a shackle
a, b - correct rope connection
c - incorrect rope connection
Page 5-146
5.34 Electric engine preheating*

Engine oil preheater
Some vehicle versions may be equipped with the engine
preheating system.
The engine preheating is mainly used in winter (at very low
1
temperatures) to a warm up the engine oil before starting
the engine.
The kit includes:

- engine oil preheating by a (500W) resistor element from
a 230V power supply;
Legend for Fig. B 2721: B 2721
1 - electric heating element circuit
5.34.1 Engine oil preheating by a resistor element from a 230V power supply
a) Safety label for electrical equipment operation (connection of the engine oil preheater)
The safety label/plate is located inside the
cab. OPERATION MANUAL
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION: CONNECT THE CONNECTING
CABLE TO THE VEHICLE PLUG AND THE OPPOSITE END
TO THE POWER SUPPLY ~ 230V/50Hz.
EQUIPMENT DISCONNECTION:
DISCONNECT THE CONNECTING CABLE FROM TO THE
POWER SUPPLY AND THE OPPOSITE END FROM THE
VEHICLE PLUG.
PROTECTION AGAINST HAZARDOUS CONTACT VOLTAGE

- LIVE PARTS: COVERING, CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKER (RCD)
- DEAD PARTS: GROUNDING, CROSS-CONNECTION
B 2369
b) Wiring scheme of the engine oil heating by a resistor element from a 230V power supply
Legend for Fig. A 7082 (vehicle ground)
1. Protective grounding wire.
The user ensures the connection to the vehicle.
Minimum cable cross section is 4 mm2.
2. Grounding rod
3. Protecting terminal
F 33.01 - current circuit breaker with overcurrent

protection
E 33.01 - engine oil heating element
E 33.02 - thermal battery casing no.1
E 33.03 - thermal battery casing no.2 A 7082
X 33.01 - wall outlet
Page 5-147
c) Electrical equipment for 230 V

Electrical equipment for 230V connection (1 - wall outlet as 1 2
a 2 - RCD) is placed on the vehicle left behind the cab.
The wall outlet 1 enables the power supply to the engine oil
preheater.
- With the engine off, connect the electrical extension cord,
which is part of the vehicle equipment, from the wall
outlet 1 to 220/230V AC power outlet according to the
current standards.
Legend for Fig. A 7074

1 - wall outlet
2 - current circuit breaker (RCD)
d) How to use the electric engine oil preheater:

1. At the end of driving, park the vehicle near a 230VAC
power supply.
2. Secure the vehicle with the parking brake and shift into
neutral "N". 1
A 7074
3. Shut off engine.
4. Perform the vehicle grounding.
Note:
Ground vehicles outside
Ground the vehicle using a grounding bar and grounding cable:
- stick the grounding bar deep into the ground;
- use the grounding cable to connect the grounding bar with the vehicle ground (e.g. vehicle frame,
grounding battery). The vehicle ground point is marked with symbol.
CAUTION!
Ground the vehicle before connecting it to a 230V AC power supply.
5. Before using the wall outlet 1, remove any dirt from it and around.
6. Connect the wall outlet 1 with the 230VAC power supply via the connecting cable. This will activate the
equipment. To disconnect, reverse the order as instructed for connecting.
7. Once completed, lay the connecting cable, grounding bar and grounding cable into the dedicated area.
8. To protect persons from the electric shock hazard, the equipment is provided with the current circuit
breaker that disconnects the device from the power supply in case of malfunction (the current circuit
breaker must be in position I. during operation).
9. The yellow button serves to check the circuit breaker functionality. If pressed, the power supply is
disconnected.
CAUTION!
The presence of 230V to preheat the engine oil at a time when the wall outlet 1 is connected to the
mains socket.
10. Before using the vehicle, disconnect the cable from the mains and then store it.
Page 5-148
e) Revision of 230V electrical equipment

Thorough revisions of this electric equipment must be performed every half year to minimize the
electric shock hazard.
The vehicle operator must keep reports (records) of electric equipment revisions performed.
When performing electric revisions/inspections of the vehicle preheating, proceed in accordance with the local
laws applicable in a respective country, including related public notices and decrees.
5.34.2 First aid in case of electric shock

Electric shock is very dangerous and therefore it needs to be approached with extreme caution. Improper
procedure may result is a risk of electric shock to the rescuer. The basic rule of first aid for electric shock,
therefore, is - Always disconnect the electrical current and never reach to the victim before the electric
current is safely disconnected.
Act quickly and effectively. Keep reviving as the most of

afflicted persons are dead only seemingly!!!
Symptoms:
General:
- unconsciousness, convulsions with a high voltage;
- respiratory and circulatory arrest
Local:
- varying degree and extent of burn.
Procedure:
A 7086
1. Get the afflicted person out of the reach of electric
current carefully, not to endanger yourself!
Therefore, do the following first:

a. cut off the power using a switch, pull a cord out of
the socket, unscrew the fuse;
b. put the cable away or pull the afflicted person
away from the dangerous area; use a
non-conducting material – wood, tie, cloth;
c. never touch the afflicted person’s body or cloth
by bare hand. Work using one hand only, if
possible. Do not forget that the afflicted person
cannot release the object s/he is grasping
himself/herself due to a muscle convulsion. A 7087
Therefore, make sure he/she does not fall after
power cut-off.
When removing the victim or live cable, try to carry out all operations with your right hand. This is
preferable for safety reasons, because you may suffer a shock from the electrical current, in which
case it is always better when the current passes through the right hand and the right part of the body
than through your heart. Also make sure not to lean into or hold the central heating or other grounded
and conductive objects with the other hand while rescuing.
Page 5-149
d. CALL EMERGENCY SERVICES (for you local country, phone .......) and more
e. If the victim is CONSCIOUS (perceives, reacts):
- let them sit in a half sit position;
- PERMANENTLY watch the victim - communicate with them, repeatedly check how they feel;
- call the emergency number if any change in status occurs.
f. If the victim is UNCONSCIOUS (no perception, no reaction):
- place the victim on their back with the head slightly tilted back;
- Check to see that they are still unresponsive (patting them on the cheeks, speaking to them);
- check the victim for breathing:
- If s/he is clearly and distinctly BREATHING (we can see that s/he is breathing normally – at
a normal tempo, “as if s/he were asleep”), leave them on their back and CONTINUOUSLY
monitor their breathing status. DO NOT PUT them in a “stabilized position” – you might lose track
of their breathing and not realize that it has stopped!
- If s/he is NOT BREATHING or is breathing “strangely” (sporadic breaths in disturbingly long
intervals, “gasping” breaths, “rasping”, movements of the mouth resembling “a carp out of water”
– commence IMMEDIATE RESUSCITATION (to revive them) – see below.
g. For HIGH-VOLTAGE shock, it is especially crucial to care for their basic vital functions (see above).
If the situation stabilizes, you can cool and possibly cover the burned area. Cooling is best done with
clean cool water (never with ice!) and cooling only the affected area, not the whole body.
For covering wounds, proceed only if you have a sterile dressing, and the victim must be transported
somewhere; if the accident occurs in a remote area, a longer time should be expected before the
arrival of emergency services. For suffering major burns (most or the entire body), concentrate only on
maintaining basic vital functions (generally regular breathing), intensively cool only the area of the
neck and/or genitals (if affected). Attempting to cool the entire body (e.g. with a cold shower) would
only worsen the situation – it would lead to hypothermia and worsen the state of shock!
Resuscitation (reviving)
Always commence resuscitation if the victim is
unresponsive and not breathing or is breathing but not
normally (“gasping” for air in disturbingly long intervals,
opening their mouth “like a carp”, etc.).
1. Place the victim on their back on a flat surface, check
that their head is tilted back (see Fig. A 7087).
2. With their arms outstretched, push on their sternum to
a depth of 5-6 cm (for an adult) at a rate of about 100
times per minute (see Figure A 7088).
3. Continue until emergency services arrive or the victim A 7088
starts to respond (by blinking, speaking, moving their
hands, etc.).
Some notes on resuscitation or generally common errors and mistakes:

- Artificial respiration generally has no basic importance for the victims of electrical shock. The most
common cause of unconsciousness is a disruption in heart rhythm. Since the victim was breathing until the
moment it happened, s/he has a supply of oxygen in their body for at least 6-10 minutes. Moreover, many
cases of “gasping” breaths continue during resuscitation. They are not an indication of regaining
consciousness; on the contrary they confirm cardiac arrest. Continue to push down even when you see
these gasps. In exceptional cases where the shock disrupts the function of the diaphragm, sooner or later
spontaneous breathing will generally be restored due to the response of other respiratory muscles.
Page 5-150
- Do not try to “feel for a pulse” – it may happen under stress that you feel your own pulse in your fingertips
and you think that no cardiac arrest has occurred when in fact it has!
- Do not try to “pull out a swallowed tongue” – it is enough to tilt the head back to free up the airways.
Trying to “pull out their tongue” rather leads to injury and consequently the risk of them swallowing blood
and other complications.
- If the victim is unconscious on the ground and their entire body is convulsing, do NOTHING – just
wait for the convulsions to subside. Do not try to “pry open their jaws” – the result would only be injury to the
teeth and gums, and if the patient is convulsing, they cannot breathe in any case.
- Do not hesitate to commence resuscitation – if the victim seems “strange” after suffering an
electrical shock, is unresponsive, breathing strangely, COMMENCE RESUSCITATION. Unless it
involves cardiac arrest, you will not seriously hurt them in any way. If it involves cardiac arrest, you
can save your friend’s life!
Page 5-151
5.35 Modifying the exhaust system to operate with the unified F-34 fuel*
This chapter is intended for fire engines operated with the unified F-34 fuel.
WARNING:
When operated with the unified F-34 fuel, the vehicles fail to comply with the European Euro 5
emission legislation, and therefore should be operated so only in emergency cases for a necessary
period of time.
If the vehicle is operated with the unified fuel designated pursuant to the F34 military standards, adjustments
to the vehicle exhaust system need to be made. The catalytic converter must be replaced with a muffler.
WARNING:
While operating with the unified F34 fuel, do not drive with a catalytic converter (catalyst). This could
damage the catalytic converter.
Note:
Have the catalytic converter replaced with a muffler (and vice versa) by personnel professionally trained for
this work, or by an authorized TATRA trucks service dealer.
Before removing and installing the catalytic converter or muffler from the vehicle, carry out the following:
- Apply the parking brake.
- Gear shift controller is in N position ("neutral").
- Turn off the engine (put the key in the ignition switch to the "STOP" position).
- Chock the wheels.
- Turn off the battery disconnector (to the "OFF" position).
Note:
The battery disconnector can be switched off only after a 90-second delay from switching the ignition off.
Before turning off the battery disconnector, the SCR ramp-down phase must be completed (Selective
Catalytic Reduction System).
After stopping the engine, the AdBlue dosing unit (UDA2) passes to the "Cleaning" mode, which means that
the AdBlue pump is stopped and the dosing valve is opened for 30 seconds. The air flows through the dosing
line. Then, the dosing valve closes, which results in the closed compressed air supply and the AdBlue dosing
unit (UDA2) switches "Off".
Note:
The AdBlue additive can be out of operation in the tank for 12 months. After this period of time, it is necessary
to drain it from the tank and refill new AdBlue before using.
Page 5-152
5.35.1 Replacing the catalytic converter with the exhaust muffler
5.35.1.1 Catalytic converter removal

Catalytic converter removal procedure
1. Turn off the Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)
system using the switch 6 on the instrument

panel.
CAUTION!
Before removing the catalytic converter, check
whether the battery disconnector is off.
B 3480
2. Disconnecting the AdBlue line on the exhaust flange:

a. Disconnect AdBlue line 2 from the injection 1 2
nozzle 1.
b. Secure the dismantled AdBlue line 2 to protect
them against damage and ingress of contaminants,
but do not seal it up.
Wrap the AdBlue line in a plastic bag and seal just
with a tape.
CAUTION!
Always handle AdBlue with great care, it is a corrosive
substance. AdBlue must never come into contact with B 2996
other chemicals. AdBlue has corrosive effects on the

alloys containing copper and magnesium (e.g. electrical cables).
CAUTION!
If any action is made on the AdBlue circuit elements, protect electrical connectors and disconnected
piping against any AdBlue splashing adequately.
If AdBlue is splashed:
- to a connected connector: rinse with water;
- to a disconnected connector: replace it.
3. Disconnecting the NOx sensor 2 terminal board (for

the NOx sensor downstream the catalytic converter):
2
1
B 2997
Page 5-153
a. Disconnect the respective terminal board 2 on the

accessory holder 4 from the NOx sensor 1
electronics panel.
b. Release the electric cable 3 from the accessory 3
holder. 1
c. Dismantle the NOx sensor 1 electronics panel from
the accessory holder 4. 2
4 B 3001
4. Disconnect the temperature sensor 3 connectors (for

the temperature sensors upstream and downstream
the catalytic converter) (Fig. B 2997):
3
2
1
B 2997
a. Release the wiring of temperature sensors 3 up to

the point (Fig. B 3002) of connectors.
b. Carefully mark the connectors of the temperature
sensor wiring (not to be confused).
1
c. Disconnect the connectors of the temperature
sensor wiring 1 and 2. 2
3
B 3002
5. Loosen the bolted connection of sleeve 1 and move

the exhaust pipe connecting hose from the catalytic 9
converter 10. 10
6. Hang up the catalyst 10 on a suitable lifting equipment. 8
11
CAUTION!
Due to the catalytic converter weight it is necessary to 7
use a lifting device. Use the lifting equipment 6
corresponding to the vehicle configuration with regard 1 5
to the workshop equipment (battery trolley, straps, 4
webbing, etc.). Observe the rules of safe handling with
suspended loads. 2 3 B 2998
Page 5-154
7. Remove the tiedown straps.

Undo the nuts 3 and 6 including washers and split washers, from the tiedown straps 4 and 7.
8. Remove the catalytic converter 10 from the accessory holder 11.
9. Remove the bottom catalytic converter of support 2 from the accessory holder 11.
10. Loosen the bolted connection of the sleeve 8 and remove the tailpipe 9 from the catalytic converter 10.
11. Place the catalytic converter 10 in a safe place and secure it against damage.
WARNING:
While removing the catalyst from the vehicle it is absolutely essential to protect the NOx sensors,
temperature sensors and Adblue nozzle against damage.
12. Protect the removable panel (electronics sensor panel with wiring), connectors of the carbon dioxide NOx
sensor and temperature sensors against damage and contamination (e.g. wrap in e.g. bubble foil and
seal with a tape).
13. Use ties to fasten the disconnected vehicle wiring with connectors.
Page 5-155
5.35.1.2 Muffler installation

Applies to: engines without the SCR system to be operated with the unified fuel designated to the F 34
military standards.
Muffler installation procedure

1. Install the muffler support 4 onto the accessory 11
10
holder 13. 12
13
2. Fit the tailpipe 10 with the sleeve 11 onto the upper 9
flange of the muffler 12 and tighten the bolted
connection. 8
2 7
Note: 1 6
Make sure that the tailpipe orientation does neither cause
any damage nor affect other vehicle elements. 5
3 4 B 2999
3. Fit the exhaust connecting pipe 2 with a metal sleeve 3
to the side flange of the muffler 12. Fasten the metal sleeve 3 with bolt and nut, including flat washer and
spring/split washer.
4. Use appropriate lifting equipment to attach the accessory holder 13 to the muffler 12.
CAUTION!
Due to the muffler weight it is necessary to use a lifting device. Use the lifting equipment
corresponding to the vehicle configuration with regard to the workshop equipment (battery trolley,
straps, webbing, etc.). Observe the rules of safe handling with suspended loads.
5. Attach the tiedown straps 6 and 9 and screw on the nuts 5 and 8 including washers and spring washers.
6. Install the exhaust connecting pipe 2 with the sleeve 1 on the exhaust pipe connecting hose and fasten
the bolted connection at the sealing sleeve 1. Evenly tighten the sealing sleeve bolts 1 to ensure proper
tightness.
7. Check the tailpipe orientation/direction.
Note:
Make sure that the tailpipe orientation does neither cause any damage nor affect other vehicle elements.
8. Start the engine and check all joints for leaks.
Note:
After replacing the catalyst with the muffler when operating with the unified fuel F34, the indicator light 2
will illuminate on the instrument panel.
9. Perform a test drive (up to 10 km).
Page 5-156
5.35.2 Replacing the muffler with catalytic converter
5.35.2.1 Muffler removal

Muffler removal procedure
11
1. Loosen the bolted connection of sleeve 1 and move 10
the exhaust pipe connecting hose from the muffler 12. 12
2. Hang up the muffler 12 on suitable lifting equipment. 13
9
CAUTION!
Due to the muffler weight it is necessary to use a lifting 8
device. Use the lifting equipment corresponding to the 2 7
vehicle configuration with regard to the workshop 1 6
equipment (battery trolley, straps, webbing, etc.). 5
Observe the rules of safe handling with suspended 3 4 B 2999
loads.
3. Undo the nuts 5 and 8 including washers and split washers, from the tiedown straps 6 and 9.
4. Remove the muffler 12 from the accessory holder 13.
5. Remove the tailpipe 10 from the muffler 12.
Loosen the bolted connection of the sleeve 11 and remove the tailpipe 10 from the muffler 12.
6. Remove the bottom muffler support 4 from the accessory holder 13.
5.35.2.2 Catalytic converter installation

Catalytic converter installation procedure
1. Remove the ties and protective wrapping from the 9
carbon dioxide (NOx) sensor, temperature sensors 10
and AdBlue line. 8
11
2. Install the bottom catalytic converter support 2 onto the
accessory holder 11. 7
3. Fit the tailpipe 9 with the sleeve 8 onto the upper 6
flange of the catalytic converter 10 and tighten the 1 5
bolted connection. 4
Note: 2 3
B 2998
any damage nor affect other vehicle elements.
4. Use appropriate lifting equipment to attach the accessory holder 11 to the catalyst 10.
CAUTION!
Due to the catalytic converter weight it is necessary to use a lifting device. Use the lifting equipment
corresponding to the vehicle configuration with regard to the workshop equipment (battery trolley,
straps, webbing, etc.). Observe the rules of safe handling with suspended loads.
5. Attach the tiedown straps 4 and 7 and screw on the nuts 3 and 6 including washers and spring washers.
6. Install the exhaust pipe connecting hose with sleeve 1 on the catalytic converter 10 and fasten the bolted
connection.
Page 5-157
7. Connect AdBlue line 2 to the injection nozzle 1.

1 2
CAUTION!
Always handle AdBlue with great care, it is a corrosive
substance. AdBlue must never come into contact with
other chemicals. AdBlue has corrosive effects on the
alloys containing copper and magnesium (e.g.
electrical cables).
CAUTION!
If any action is made on the AdBlue circuit elements,
protect electrical connectors and disconnected piping
against any AdBlue splashing adequately. B 2996
- to a disconnected connector: replace it.
8. Install the NOx sensor electronics panel 1 on the
accessory holder 4.
9. Connect the appropriate terminal board 2 to the NOx
sensor electronics panel 1 (for the NOx sensor 3
downstream the catalytic converter). 1
2
4 B 3001
10. Connect the appropriate connectors 1 and 2 (Fig.B

3002) of the electric lines of temperature sensors 3
(Fig.B 2997) (for the sensors upstream and
downstream the catalytic converter). 3
Plug the electric connectors in accordance with their
markings.
2
1
B 2997
11. Fasten the electrical harnesses from NOx and

temperature sensors with ties.
12. Check the tailpipe orientation/direction.
Note: 1
any damage nor affect other vehicle elements. 2
13. Top up or refill the AdBlue tank (minimum volume of 3
20l).
B 3002
Page 5-158
14. Turn on the Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system using the switch 16 on the instrument
panel.
15. Start the engine and check all joints for leaks.
16. Perform a test drive (up to 10 km).
Note:
If you face problems in the SCR system, please contact your authorized TATRA TRUCKS service dealer.
Page 5-159
Page 5-160
C 0147
6 Vehicle maintenance
Page 6-1
Vehicle maintenance 01-0565-ENG/01
6.1 Operations and preventive maintenance intervals
6.1.1 Daily - before the ride

- visual inspection of vehicle condition (damage, leaks, .....)
- check of engine operation by listening
- check of the engine oil level
- visual inspection of the fuel tank for leaks
- check of transmission and transfer case operation (and PTO where applicable)
- check of the oil level in the tank of the powersteering hydraulic circuit
- check of function and cleanliness of the sealing surfaces of the automatic dedusting valve1)
- check of the tires for condition and wear
- check of the oil level in the hydraulic tank for the body tipping circuit*
- check the oil level in the tank of the winch hydraulic circuit*
- check the winch equipment and accessories (e.g. rope, rope eye, remote control, rope guide rollers, etc.)*
6.1.2 Monthly
- check of the brake fluid level in the clutch hydraulic circuit (manual gearbox TATRA)
- draining of dirt from the coarse fuel filter (FLEETGUARD)2)
- check of water level in the transparent container, draining of water and debris from the coarse fuel filter, if
needed (RACOR)2)
- check of the oil level in the transmission
- check of the oil level in the transfer case
- check of the actuator (a set of pneumatic cylinders), piping and valve block for leaks, check mounting of
linear sensors, connectors and harness visually (NORGREN)
- check of the piping and mounting of sensors, connectors and harness visually of the transmission Allison
- check or possible cleaning of the breather valve of the transmission Allison
- check of the axles for wear and leaks
- lubrication of upper and bottom pivot pin mountings, cardan shaft bearing mountings on the half-axles and
cardan shaft cross pins front axle(s) and steering rear axle(s)3)*
- check of the oil level in the axle final drives
- check of oil in wheel hub reduction gears*
- check of the oil level in the transmission housing of the retarder*
- visual check of the play between the stator and rotors on the retarder*
- check of wheel nuts for tightening torque4)
- check the brake lining/pad wear indicator visually (disc brakes)*
- check the brake pads/discs for wear visually - independently of visual check of the wear indicator
(disc brakes)5)*
- check of the brake lining for condition (drum brakes)6)*
- check of the air system for leaks
1)If
the vehicle is used in very dusty conditions, check more often.
2)In
harsh climatic conditions, check more often.
3)When operating in muddy terrain, reduce the time to weekly inspections.
4)
Perform 4 times per month.
5)To be performed once in 3 months
6)If wear occurs, where the limit for exchange is close, reduce the time to a week.
Page 6-2
31-10-2017 Vehicle maintenance
- drain of condensate from the air tanks

- check of the tow hitch for wear damage (incl. mounting)
- visual check of the engine intake joints downstream the filter
- check and cleaning (replacement) of the main filter element1)
- check of the fuel system for leaks
- check of pollen filter contamination
- check of all functions of the A/C unit
- turn on the independent heating for 10 minutes as a minimum, outside the heating season as well*
- check of the tipper cab function, inc. locking
- check of rearview mirror setting and heating functions
- check the condition and function of the external vehicle lighting
- review of the vehicle electrical equipment for preheating the engine oil pan (230V/50Hz power supply from
electrical devices)2)*
- check the oil filter element in the hydraulic tank for the body tipping/winch circuit3)*
- check the air filter element in the hydraulic body tipping circuit and replace if needed*
- check the winch function*
1)
Perform 1 for 3 months or after the service indicator is lighting.
2)Recommended interval 2x a year (before and after the winter).
3)According to the clogging indicator (only for the filter housing with the oil pressure gauge).
Page 6-3
6.2 Technical maintenance during running in - after 2,500 - 3,000 km

Vehicle
- visual check of vehicle condition (damage, leaks, .....)
Engine
- check of engine condition (damage, leaks, .....)
- check the vehicle´s engine with the tester
- check of the cylinder head covers and gaskets
- check of the valve clearance and adjustment, if needed
- check of the alternator V-belt for tensioning (tensioning, if needed) and air-conditioning blower
- check of the exhaust tract for leaks, turbocharger mounting, tightening the exhaust pipe fastening nuts
- check of the filling (intake) main for leaks and rubber components condition
- check of the engine intake air underpressure indicator and the electric circuit of "underpressure indicator -
indicator lamp"
- check of function and cleanliness of the sealing surfaces of the automatic dedusting valve
- check of the turbocharger oil supply and outlet piping for leaks
- check of the accelerator pedal, adjustment if needed
- check of the engine exhaust brake switch at the accelerator pedal and adjust, if needed.
- check of the AdBlue inlet and return piping
- check of the AdBlue oil heating inlet and return piping
Transmission assembly and propeller shafts

- check of the shift assistance, constant mesh and transfer case, PTOs for leaks - check of all connections
and features for leaks (manual gearbox TATRA)*
linear sensors, connectors and harness visually (NORGREN)*
- check of the piping and mounting of sensors, connectors and harness visually (transmission ALLISON)*
- check of the breather valve (transmission ALLISON)*
Axles
- check of the axles for wear and leaks
- check of the oil level in the axle final drives and check them for leaks
- check of the oil level in back-bone with separate oil filling and check them for leaks*
- change oil in the reduction gears in wheel*
- visual check of the condition of the retarder (mechanical damage, leaking)*
- check of retarder functions*
Suspension
- check of the rear axles camber (applies to vehicles with a combined suspension)*
- check of leaf spring shackle bolts (torque)
Air system
- check of the automatic load control setting
- check of pressure regulator cutoff pressure
- check of the pressure after the brake circuit reducing valve
- check of the pressure in the brake cylinders
- check of air tank mounting
Page 6-4
- check of the CTIS function
Steering
- check of the front axle(s) wheel camber and toe-in
- check of the proper torque of steering lever fastening bolts near pivots
- check of the power steering mounting bolts and the nuts of the main steering lever (tightening torque)
- replacement of the power steering tank(s) filter element(s)
Frame and bodywork

- check of the nuts of the vehicle chassis frame mounting bolts
- check of the tightening torque of the nuts (bolts) mounting the winches to the vehicle chassis
Page 6-5
6.3 Technical maintenance TM1 after covering every 30,000 km or every 600 engine
hours or every 12 months (whichever is earlier)
Vehicle
Engine
- check of engine condition (damage, leaks, .....)
- check of the valve clearance and adjustment, if needed
- check of the alternator V-belt for tensioning (tensioning, if needed) and air-conditioning blower
- check of the exhaust tract for leaks, turbocharger mounting, tightening the exhaust pipe fastening nuts
- check of the filling (intake) main for leaks and rubber components condition
- cleaning the cylinder head cooling ribs, filling air coolers, oil cooler and cooling blower
- check of the engine intake air underpressure indicator and the electric circuit of "underpressure indicator -
indicator lamp"
- check of function and cleanliness of the sealing surfaces of the automatic dedusting valve1)
- check of the electronic engine cooling control for function
- check of the cold engine start auxiliary equipment for function
- check of the AdBlue inlet and return piping
- check of the AdBlue oil heating inlet and return piping
- drain of dirt and water from the AdBlue tanks
- check of the turbocharger oil supply and outlet piping for leaks
- check and cleaning (replacement) of the main filter element2)
- check of the engine and vehicle systems using a tester
- check of the cylinder head covers and gaskets
- check of the declutching operation
- lubrication of the clutch shaft bearing
- check of the oil level in the clutch PTO*
- visual check of the fuel tank for leaks
- replacement of the screw-mounted filter of the coarse filter (FLEETGUARD)
- replacement of the filter element of the fine filter
- replacement of the coarse cleaner filter element (RACOR)
- draining of dirt and water from fuel tanks

- check of the transmission, transfer case and PTOs
- check of the shift assistance, constant mesh and transfer case, PTOs for leaks - check of all connections
and features for leaks (manual gearbox TATRA)*
- check of the gear shift lever for wear and damage, incl. mounting clearance, check of the expanding
mechanism for cab tilting and drop box control bar after the engine (manual gearbox TATRA)*
1)Check
more often in a very dusty environment.
2)After
the service indicator is lit or TM 1 (normal operation).
In extremely dusty environments - more often.
Page 6-6
- check of the ball joints clearance of the gear shift mechanism (manual gearbox TATRA)*
- check of the outside surface of gearshift control bowden ropes - mounting, damage (abrasion) of the
external plastic packaging (manual gearbox TATRA)*
- check of the venting of the transmission and the transfer case
- calibration shifting (NORGREN)*
linear sensors, connectors and harness visually (NORGREN)*
- check and venting of the actuator and valve block (NORGREN)*
- check of the piping and mounting of sensors, connectors and harness visually (transmission ALLISON)*
- check of the breather valve (transmission ALLISON)*
- check of the universal joints, coupling splining, noise, leakage
- check of tightening of mounting bolts on the flanges with cross splining
Axles
- check of axle condition (damage, leaks, .....)
- check of the oil level in the axle final drives
- check of the oil level in back-bone with separate oil filling*
- check of the oil level in the reduction gears in wheel*
- check of the clearance of the front wheel hub bearings (front axle(s))
- check of the axle protecting rubber packings for damage, replace if needed (minor cracks, ageing, etc.)
- check of the clearance of the rear axle(s) wheel hub bearings
- check of the venting of axle housings and wheel hub reduction gears*
- check of the venting of back-bone with separate oil filling*
- check of the PERROT brake expanding device (drum brakes)*
- replacement of the PERROT brake expander protective gaskets (drum brakes)1)*
- replacement of the brake shoe clamping and return springs (drum brakes)1)*
- check the clearance between the lining and disc (disc brakes)*
- check the brake discs, brake pads and brake calliper (disc brakes) for wear and damage*
- check of the brake cylinder mounting
- lubricate of upper and bottom pivot pin mountings of the front axle(s) and rear steering axle*
- lubricate of cardan shaft bearings mountings on the half-axles (front axle(s) and rear steering axle*
- lubricate of cardan shaft cross pins of the front axle(s) and rear steering axle*
- check of the overall condition of the retarder*
- check of retarder functions*
Suspension
- visual check of the condition and function of the suspension system
- visual check of the hydraulic shock absorbers for leaks
- check of the rubber bellows springs, removing impurities around metal brackets
- check of the position valve tie-rod, incl. mounting
- check of the rear axle(s) wheel camber
- check of the bellows springs filling circuit (ground clearance) for function and leaks
1)After
every two years of operation.
Page 6-7
Air system
- overall inspection of the air system
- check of the automatic load control setting
- check of the firon filter element in the condensing sump and replacement, if needed
- check of pressure regulator cutoff pressure
- check of the pressure after the brake circuit reducing valve
- check of the bellows suspension springs for leaks
- check of the main caliper for wear and damage, incl. mounting
- check of the rubber air hoses for wear and damage
- check of the brake cylinder venting and spring brake releasing
- check of the condition and function of the air coupling heads (filling and control)1)
- check of the pressure in the brake cylinders
- check of air tank mounting
- replacement of air dryer cartridge2)
- check of the function of all servo-control circuits (differential, electro-pneumatic valves .....)
- check of the compressor functioning
- check of the the CTIS operation*
Steering
- check of the oil level in the tank of the powersteering hydraulic circuit
- check of the steering condition (damage, .....)
- check of the steering play
- lubrication of ball joints (does not apply to maintenance-free ball joints)
- check of the front axle(s) wheel camber and toe-in
- check of the proper torque of steering lever fastening bolts near pivots
- check of tightening of mounting bolts of the double steering arm
- lubrication of telescoping steering shaft in the cab
- lubricate of double steering arm (does not apply to maintenance-free ball joints)
- lubrication of telescoping steering shaft and of spline steering spindle (under the cab)
- check of the steering column mounting, steering column clearance, steering wheel crossbars
- check of the cross joints, steering shaft bearings and angular gears for wear and damage
- check the centering cylinder for liks (ETS)
- check and adjust the nitrogen presure in the hydraulic accumulator (ETS)
Frame and bodywork

- check of the oil level in the hydraulic circuit for spare wheel tilting
- lubricate the pins of the spare wheel lifting device
- visual check of the spare wheel lowering rope
- lubrication of the worm mechanism and rollers for spare wheel lifting
- check of the tow hitch for wear damage (incl. mounting)
- hitch lubrication
- check of the tightening torque of the nuts (bolts) mounting the winches to the vehicle chassis*
- check the oil level in the winch hydraulic circuit*
- check the oil level in the winch gearbox housing*
1)Always when connecting a trailer.

2)After
every two years of operation.
Page 6-8
- check the winch function*

- check, clean and lubrication the rollers and winch guide rollers system*
- lubrication of the winch rope*
- check or adjust the clearance between the tipper body and frame*
- check the oil filter element in the hydraulic body tipping/winch circuit and replace if needed1)
Cab
- check of the condition of the cab
- check of the oil level in the hydraulic circuit for cab tilting
- replacement of the pollen filter
- check of A/C unit condenser for dirt/clogging
- check of all functions of the independent heating
- check for leakage fuel system of the independent heating
- check of the combustion air piping and independent heater exhaust pipe
- check of movable parts of the seat base, incl. mounting
Electric accessories
- overall check of the condition and functions of the vehicle wiring
- check of the batteries (voltage)2)
- check of the condition and functioning of electrical sockets for trailer
- preservation of auxiliary start sockets2)*
- review of the vehicle electrical equipment for preheating the engine oil pan (230V/50Hz power supply from
electrical devices)2)*
1)According to the clogging indicator (only for the filter housing with the oil pressure gauge).
2)Recommended
interval 2x a year (before and after the winter).
Page 6-9

1,200 engine hours or every 36 months (whichever is earlier)
Vehicle
Engine
- steps specified under TM1
- replacement of the rubber gaskets on the engine intake main1)
- replacement of the main filter element2)
- replacement of the safety filter element3)
- replacement of the selective catalytic reduction system filter element
- check of the clutch master cylinder and hydraulic circuit for leaks*
- replacement of the injection nozzles and adjustment of the injector opening pressures4)

Axles
- check the brake discs, brake pads and brake calliper (disc brakes) for wear and damage*
Suspension
- check of the cross stabilizer mounting
- check of leaf spring shackle bolts (torque)
- check of the leaf spring safety shackles for wear
- check of the leaf spring suspension and mounts
Air system
Steering
- check of the power steering (steering monoblock) for operation and leaks5)
- check of the power steering mounting bolts and the nuts of the main steering lever (tightening torque)
Frame and bodywork

- check the tightening torque of the bolt nuts mounting the frame to the vehicle chassis
- check of the frame for wear, cracks and damage
1)To
be performed after covering 180,000 km.
2)Reduce the interval if having operated in a very dusty environment. Always replace when the filter element is damaged.
3)
To be performed upon every fourth replacement of the main filter element.
4)To be performed after covering 360,000 km.
5)To be performed upon every fourth TM2.
Page 6-10
- replace the oil filter of the hydraulic body tipping/winch circuit1)*

- replace the breather filter of the hydraulic body tipping/winch circuit2)*
- replace the air filter of the hydraulic body tipping/winch circuit2)*
Cab
- check of the refrigerant volume in the A/C
- check or replacement of heating exchanger of heating independent
Electric accessories
- check of the fuse box area
- check of the electronics box area
- check of the connector wall area
1)To be performed every time the hydraulic oil is changed (only for the filter housing without the oil pressure gauge).
2)To
be performed when damaged, clogged or upon oil change.
Page 6-11
6.5 Engine
6.5.1 Engine cleaning

To secure a trouble-free operation of the engine cooling system under all operating conditions, the cylinder
cooling ribs, cylinder heads, cooling fan and especially oil cooler and charge air coolers must be perfectly
clean.
Dismount the upper metal sheet and if much polluted, detach also the outlet sheets clamped by means
of springs among engine cylinders.
Use the degreasing solvent to clean the polluted spots and then rinse them with a stream of warm water.
After cleaning the engine, remount all parts in position.
WARNING:
While washing the engine, prevent water and dirt from getting inside the alternator.
6.5.2 Oil system

Checking the engine oil level
- The engine oil dipstick 1 is located on the RH side behing
the cab.
A 7608
- When checking the oil level 2 to 3 minutes after stopping

the engine heated to the operating temperature, the “ +
and -” marks are valid.
Note:
The difference between these marks makes 4.5 litres.
- When checking the oil level before starting out (after
6 hours´ standstill at least), the mark on the opposite side
of the oil dipstick shows the maximum oil level.
- Oil should not be added until its level falls to the bottom
mark at the dipstick.
A 6370
- Constant filling up to the top mark "+" is unnecessary.
WARNING!
Exceeding the oil level over the top mark "+" at the oil dipstick is unacceptable. It initiates
over-consumption of oil and can cause damage to the shaft seals.
- When checking the oil level,oil check dipstick into its lining fully to the stop.
- When the engine is running, the oil check dipstick must properly be inserted in the its guiding tube
Page 6-12
Engine oil and oil filter change

Draining the engine oil
WARNING:
Avoid direct contact with hot oil. Hot oil may cause
injury. Use protecting gloves when working with oil.

- Lift the cab
- Unscrew the filling neck cap on the centrifugal oil cleaner.
B 3189
- Loosen the oil drain plug on the drain tube from the lower
engine cover (on the right side behind the front wheel)
and drain oil into a prepared container.
- Let the oil drip off well.
Note:
Dispose of used oil in accordance with environmental
requirements.
A 7820
Cleaning oil filter and replacement of filter cartridge in

the oil filter
Replace the oil filter element at the same time when
changing oil.
- Unscrew screws fixing the oil filter body, remove the filter
and drain the used oil from the filter bowl.
A 5979
- Unscrew the oil filter central bolt and remove the bowl.
- Remove the filter element, clean the bowl from sediments
and as necessary, replace the bowl gasket in the filter
body.
- Install a new filter element and fix the bowl using the
central bolt.
- Replace "O" sealing rings and reinstall the filter to engine.
A 6114
Page 6-13
Cleaning the centrifugal oil filter

- Unscrew the nut fixing the rotor cover 1 and remove it.
- Remove the rotor 3 and lay it with nozzles down so that
the oil can spill out.
- Release the nut 2 on rotor and separate both rotor parts
from each other.
- Use a wooden spatula to remove dirt from rotor inner
walls and clean all parts in diesel fuel properly.
- Take care that both rotor parts are reinstalled in a proper
A 4672
position prescribed by marks.
- Prior to mount the rotor cover, try with hand whether the rotor is free to rotate.
- Carefully tighten the nut of the rotor cover so that the rotor cover would not be damaged.
WARNING:
Clean the centrifugal oil filter every time upon engine oil refilling and replace the filter element upon
every second engine oil refilling.
- Remove dirt from the magnetic drain plug and replace the sealing with a new one.
- After draining all oil (it takes about 20 minutes), screw the drain plug on.
- Fill the engine with the fresh oil to the separate mark on the dipstick and add another 4 liters of oil.
- Check the oil level within the framework of the next routine check.
- The oil tank cap must be screwed in when the engine is running.
WARNING:
If indicator lamp 20 does not go out within 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
15 seconds from engine start, it is necessary to
immediately stop the engine to avoid damage thereto
and reassure that required oil quantity in the engine
casing.
B 3431
Page 6-14
6.5.3 Turbocharger
Inspect the turbocharger together with the inspection of the
engine.
Note:
For easy access to the turbocharger, remove the top cover
or back cover on the accessories holder behind the cab.
Remember to inspect upon each engine oil change:

- oil inlet and return manifolds to/from turbocharger;
- exhaust manifold and connections and;
- intake (suction) manifold for leaks. A 5981
WARNING:
Fill the turbocharger bearing housing with the pure engine oil before the first putting the engine in
operation during the turbocharger replacement.
6.5.4 Fuel system

CAUTION!
Do not smoke when handling with fuel! Turn off the engine before fuelling. Fuel and vapors are
flammable and explosive. vehicle damage and serious injury to persons might occur.
- Pay particular attention to maintenance of the fuel system, especially to regular water and dirt discharge
from the coarse fuel filter.
- When neglecting the prescribed maintenance, the engine fuel injection system may be damaged.
Make sure high-quality fuel is used.

If the fuel is stored in barrels or canisters, possible presence of impurities may result in a disruption of the fuel
system.
Therefore it is necessary to filter such fuel before pouring into the tank.
Never overfill the fuel tank.
The fuel could overflow due to thermal expansion.
6.5.4.1 Dirt and water discharge from the fuel tank

- The vehicle must be at standstill for some time prior to
drain dirt and water from the fuel tank in order water with
dirt could separate from the fuel.
- Release the bolt on the tank bottom to drain the sludge.
- If the pure fuel starts to flow out, tighten the bolt again.
B 1940
Page 6-15
6.5.4.2 Coarse fuel filter

Different versions of coarse fuel filters may be installed in the fuel system.
FLEETGUARD FS 1212 with a Non-transparent Sediment Bowl

The coarse fuel filter 6 is located on the right side vehicle
behind the cab.
1
Draining dirt and water from the coarse fuel filter 2

The dirt from fuel and water accumulate in the sediment 8 3
bowl in the coarse fuel filter 6 of the vehicle operation.
7
Drain dirt and water from the filter once a month1):
- Unscrew the drain valve completely and allow the dirt to
spill out. 6 5 4 B 1520
- If the pure fuel starts to flow out, reinstall the drain valve.
Take a care to fit the valve thread co-axially into the threaded hole in the filter and be sure not to damage it.
Note:
Collect dirt flowing out of the filter to a prepared container and liquidate in accordance with local regulations
regarding the environment protection.
WARNING:
Always drain the sludge in an environment-friendly manner, avoiding soil contamination.
Coarse fuel filter replacement

- Drain fuel from the filter using the drain valve.
- Turn the filter body to the left to remove it from the filter cover and remove gasket from the filter cover bolt.
- Clean the gasket contact surface on the filter cover and on the filter cover bolt.
- Fill the new filter with a pure fuel and gently smear the rubber gasket with fuel.
- Install a new gasket on the filter cover bolt.
- Screw a new filter on the filter cover and tighten it by hand.
- Start the engine and inspect it for leaks visually.
Note:
The element removed from the filter is contaminated with crude oil products and must be liquidated
in accordance with local regulations regarding the environment protection.
1)Montly
- for normal traffic.
In harsh climatic conditions, check more often.
Page 6-16
RACOR 900 FH 324 10 with transparent sludge bowl

1
The vehicle is equipped with heated RACOR 900 FH 324 10
coarse fuel filter, where a replaceable filter element is used. 2
The coarse fuel filter 7 is located on the RH side behing the
cab under the holder equipments. 3
Coarse fuel filter maintenance
The filter maintenance lies in regular water and dirt
desludging and replacing of filter element. 4
8 7 6 5 B 1530
Dewatering and desludging

Dirt and condensate deposit on the coarse filter sump
bottom during operation.
Water and dirt drain from the preliminary fuel filter should
be carried out once a week at least, especially in winter
after ending the drive when the fuel is still warm.
WARNING:
Engine must not be running!
Collect dirt flowing out of the filter to a prepared container

and liquidate in accordance with local regulations regarding
the environment protection.
WARNING:
Always drain the sludge in an environment-friendly
manner, avoiding soil contamination.
- Install a pipe onto the sludge valve 7 if it is not possible to

put a pan beneath sludge valve directly.
- To drain the filter, loosen the drain-off valve 7
on the sludge bowl 6 bottom and discharge the dirt.
- If clean fuel flows out, reinstall the drain-off valve.
- The water level in the sludge bowl 6 should never reach
the lower edge of separator 5.
B 0904
Page 6-17
Replace the coarse fuel filter element

Replace the filter element in the intervals as per the
Service Booklet.
Replace the filter element as follows:
- Turn off fuel heating using switch 8 .
- Discharge fuel from the sludge valve 7 and close the

valve.
- Unscrew the filter cover mounting bolt 1
and remove the filter cover 2.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
- Replace old filter element 3.
- Remove old sealing from the cover mounting bolt 1 and
filter cover 2. 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
- Clean the contact surface for the cover mounting bolt 1,
cover 2 and filter body. B 3727
- Fit a new filter element 3 on the mandrel 4 in the filter.

- Fill the filter with clean fuel.
- Fit new sealing to the groves on the cover mounting bolt 1 and cover 2 and apply fuel to it slightly.
- Install the filter cover 2 and hand-tighten the cover mounting bolt 1 (do not use a tool).
- Bleed the fuel system, if needed.
- Check the filter for leaks after the engine start visually.
Note:
The element removed from the filter is contaminated with crude oil products and must be liquidated
in accordance with local regulations regarding the environment protection.
WARNING:
Never drive without the element or with a damaged one to avoid serious damage to the engine.
Engine cannot be even started with the filter without an element. It is recommended to keep a spare
element in the vehicle.
Neither regenerating nor reassembling of the element is recommended.
The sealing of the cover mounting bolt and filter cover is supplied along with the element.
WARNING:
If the engine is not running, make sure the filter heating is not turned on longer than 30 minutes.
Page 6-18
6.5.4.3 Fine fuel filter

Fine fuel filter maintenance
The fuel system includes the fine fuel filter with
a replaceable filter element.
WARNING:
Never drive without the element or with a damaged one to avoid serious damage to the engine.
Engine cannot be even started with the filter without an element.
Replace the filter element in the intervals as per the Service Booklet:
Replacing of fine fuel filter

- Lift the cab.
- Release the plug on the filter bottom, drain the fuel and
retighten the plug.
B 3413
- Unscrew the fastening screw from the filter bowl, remove

the bowl and take out the filter element.
- Clean the bowl including the gasket contact surfaces.
- Smear the mandrel in the bowl with fuel and make sure
that spring c/w dish are installed on it.
Use a screw-like movement to install a new filter element
on the mandrel.
Take a care not to release the rubber bushings from the
element cover.
- Clean the rubber gasket along the filter cover, fit the bowl
A 5971
on cover and tighten the bowl fastening screw.
- Bleed the fuel system.
- Start the engine and visually inspect the fuel system for leaks.
Page 6-19
6.5.4.4 Fuel system bleeding

- Loosen the bleeding screw 1 on the file fuel filter cover.
- Unscrew the manual pump riser.
- Pump the fuel using a manual pump until the pure fuel
starts to spill out (fuel can also be pumped using the
electric feed pump via switch 7) ).
- Tighten the bleeding screw 1 and go on pumping until

you can hear a “creaky sound” of the overpressure relief
valve on the injection pump.
A 5629
- Push the hand pump riser down and screw tightly.
B 3480
Page 6-20
6.5.5 Air filtration

Take an extreme care to the air filtering and a perfect tightness of the whole intake manifold, because
it has a decisive influence upon the mechanical wear (service life) of the engine.
Neglecting or not keeping the prescribed maintenance of the filter system can considerably reduce
the engine life.
Use only the filter elements recommended by the manufacturer.
Otherwise the manufacturer is not responsible for the engine damage occurred.
The air filter is fitted with a dust reservoir c/w automatic dust-off valve, main filter element and safety filter
element.
6.5.5.1 Air filter SANDRIK

Air filter maintenance
Maintenance of the dust reservoir with dedusting valve
- Check the dedusting and rubber gasket lips for dirt and
damage.
- The lips must be flexible, damage-free, must not lean into
any surrounding vehicle parts.
- Dirt deposited in dedusting valve is removed
automatically, the collector itself requires no special
maintenance.
- Press the emptying groove to check its correct A 4715
functioning.
Main air filter element maintenance

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A indicator lamp 17 on the main instrument panel 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
indicates a pollution of the main filter element.
When the indicator lamp flashes and the engine is running,

it is necessary to remove and clean the main filter element.
B 3431
Check it for condition, clean and/or replace it as follows:

- Remove the dust collector 5 from the filter jacket.
B 2254
Page 6-21
- Remove the dust collector partition 4 and unscrew the

winged nut.
- Remove the main filter element.
- Check the main filter element for damage.
If damaged, replace it with a new one, as well as the
safety element. 3
- Clean the filter inside and dust collector.
When cleaning, the safety element must be mounted
properly.
- Install the main filter element (cleaned or new). 4 B 2253
WARNING:
The element may be cleaned four times as a maximum (ten times as a maximum if operated
permanently in very dusty environment), then it must be replaced with a new one.
Maintenance of the safety air filter element

You need not to perform any maintenance of the safety filter element.
Replace the safety filter element upon every fourth replacement of the main filter element, or if the main filter
element is damaged, or after two years of operation from the last replacement of the safety filter element.
Loosen the nut to remove the element.
Cleaning the main air filter element

Knock out all dirt from the element on a flat support in
horizontal position by continuously turning the filter element
over its axis.
In doing so, avoid any damage or deformation of the
element.
Prevent from entering dirt to the inner part.
A 5984
Check the main air filter element

Replace the main filter element if:
- cracks are found out on the filter paper;
- paper does not stick to the metal covers;
- deformation to the covers or the whole unit is detected;
- sealing is deformed, cracked, non-elastic, does not stick
or damaged otherwise.
WARNING:
When replacing a damaged main element, replace the
safety element at the same time. A 2753
Page 6-22
Installation of the main and safety air filter element

- Before mounting the filter element, make sure first that
the guide wheel 1 is pressed properly to the filter rear
face and sealing contact surface on the rear face is clean
and undamaged.
- Smear the rubber gasket of elements with grease slightly.
- Install the safety element 2 and tighten using a nut.
B 2252
- Install the main filter element 3.

- Tighten the winged nut.
- Install the dust collector partition 4.
Install the partition with a cutout upwards.
- Install the main filter cover 5. 3
The cover must fit to the dust collector offset, the arrow
on its bottom must be directed upwards.
Use four tightening clamps to secure it.
The rubber dedusting valve may not touch the adjacent
vehicle parts. 4 B 2253
Inspection of the sub-pressure indicator circuit and

function
- During inspection the engine must be at standstill and the
ignition key must be in position I.
- Detach the hose of the sub-pressure indicator from the
air filter.
- Create a sub-pressure (e.g. with mouth).
- If it works properly, the signal lamp 17 lights up on

the instrument panel. A 5665
- If not, inspect if the signal lamp bulb has not been blown or inspect the continuity of the circuit between bulb
and indicator.
Page 6-23
6.5.5.2 Air filter DONALDSON

Air filter maintenance
Maintenance of the dust reservoir with dedusting valve
- Check the dedusting and rubber gasket lips for dirt and
damage.
- The lips must be flexible, damage-free, must not lean into
any surrounding vehicle parts.
- Dirt deposited in dedusting valve is removed
automatically, the collector itself requires no special
maintenance.
- Press the emptying groove to check its correct
functioning. A 4715
Maintenance of the main filter element

Pollution of the air filter main element is indicated by the 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
indicator lamp 17 on the main instrument panel.
When the indicator lamp flashes and the engine is running,
it is necessary to remove and clean the main filter element.
B 3431
Carry out the inspection of the main element, clean it, eventually replace as follows:
- remove the main filter element;
- check the main filter element for damage.
If damaged, replace it with a new one, as well as the safety element;
- clean the filter inside and dust collector.
When cleaning, the safety element must be mounted properly;
- install the main filter element (cleaned or new).
Page 6-24
Remove the main filter

- Remove the dust collector 5 from the filter jacket.
B 3171
- Because the filter fits tightly over the outlet tube to create
the critical seal, there will be some initial resistance,
similar to breaking the seal on a jar. Gently move the end
of the filter back and forth to break the seal then rotate
while pulling straight out. Avoid knocking the filter against
the housing.
A - Rotate the filter while pulling straight out.
A
B 2921
Maintenance of the safety filter element

You need not to perform any maintenance of the safety filter.
- If your air cleaner has a safety filter, replace it every third primary filter change. Remove the safety filter as
you would the primary filter. Make sure you cover the air cleaner outlet tube to avoid any unfiltered
contaminant dropping into the engine.
Clean both surfaces of the outlet tube

- Use a clean cloth to wipe the filter sealing surface and
the inside of the outlet tube. Contaminant on the sealing
surface could hinder an effective seal and cause leakage.
Make sure that all contaminant is removed before the
new filter is inserted. Dirt accidently transferred to the
inside of the outlet tube will reach the engine and cause
wear. Engine manufacturers say that it takes only a few
grams of dirt to “dust” an engine! Be careful not to
damage the sealing area on the tube. A B
B 2922
Wipe both sides of the utlet tube clean.

A - Outer edge of the outlet tube
B - Inner edge of the outlet tube
Page 6-25
Check the old main filter element for leak clues

- Visually inspect the old main filter element for any signs
of leaks. A streak of dust on the clean side of the filter is
a telltale sign. Remove any cause of leaks before
installing new filter.
Replace the main filter element if:
- cracks are found out on the filter paper;
- paper does not stick to the metal covers;
- deformation to the covers or the whole unit is detected;
B 2923
- sealing is deformed, cracked, non-elastic, does not stick
or damaged otherwise.
WARNING:
When replacing a damaged main filter element, replace the safety filter element at the same time.
Check the new filter element for damage

Check the new filter element carefully, paying attention to
the inside of the open end, which is the sealing area.
NEVER install a damaged filter element. A new Donaldson

radial seal filter may have a dry lubricant on the seal to aid
installation.
B 2924
Installation of the main and safety filter element

Insert the new radial seal filter properly
If you’re servicing the safety filter, this should be seated
into position before installing the primary filter.
- Insert the new filter carefully. Seat the filter by hand,
making certain it is completely into the air cleaner
housing before securing the cover in place.
- The critical sealing area will stretch slightly, adjust itself
and distribute the sealing pressure evenly.
To complete a tight seal, apply pressure by hand at the B 2925
outer rim of the filter, not the flexible center. Avoid
pushing on the center of the urethane end cap. No cover pressure is required to hold the seal. NEVER use
the service cover to push the filter into place! Using the cover to push the filter in could cause damage to the
housing, cover fasteners and will void the warranty.
- If the service cover hits the filter before it is fully in place, remove the cover and push the filter (by hand)
further into the air cleaner and try again. The cover should go on with no extra force.
- Once the filter is in place, secure the service cover.
Page 6-26
WARNING:
NEVER use the service cover to push the filter into place! Using the cover to push the filter in could
cause damage to the housing, cover fasteners and will void the warranty.
Check connectors for tight fit

Make sure that ll mounting bands, clamps, bolts, and connections in the entire air cleaner system are tight.
Check for holes in piping and repair if needed. Any leaks in your intake piping will send dust directly to the
engine!
Check of the vacuum indicator function

- When checking the vacuum indicator, the engine must be
at standstill and ignition key in position I.
- Remove the vacuum tube from the air cleaner.
- Induce vacuum (e.g. by mouth).
- If the function is correct, the indicator lamp 17 will

illuminate on the instrument panel.
- If not, check the electric circuit from the bulb to the
indicator.
A 5665
6.5.6 Rubber dust nozzle on the air intake cleaner

How to prepare the dust nozzle before fording
- If the air cleaner cover is equipped with a dust nozzle
2, it is necessary to replace the dust nozzle with the
cap 1 before the fording. There is a risk of water
getting into the air intake cleaner.
- Return it to normal condition after fording.
2
Note:
The cap 1 is part of the vehicle equipment (according to 1
design of vehicle).
B 3564
Page 6-27
6.5.7 Selective catalytic reduction system

The system is equipped with the Fleetguard air cleaner
where replaceable Fleetguard AS 2474 filter element is
used.
The filter is located on the left side of the vehicle.
Replace the filter element in the intervals as per the

Service Booklet.
B 3759
6.5.7.1 Filter element

Filter element replacement
- Clean the air cleaner surface.
- The air cleaner must not be under pressure.
- Unscrew the filtering cartridge by rotating it counter-clockwise (using the filter clamping band).
- Use a cloth to wipe the bottom side of the cleaner lid.
- Make sure no dirt gets into the space with clean air.
- Use a new filter element.
- Apply a thin oil film to the sealing.
- Tighten the filter element manually (torque about 15 Nm).
Used filter element needs to be disposed of as special waste, as oil separated from the pressured air deposits
inside the element.
WARNING:
Before starting of filter element replacing, the front and rear axle brake pressure gauges must show
zero pressure – engine must be turned off unconditionally.
6.5.8 Auxiliary engine oil cooler

Maintenance
The auxiliary engine oil cooler 1 is located the left side
on the accessory holder behind the cab.
- Regularly check the transmission oil cooler visually
and clean if necessary. 1
- If dirty/clogged (insects, leaves, dust, etc.), blow
the plates with compressed air gently.
- The cooler plates must be free of mechanical damage.
B 2664
Page 6-28
6.6 Clutch
The clutch does not require any adjustments during operation. You will recognize during the ride that it is
necessary to replace a plate with a new one when it starts "slipping" at the maximum torque or when driving
away the clutch "slipping" is longer than usual.
In case of such findings, have the clutch plate replaced as soon as possible!
6.6.1 Clutch control equalizing tank

Checking the fluid level
Check the brake fluid quantity in the tank located under the
front foldable bonnet regularly.
- Periodically check the brake fluid in equalizing tank.

- When measuring the level in the brake fluid in equalizing
tank, park the vehicle on a flat surface.
Topping the brake fluid

B 3405
CAUTION!
The brake fluid is toxic and can cause injury. Avoid direct or indirect physical contact.
As the brake fluid is aggressive, it could damage the vehicle surface finish.
Avoid contact of the brake fluid with paint.
- Use specified fluids only.

- When topping up, do not remove the screen from the tank and top the fluid to the mark indicated (up to the
upper edge of the sheet-metal fastening sleeve).
- After topping up the brake fluid, tighten the sealing cap.
Refilling brake fluid

Note:
Refilling of brake fluid and bleeding the clutch hydraulic circuit can only be performed in an authorized TATRA
TRUCKS repair shop, or staff professionally trained for this activity, in the intervals as per the Service
Booklet.
Page 6-29
6.6.2 Clutch case

Draining water out of the clutch case
Draining the water from the clutch case is made only to
vehicles with a manual gearbox TATRA or semi-automatic
gearbox TATRA (system Norgren).
After fording or vehicle operation in extreme climatic

conditions (e.g. extremely humid (subtropical) weather),
condensate (condensed water) may occur in the clutch
housing.
This may result in possible sticking of or corrosion to the
clutch linings. B 2002
Therefore, it is necessary to periodically check, and drain
intruded water or condensate from the clutch housing, if needed.
- Drain the inside water through a drain screw at the bottom part of the clutch case into a container you
prepare beforehand.
- Clean the bearing surface of the drain screw properly.
- Place an O-ring on the plug and screw in the clutch case.
- Tighten the drain screw properly.
WARNING!
Before screwing the drain screw back, put a new O-ring on it.
6.7 Propeller shaft

6.7.1 Propeller shaft cross joints
Maintenance-free propeller shaft
Checking
- Consists in on-going external shaft check.
- Check the outside surface for deformation (bends,
twisting, notches, etc.).
- Check for vibrations (loose connecting brackets, bearing
wear, etc.).
A 5986
Lubrication
Needle bearings in joints need not be lubricated.
The propeller shaft is maintenance-free.
Page 6-30
6.7.2 Clutch shaft bearing*

Lubrication
Use the greasing nipple on the clutch housing cover to
lubricate the clutch shaft bearing.
- Before lubrication, remove all dirt from grease nipple.
Note:
Clutch shaft bearing lubrication intervals are specified in
the chapter 7: "Overview of lubricants and operating fluids".
A 5978
Page 6-31
6.8 Power take- off (PTO)

6.8.1 Clutch PTO*
a) Clutch PTOs without forced cooling
Legend for Fig. B 1340
2 - PTO oil filler cap - alternative version 8 1
3 - Dipstick
7
6 - Oil PTO breather plug 2
7 - Oil PTO breather plug
8 - PTO oil filler cap - alternative version 6
Check of PTO oil level 3

- Always check the oil level on a flat ground.
- Check the oil level in the PTO through the inspection hole
after unscrewing the filler cap 5 or dipstick mark 3.
- The oil level must reach the inspection hole bottom 5 or 5
dipstick mark 3.
4 B 1340
Oil refilling
Have the oil of the PTO from the clutch changed by an authorized TATRA TRUCKS service facility as often as
indicated in the Service Booklet.
- Drain oil from the entire PTO circuit step by step, unscrewing the plugs 1 and 4.
- Refill the oil circuit after screwing in the plug 4.
- Fill the PTO housing with about 2.3 litres of transmission oil through the filler hole 1 (alternatively, through
the hole filler 2). After filling the oil screw plug.
- Start the engine and turn on the PTO for about 1 minute.
- After stopping the engine, top up the PTO oil up to the inspection hole bottom edge 5, or check the oil level
using the dipstick where the level must reach a designated mark.
Page 6-32
b) Clutch PTOs with forced cooling*

Check of PTO oil level
- Check the oil level in the PTO through the inspection hole after unscrewing the filler cap 5 or dipstick mark
3.
- The oil level must reach the inspection hole bottom 5 or dipstick mark 3.
Clutch PTO cooling scheme
A 4913
Legend for Fig. A4913:

4 - Clutch PTO
5 - Hydraulic pump (on the transmission PTO)
6 - Engine rear noise cover
7 - Oil cooler drain plug
8 - Oil cooler breather plug
9 - PTO oil cooler
10 - Cooling fan
11 - Dipstick
Oil refilling
- Drain oil from the entire PTO and cooling circuits step by step, unscrewing the plugs 1, 3, 7 and 8.
- Refill the oil circuit after screwing in the plugs 3, 7 and 8.
- Fill the PTO housing 4 with about 2.3 litres of transmission oil through the filler hole 1.
- Start the engine and turn on the PTO for about 1 minute (to activate the hydraulic pump).
- After stopping the engine, top up the PTO oil up to the inspection hole bottom edge 2, or check the oil level
The total volume in the entire oil circuit is approximately 3.2 l.
Page 6-33
6.8.2 Transmission PTO*

The oil volume in the transmission PTO is a part of the transmission oil and it should be refilled simultaneously
with the transmission oil volume.
6.9 Manual gearbox TATRA

Checking the oil level
- Undo plug 4 to check the oil quantity.
- The oil level must reach to the lower edge of the hole.
Oil refilling
Have the transmission oil refilled by an authorized TATRA
TRUCKS service dealer pursuant to the Service Booklet.
B 1521
- On the left side in the transmission casing bottom, unscrew two union nuts 2 of the coolant piping on the oil
cleaner cap 1.
- On the left side in the transmission casing bottom, unscrew two mounting molts 3 of the oil cleaner cap 1.
WARNING:
Item 3 is not a drain plug, it is the shifter fork pin. DO NOT USE TO DRAIN OIL. Damage to the
transmission might occur as a result.
- Remove the cap 1, remove the the oil strainer and drain the old oil into a container prepared.
- Rinse the oil filter (strainer) located on the inner cover side in kerosene and remove dirt from the magnet
upon each refilling.
- Reinstall the cap with the filter and make sure the cap projection fits to the groove in the sheet-metal cover,
fastened firmly in the transmission casing.
- Tighten the cap with the filter (strainer).
- Remove the oil check and filler hole plug 4 and top up oil to the lower edge of the check and filler hole.
- Screw up two union nuts 2 of the coolant line pipe on the oil cleaner cap 1.
Page 6-34
6.10 Automatic transmission ALLISON
6.10.1 Introduction
a. Regular inspections
It is very important to keep an eye on the oil level and the electronic and hydraulic circuit connections.
Please check the following regularly:

- "Check the gear oil level.
- "Discoloured, strongly smelling transmission oil or exceeding the oil analysis limits.
- "Presence of transmission oil in the engine cooling system.
- "Oil leaks around mounting or hydraulic lines.
- "Oil dripping from the transmission or outlet seal area.
- "Dirt blocking the vent/bleeder at the top of the torque converter housing.
- "Bolts securing the transmission to the engine or vehicle components attached to the transmission unit (for
proper tightening).
- "Engine and transmission mounting (for proper tightening).
- "Wiring harnesses in contact with the transmission controls and vehicle functions - still in good condition.
"Contact your authorized TATRA TRUCKS service dealer for any unusual condition. Immediately remove any
problems encountered during the inspection to avoid further damage to the vehicle or transmission.
b. Preventing major issues

Revealing minor issues can help prevent major problems by contacting a TATRA TRUCKS authorized service
dealer in time for any of the following:
- "Problems while changing gears.
- "Driving difficulties - e.g. vibration.
- "Oil leakage from the transmission, hydraulic circuits or fittings.
Note:
Wetting around the vent/bleeder and the transmission outlet sealing is normal.
However, if there is any oil leakage in this area or anywhere on the transmission, make sure to remove the
cause of the leakage.
- "The "CHECK TRANS" (transmission fault) indicator lamp is on.
c. Recommended oils for automatic transmissions

Use only the oil compliant with the Allison TES 295 transmissions.
For a list of approved transmission oils refer to chapter 7 "Overview of lubricants and fluids" or the Allison
website: www.allisontransmission.com.
When choosing the right type of oil for your transmission, Allison recommends the following points to
be considered:
- "TES 295 compliant oil is designed for demanding operation and features an extended oil change interval.
- "TES 295-compliant oil is required for transmissions using prognostic functions.
- "TES 295-compliant oil enables the transmission to operate at low temperatures down to -35 °C.
Page 6-35
d. Transmission oil purity

CAUTION!
Containers or fillers that contained antifreeze or engine coolant must NEVER be used for the
transmission oil.
Antifreeze and coolant solutions contain ethylene glycol and water that can cause damage when
penetrated into the transmission.
Store the transmission oil in clean containers without deposits to prevent foreign material or chemical
impurities from entering it.
e. Transmission oil analysis

Have the oil analysis carried out once a year or before changing the oil. Use only one fluid analysis company
to ensure a consistent and accurate analysis.
f. . Transmission oil change

The new oil volume is less than that specified primary transmission filling volume because a small amount
remains in the outer lines and various cavities of the transmission unit.
After refilling oil, check the oil level.
g. g. Regular check of oil level

Although the transmission oil is not consumed when using the transmission unit, as may happen in the case
of the engine oil, please perform regular oil level checks before you bring the vehicle to an authorized TATRA
TRUCKS service dealer or just after returning from a service dealer.
Regular checks of oil level will help prevent human error or mechanical failure of the vehicle or transmission
unit components.
Regular checks also help to detect oil leakage, a cooler fault (contaminating transmission oil), overfilling,
insufficient oil volume, or the use of an incorrect type of oil upon the last transmission servicing.
6.10.2 General information on transmission servicing

a) Prognostics features
T ATRA FORCE vehicles equipped with Allison transmissions can have with so-called "Prognostics" -
monitoring the condition of important parts..
Prognostics monitor various operating parameters to determine and alert you when a specific maintenance
function is required. Prognostics feature Oil Life Monitor, Filter Life Monitor and Transmission Health Monitor.
You can then schedule the repair at your convenience. Allison Approved TES 295 transmission oil, Allison
transmission High Capacity main and lube filters and shift selector lever Allison 4th or 5th generation controls
with prognostics are required to engage prognostics.
Note:
Allison transmissions are equipped with High Capacity filters when they leave the TATRA TRUCKS
manufacturing plant; these transmissions are filled with oil pursuant to the TES 295 specification.
If any other fluids or filters are used, the Prognostics feature MUST BE turned OFF. Prognostics information
will not be accurate with any other transmission fluids and could result in missed maintenance activities
resulting in transmission damage. If Prognostics functions are not programmed or are turned OFF, refer to
chapter 7.5.2: “Oil and filter change intervals recommended for automatic transmission Allison”. For more
information, please contact either a TATRA TRUCKS authorized service facility, Allison Transmission
distributor or a service facility.
Page 6-36
Prognostics function description

Prognostics function name Description
Oil Life Monitor (OM) Displays the percentage of oil life remaining
Filter Life Monitor (FM) Notifies that main and lube filters need changed
Transmission Health Monitor (TM) Notifies that one or more clutches, C1-C5, needs replaced
Note:
The term TRANS SERVICE indicator refers to the lighted wrench icon in the shift selector levers.
Allison Transmission 4th or 5th Generation Controls with Prognostics has a TRANS SERVICE indicator,
between the SELECT and MONITOR display window on all Allison 5th Generation Controls with Prognostics
shift selector levers.
When a specified threshold is detected for any of the serviceable conditions, the TRANS SERVICE indicator
is illuminated to alert the operator.
Failure to attend to the service condition and reset the TRANS SERVICE indicator within a defined operating
period results in illumination of the CHECK TRANS light, indicating the increased probability that the service
condition will develop into a more serious condition.
b) Monitoring the condition of important parts (Prognostics)
Service symbol
If the vehicle is equipped with the ALLISON gearbox, the key symbol will
illuminate briefly (for 3 seconds the second time) when the ignition is switched on.
A wrench symbol appears in the following situations:

1) Normal mode:
- To check the symbol lighting functionality, the wrench symbol comes on for around 0.5 seconds and then
turns off again upon each engine start.
- To indicate that the prognostics feature is active, the wrench symbol lights up after the inspection
mentioned above once again for about 3 seconds.
If the light does not turn on again, the prognostics is not active.
Page 6-37
2) Warning mode:
- Warning messages associated with the oil life status:
The wrench symbol will light up for 2 minutes after the "Drive" mode is selected.
The wrench system so indicates the need for oil change.
- Warning messages associated with the filter condition:
The wrench symbol blinks for 2 minutes after the "Drive" mode is selected.
The wrench system so indicates the need for filter replacement.
- Warning messages associated with the state of the transmission (friction members):
The wrench symbol lights throughout the vehicle operation .
The wrench system so indicates the need for inspections of friction members (or the entire transmission).
c) Accessing Prognostics
When you are alerted via the wrench icon that service is due, you can check the status by toggling
through the shift selector display as follows.
(Be sure to park the vehicle on a level surface, shift to N (Neutral) and apply the parking brake before
accessing prognostics through the shift selector lever).
1. Oil life monitor (OM)
Read and reset oil life monitor (OM) from the Diagnostics button .
The system monitors various operating parameters representing the load cycle in time.
The system cannot monitor the time in terms of calendar months (this is up to operators)
a. Read OM
With the ignition on and the engine off to view the state, press the Diagnostics button on the shift
selector lever twice.
- “OM” appears followed by a number, from 99 to 0, which represents the percentage of oil life
remaining before a oil change is required.
99 is displayed for new oil and the number gradually decreases down to 00 for completely
used oil.
- The servicing wrench symbol lights up when the remaining oil life reaches 1%.
- The "Check Trans" indicator lamp turns on and P0897 diagnostic code (transmission
oil at the end of life) will be recorded, unless oil is changed.
- After oil change, the system should be reset.
Page 6-38
b. Reset OM
The OM may be reset back to 99% by either of these methods:
- Using either shift selector lever, press and hold MODE button for approximately
10 seconds while in oil life monitor mode
or
- using either shift selector lever, perform the following shift sequence with the ignition on
but the engine off. Do not stop the sequence for more than three seconds once you have
started.
N-D-N-D-N-R-N
Successful resetting is indicated by short lighting up of the service wrench symbol .

Note:
A “99” will display verifying that oil life monitor has been reset.
2. Filter life monitor (FM)
Read and reset filter life monitor (FM) from the Diagnostics button . This feature provides an alert when
the transmission’s oil filters need to be replaced. Both the main and lube filters must be changed when the
wrench icon in the selector display indicates the main filter should be changed. The system monitors the
pressure downstream the main filter.
a. Read FM
- With the ignition on and the engine off to view the state, press the Diagnostics button on the shift
selector lever three times.
- “FM” appears followed by either “oK” or “Lo”.
- “oK” means filters do not need to be changed (conforming).
- “Lo” means filters need to be changed (non-conforming).
- If an alarm is released concerning the filter condition, P088A diagnostic code (clogged filter)
is indicated but the "Check Trans" indicator lamp will not light up.
- If the oil change is not made soon, P088B diagnostic code (a clogged filter) is indicated and
the "Check Trans" indicator lamp lights up.
- After oil change, it is not necessary to reset the system, the system will recognize it
automatically.
Page 6-39
b. Reset FM
The FM automatically resets once the new filters have been installed. The FM can also be reset manually by
either of these methods:
- Using either shift selector lever, press and hold MODE button for approximately
10 seconds while in filter life monitor mode
or
- using either shift selector lever, perform the following shift sequence with the ignition
on but the engine off.
Do not stop the sequence for more than three seconds once you have started.
N-R-N-R-N-D-N
Successful resetting is indicated by short lighting up of the service wrench symbol .

Note:
The wrench icon will illuminate briefly and “oK” will display verifying filter life monitor has been reset.
3. Transmission health monitor (TM)

This prognostic feature alerts you when clutch maintenance is required. Parameters of the C1 - C5 friction
member system are monitored, i.e. all transmission clutches and brakes, except for the converter lock-up
clutch.
a. Read TM
- With the ignition on and the engine off to view the state, press the Diagnostics button on the shift
selector lever four times.
- “TM” appears followed by either “oK” or “Lo”.
- “oK” means no clutch maintenance is required (conforming).
- “Lo” means clutch maintenance is required (non-conforming).
- If a problem occurs, the diagnostic code P2789 is recorded after several warnings
(adaptive friction member system in the limit state).
- The transmission must undergo a complete inspection if a problem is detected.
b. Reset TM
- The system resets itself automatically providing it detects a corresponding state.
- Manual reset is only possible using the Allison DOCTM program. Operator reset through the shift selector
lever is not allowed.
Page 6-40
Table - Summary of display functions on the shift selector lever

Data displayed
Pressing order
Displayed parameter (Diagnostics Characteristic
button) Figure
abbreviation
Oil level 1x oL oK / oL Lo xx / oL HI xx
Oil life monitor 2x oM 99.......... 0 (remaining life in %)
Filter life monitor 3x FM oK / Lo
Transmission health monitor 4x TM oK / Lo
Diagnostic codes 5x d (serial number) _P xx xx
Additional Info
If an updated version is loaded to the existing control unit instead of the original calibration, then the oil life
data remains unchanged and is retained in the control unit memory.
6.10.3 Checking the oil level

Check the transmission oil level by one of the following methods:
a) Dipstick
The dipstick is marked with temperature bands for a COLD and HOT oil level check.
Use the dipstick method if any of the following situations exist:

- If transmission oil temperature is below the allowed temperature to check it electronically, conduct a COLD
CHECK to determine whether there is enough oil to start and move the vehicle.
- If the vehicle does not have an Allison 5th Generation shift selector lever.
- If the OLS or vehicle wiring is defective, or the OLS was not auto detected, preventing electronic access to
oil level.
b) Shift selector lever

Using shift selector lever to electronically check the Oil Level Sensor (OLS).
This method is more accurate than the dipstick method.
The OLS is designed to automatically compensate for oil temperature fluctuations (thermal expansion) that is,
within its operating band parameters for oil temperature.
Page 6-41
6.10.4 Checking oil levels using dipstick

Note:
Only use this check to confirm adequate oil volume for a
cold startup and not to set oil levels for continued
operation.
FULL
HOT
There are two temperature bands marked on the dipstick
to allow for transmission oil expansion when the
temperature increases.
B
The lower band, referred to as COLD CHECK, is used
when the transmission oil is below operating
temperature.
FULL ADD
COLD HOT
The upper band, referred to as HOT CHECK, is used
when the transmission oil is at normal operating
temperature.
A
The dipstick may refer to these as COLD FULL/COLD
ADD (COLD CHECK) and HOT FULL/HOT ADD (HOT
CHECK).
COLD
ADD
A - COLD CHECK zone
B - HOT CHECK zona
B 1738
a) COLD CHECK
The COLD CHECK band verifies the transmission has
adequate oil for startup and operation until it can be checked at the operating (hot) temperature.
Only use this check to confirm adequate oil level for a cold startup and not to set oil levels for continued
operation. Typically, the check is most accurate with oil temperatures of 16°C to 49°C (61°F to 120°F).
Note:
With engine off the oil level should reach the hot run band or higher on the dipstick even at cold ambient
temperatures. The cold check band is calibrated on the stick for the oil level attained while the transmission is
running and in N (Neutral). Do not move the vehicle until the oil level reaches the COLD FULL mark with
engine running and transmission in N (Neutral).
b) HOT CHECK
The HOT CHECK band checks the oil level at the normal operating temperature, 71 to 93°C (160 to 200°F).
Oil level checks at operating temperature offer the best assurance of maintaining the correct oil level.
Typically, the transmission is at operating temperature at the end of the shift or at the end of the day.
The oil must be maintained above the COLD CHECK mark to assure the oil is above the charging pump
suction port inside the transmission. This prevents charging pump cavitation which causes aeration of the oil
and erratic operation of the transmission. If the oil is above the HOT CHECK mark, it may contact the rotating
parts of the transmission causing oil aeration which results in erratic transmission operation, and may cause
overheating and power loss.
WARNING:
Transmission damage can result from extended operation at low oil level conditions.
Note:
Do not overfill the transmission. Overheating, oil foaming out of the breather, and power loss may occur if
driven while transmission is overfilled.
Page 6-42
a) COLD CHECK PROCEDURE

Note:
The correct oil level cannot be determined unless the
transmission is in
FULL
HOT
a level position.
WARNING:
B
DO NOT start the engine until the presence of
sufficient transmission oil has been confirmed.
Remove the transmission oil dipstick and be sure
the oil level is near the HOT FULL mark.
FULL ADD
COLD HOT
WARNING:
If you leave the vehicle and the engine is running,
A
the vehicle can move unexpectedly and you or
others could be injured. If you must leave the engine
running, do not leave the vehicle until you have
COLD
ADD
completed all of the following procedures:
1. Put the transmission in N (Neutral).
2. Be sure the engine is at low idle (500–800 rpm). B 1738
3. Apply the parking brakes and emergency brake

and make sure they are properly engaged.
4. Chock the wheels and take any other steps necessary to keep the vehicle from moving.
A COLD CHECK determines if the transmission has enough oil to be operated safely until a HOT CHECK can
be made. Complete a COLD CHECK after the presence of transmission oil has been confirmed with the
engine off. The transmission oil temperature should be between 16°C to 49°C (61°F to 120°F).
Note:
Always check oil level with the dipstick in the unscrewed or loose position.
Complete a COLD CHECK procedure using the dipstick

as follows:
1. Move the vehicle to a level surface, put the
transmission in N (Neutral) and set the parking
brake.
2. With the engine idling (500–800 rpm), shift to D
(Drive) and then to R (Reverse) to clear air from the
hydraulic circuits.
3. Run the engine at idle (500–800 rpm) in N (Neutral)
for about one minute.
4. Clean debris from around the end of the fill tube B 1720
before removing the dipstick.
5. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
6. Insert the dipstick into the fill tube, pushing down until it stops, but still in its loose or unscrewed position.
7. Remove the dipstick and observe the oil level. If the oil on the dipstick is within the COLD CHECK band,
the level is satisfactory. If the oil level is not within this band, add or drain as necessary to bring the level
within the COLD CHECK band.
Page 6-43
8. Perform a HOT CHECK at the first opportunity after

normal operating temperature 71°C to 93°C A
(160°F to 199 °F) is reached.
WARNING:
DO NOT operate the transmission for extended
periods of time until a HOT CHECK has verified
proper oil level. Transmission damage can result
from extended operation at improper oil level
conditions.
B
WARNING: B 1737
The oil level rises as oil temperature rises. DO NOT
fill the transmission above the COLD CHECK band if
the transmission oil is below normal operating temperatures. During operation, an overfull
transmission can become overheated, leading to transmission damage.
WARNING:
Obtain an accurate oil level by imposing the following conditions:
- Engine is idling (500–800 rpm) in N (Neutral);
- Transmission oil is at the normal operating temperature;
- The vehicle is on a level surface;
- Apply the parking brake and chock the wheels.
b) HOT CHECK PROCEDURE

Note:
Always check oil level with the dipstick in the unscrewed or loose position.
To complete a HOT CHECK procedure using the dipstick do the following:

1. Be sure oil has reached normal operating temperature of 71°C - 93°C (160°F - 200°F). If a transmission
temperature gauge is not present, measure oil level when the engine water temperature gauge has
stabilized.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and shift to N (Neutral).
3. Apply the parking brake and allow the engine to idle (500-800 rpm).
4. Clean debris from around the end of the fill tube before removing the dipstick.
5. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
6. Insert the dipstick into the fill tube, pushing down until it stops, but still in its loose or unscrewed position.
7. Remove the dipstick and observe the oil level.
The safe operating level is anywhere within the HOT RUN (between HOT ADD and HOT FULL) band on
the dipstick.
8. If the level is not within the HOT RUN band, add or drain oil as necessary to bring the level within the
HOT RUN band.
9. Measure oil level more than once.
Be sure oil level measurements are consistent.
If readings are not consistent, be sure the transmission breather is clean and not clogged.
10. If readings are still not consistent, contact your nearest TATRA TRUCKS authorized service facility,
Allison Transmission distributor or a service facility.
Page 6-44
6.10.5 Checking oil levels using shift selector lever

ELECTRONIC CHECK OF OIL LEVEL (PROGNOSTICS)
a) Display of oil level and oil level codes
After obtaining the oil level reading mode, the display 1
provision of the shift selector leverr indicates oil level 2
status to the operator by sequentially flashing the oil 3
level information two characters at a time to the 4
SELECT
and MONITOR digital displays (6 and 8).
5 R
N
+
6 D M
L
-
b) To enter the oil level function: 7

To check the oil level electronically from the shift selector 8
lever, do the following: 9 B 2900
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, shift to N (Neutral) and apply the parking
brake.
2. For a shift selector lever, press the 9 DIAGNOSTIC button one time.
3. The oil level reading may be delayed until the following conditions are met:
- Engine must be at idle (500-800 rpm).
- Transmission is in N (Neutral).
- Output speed must be zero.
- Oil temperature must be between 140°F (60°C) and 220°F (104°C).
- Vehicle has been stationary for two minutes to allow the oil to settle.
4. The shift selector displays the oil level data as follows:
CORRECT OIL LEVEL
The oil is within the correct oil level zone when OK is shown.
LOW OIL LEVEL

The display shows the number of quarts the transmission oil is low.
HIGH OIL LEVEL

The display shows the number of quarts the transmission oil is overfilled.
Page 6-45
c) Delayed oil level check

If the oil level check cannot be completed, one of the following oil level display faults will be shown
d) To exit the oil level function
For shift selector lever, press the 9 DIAGNOSTIC button until you return to range
display..
Page 6-46
6.10.6 Oil and filter change interval

1. Oil and filter change interval schedules with PROGNOSTICS turned ON
With authomatic Allison transmissions, 3000/4000 product families with PROGNOSTICS turned ON,
a replacement interval is set by the electronic system providing that all preconditions the system needs to
evaluate are met (oil complying with TES 295 approved by the Allison company, and "High Capacity" filters),
see Chapter 7.5.2 (Table No. 1).
The system, however, cannot monitor the number of calendar months; this has to be done independently by
the driver.
2. Oil and filter change interval schedules with PROGNOSTICS or turned OFF
With authomatic Allison transmissions, 3000/4000 product families with PROGNOSTICS turned OFF,
(using oil pursuant to TES 295 and approved by the Allison company, and "High Capacity" filters), for change
of filters and oil see Chapter 7.5.2 (Table No. 2a and Table No. 2b).
6.10.7 Refilling oil and changing filters

Drain oil
1. Before draining the used oil, clean the transmission
thoroughly, especially around the drain hole and
around the filler neck with the top of the dipstick.
Drain the oil when the transmission is at the normal
operating sump temperature of 71°C to 93°C
(160°F to 200°F). Hot oil flows quicker and drains
more completely.
2. Unscrew the dipstick.
3 2 1 B 1756
3. Unscrew the drain plug 1 at the transmission bottom

and discharge any hot oil into a prepared container. 1
WARNING:
Avoid contact with the hot oil or the sump when
draining transmission oil.
Direct contact with the hot oil or the hot sump may
result in bodily injury.
2
4. Examine the oil for contamination. 1
Note:
At each oil change, examine the drained oil for evidence B 1951
of dirt or water. A normal amount of condensation
appears in the oil during operation.
5. Clean the drain plug mating surface properly.
6. Fit a sealing O-ring 2 onto the drain plug and screw it into the casing.
7. Tighten the drain plug 1 to torque 25-32 Nm (18-24 lb-ft).
8. Replace the main filter (MAIN) and lubrication filter (LUBE) in the transmission - see the next chapter
b) Changing the MAIN and LUBE filters. Fill the required volume (approx. 45 l) of new transmission oil
through the filler hole.
Page 6-47
WARNING:
New oil must also be kept clean, both in terms of mechanical impurities, as well as from the chemical
point of view, otherwise it would have been paralyzed the sealing function of sealing elements and
other transmission members with serious consequences.
9. Screw in the filler and check hole caps and then check the oil volume pursuant to Chapter 6.10.3
"Checking the oil level".
10. Start the engine and turn on the PTOs for about 1 minute (to activate the hydraulic pump).
11. After stopping the engine, top up the transmission oil based on the information shown check the oil level
For recommended oils see Chapter 7 "Overview of lubricants and operating fluids".
b) Changing the MAIN and LUBE filters

Note:
Do not drain the tramsmission if replacing only the filters.
Transmission oil loss - filter change only
MAIN filter 1.9 litres (1 quart)
LUBE filter 7.6 litres (3 quarts)
1. Remove twelve bolts 1, two filter covers 2, two

gaskets 3, two O-rings 4, two O-rings 5 and two
filters 6 from the bottom of the transmission.
2. When reinstalling parts, lubricate and install new
O-rings 4 and 5 on each cover.
Lubricate O-ting inside filter 6 and push filter onto
each cover 2.
Install new gaskets 3 on each cover 2 and align bolt
holes in gasket with holes in cover.
3. Install filter and cover assemblies into the filter
compartment. Align each filter/cover assembly with B 1762
the holes in the channel plate/sump. Push the cover
assemblies in by hand to seat the seals.
4. Install twelvw bolts into cover and tighten to 51-61 Nm (38-45 lb-ft).
5. Replace the drain plug O-ring. Install the plug and tighten to 25-32 Nm (18-24 lb-ft).
WARNING:
Do not use the bolts to draw the filter covers to the control module. Do not use an impact wrench to
tighten the bolts. Using an impact wrench to tighten the bolts may cause stripped threads and
expensive parts replacement. Use a torque wrench to tighten the bolts.
Filter and gasket kits for transmission Allison

High-Capacity filter kit
4 inch filter kit P/N 29548988
Page 6-48
6.10.8 Breather
Location and purpose
- The breather 1 is located on top of the transmission 1
converter housing.
The breather prevents air pressure buildup within the
transmission and its passage must be kept clean and
open.
Maintenance
- The amount of dust and dirt encountered will
determine the frequency of breather cleaning.
Use care when cleaning the transmission. B 1777
WARNING:
Do not spray steam, water, or cleaning solution directly at the breather. Spraying steam, water, or
cleaning solution at the breather can force water or cleaning solution into the transmission and
contaminate the transmission fluid.
Replacement
- Always use a correctly sized wrench to remove or replace the breather.
Using pliers or a pipe wrench can crush or damage the breather stem and produce metal particles which
could enter the transmission.
- Tighten the breather to 12-16 Nm (9-12 lb-ft).
6.10.9 Auxiliary transmission oil cooler

The auxiliary oil cooler 1 is only available for the
ALLISON-equipped vehicles.
Maintenance 1
The transmission oil cooler 2 is located the right side on
the accessory holder behind the cab.
- Regularly check the transmission oil cooler visually
and clean if necessary.
- If dirty/clogged (insects, leaves, dust, etc.), blow
the plates with compressed air gently. B 2664
- The cooler plates must be free of mechanical damage.
Page 6-49
6.10.10 Diagnostic transmission codes (ALLISON)
Diagnostic code Code description

(DTC)
C1312 Retarder request sensor failed LOW
C1313 Retarder request sensor failed HIGH
P0122 Pedal position sensor low voltage
P0123 Pedal position sensor high voltage
P0218 Transmission oil over temperature condition
P0562 System voltage low
P057C Brake pedal position sensor LOW
P057D Brake pedal position sensor HIGH
P0602 TCM not programmed
P0603 Internal control module keep alive memory error
P0604 Control module random access memory (ram)
P0607 Control module performance
P060C Main processor monitor fault
P0614 Torque control data mismatch-ECM/TCM
P0634 TCM internal temperature too HIGH
P0642 Sensor reference voltage “a” circuit fault
P0652 Sensor reference voltage “b” circuit fault
P0657 Actuator supply circuit voltage 1 open (HSD 1)
P0658 Actuator supply circuit voltage 1 (HSD1) LOW
P0659 Actuator supply circuit voltage 1 (HSD1) HIGH
P0701 Transmission control system performance
P0703 Brake switch circuit
P0708 Transmission range sensor circuit HIGH
P070C Transmission oil level sensor circuit LOW
P070D Transmission oil level sensor circuit HIGH
P0712 Transmission oil temperature sensor circuit LOW
P0713 Transmission oil temperature sensor circuit HIGH
P0715 Turbine shaft speed sensor circuit
P0716 Turbine speed sensor circuit performance
P0717 Turbine speed sensor circuit no signal
P071A Neutral at stop input failed ON
P071D General purpose input fault
P0721 Output speed sensor circuit performance
P0722 Output speed sensor circuit no signal
P0725 Engine speed sensor circuit
P0726 Engine speed sensor circuit performance
P0727 Engine speed sensor circuit no signal
P0729 Incorrect 6th gear ratio
P0731 Incorrect 1st gear ratio
Page 6-50

(DTC)
P0732 Incorrect 2nd gear ratio
P0733 Incorrect 3rd gear ratio
P0736 Incorrect reverse ratio
P0741 Torque converter clutch system stuck OFF
P0752 Shift solenoid 1 valve performance - stuck ON
P076F Incorrect 7th gear ratio
P0776 Pressure control solenoid 2 stuck OFF
P0777 Pressure control solenoid 2 stuck ON
P077F Incorrect reverse 2nd reverse
P0796 Pressure control solenoid 3 stuck OFF
P0797 Pressure control solenoid 3 stuck ON
P07D9 Incorrect 8th gear ratio
P07F6 Incorrect 9th gear ratio
P07F7 Incorrect 10th gear ratio
P081B Crank enable circuit HIGH
P0837 Four wheel drive (4wd) switch circuit range/performance
P083C Transmission oil pressure switch 6 circuit LOW
P083D Transmission oil pressure switch 6 circuit HIGH
P0842 Transmission oil pressure switch 1 circuit LOW
P0843 Transmission oil pressure switch 1 circuit HIGH
P084C Transmission oil pressure switch tcc circuit LOW
P084D Transmission oil pressure switch tcc circuit HIGH
P0880 TCM power input signal
P0881 TCM power input signal performance
P0882 TCM power input signal LOW
P0883 TCM power input signal HIGH
P088A Transmission filter maintenance alert
P088B Transmission filter maintenance required
P0894 Unexpected mechanical gear disengagement
P0897 Transmission oil deteriorated
P0960 Main pressure modulation solenoid control circuit OPEN
P0961 Main pressure modulation solenoid system performance
P0962 Main pressure modulation solenoid control circuit LOW
Page 6-51

(DTC)
P0963 Main pressure modulation solenoid control circuit HIGH
P0964 Pressure control solenoid 2 (PCS2) control circuit OPEN
P0966 Pressure control solenoid 2 (PCS2) control circuit LOW
P0967 Pressure control solenoid 2 (PCS2) control circuit HIGH
P0973 Shift solenoid 1 (SS1) control circuit LOW
P0974 Shift solenoid 1 (SS1) control circuit HIGH
P0975 Shift solenoid 2 (SS2) control circuit OPEN
P0976 Shift solenoid 2 (SS2) control circuit LOW
P0977 Shift solenoid 2 (SS2) control circuit HIGH
P0979 Shift solenoid 3 (ss2) control circuit HIGH
P097A Shift solenoid 1 control circuit OPEN
P097B Shift solenoid 2 control circuit OPEN
P097C Shift solenoid 3 control circuit OPEN
P0980 Shift solenoid 3 control circuit HIGH
P0989 Retarder pressure sensor circuit LOW
P0990 Retarder pressure sensor circuit HIGH
P0A0B High voltage interlock loop 1 invalid
P0A2F Drive motor over temperature
P0A44 Drive motor overspeed
P0A7D Energy storage system over discharge
P0A90 Drive motor invalid direction
P0AA6 Isolation status invalid
P0B37 Service disconnect invalid
P0C19 Drive motor torque delivered performance
P0C26 Electric pump power draw too high
P0C2C Electric pump speed incorrect
P0C30 Energy storage system over charge
P0C76 High voltage bus discharge time too long
P0DA8 Hybrid battery voltage/drive motor inverter voltage
P1739 Incorrect low gear ratio
P1790 Gear shift module 1 calibration invalid
P1791 Gear shift module 2 calibration invalid
P1891 Throttle position sensor PWM signal LOW
P1892 Throttle position sensor PWM signal HIGH
P1901 Countershaft speed sensor circuit
P1902 Countershaft speed sensor performance
Page 6-52

(DTC)
P1903 Countershaft speed sensor no activity
P1907 Shift fork stuck moving to reverse position
P1922 Transmission oil pressure switch a circuit LOW
P1923 Transmission oil pressure switch a circuit HIGH
P1927 Transmission oil pressure switch b circuit LOW
P1928 Transmission oil pressure switch b circuit HIGH
P192C Transmission oil pressure switch c circuit LOW
P192D Transmission oil pressure switch c circuit HIGH
P1A01 Transmission control system 2 performance
P1A0C Transmission oil level sensor 2 circuit LOW
P1A0D Transmission oil level sensor 2 circuit HIGH
P1A11 DC/DC converter “A” fault active
P1A12 DC/DC converter “B” fault active
P1A13 Electric pump fault active
P1A14 Energy storage system fault active
P1A15 Inverter fault active
P1A20 High voltage interlock loop 2 invalid
P1A30 Inverter operating mode not correlated
P1A31 Energy storage system operating mode not correlated
P1A32 DC/DC converter “A” operating mode not correlated
P1A33 DC/DC converter “B” operating mode not correlated
P1A34 Electric pump operating mode not correlated
P1A3F Inverter isolation fault
P1A40 High voltage bus power balance
P2184 Engine coolant temperature sensor 2 circuit LOW
P2185 Engine coolant temperature sensor 2 circuit HIGH
P2637 Torque management feedback signal A
P2641 Torque management feedback signal B
P2669 Actuator supply circuit voltage 2 (HSD2) OPEN
P2684 Actuator supply circuit voltage 3 (HSD2) OPEN
P26E7 Actuator supply circuit voltage 4 (HSD 4) OPEN
P26E8 Actuator supply circuit voltage 4 (HSD 4) LOW
P26E9 Actuator supply circuit voltage 4 (HSD 4) HIGH
P2714 Pressure control solenoid 4 (PCS4) stuck OFF
P2715 Pressure control solenoid 4 (PCS4) stuck ON
Page 6-53

(DTC)
P2736 Pressure control solenoid 5 (PCS5) control circuit OPEn
P273F retarder oil temperature sensor over temperature condition
P2742 Retarder oil temperature sensor circuit LOW
P2743 Retarder oil temperature sensor circuit HIGH
P274B Transmission oil temperature sensor “C” circuit range/performance
P274C Transmission oil temperature sensor “C” circuit LOW
P274D Transmission oil temperature sensor “C” circuit HIGH
P274F Transmission oil sensor “C” over temperature
P2761 Torque converter clutch (TCC) pressure control solenoid (PCS) control circuit OPEN
P2763 Torque converter clutch (TCC) pressure control solenoid (PCS) control circuit HIGH
P2764 Torque converter clutch (TCC) pressure control solenoid (PCS) control circuit LOW
P2789 Transmission clutch life expired (clutch adaptive learning at limit)
P2793 Gear shift direction circuit
P281B Pressure control solenoid 7 (PCS6) control circuit OPEN
P281D Pressure control solenoid 7 (PCS6) control circuit LOW
P281E Pressure control solenoid 7 (PCS6) control circuit HIGH
P2832 Shift fork position circuit performance
P2833 Shift fork position circuit LOW
P2834 Shift fork position circuit HIGH
P2849 Shift fork stuck moving to forward position
P284D Shift fork unrequested movement
Page 6-54

(DTC)
P2879 Engine/hybrid clutch system slipping
P287A Engine clutch stuck on
U0073 Can communication bus 1 OFF
U0074 Can communication bus 2 OFF
U0100 Lost communication with ecm A
U0103 Lost communication with gear shift module 1
U0110 Lost communication with drive motor control module
U0111 Lost communication with energy storage system control module
U0287 Lost communication with electric pump
U0291 Lost communication with gear shift module 2
U0298 Lost communication with DC/DC converter “A”
U0299 Lost communication with DC/DC converter “B”
U0304 Gear shift module 1 incompatible
U0333 Gear shift module 2 incompatible
U0404 Gear shift module 1 invalid data
U0411 Inverter invalid data
U0412 Energy storage system invalid data
U0588 Electric pump invalid data
U0592 Gear shift module 2 invalid data
U0599 DC/DC converter “A” invalid data
U059A DC/DC converter “B” invalid data
Page 6-55
6.11 Transfer case
6.11.1 Auxiliary transmission with oil level gauge

- Check the oil quantity regularly on the oil level gauge 3
located on the right side of the transfer case.
Correct oil level is in the centre of the oil level gauge.
- If the level is not visible, immediately top up oil through
the filler hole and check hole 1.
Oil refilling A 5304
Have the auxiliary transmission oil refilled by an authorized TATRA TRUCKS service dealer pursuant to the
Service Booklet.
- Unscrew the filler cap (hole for a lifting eye).
- Position a container under the transfer case and unscrew the drain plug 2 on the left side in the bottom of
the transfer case to drain hot oil.
- Remove the cleaner strainer and rinse with kerosene and remove dirt using a brush.
- Clean the transfer case drain plug 2 mating surface properly.
- Fit a new sealing ring O to the drain plug 2 and screw the plug into the casing.
- Tighten the plug 2.
- Remove the check hole plug 1.
- Top up new oil through the lifting eye hole up to the bottom edge of the check hole 1.
- Provide the plug 1 with new O-rings.
- Screw in the filler hole plug 1.
- Perform road test and visually check all the caps/plugs for leaks.
Page 6-56
6.11.2 Auxiliary transmission without oil level gauge

- Check the oil level after unscrewing plug 2 on the left 1
side of the transfer case.
- If the level is not visible, immediately top up oil through 2
the filler hole 1 up to the bottom edge of the sight hole
2. 3
B 1730
Oil refilling
Have the auxiliary transmission oil refilled by an authorized TATRA TRUCKS service dealer pursuant to the
Service Booklet.
- Unscrew the filler cap 1 (hole for a lifting eye).
- Position a container under the transfer case and unscrew the drain plug 3 on the left side in the bottom of
the transfer case to drain hot oil.
- Remove the cleaner strainer and rinse with kerosene and remove dirt using a brush.
- Clean the transfer case drain plug 3 mating surface properly.
- Remove trapped metal chips and residues from the drain plug magnet.
- Fit a new sealing ring to the drain plug 3 and screw the plug into the casing.
- Tighten the plug 3.
- Remove the sight hole plug 2.
- Remove trapped metal chips and residues from the drain plug magnet 2.
- Top up new oil throough the filler hole 1 up to the bottom edge of the sight hole 2.
- Provide the plug 1 and 2 with new O-rings.
- Screw in the filler hole plug 1 and sight hole cap 2.
- Tighten the check plugs 1 and 2.
- Perform road test and visually check all the caps/plugs for leaks.
Page 6-57
6.12 Axles
- Always check the oil level on a flat ground. 1
- Check the oil level after unscrewing the plug 1 on the 2 3
side of the axle final drive housing.
- The oil level must reach to the lower edge of the hole1.
Oil refilling
Have the axle oil refilled by an authorized TATRA TRUCKS
service dealer pursuant to the Service Booklet.
- Unscrew plugs 2 and 3 to drain the oil. C 0093
- After the oil has spilled out from the axle final drive
housing and from the space of the differential too, reinstall plugs 2 and 3.
- Fill the fresh oil through the inspection hole 1 to its lower edge.
- Screw in and tighten the filler hole plug 1.
WARNING:
Having covered about 50 km after changing the oil in axle final drive housings, recheck the oil level
and add the oil to the lower edge of the inspection hole.
6.12.1 Back-bone tube with separate oil filling

Some versions vehicles have with the back-bone tube with separate oil filling (located behind or in front the
auxiliary transmission).

- Check the oil level after unscrewing the plug 1 on the
side of the back-bone tube.
- The oil level must reach to the lower edge of the hole 1.
- If the level is not visible, immediately top up oil up to the
lower edge of the check / filler hole 1.
Oil refilling
1 2 B 2512
Have the back-bone tube oil refilled by an authorized
TATRA TRUCKS service dealer pursuant to the Service
Booklet
- Unscrew plugs 1 and 2 to drain the oil.
- Unscrew plug 2 to drain the oil.
- Fill the new oil through the check/ filler hole 1 up to the lower edge.
- Screw in the check/filler hole plug 1.
- Perform road test and visually check all the caps/plugs for leaks
WARNING!
Having covered about 50 km after changing the oil in back-bone tube with separate oil filling, recheck
the oil level and add the oil to the lower edge of the check hole.
Page 6-58
6.12.2 Front steering axle(s) and rear steering axle

Lubricated points on the steering axle(s)
1
Lubrication
- Before lubrication, remove all dirt from grease nipples.
In steered axles, lubricate the following points with grease:
1 - Upper and bottom pivot pin mountings
3
2 - Cardan shaft bearings mountings on the half-axles
3
3 - Cardan shaft cross pins of the front axle 2
1
6.12.3 Wheel hubs
C 0095
- All axles have constant grease fillings in wheel hubs.
- Do not add grease during the vehicle operation.
WARNING:
If grease leakage is found out, remove the hub from the half-axle, replace the sealing rings and fill the
hub with a specified amount and kind of new grease.
6.12.4 Wheel reduction gears*

- Set the wheel so that the plane marked on the wheel hub
reduction gear cover 1 is in the horizontal position.
- Remove the plug 2.
2 1
Oil refilling
C 0094
Have the oil in the hub reduction gears refilled by an
authorized TATRA TRUCKS service dealer pursuant to the
Service Booklet.
Note:
Before draining the oil, remove the wheel guard plate. When changing the oil, prevent oil spills to the wheels and
tires.
- Unscrew the wheel unit oil plug 2 and set it with the hole down so that the entire contents run off.
- Drain oil into a container prepared.
- Turn the wheel unit to align the marks on the hub reduction gear cover in the horizontal position 1.
- Fill the wheel unit with an appropriate amount of new oil (up to the lower edge of the sight hole).
- Clean the mating surfaces of drain plug 2 and hub reduction gear cover.
- Screw the plug with the sealing ring.
Page 6-59
6.13 Retarder
6.13.1 TELMA retarder

Check of the retarder
In order to ensure the retarder works properly, it is essential to maintain it regularly. It is easy. Besides
washing it and besides driver´s visual checks, the retarder requires periodic inspections of mechanical and
electrical parts at a specialized service facility.
CAUTION!
All tests and checks of mechanical and electrical parts must be carried out by Telma's authorized
representatives.
It is necessary for the driver to check the condition of the retarder on a continuous basis. This basic check
consists in a visual check in order to find out:
- if a part of the retarder, coil insulation or cables are damaged;
- if there is leakage from the retarder;
- if rotors are dirty with mud and dirt;
- if the play between rotors and the stator is the same along the whole circumference (it cannot
exceed 0.6 mm).
WARNING!
The difference of the play in the top part and the bottom of the retarder exceeding 0.6 mm indicates
that the play in bearings has increased, and it is absolutely necessary to take the truck to a
specialized service facility. Failure to do so may result in a serious damage to the whole retarder, and
the cost of subsequent repair may reach half of the acquisition value.
Washing of the retarder

We recommend washing the retarder at least twice a year to remove dirt and grease.
It is necessary to clean rotor blades thoroughly in order to ensure good cooling of rotors.
The best way to wash the retarder is to use a stream of warm water; avoid high pressure, do not use
detergents.
If warm water is not available, use cold water. If rotor blades are dirty with mud, first, it is necessary to remove
the mud mechanically, and then to spray them again with water. Do not use pressure washers to wash the
retarder, as coil insulation covers may be damaged by that!
For drying, use a stream of pressurized air.
WARNING!
Do not wash the retarder until it is sufficiently cool. Under exceptionally difficult operating conditions,
it is necessary to wash the retarder more frequently - up to once a week, e.g. at a construction site
(even more often in mines or an aggressive environment).
Page 6-60

- If you want to measure the oil level in the retarder
transmission housing, park the truck on a flat surface.
- Check oil amount visually; check oil level indicator 2,
which is on the left side of the retarder.
- The oil level is right if it is in the middle of the oil level
indicator.
- If you cannot see the oil surface, immediately add oil
through a hole for lifting eye 1.
B 1657
Oil refilling
- Unscrew plugs 1 and 3.
- Take a container, and drain oil from the retarder transmission hosing into it.
- After the used oil is drained from the retarder through drain plug 3, use a plug with a new sealing ring.
- Fill up the retarder with the recommended type and amount of new oil through an outlet for lifting eye 1 (until
half of oil level indicator 2).
- After filling the retarder up with oil, use plug 1 to plug the hole for the lifting eye.
WARNING!
After you change oil in the retarder and after you drive approx. 50 km, you must check the oil level and
if necessary, add some more to reach half of the oil level indicator.
Page 6-61
6.14 Suspension
6.14.1 Front suspension
Check
- Check the bellows springs for marks of puncture visually.
- Remove dirt from the bellows surface (mud, small stones,
etc.), especially around metal sleeves.
- Check the bellow springs air inlet for leaks.
- Check the tie-rod (to make sure if it has not been
deformed) and its attachment in the rubber socket of the
positioning valve lever.
C 0082
- Visual check the front stabilizer bars attachment visually.

- Visually check the front hydraulic shocks absorbers for
leaks.
B 2928
Page 6-62
6.14.2 Rear suspension

Rear air suspension
Check
deformed) and its attachment in the rubber socket of the
B 1346
- Check the rear hydraulic shocks absorbers for leaks.
C 0082
- Visual check the rear stabilizer bars attachment visually.
B 2968
Page 6-63
Rear combined suspension (air suspension and leaf spring)

Check
The rear axles are suspended with leaf springs and air
bellows. Therefore, perform the following in regular
intervals:
deformed) and its attachment in the rubber socket of the C 0085
- Check the rear leaf spring safety shackles for wear.
- Check the rear leaf spring suspension and mounts.
- Check the bolts of the rear leaf spring shackles for proper torque 280 ± 30 Nm.
Note:
Valves are provided on the vehicle frame to allow for system air pressure inspection and adjustment.
Leaf spring safety shackle

The safety shackles are subject to wear during vehicle‘s
operation.
If the wear is excessive, the suspension shackle may move
out of the lenses (when the half-axle lifts).
Therefore check the extent the wear must be checked
regularly.
If it makes 3-6 mm is detected (measured from the yoke
surface, which is in contact with the half-axle), it is
3÷6mm
necessary to weld the shackle in the point of wearing and

grind off to the original thickness.
C 0127
Page 6-64
6.15 Brake system
6.15.1 Automatic brake pressure control

The inspection of the automatic brake pressure control setting as per the values shown in the label located in
the cab on the side wall of the gearshift panel next to the driver's seat must be performed at same authorized
service only.
WARNING:
During welding and boring procedures performed on
the vehicle carefully protect the polyamide pipes of the
brake and fuel systems.
Pipes damaged by heat, polluted by weld drops,
broken by the forced bending during assembly or
otherwise damaged must be replaced with new ones.
A 2068
6.15.2 Drum brakes*
6.15.2.1 PERROT brake units

The vehicle brake system is fitted with the automatic brake pressure control, PERROT brake units with
the automatic adjustment of clearance between the brake lining and brake drum and the Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS). Pneumatic instruments are fitted with noise dampers to meet the noise regulations.
The basic adjustment of brake units, maintenance and repairs of brakes (e.g. replacement of rubber
sealing collars of the brake unit, return springs and/or faulty groups such as brake cylinder, brake unit and
replacement of worn brake shoes) may be performed by any TATRA TRUCKS authorized service station
and/or the vehicle's user.
The special procedures (e.g. riveting of the brake lining, machining of brake shoes and drums, repairs of
brake shoe expanders) may be performed by service stations being authorized by the PERROT manufacturer
only.
6.15.2.2 Brake lining

Check of brake lining
Front steering axle(s) and rear steering axle
- Check the brake lining through the inspection holes in the
brake shields.
- The check holes in the brake shields of the steering axle
are closed with rubber plugs.
C 0096
Page 6-65
Rear axle(s)
- On brake shields of rear axles there are also oval holes
except for rubber plugs to check the brake lining; prior to
check, first remove metal sheet covers from them.
A 4509
Replacing the brake lining

Replace the brake lining with a new one in the case
that some brake shoe has been worn up to the edge
marked on the side of the brake lining.
Replace the brake lining also when it has been damaged,

e.g. burnt, broken, oiled or vitreous.
WARNING:
Replace the brake lining always on both wheels of the
pertaining axle.
A 4510
For your information:

On the brake lining, the wear of the leading shoe 1 on PERROT brake units is about twice higher than that
of the trailing shoe 2.
A new brake lining is of an arrow profile - in the middle the utilizable thickness makes about 16 mm, on shoe
edges about 10 mm.
(The brake lining is much more worn in the middle of the brake shoe than on on its edges.)
The leading shoe can be recognized on each wheel

separately in relation to:
- position of the expander 3;
- sense of the wheel rotation on the move.
2
3 1
The Fig. C 0099 shows the leading shoe 1 in relation to a
position of the expander 3 and a sense of the wheel
rotation during the forward drive.
C 0099
Page 6-66
6.15.3 Disc brakes*

The brake system is equipped with the automatic brake load control (AZR), brake units and anti-lock braking
system (ABS). The brake unit is equipped with an automatic, non-wear adjustment system, maintaining a
constant clearance between the brake lining and the brake disc.
The brake system instruments are provided with noise silencers to meet the noise limit.
Only an authorized TATRA TRUCKS service dealer is allowed to carry out the adjustment of the brake
units, maintenance and repairs of brakes (e.g. replacement of thrust elements with dust caps and inner seals,
calliper, inner dust sleeves, guide pins, brake holder and brake cylinder or replacement of worn brake pads).
Check of brake pads

Although long-life materials are used, some components need to be checked regularly for wear and damage.
Regular inspection and maintenance will ensure a long service life and trouble-free operation of the disc
brakes.
- Have the brake lining wear checked at the intervals indicated in the Service Booklet or when the indicator
lamp comes on. Make sure to bring the vehicle to an authorized TATRA TRUCKS service dealer for
inspection, or to replace the brake pads, as soon as possible.
- Vehicles are equipped with an open rubber case for brake wear control.
6.15.3.1 Checking the brake lining and discs - disc brakes

CAUTION!
For the sake of safety, respect the wear limits of
the brake pads and discs.
Brake lining
Check the brake lining thickness at regular intervals
depending on the operating use of the vehicle and legal
provisions, however, every 3 months at least.
Minor damage to the brake pad edges is acceptable

(see arrow, Fig. B3532).
B 3532
Major damage to the brake pad surface is

NOT PERMISSIBLE (See Fig. B3533).
WARNING:
If the brake lining is severely damaged on its
surface, immediately visit an authorized TATRA
TRUCKS service station for replacement.
B 3533
Page 6-67
If the remaining thickness of the brake lining is less than

2 mm (parameter C), the brake lining must be replaced.
A - overall thickness of new brake lining 30 mm

B - carrier plate of the brake lining:
thickness 9 mm for SN6 and SN7 thickness 7 mm
for SK7 and NA7
C - minimum thickness pf friction material 2 mm
D - minimum permissible thickness of the brake
lining when worn, including the carrier plate:
for the carrier plate thickness 9 mm, D = 11 mm
B 3534
for the carrier plate thickness 7 mm, D = 9 mm
If the minimum thickness is achieved, the brake lining

must be replaced.
B 3535
Page 6-68
Brake discs
Measure the brake disc thickness at the narrowest point. Avoid measuring near the disc edge due to possible
burrs.
E - total brake disc thickness:

new disc - 45 mm
worn disc - 37 mm (disc must be replaced)
If the disc thickness E is less than or equal to 39 mm, it is recommended to replace the brake disc together
with the brake lining.
CAUTION!
A failure to observe these recommendations will result in danger of brake system malfunction!
During each brake lining inspection/replacement, always m

ax
check brake disc for lining scratches (grooves) or .1
.5
m
cracks. A1 m
B1
The figures show possible brake disc surface conditions.
max. 0.75 x a
A1 - Mesh cracks on the disc (permissible)
B1 - Cracks in width and depth facing the wheel hub a
centre up to 1.5 mm are acceptable. Cracks of max.
length 0.75 x a are permissible (a - discs and lining
contact area)
C1 - Circular grooves (lining traces) are permissible D1 C1
up to a maximum depth of 1.5 mm B 3536
D1 - Cracks going through a cooling duct, or to the outer
or inner disc edge ARE NOT PERMISSIBLE.
The disc must be replaced.
Note:
With the surface condition A1, B1, and C1, a brake disc can further be used until the maximum permissible
wear to the thickness E = 37 mm is achieved.
In normal cases, the Knorr-Bremse brake discs do not need maintenance and machining (on a lathe) when
the brake lining is replaced. Only in exceptional cases the brake disc machining makes sense to increase
the brake lining effect when the disc is heavily scratched around the perimeter.
For safety reasons, the lowest allowable disc thickness after machining must be greater than 39 mm.
The figure B3537 shows examples of cracks and

scratches.
CAUTION!
Failure to observe these regulations results in C1
danger of accident!
Brake effect significantly decreases or completely B1
disappears if the brake pads are worn down to a
carrier plate or the brake discs are worn-out. D1
WARNING:
If large cracks and scratches are found one of the
brake discs, immediately visit an authorized TATRA B 3537
TRUCKS service station for replacement.
Page 6-69
6.15.3.2 Checking the brake lining wear using a rubber bushing

Brake lining inspection
Note:
Visual inspection of the brake lining or brake pad wear is
carried out on vehicles not equipped with an indicator on
the dashboard.
1
- The brake lining condition can be visually checked
without disassembling by checking the guide pin (4)
position in the shackle (1). 4
- If the dimension C is less than 1 mm, it is necessary to
check the brake lining and disc for wear in more detail. C B 3501
Promptly visit an authorized TATRA TRUCKS service
centre. Depending on the operating conditions, it is
necessary to check the brake lining and the disc thickness, even if the dimension C is greater than 1 mm.
position "C"
- pin protrusion - the state with new brake lining.
position "D"
- minimal pin protrusion - worn brake lining and brake
discs. The brake lining should be replaced, as well as 1
the brake discs where necessary. Promptly visit an
authorized TATRA TRUCKS service centre.
4
Note:
The brake lining (and the brake discs where necessary)
should be replaced even if the minimum tolerance is not D
achieved (see Chapter 5.14.3.1). B 3502
Replacing the brake lining

We recommend replacing the brake lining in an authorized TATRA TRUCKS service dealer.
CAUTION!
One brake lining must always be replaced at the same time as all brake linings of the respective axle!
Page 6-70
6.15.3.3 Removing and replacing the brake lining

CAUTION!
Before starting to remove the brake lining, make sure the service and parking brakes are not in
operation, chock the wheels and secure the vehicle against spontaneous motion.
Removing the brake lining

- Remove the wheel (see Chapter 5.25.4 "Replacing 1
a wheel").
- Remove clip (2) and washer (4). 3
- Use a screwdriver to pretension the brake lining holder
(1) and push the pin (3) out.
- Remove the brake lining holder (1). 4
Note:
Replace the brake lining holder (1) if corroded or 2
damaged. B 3538
- Remove the adjuster cap (7).

Note:
Replace the adjuster cap (7) with a new one, if
damaged.
5
WARNING:
Do not use any tool to remove the cap adjuster 6
(7), as it could damage the adjuster sealing
elements.
6
- Use a wrench (6) to turn the hexagonal adjuster (5) 7
counterclockwise, until you release the brake linings. B 3539
- Remove the brake lining 81 and 82.

- Visually check the brake lining and discs for wear and GRYQLWĜ
damage (see Chapter 6.15.3.1). ven
1
8
2
8
B 3540
Page 6-71
Brake lining installation

- Clean the brake lining compartment if corrosion or 9QLWĜQtEU]GRYiGHVND
debris appears.
9
- Install the brake lining 81 and 82.
1
8
B 3542
- Having installed the brake lining, depress the brake 9QČMãtEU]GRYiGHVND

pedal several times and then make sure the wheel hub
rotates freely.
2
8
9
B 3543
- Slightly grease the adjuster cap (7) and mount it on the

appropriate hexagonal adjuster (5).
Note:
The adjuster cap notch (7) should face as shown in
Figure B3546. 5
This will ensure easy access when removing.
Removal of the cap with a screwdriver is not 6
recommended, it could damage the seals.
6
7
B 3539
- Insert brake lining holder (1) into the groove in the

shackle (9) and push it so that the lining holder pin (3) 9
can be inserted into the hole.
B 3544
Page 6-72
- Install the washer (4) and lock the lining holder pin (3)
with a spring cotter pin (2). It is recommended to install
the lining holder pin 3 facing downward (See Fig.
B3545).
- Install the wheel (see Chapter 5.25.4 "Replacing 3
a wheel").
CAUTION!
After the installation, check the brake operation and
efficiency. 2
4
B 3545
Page 6-73
6.15.4 Air dryer

The service life of the air dryer cartridge depends fast fully
on a pollution of the air supplied.
1
In relation to the oil contents in the air, it is mostly enough
to replace the air dryer cartridge after every one or two
years of operation. 2
8 3
Check
7
In order to ensure proper operation of the air dryer 4, check
the air reservoirs for condensed water.
1. Check the air reservoirs for condensed water by
pulling the drain valve rings.
6 5 4 B 1520
2. If a higher than normal amount of water comes out repeatedly, replace the air dryer cartridge. Contact an
authorized TATRA TRUCKS repair shop.
If water occurs in the air reservoir, check the condition of the dryering cartridge, condensate sump and
compressor.
It is also necessary to check the air system for leaks and remove any leaks immediately as they prolong the
time during that the compressor fills the system and have unfavorable effect upon the air dryer function. If oil
is detected in the driing cartridge, replace the cartridge.
Replacement the air dryer cartridge

- Clean the air dryer surface.
- The air dryer cartridge must not be under pressure (fill the system to the cut-out pressure value).
- Turn the air dryer cartridge counterclockwise to remove it (use the filter belt to do it).
- Clean the cartridge top surface with a rag.
Be careful not to allow the dirt to get into a space in which the clean air occurs.
- Apply a new air dryer cartridge.
- Gently oil the gasket.
- Tighten the air dryer cartridge manually (torque specification is about 15 Nm).
WARNING:
Handle the used air dryer cartridge like the special waste because the oil, being drawn out from the
pressure air, accumulates inside the cartridge.
During the air dryer cartridge replacement, it is necessary to clean the interior of the condensate sump fitted
with a firon element - this should be replaced as necessary (see “Condensate separator”).
While replacing the air dryer cartridge in the pneumatic system, in which a high amount of water occurred or
when the air dryer has been installed additionally, its inspection can give a satisfactory result only after about
three weeks of operation because water already contained in the system has been already bonded to the oil
and it takes a long time to separate from it.
Page 6-74
6.15.5 Condensate separator

Clean and/or replace the filter element in the condensate
separator 7 situated on the right side of the vehicle at
regular intervals mentioned in the Service Booklet.
WARNING:
The filter element must not be shorter by more than
3 cm than the bush in which it is placed in the
separator. Replace the shorter filter element with a new
one.
A 6649
6.15.6 Air reservoirs

Draining of condensate from air reservoirs
Condensate (condensed water) deposits in the brake
system air reservoirs during the operation, which must be
periodically discharged.
In order to ensure proper operation of the air dryer, check
theair reservoirs for condensed water.
1. Check the air reservoirs for condensed water by
pulling the drain valve rings.
2. If a higher than normal amount of water comes out
repeatedly, replace the air dryer cartridge. Contact an
authorized TATRA repair shop. C 0100
The full working pressure must be in the braking system

during draining.
6.15.7 Filling the brake system with the compressed air

If you fill the system via a quick-release coupling (located
at the boarding stairs on the driver's side) or the filling
pressure fitting 1 (Fig. B 2523) located on the front bumper
from a workshop compressor, or the central air distribution
system, it must be free of dirt and condensate.
The impurities contained in the compressed air may impair
a function of the brake system instruments what may result
in their malfunction.
B 1778
Page 6-75
WARNING:
While filling the brake system with the compressed air,
watch the air pressure on the pressure gauge.
The pressure must not exceed 12.5 bars (1,250 kPa).
1 2
B 2523
6.15.8 Emergency release of spring-loaded brake cylinders

CAUTION!
Prior to release the spring-loaded brake cylinders on 2
rear axles on emergency, secure the vehicle with
chocks in both directions and use the tow-bar to
couple it to the loaded vehicle whose parking brake is 1
applied!
The driver of this vehicle must be in his place in the
cab!
- To release the brakes on emergency, unscrew releasing

screws from spring-loaded brake cylinders and continue F 0068
to unscrew them until the spring-loaded brake is
released.
- Loosen the screws only partially (within a distance of about 50 to 65 mm - measured from the brake cylinder
bottom).
- Having corrected the cause of the brake system defect, mount releasing screws back into brake cylinders
again and tighten to torgque 30+10 Nm.
WARNING:
Unscrew the screws using hand tools only, do not use pneumatic or electric tools.
6.15.9 Brake system tightness

In case of excessively rapid drop in the air pressure in the system, put the vehicle out of service immediately
and find a fault.
Remove minor defect (e.g. leaking connections) and allow an authorized TATRA TRUCKS repair shop to
repair defects in the braking system parts.
Page 6-76
6.16 Power-assisted steering

Maintenance
The servicing of the power-assisted steering system under normal operating conditions lies only in checking
the oil level in the tank of the power-assisted steering and in lubrication of ball joints of steering rods and
arms.
Have the filter elements replaced and the oil in the circuit of the power-assisted steering changed at
the authorized TATRA TRUCKS repair shop because it is necessary to bleed the whole power-assisted
steering circuit during the oil refilling.
6.16.1 Hydraulic power steering circuit

a) Vehicle equipped with a plastic tank*
The power-steering oil tanks are located on the right side
behind the cab.
- When measuring the oil level in power steering tank, park
the vehicle on a level surface.
- During the inspection, the wheels must be in straight
direction and the oil level must not drop under the lower
mark on the check gauge.
- Check the power steering and the whole hydraulic circuit
for external leaks visually.
B 1014
- Always check the oil level before driving.
When measuring the oil level, proceed as follows:

- Check the steering oil level with the engine turned off.
- Clean the dipstick and surrounding surface so that no dirt
gets into the tank.
- Use the dipstick to check oil level in the tank(s).
- If the steering oil is “cold”, the oil level should be between
the marks.
- If necessary, top up oil through the filler hole.
- If the water level is below the minimum mark, leakage
may occur. Contact an authorized TATRA TRUCKS
repair shop as soon as possible.
Note: D 001404
When the steering fluid reaches the working temperature,

the level may be above the upper mark.
Oil refilling
The hydraulic oil refill and the hydraulic power-assisted steering system bleeding should be done at the
authorized TATRA TRUCKS repair shop at intervals stipulated in the “Service Booklet”.
Inspection of the filter element

- Checking the filter cartridge in the oil tank power steering is not performed.
Page 6-77
Replacement of the filter elements

Replacement filter elements in the power steering oil tanks
after driving the vehicle from 2,500 to 3,000 km and then
every time you refill the oil in a hydraulic power-steering.
- To replace the filter element in the power steering tank,

follow these steps (Fig. A 7569):
- Park the vehicle on a flat surface and secure against
movement.
- Unscrew the cap 5 from the power-steering container 1.
- Push down the screen body 4 in the container 1 and turn
it anticlockwise through an angle of 20°.
Remember the position of the screen body 4 according to
a mutual position of the lug on the side border of the
screen body and oil dipstick.
Remove the loosened screen body 4 from container 1. A 7569
- Remove the pressure spring 3 and filter element 2 from container 1.

- Install a new filter element 2, pressure spring 3 and screen body 4 into container 1.
- Turn the screen body 4 into the mounting position, push it down and turn it clockwise through an angle of
20° to lock it.
- Close the cap 5 of the filler neck of the power-steering container 1.
b) Vehicle equipped with a metal tank*

The oil tank 1 for the power steering hydraulic circuit is 1
max
located is located on the right side behind the cab.
- When measuring the oil level in power steering tank, park
min
the truck on a level surface.
- During the inspection, the wheels must be in straight
direction and the oil level must not drop under the lower
mark on the check gauge.
- Keep the oil level between "min" and "max" marks on the
oil dipstick.
B 2135
- Check the power-assisted steering and the whole
hydraulic circuit for external leaks visually.
- Always check the oil level before driving.
When measuring the oil level, proceed as follows:

- Check the steering oil level with the engine turned off.
- Clean the dipstick and surrounding surface so that no dirt gets into the tank.
- Use the dipstick to check oil level in the tanks.
- If the steering oil is “cold”, the oil level should be between the marks.
- If necessary, top up oil through the filler hole.
Page 6-78
- If the water level is below the minimum mark, leakage may occur. Contact an authorized TATRA TRUCKS
repair shop as soon as possible.
Note:
When the steering fluid reaches the working temperature, the level may be above the upper mark.
Oil refilling
The hydraulic oil refill and the hydraulic power-assisted steering system bleeding should be done at the
authorized TATRA TRUCKS repair shop at intervals stipulated in the “Service Booklet”.
Inspection of the filter element

- Checking the filter cartridge in the oil tank power steering is not performed.
Replacement of the filter element

Replacement filter elements in the power steering oil tanks
after driving the vehicle from 2,500 to 3,000 km and then
every time you refill the oil in a hydraulic power-steering.
To replace the filter element in the power steering tank,

follow these steps:
- Unscrew the return filter lid 1 and twist to pull out the old
filter element 2.
- Install a new filter element 2 and screw in the return filter
lid 1.
B 2506
Page 6-79
6.16.2 Steering of cab

Lubrication points of steering in the cab
Telescopic steering spindle in cab
Lubrication
- Use a grease press to lubricate the telescopic steering
spindle in the cab through the grease nipples.
B 1349
6.16.3 Steering of chassis

Lubrication points of steering on the chassis
a) Steering ball joints
Check
- Check the rubber dust covers for condition and leaks.
Lubrication
Lubrication of steering ball joints shall not be done.
Steering ball joints are maintenance-free.
CAUTION!
vehicle can be equipped with ball steering joints from
different suppliers.
B 2050
Replacement of some ball steering joints or of the
whole steering connecting rod shall be done only by an authorized TATRA TRUCKS repair shop or by
specially trained staff.
b) Double steering arm

Check
- Check the bolted connections of the two-arm steering
lever for wear, damage and torque.
Lubrication
Lubrication of double steering arm shall not be done.
Double steering arm is maintenance-free.
C 0086
Page 6-80
c) Telescopic steering spindle and spline steering spindle

Telescopic steering spindle and spline steering spindle are
located under the cab in the left left longitudinal frame.
Lubrication
- Lift up the cab.
- Top up grease using a grease press.
C 0087
6.16.4 Steering rear axle*

Centering cylinder
Check
- Use the check plug 1 to check the centering cylinder 2 for
leaks; 2
- No oil leakage after loosening the check plug 1 is
allowed.
1 B 2155
Checking (refilling) the nitrogen pressure in the hydraulic accumulator
1 - hydraulic accumulator
2 - centering cylinder
1
If the indicator lamp 3 ETS turns on, contact an authorized 2
TATRA TRUCKS repair shop to remove defect/malfunction
as soon as possible.
Checking and refilling the pressure (nitrogen) in the rear

axle control system may be performed by authorized
TATRA TRUCKS repair shop.
B 2154
WARNING!
Use only the nitrogen to fill the accumulator. Danger of explosion!
Page 6-81
6.17 Cab
6.17.1 Hydraulic cab lifting equipment

Check
- For technical maintenance, always perform a visual check for leakage of the cab tilting hydraulic circuit and
visual check of general condition.
6.17.2 Hydraulic circuit cab tilting

Checking the oil level 2
The cab tilting hand pump 1 situated on the right side
behind the cab.
FILLING LEVEL
- Stabilize the vehicle on a level surface.
- The driver's cab must be down in the primary 3 1
(driving) position when measuring the oil level in the
manual pump.
- Set the lever 3 to the lower position.
- Set the controller on the hydraulic unit 4 into position. 4
B 2059
Topping up oil
- Unscrew the plug 2.
- Make sure the controller on the hydraulic unit 4 is in the position.
- Set lever 3 to the lower position (so that the movable piston of the hydraulic unit was in the lower position -
thus creating a maximum space to fill with oil).
- When filling, the pump lever 3 must be in the lower position.
- After filling, the oil level must be max. 1 or 2 mm above the top edge of the movable piston of the hydraulic
unit.
Note:
Never refill the oil in the cab tilting pump if the cab is tilted forward.
Oil refilling
The hydraulic oil refill and the hydraulic cab tilting system bleeding should be done at the authorized TATRA
TRUCKS repair shop at intervals stipulated in the “Service Booklet”.
Page 6-82
6.18 Roof hatch

Check
Check and maintenance of the roof hatch is performed simultaneously with the driver's cab after each trip.
6.19 Seats
Maintenance
- Seats do not require special maintenance.
- Upholstery can be cleaned with common products designed for upholstery fabric
Lubrication
- Pins are mounted in plastic bushings.
- It is recommended to lubricate the threads of control screws and pins of the tilt mechanism once a year with
suitable grease, whose quality is not specified.
6.20 Heating and ventilation system

Check the air conditioning system once a year as a minimum.
It is recommended to check all system features by the vehicle operator (function of the control panel buttons
of the ventilation, dependent heating and cooling systems, etc.). An authorized TATRA TRUCKS repair shop
equipped with the filling and purging device may only perform the inspection or adding the A/C refrigerant.
6.20.1 Ventillation system
front glass sideway glass

front glass
sideway glass interior
interior
interior
floor
floor
D 0586
Maintenance
- Make sure the vents are clean (no clogging).
Page 6-83
6.20.2 Dust and pollen filter

The dust and pollen filter of the heating and A/C system is situated in the suction duct of the cab under the
front bonnet.
Checking of the dust and pollen filter

Check and clean the external dust and pollen filter the
intervals as per the Service Booklet.
Keep the filter clean.

Remove dirt, if any.
- Knock out all dirt from the filter on a flat support in
horizontal position, first from one side, then from the
other.
- While doing so, avoid any damage or deformation of the B 3344
filter.
- If contamination is excessive, replace the dust and pollen filter.
Replacement of dust and pollen filter

Replace the dust and pollen filter the intervals as per the Service Booklet.
Removing the filter is performed as follows:
- Lift off the front cab bonnet and lock it in open position.
- Remove the intake port with filter element.
B 3755
Page 6-84
- Unlock safety clamps of the suction port.
A 6109
- Move the lock pawl out in the arrow direction and remove
the suction port.
A 6111
- Pull out the polluted filter in the arrows direction and

replace it with a new one.
- The installation of a new filter is a reverse procedure to
removal.
WARNING:
Install a new filter with arrows in the air intake direction
(see the AIR FLOW arrows on the side of filter
element).
B 1224
6.20.3 Air-conditioning
Check
- It is recommended to check all system features by the
vehicle operator (function of the buttons, cab fan
operation, cooling, heating systems, etc.).
- Inspect and refill A/C refrigerant at the intervals pursuant
to the Service Booklet.
B 3377
Page 6-85
6.20.4 Air conditioning condenser

Check
- Regularly visually check or clean the cover and plates of
the condenser from dirt.
- When polluted (by insects, leaves, dust, etc..), gently
blow the plates dry.
- Condenser plates must not have any mechanical
damage.
Note:
Before the maintenance, remove the protective cover of
the condenser and do not damage it. B 0903
6.21 Independent hot-air heater*

Check
Instruction for independent hot-air heater maintenance:
- A vehicle equipped with independent hot-air heater has a
separate fuel tank.
- After putting the vehicle aside in longer term, it is
necessary to check or clean the combusted air and flue
gas exhaust duct (under the cab).
- Within the hardware preparation for winter operation and
after refueling with winter fuels, carry out trial heater
operation.
If the fuel tank has been filled up with winter diesel, allow B 2335
the independent hot-air heater to run on the new fuel for
half an hour. Make sure that all the old (summer) fuel is used up.
- If excessive smoke emissions or unusual noise occur or fuel can be smelled or electric/electronic structural
parts overheat, it is necessary to turn off the heater and remove fuses F16 and F17 to deactivate the heater.
WARNING:
To remove a defect, always choose the nearest the repair shop TATRA TRUCKS or EBERSPÄCHER
servicing network.
- Outside the winter season, turn on heater for about 10 minutes once a month.
Note:
Replace the heat exchanger can only be performed by repairers authorized by the manufacturer of the
EBERSPÄCHER independent diesel oil heating or the authorized TATRA TRUCKS repair shop.
Page 6-86
6.22 Spare wheel holder
6.22.1 Hydraulic spare wheel lifting system*

Check
- For technical maintenance, always perform a visual
inspection for leakage of the hydraulic circuit and visual
inspection of general condition.
Lubrication
Pins of spare wheel holder
- Before lubrication, remove all dirt and grease the pins.
B 2935
Spare wheel tilting manual pump

3
The hydraulic pump 2 of the spare wheel holder circuit
located on the left side behind the cab.
- When measuring the oil level in the hydraulic pump, park 1
the vehicle on a flat surface.
- Leave the spare wheel holder with the spare wheel in
its basic (driving) position.
- Set pump socket 4 to the lower position (so that the
movable piston of the hydraulic pump was in the lower
position - thus creating a maximum space to fill with oil). 2
- Make sure the controller 5 on the hydraulic pump 2 is in
position I "lower".
B 1945
Topping up oil
- Unscrew the plug 6.
6
- When filling, the oil level must be max. 1 or 2 mm above
the upper edge of the movable piston of the hand pump
when in the lower position.
When fiiling. the pump lever 4 must be in the lower 5
position.
- Once the tank is filled with oil, screw the plug 6. 4 II I 2
B 2860
Oil refilling
The hydraulic oil refill and the hydraulic cab tilting system bleeding should be done at the authorized TATRA
repair shop at intervals stipulated in the “Service Booklet”.
Page 6-87
6.22.2 Mechanical spare wheel lifting system*

Check
- Check the rope for mechanic condition.
- Replace a damaged rope with a new one immediately.
Lubrication
- Lubricate the winding mechanism gear using a grease
press through the greasing nipple.
- Clean the rope and preserve it with grease slightly.
C 0104
6.23 Trailer hitch
6.23.1 Trailer hitch Ringfeder type 4040/G150*

Check
- Functional check by repeatedly opening and closing the
hitch.
- Clean coupling bolt.
Lubrication
- Lubricate the towing equipment using a grease press
through grease nipples on the lock pin and hitch body.
If the towing equipment is not used for a longer period of C 0143
time, protect is with an appropriate cover against
contamination.
6.23.2 Non-automatic trailer hitch ROCKINGER RO 225 G110

Check
- "Check the hitch operation.
Functional check by repeatedly opening and closing the
hitch.
- "Check the hitch attachment to the vehicle frame.
- Check the following on the lock pin head regularly:
- it must be easy to pull out in the axial direction.
- Clean the closing pin.
Lubrication
B 3592
- Lubricate the towing equipment using a grease press
through grease nipples on the lock pin and hitch body.
If the towing equipment is not used for a longer period of time, protect is with an appropriate cover against
contamination.
Page 6-88
6.23.3 Non-automatic towing hitch

Check
- Check the towing device function and fixation to the
vehicle frame.
Lubrication
- Lubricate the pin of towing hitch once a year.
Other types of hitches according to the manufacturer's

instructions.
A 5648
6.24 Wheels and tires

- Remove any stones and so on from the tread and from between the tires (if twin wheels are fitted).
- Check for evidence of wear and damage and for nails or other foreign objects caught in the tires.
- Check the attachment of the wheels.
- Check the tire pressures (do not forget the spare wheel). Check and correct the tire pressures while the tires
are cold. For correct tire pressure see the tire inflation label located on the right cab door pillar.
Page 6-89
6.25 Winch hydraulic circuit*

Checking the winch hydraulic system
- "Regularly check the joints of hoses and tubes of the winch hydraulic circuit (in unprotected places, they
must show no damage, they must be properly fastened and show no hydraulic oil leakage).
- "Regularly check the mounting bolts and perform a visual inspection of the winch structure and guide pulley
(for deformation, cracks, bolt tightening torque, etc.)

- Stabilize the vehicle on a level surface when measuring
the level in the hydraulic winch tank.
- Check the oil level in the hydraulic winch circuit using a
dipstick forming a part of the cap (Fig. B 1703) or on the
sight hole 1 (Fig. B 2503).
- Keep the level between the min and max marks on the
dipstick.
B 1703
- Maintain the oil level in the middle of the oil gauge.
B 2503
The vehicle may be equipped with an oil tank with two oil
level gauges.

For the winch hydraulic circuit, the lower oil level gauge 4 is
used.
The upper oil level gauge 5 is not used.

B 3218
Page 6-90
Oil refilling
Refill the hydraulic oil and bled the body tipping hydraulic 2
circuit in an authorized TATRA TRUCKS repair shop
pursuant to the Service Booklet.
1
Discharge hydraulic oil at the operating temperature of the
hydraulic system.
- When changing the oil, vehicle must be parked on a level
surface.
- Open the filler neck 2.
B 1656
- Unscrew the drain plug 1 in the tank bottom and
discharge oil into a container prepared before.
- When refilling oil, have also the oil filter element replaced (see section "Replacing oil filter element").
Note:
When draining oil, avoid soiling of the surface under the vehicle by suitable placing a collecting container.
- Install the drain plug 1 and filll the tank with new oil.
- "Fill the tank with the specified type and volume of hydraulic oil up to half of the oil level gauge.
- "Bleed the hydraulic circuit of the winch.
- "Check the hydraulic system for leaks, check the oil volume in the tank, top up as required.
Note:
When the temperature drops below -32 °C, it is necessary to ensure exchange of the oil in the winch hydraulic
circuit for hydraulic oil specifically designed for very low temperatures.
6.25.1 Filter body without oil pressure gauge

The filter body without the oil pressure gauge 3 and
breather filter 2 are mounted on the oil tank 4 of the 2 3
hydraulic winch circuit.
4
5
B 2505
Page 6-91
6.25.2 Filter the oil tank
6.25.2.1 Oil filter element

Checking oil filter element
- No check of the oil filter element is performed.
1
Replacing oil filter element

Replace the oil filter element simultaneously when
changing the hydraulic oil.
- Unscrew the lid 1 and remove the old oil filter element 2 2
by rotating it slightly.
B 2506
- Install a new oil filter element 2 and lid 1.
6.25.2.2 Bleeding the oil tank

The oil tank can be vented as follows:
a) using a breather filter located on the oil tank directly;
b) using the breather filter (MANN) located behind the cab (on the accessory holder).
a) Breather filter*
Checking the breather filter
2 3
- No check of the breather filter 2 is performed.
- If damaged, replace the breather filter immediately.
1
Replacing the breather filter
The breather filter 2 should be replaced at the same time
as changing the hydraulic oil.
4
- Remove the old breather filter. 5
B 2505
- Install a new breather filter.
Page 6-92
b) Breather filter (MANN)

The oil tank breather outlet is fitted with a filter, designed to
prevent the penetration of dirt.
The oil tank breather outlet is located in the accessory
holder compartment.
Checking and replacing the breather filter

- "Regularly check the breather outlet of the winch oil tank
for wear, damage and dirt.
- "The filter service life depends almost solely on the air
contamination level and a visual check should be B 2256
sufficient. If contaminated (dust, sand) or damaged
mechanically, replace the filter with new one.
WARNING:
If the vehicle is operated in very dusty environment, check the breather filter more frequently.
6.25.3 Hydraulic oil

Temperature oil
During operation, check the temperature of the hydraulic oil on the thermometer, which is mounted on the oil
tank directly.
The oil temperature should be between +30 °C and +60 °C during normal operation.
Oil life is greatly reduced if its temperature exceeds +60 °C. As a general rule, oil life is halved for each 8 °C
its temperature exceeds +60 °C. If the oil temperature exceeds 80°C the seals in the hydraulic system can get
damaged and the life time for the seals is reduced.
If the temperature is below minus 20 °C disengage the rope drum from the drive chain and run the winch for
5 - 10 minutes.
Viscosity
The viscosity for the oil should be between 20 mm2/s and 75 mm2/s (100 and 370 SUS) when the operating
temperature of the system has become stabilised. We recommend the use of an oil type having a viscosity of
35 mm2/s (165 SUS) at the actual operating temperature.
Page 6-93
6.26 Vehicle accessories - hydraulic winch
6.26.1 Hydraulic winch RAMSEY H 800*
6.26.1.1 Checking and maintenance of the winch

Check
- Check the torque of bolts and nuts that
mounting the winch to the chassis.
- Check the hose connections, tubes of
hydraulic winch circuit (check for damage
in exposed areas, must be fixed and
must not show any leaks of hydraulic oil).
- Check the mounting bolts and perform a
visual inspection of the winch structure
and guide pulley (for deformation, cracks,
bolt tightening torque, etc...).
- Verify the winch functioning regularly.
- When working with the winch, check the
snap ring operation. Make sure the
spring is stressed, freely moving against
B 2488
the drum in the ON position and whether
it is pulled from the drum and fits in when
in the OFF position.
- Check the winch housing for oil leaks.
- Check the breather plug in the upper part of the gearbox 2 (for damage or clogging).
- If the winch brake wears out (is less efficient), pass it to an authorized TATRA TRUCKS repair shop.
Regular inspections and checks on RAMSEY H 800 hydraulic winch

1. Daily maintenance
Before winding
- Before operating the winch check the rope and hook (function of the safety pin, slings and jigs) for damage
visually).
- Visually check the oil for leaks from the winch hydraulic circuit and the winch itself.
- Check the oil level in the hydraulic tank.
- Check the proper adjustment of drum brakes.
During winding
- Check of the hydraulic winch oil temperature.
It must not be too high. If you find too high hydraulic oil temperature when winding, stop winding
immediately.
After winding
- Check the proper rope winding on the drum;
- Purity of the winch;
- Lubricate all rope guide pulleys.
Page 6-94
2. Weekly
- Check the breather plug 2 in the upper part of the winch gearbox (for damage or clogging).
3. Once a month
- Check the rope for wear and damage visually (if frequently used).
- Lubricate the rope (with heavy use (intensive operation 1x per half year)).
- Check the winch function regularly.
- If the winch is not used regularly, once a year as a minimum, check rope treatment and lubrication in relation
to environment.
4. Once a year
When checking the winch, park the vehicle on a level surface.
- Check of hoses and tubes of the winch hydraulic circuit (they must not be damaged in exposed places, they
must be fixed and should not show leakage of hydraulic oil).
- Refill the oil in the winch gearbox.
- Check the breather plug 2 in the upper part of the winch gearbox (for damage or clogging).
- Use a grease gun to lubricate the grease nipples 1 on the winch drum on both sides.
- Check the mounting bolts and perform a visual inspection of the winch structure and guide pulley (for
deformation, cracks, bolt tightening torque, etc...).
- Clean the rope, renew the red check stripe, preserve the rope with light oil slightly.
- If the rope starts fraying and wearing, replace it with a new one immediately.
- Reel on the rope correctly (symmetrically under medium draw, the laps may not cross each other).
- Arrange for a professional inspection according to ČSN 270142 (revision of the rope, hook, slings or
tie-town tools, and the hydraulic circuit).
Note:
All maintenance and inspection work may only be carried out by qualified (trained) personnel.
Page 6-95
6.26.2 Gearbox of the winch

Lubrication
If the winch gearbox is fitted with grease nipples, lubrication is performed as follows:
- Use a pressure press apparatus to grease lubricating nipples 1 on the winch drum on both sides.
Checking the oil level in the winch gearbox

2
- When measuring the oil level in the winch gearbox, park
the vehicle on a flat surface.
- Check the oil level regularly after unscrewing plug 3 on 3 1
the side of the winch gearbox.
OIL
- The oil level must reach to the lower edge of the check LEVEL
hole.
DRAIN
4
B 2119
Refilling oil in the winch gearbox

Have the winch gearbox oil refilled by an authorized TATRA
service dealer pursuant to the Service Booklet. If the winch
is operated frequently, change the oil several times a year.
- When changing oil level in the winch gearbox, park the
vehicle on a flat surface.
- Drain oil from the winch box through a drain plug 4 in the
bottom part of the gearbox.
- Fill up the winch box with kerosene until the oil plug 3.
A 7134
- Start and use the winch for a few minutes, however, with
no load applied.
- Drain kerosene, screw in the drain plug 4.
- Use gear oil 85W-140H to fill up the winch box up to oil check plug 3.
Page 6-96
6.26.3 Hydraulic winch SEPSON*
6.26.3.1 Checking and maintenance of the winch

Check
- Periodically check the torque of bolts and
nuts that mounting the winch to the
chassis.
- Periodically check the hose connections,
tubes of hydraulic winch circuit (check for
damage in exposed areas, must be fixed
and must not show any leaks of hydraulic
oil).
- Regularly check the mounting bolts and
perform a visual inspection of the winch
structure and guide pulley (for
deformation, cracks, bolt tightening
torque, etc...).
- Verify the winch functioning regularly.
- When working with the winch, check the
snap ring operation. Make sure the
spring is stressed, freely moving against
the drum in the ON position and whether
it is pulled from the drum and fits in when
in the OFF position.
- Check the winch housing for oil leaks.
B 2647
- Check the breather plug in the upper part
of the gearbox (for damage or clogging).
- If the winch brake wears out (is less efficient), pass it to an authorized TATRA TRUCKS repair shop.
Regular inspections and checks on SEPSON hydraulic winch

Check
1. Daily maintenance
Before winding
- Check the tightness of the winch housing and hydraulic connections (possible leaks);
- Check the proper adjustment of drum brakes.
- Check the rope for wear and damage visually (if frequently used).
During winding
- Check the hydraulic oil temperature (winch overheating) using a thermometer (where fitted on the oil tank).
It must not be too high. If you find too high hydraulic oil temperature when winding, stop winding
immediately.
After winding
- Check the proper rope winding on the drum.
- Purity of the winch
Page 6-97
Daily maintenance Mainten Mainten Mainten

Serial ance ance ance
Item or accessories Before While After
no. every 2 every 12 every 36
winding winding each use months months months
Winch, steel rope, guide rollers
1 - - C C C
and other accessories
Emergency shutdown 2 - - I I I
Steel rope 3 - - I ICL ICL
Winch drum and rope wedge 4 - - I IC IC
Winch drum brake 5 - - I IAC IACR
Thrust roller/thrust winch disc 6 - - I IC IC
Guide rollers, slides, wheel
7 - - I ICL ICL
guards
Winch drum sealing (wedge
8 - - I IC IC
ring)
Overrun clutch 9 - - I IL ILY
Transmission drain hole 10 - - - E E
Winch gear drive 11 - - - - L ICL
Oil in the winch gear drive
12 - - - - U E
(some winch versions)
Final drive mechanism (wheel
13 - - I ICL ICL -
guards) (optional)
Winch, rope guides and fixation
14 - - - - Y -
points of other accessories
Hydraulic tubes, lines and
15 - - - C I
fittings
Electrical ropes and connectors 16 - - - C I
Coatings and anti-corrosion
17 - - - - U
protection
Hydraulic tank oil level 18 U - U E
Hydraulic oil temperature
(oil tank thermometer - some 19 - I - - -
winch versions)
Tightness of the winch
20 - - I - -
hydraulic circuit
Legend:
A - Adjust, B - Bleed, C - Clean, E - Drain and fill, I - Inspect and repair, L - Lubricate, O - Overhaul,
R - Replace, U - Check and to up, Y - Tighten/Loosen
Page 6-98
Note:
1. Always clean the winch and its accessories after use.
2. Check the emergency stop function.
3. Pull the rope out and check its condition (deformation, damage and wear) in accordance with section
6.26.4.1. "Rope". Lubricate properly.
4. Check rope drum and wedge for proper assembly and operation.
5. Check and adjust in accordance with section 6.26.3.3 "Drum brake".
If the brake lining thickness is less than 1 mm, replace it.
6. Check the thrust rollers for wear, damage and deformation.
7. Check the guide pulleys for wear, damage and deformation. Lubricate properly.
8. Check the drum sealing ring for wear and damage, check its proper installation.
9. Check the free overrun clutch movement. Lubricate the moving parts.
10. Drain any moisture from the winch gearbox.
11. Check the gear drive and lubricate the winch grease nipples.
12. Check the transmission oil level in the winch gearbox. Drain and refill the transmission oil.
13. Check the frame assembly for wear, damage and deformation. Lubricate properly.
14. Check all fastening screws and bolts. Tighten, if necessary.
15. Check the hydraulic lines and fittings for wear, damage and deformation.
16. Check the electrical ropes, harnesses and connectors for wear and damage.
17. Check the equipment surface finish (corrosion, coating damage).
If necessary, repair or renew the coating/finish.
18. Check the oil level in the hydraulic tank.
19. Check the hydraulic oil temperature (should not be too high).
20. Check the transmission casing and hydraulic fittings for oil leaks
Page 6-99
6.26.3.2 Gearbox of the winch

For most Sepson winches, the gear drive is located inside a closed container filled with grease.
If necessary, repair the gear drive using NLGI 2 grease, which uses complex lithium soap as a thickener.
Sepson recommends Mobil Grease XHP 222 or similar lubricant. The Mobil Graase XHP 222 "melting"
temperature is 30-40 °C.
Check
- See section 6.26.3.1 "Checking and maintenance of the winch”.
Lubrication
In thegear housing of winch there is a permanent grease
charge.
If the winch gearbox is fitted with grease nipples, lubrication

is performed as follows:
- Top up grease using a grease press.
WARNING:
When a leakage of lubricant occurs, it is necessary to
B 2931
reseal the gearbox winch and fill it with the prescribed
content and a type of lubricant. (e.g. CASTROL MS 3).
Draining the condensate from the winch gearbox (some winch types only)*
- No water may condensate in the winch gearbox.
Therefore, release the bottom plug of the winch gear and
drain condensed water, if any, at least once a year (see
Fig. A 6421).
A 6421
Page 6-100
6.26.3.3 Drum brake

Adjustment of drum brake
Schedule a regular check of the friction drum brake
components. The purpose of this brake is to avoid and
prevent the drum from continuing to turn when unwinding
the rope in a free spooling operation. The brake lining shall
be replaced when the thickness is less than 1 mm.
A 6422
To increase the brake effect, follow these steps 63.31- 63.31-

1. Loosen the locking nut. 63.34-
2. Turn the adjusting screws clockwise.

3. Tighten the locking nut.
To reduce the brake effect, follow these steps

4. Loosen the locking nut.
73.07-
5. Turn the adjusting screws counter-clockwise a quarter 73.08-
turn.
6. Tighten the locking nut.
A 6422
Page 6-101
6.26.4 Winch accessories*
6.26.4.1 Rope
This chapter applies in general to the winch ropes which the TATRA FORCE vehicles are equipped with.
The winch rope is considered to be a replacement component to be replaced if the inspection results show
that its load capacity has decreased to a limit where its further use would not be safe.
Note:
The rope maintenance in the Czech Republic is governed by the relevant ČSN ISO 4309 standard "Cranes -
Steel wire ropes - Care and maintenance, inspection and decommissioning" regarding general principles of
care and maintenance, inspection and decommissioning of steel wire ropes (ropes).
WARNING:
Damaged or worn rope must be replaced immediately.
Rope treatment and maintenance is important to extend rope service life and maintain safety of operation.
The winch design does not allow unlimited use of the rope. For ropes with 6 or 8 strands, surface cracking is
the most common wear. For rotatable ropes, the most common is internal fiber cracking, but it is not visible
from the outside.
Check
- When using the winch frequently, clean and check the
overall rope condition.
- Wind the rope correctly (symmetrically under medium
draw, the laps may not cross).
- If the winch is not regularly used, once a year as a
minimum (depending on the conditions), carry out a
visual rope inspection and lubricate it (grease NH 2).
Figure A 6420 shows some examples of damage to the
rope requiring its replacement.
Lubrication
Rope treatment, maintenance and lubrication is important
to extend rope service life and maintain safety of operation.
- Before lubrication, always clean the rope, remove dust
and residues of dry lubricant. A 6420
Unwind the rope from winch drum fully and clean it
properly (e.g. using a steel brush).
- Renew the red checking strip on the rope.
- Then, lubricate the rope with high-viscosity grease (Elaskon, Rocol or eg. SWR lubricant - stiff, thin version).
- Reel on the rope correctly (symmetrically under medium draw, the laps may not cross each other).
Page 6-102
Replacing the rope

Have the rope replaced with an authorized TATRA TRUCKS service dealer or only with a qualified trained
personnel.
Winch rope replacement procedure:

1. .Switch the winch gear to idle and pull the entire rope from the winch drum.
2. Loosen the bolts holding the rope on the drum and pull the rope out of the drum.
3. Attach a new rope and make sure it is properly attached to the drum.
Tighten the fixing bolts properly. Only use original parts from the manufacturer.
6.26.4.2 Winch rope guides and idle rollers Pulleys for guiding the rope
Check
- Visually check of the fastening of the all pulleys guiding
the rope (for deformation, cracks, bolt tightening, etc.).
B 1938
B 2929
Lubrication
- Before lubrication of rope pulleys, remove all dirt from
grease nipples.
- Use a grease press to lubricate the greasing nipples on
winch rope guide pulleys (NH 2 grease).
B 0972
Page 6-103
B 2303
B 0971
Page 6-104
6.27 Body tipping
6.27.1 Tipper body maintenance

- Always check and lubricate all body hinges and pistons during routine vehicle inspections.
- Make sure all hydraulic hose connections are OK and that there are no leaks of hydraulic fluid.
CAUTION!
Hydraulic fluid can cause health problems, threaten the environment and it must not escape from the
closed system.
- Always check that the hydraulic hoses are neither damaged nor scrubbing the body.
- REGULARLY check the chassis for protruding sharp parts that could cause injury to workers.
Make sure that the seal around the tailgate is fine, and that loose material cannot escape when closed.
- Always check the vehicle tail lamps for damage after tipping or riding off road.
- For more information about the tipper body maintenance see a separate manual for the tipper body, which is
part of the vehicle documentation.
6.27.2 Hydraulic body tipping circuit

- When measuring the oil level in the hydraulic body
tipping circuit, park the vehicle on a level surface.
- Check the oil level in the hydraulic body tipping circuit
with the body lowered using a dipstick integral with the
tank filler cap (Fig. B 1703) or on the oil level gauge (Fig.
B 3140).
- If the oil level is outside the range of MIN and MAX marks
on the dipstick, please contact an authorized TATRA
B 1703
- For a tank with two oil level gauges, check the oil level in
the middle of the respective oil mark:
- oil level gauge 1 applies to 8x8 vehicles;
- oil level gauge 2 applies to 4x4 and 6x6 vehicles.
1
- If there is a low oil level, contact an authorized TATRA
2
B 3140
Page 6-105
Oil change
Have the hydraulic fluid refilled and the body tipping 2
hydraulic circuit bled by an authorized TATRA TRUCKS
service dealer pursuant to the Service Booklet.
Drain hydraulic oil at the operating temperature of the 1

hydraulic system.
- When changing oil, park the vehicle on a level surface.
- Unscrew the filler neck 2.
- Unscrew the drain screw 1 at the tank bottom and drain
the oil into a prepared container. B 1656
- When refilling oil, have also the oil filter element replaced (see section "Changing the oil filter element.")
Note:
When draining oil, avoid soiling of the surface under the vehicle by suitable placing a collecting container.
- Screw in the drain plug and fill the tank with specified type and quantity of hydraulic oil.
- Bleed the entire system with the tipper body lifted, engine switched off, by loosening the bleeder screw on
the hydraulic cylinder (piston of the smallest diameter in the thinning point under its upper spherical part).
CAUTION!
The tipper body will drop down, lock it properly! The tipper body must be secured against possible
drop.
- Having bled the air from the tipping circuit, tighten the bleeder screw on the hydraulic cylinder.
- If the hydraulic tipping cylinder is not equipped with a bleeder screw, the bleeding operation will take place
automatically after tipping the body several times.
- Check the hydraulic system for leaks, check the oil volume in the tank, top up as required.
The following can be mounted on the oil tank of the hydraulic body tipping circuit:
- "filter housing with oil pressure gauge*;
- "filter housing without oil pressure gauge*.
Page 6-106
6.27.3 Filter elements of the hydraulic body tipping circuit
6.27.3.1 Oil filter element

a) Filter housing with oil pressure gauge*
2 3
Oil filter element inspection
The filter body with oil pressure gauge 4 can be mounted
4
on the oil tank of the body tipping hydraulic circuit 5. 1
The oil pressure gauge indicates the need to replace the oil
tank filter element.
CAUTION!
5
Replace the oil filter element according the pressure
gauge indication, not upon every oil refilling. 6
B 2502
- Leave the engine running at idle speed.

- Depress the clutch pedal and turn on the PTO with switch
15 on the instrument panel.
- Depress and release the clutch pedal to turn on the

tipping pump motor.
- Check the pressure on the pressure gauge. If about 6 bar
is indicated, replace the oil filter element.
Inspect the oil filter element at the intervals pursuant to the A 3568
Service Booklet.
Changing the oil filter element

1 2 3
- Unscrew the lid 3 and remove the oil filter element 5 by
rotating it slightly.
- Install a new element and lid 3.
B 0985
Page 6-107
b) Filter housing without oil pressure gauge*

If the oil tank filter body is not equipped with an oil pressure gauge and air (paper) filter element,
no check of the oil filter element is needed, just replace the oil filter element simultaneously with the hydraulic
oil.
6.27.3.2 Air filter element

Changing the air filter element
1 2 3
- Push to remove the bayonet lock 1 from the filter body.
- Remove the exhaust (paper) filter element 2.
- If deformed, broken or contaminated, replace it with a
new one.
- Replace the air filter element and reinstall the bayonet
cap 1.
CAUTION!
4
Always replace the air filter element when
replacing the oil filter element.
CAUTION!
If the vehicle is operated in very dusty environment, 5
check the air filter element more frequently.
B 0985
6.27.3.3 Breather filter

Checking the breather filter
- No check of the breather filter 3 is required. 2 3
- If damaged, replace the breather filter immediately.
4
1
Replacing the breather filter
The breather filter 3 should be replaced at the same time 5
as changing the hydraulic oil.
- Remove the old breather filter.
6
- Install a new breather filter
B 2502
Page 6-108
6.27.4 Tipper body control mechanisms
6.27.4.1 Telescopic cylinder

Lubrication
- Lubricate the upper and lower bearings of the telescopic
cylinder through the grease nipples.
A 4127
A 7355
CAUTION!
When lubricating the lower and upper bearings of the
telescopic body tipping cylinder, support the tipper
body with a strut and leave the tilt control lever in the
lowering (LOW) position.
C 0105
Page 6-109
6.27.4.2 Swivel forks on the rear body beam

Lubrication
- Use a grease gun to lubricate the swivel forks on the rear
body beam.
B 1246
Page 6-110
6.28 Electric equipment
6.28.1 Welding repairs

Principles for electric arc welding on the finished vehicle.
The vehicles of the TATRA FORCE range are equipped with electronic circuits ensuring proper functioning
of respective systems and assemblies (engine cooling, ABS, alternator, etc.).
Functioning of these electronic circuits can be disturbed or irreparably damaged by strong electromagnetic
interference, which usually accompanies arc welding on finished vehicles.
For these reasons, it is necessary (if arc welding cannot be avoided) to follow these principles in order to
minimize the aforementioned hazards.
CAUTION!
When welding on the vehicle, protect the polyamide
pipes in the brake and fuel systems carefully.
Always replace any pipe damaged by heat, dirty of
welding drops or damaged otherwise.
A failure to follow this instruction may result in fire or
damage to vehicle or equipment.
When welding, use protective aids such as eye shield,
gloves, leather apron, appropriate cloths and boots.
A 2068
1. To protect semiconductor parts of the electronic

control system, before arc welding it is necessary to 8
disconnect control units: engine 4, ABS 3, NORGREN 1
3, etc. 2
Note:
For vehicles with the ALLISON transmission, disconnect
the ALLISON control unit.
7
2. On the batteries, disconnect the rope from the positive
terminal and connect the disconnected rope with the
6
3
vehicle frame (preferably directly to the frame or a 5 4
conductor leading directly to the frame). B 3455
At the same time, the positive battery terminal must be
insulated to avoid accidental short circuit.
3. Connect the earthing rope from the welding set as close as possible to the welding point, even at the cost
of paint removal and refinish after welding completion.
Never connect the earthing rope from the welding set to a rotating part, nor to a set comprising moving
parts.
4. It is recommended to hold the weldment directly to the pliers of the second pole of the welding set and
hold it on the welding spot throughout the welding process.
In principle, it is not allowed to connect the second pole of the welding set to the point, which is indirectly
connected to the welding point (e.g. through an engine-to-frame connection, etc.).
5. When reconnecting, do not forget first to disconnect the frame connection and only then connect to the
terminal.
Page 6-111
6.28.2 Batteries
Vehicle battery system
The vehicle has a regular battery system with a set of two 12-volt batteries. The batteries are connected in
series and are placed in a special box behind the vehicle cab. Keep the batteries clean and dry.
CAUTION!
Do not place any metal objects on the battery.
Discarded batteries are environmentally hazardous
waste.
CAUTION!
Sparks and open flames in the vicinity of a battery can
lead to an explosion which can cause serious injury.
- Avoid sparks and open flames in the vicinity of
batteries.
WARNING: A 7710
If battery types other than those specified are used,
electrical components can be damaged.
- Do not use battery types or capacities other than those specified. Contact an authorized TATRA
WARNING:
When power is used directly from the batteries, the batteries can be damaged and it may lead to
starting difficulties.
- Do not make any permanent direct connections to the batteries.
WARNING:
It is forbidden to interfere with the internal part of the maintenance-free batteries.
- Do not remove the covering adhesive foil from the batteries.
Maintenance-free batteries
The vehicles TATRA FORCE use maintenance-free 12V batteries. This means there is no need to add
distilled water (electrolyte) to the batteries. The other tasks associated with maintenance/charging of
maintenance-free batteries do not change and are essential to their correct function and durability.
Note:
Only the manufacturer may interfere with the maintenance-free batteries, peel off stickers at check plugs and
check the electrolyte. Otherwise, this shall be considered as a broken seal and possible claim shall be
rejected.
Page 6-112
Battery check and maintenance

- Check the terminals for damage. If you find damage,
contact an authorized TATRA TRUCKS service dealer.
- Make sure the rope clamps to wires and battery terminals
are appropriately tightened.
- Check that the battery poles and terminals are clean and
greased. If necessary, coat the poles with acid-free
grease.
- Periodically check that batteries are in good condition.
B 3812
Removing the batteries

CAUTION!
Remove the batteries using a lifting device or with help of another person due to their weight. Never
tilt the batteries. Insulate disconnected ropes to avoid short circuit. A failure to follow this instruction
may result in property damage, injury or death of persons.
- Turn off all electric consumers.

1 2 47 3
- Set the key in the ignition box to position "0". 7 9
4
- Unscrew winged nuts, fastening the cover to remove the 5
battery housing cover. 6
4 8
- Remove the front side of battery box 10. 8
- Disconnect the rope clamp 1 from the negative battery
terminal. 10
- Disconnect the rope clamp 3 from the negative battery B 1380
terminal.
- Disconnect connecting rope 2 from the battery contacts.
- Unscrew the nut 6.
- Pull the anchor bolt 5 from the battery box 9.
- Unscrew the nuts 4 at shackles 7 mounting the batteries in the battery box 9.
- Remove the shackles 7 from the battery box 9.
- Remove the batteries 8 from the battery box 9, one after another.
WARNING:
Install in the reverse order of removal. Ensure battery ropes and terminals are installed in same
position as before disconnecting. A failure may result in injury of persons.
Page 6-113
Battery charge inspection

When putting the vehicle out of operation for more than 1 month, ensure regular battery charging and,
before putting the vehicle in operation, charge the batteries fully.
When dead parking the vehicle for a period of time shorter than one month, check the terminal voltage.
When putting the vehicle out of operation for a period longer than 1 month, check the battery after regular
engine start once a month.
The voltage shall never drop below 12.4 V - have such a battery recharged.
The following charging equipment can be used: automatic charger with at least the WU characteristic with
the constant voltage of 14.4 V (for one battery) or 28.8 V (two batteries) until the total charge.
Charging the fully discharged battery where the cells had frozen may cause explosion and serious
injury.
Measure the terminal voltage to check the battery condition.

Table - Voltage on terminals
Charge condition Terminal voltage Note
100% 12.85 V OK
85% 12.60 V OK
65% 12.40 V charge
55% 12.20 V the possibility of internal damage
40% 12.00 V the possibility of internal damage
If undervoltage is detected, charge the batteries (voltage on the charging terminals must not exceed 14.4V)
and then check the vehicle electrical system. After charging, leave the battery stationary for 24 hours and then
perform a retest.
Note:
A precise calibrated digital voltmeter should be supplied for measurement. Measure the batteries at least 3
hours after disconnecting the charger, ideally after 20 hours. Charge the batteries in a room perfectly
ventilated only. Charge the starting battery with the current equal to 10% of the total capacity.
WARNING:
Never disconnect the battery ropes while the engine is running.
For the vehicle stored in the winter months, remove the batteries and store them charged in dry and clean
premises with an optimal temperature of about 15 °C.
A battery removed from the vehicle, designed for storage (e.g. in winter), and showing 100% charged
condition, should be checked at least once every three months and when the voltage drops to 12.4V, charge
them immediately.
Before installation into the vehicle, check the battery charge condition (See the Table - Voltage on terminals).
Page 6-114
6.28.3 Preservation supply sockets

There are two preservation sockets in the vehicle:
- The first preservation socket 2 is located on the right side
on the holder accessories.
4
2 1
B 2522
- The second preservation socket is located on the rear

right side vehicle.
The preservation socket has been designed for charging of

batteries using an external preservation source in
long-term stored (laid up) vehicles.
The preservation sockets are insulated from the vehicle

chassis. Its positive pole (+) is secured with a fuse.
The negative pole (-) is connected battery minus pole
permanently. 1
B 2518
This connection allows for charging even with the battery
disconnector switched OFF.
Note:
When working with the preservation rectifier, proceed in accordance with the operating manual of respective
power supply. The charging current amount may not exceed 0.01 of battery capacity, which is 1.7 A.
Page 6-115
6.28.4 Bulb replacement

Before replacing the bulbs, first switch off the lights and then turned off the ignition. Replace damaged bulbs
with those of the same type and the same power. The bulb designation can be found on the sleeve, or on its
metal base respectively.
6.28.4.1 Front headlamps with halogen lamps*

Main headlamp
Replacing halogen bulb and side marker bulb in the
main headlamp 1 2
Follow these instructions to replace the bulb of main
headlamp 1.
B 2337
Removal procedure:
1. Dismantle the covering frame. Remove the retaining
screw (see arrow) and dismantle the cover frame
headlamp.
A 6532
2. Deflect the adjustment pin up and remove the optical

insert.
A 4838
Page 6-116
3. Unscrew the screws 1 to separate both halves of the

headlamp.
A 4839
a) Removing the bulb marker illumination

4. Remove the power supply connector from the side
marker bulb base 3 or remove the bulb along with the
sleeve.
A 7658
b) Removing the halogen bulb

5. Remove the plug 2 from the connecting base of
halogen bulb 4 (Fig. A 7658) carefully and put optical
reflector 1 aside.
6. Press the retaining springs 2 on the optical insert to
release the halogen bulb 1 from its position.
Installation procedure
a) Installation bulb side indicator of illumination A 7657
1. Fit the socket c/w bulb 3 into the side marker lamp.
2. Install the base on the halogen bulb 3 in the optical
reflector.
b) Installation of halogen bulb

3. Install new halogen bulb 4 into the optical reflector of headlamp 1 and secure with springs 2 in correct
position (Fig. A 7657).
4. Install the power connector 2 on the halogen bulb 4 in the optical insert.
Note:
Remove the halogen bulb from a box so that you grasp it holding its base and never the bulb glass. Hold it
catching its metal base or use a foam if need be.
Page 6-117
5. Insert the rubber gasket between the optical and back cover.
6. Connect the optical reflector with the back cover using six bolts 2.
7. Install the optical reflector with its recess on two lower adjusting elements 2 and attach them to the upper
mounting 3 (Fig. A 4839).
8. Turn the ignition key to position I.
9. Check the correct functioning of the main headlamps.
10. Adjust the headlamps.
11. Install the headlamp covering frame.
Note:
After replacement of the main bulb or the main headlamp, check and adjust the headlamps using an optical
instrument (regloscope) or measuring wall. The headlamp light must meet the specified technical conditions
and must allow a left-and-right and up-and-down adjustment.
6.28.4.2 Front fog lamp

Replacing bulbs in the front fog lamps
1 2
When replacing bulbs in the front fog lamp 2, follow these
steps:
B 2337
Removal procedure
1. Unscrew five screws 3 of the front fog lamp. 2 3
2. Carefully slide out the bezel 1 with the headlight optical
insert ahead the bumper. 1
3. Replace a defective bulb with a new one.
1. Install new bulb 4 into the optical insert.
2. Attach the front bezel 1 with the sealing to the fog lamp
housing and install it by means of five mounting bolts
3.
4
4. Check the correct functioning of the fog headlamp.
5
Note: 6 DD1247
1247
After replacing a bulb or the whole fog headlamp carry out
headlamp setting inspection using an electronic instrument (regloscope) or measuring/checking wall.
Page 6-118
6.28.4.3 Elevated (auxiliary) headlamp

Replacing bulbs in the elevated (auxiliary) headlamps
To replace a bulb for an elevated headlamp 3, proceed as
follows: 1
Removal procedure
1. Unscrew two screws 2 from the elevated headlamp.
2. Carefully slide out the front bezel 1 with the optical
2
headlamp insert.
3 B 3129
a) Halogen bulb removal
3. Remove the 3-pin power connector from the halogen lamp socket and put the loose front part
of the optical headlamp insert aside.
4. Replace a defective halogen bulb with a new one.
b) Removal of side marker bulb

5. Remove the supply connector from the clearance light bulb base or remove the bulb along with the
sleeve.
c) Halogen bulb installation

7. Install a new halogen bulb into the optical headlamp insert and secure it in the correct position.
8. Install the power connector on the halogen bulb in the optical insert.
Note:
When removing a halogen bulb from the box, grip the bulb socket/base, never touch the glass bulb.
If needed, hold the metal base only, or use a plastic foam.
d) Installation of side marker bulb

9. Install a socket with bulb to the hole for the clearance light (side marker).
10. Install the power connector on the side marker bulb in the optical insert.
1. Attach the front bezel to the elevated headlamp housing and install it using two fixing screws.
3. Check the elevated headlamp operation.
Note:
After replacing a bulb or the whole elevated headlamp carry out headlamp setting inspection using an
electronic instrument (regloscope) or measuring/checking wall and adjust, if needed.
Page 6-119
Replacing bulb in the elevated headlamp

1. For turn signal lamp, unscrew the bolt 1.
2. Carefully slide out the transparent plastic cover 2. 1
4. Screw the transparent plastic cover back on the
elevated headlamp. 2
B 3130
6.28.4.4 Side direction indicator lamp
Replacing a bulb in the side direction indicator lamp
1. Unscrew two bolts 1 and remove the transparent 2
plastic cover 2.
3. Bolt the transparent plastic cover back onto the cab.
Upon reinstallation, make sure rubber sealing fits to
the covering lid precisely.
1
C 0155
6.28.4.5 Rear combined lamp
Replacing a bulb in the rear combined lamp
Version No.1
1. Remove four bolts.
2. Loosen the plastic cover of the combined tail lamp
3. Remove the bulb - push and turn the bulb
counter-clockwise (bayonet fitting).
5. When reassembling, make sure the glass of the
combined tail lamp is properly sealed.
B 1881
Version No.2
1. Unscrew four bolts to dismantle the protection cover
of the tail combined lamp.
2. Unscrew two bolts to dismantle the bezel of the tail
combined lamp.
3. Remove the bulb - push and turn the bulb
counter-clockwise (bayonet fitting).
5. Install the cover with the coloured plexi-glass on the
lamp body properly and make sure no damage has
occurred to the sealing. B 1310
6. Tighten all bolts evenly.

7. Install the outside headlamp cover.
Page 6-120
6.28.4.6 LED side markers*

Replacing LED side markers
1. Unscrew the bolts 1 and remove the LED side marker 1 2 1
2.
2. Replace defective LED side marker with a new one.
3. Screw up the external lamp cover with the LED side
marker.
C 0138
6.28.4.7 Dome light

Replacing a bulb in the dome light
1. Insert a flat screwdriver with the tip wrapped in a cloth,
or another object into the lamp cover recess.
2. Push the lamp cover out.
4. Install the lamp cover.
A 7782
6.28.4.8 Map reading lamp

Replacing a bulb in the map reading lamp
1. Insert a flat screwdriver with the tip wrapped in a cloth,
or another object into the lamp cover recess.
4. Install the lamp cover.
B 2123
Page 6-121
6.28.4.9 Search lamp*

Replacing a bulb in the search lamp
1. Insert a flat screwdriver or another object into the lamp
cover recess.
3. Unscrew four bolts and remove the lamp frame.
4. Remove the optical cartridge from the lamps cover.
5. Remove the power connector and unlock the spring
retaining the socket with the bulb.
6. Replace defective bulb with a new one.
B 1615
7. Lock the bulb socket with a spring and install the
power connector.
8. Install an optical element into the lamp housing.
9. Screw on the lamp frame.
10. Insert the lamp cover into the lamp cut-out.
6.28.5 Adjusting of main headlamps and front fog lamps

Check the headlamp setting in specified servicing intervals always after replacement of the bulb or the whole
headlamp.
Note:
Correct headlamp setting is an important element of safe operation of both the vehicle it self and other road
users. Halogen bulbs are a very strong light source and, if set incorrectly, they may cause dazzling of
oncoming drivers.
Conditions for adjusting headlamps

Headlamp inspection and setting can be carried out using either a specialized instrument (regloscope) or
checking wall. If a regloscope is used, follow the procedure described in the manual.
Low beam inclination should be set to the value indicated on the type plate.
The type plate is located on the side wall of the instrument panel and it is visible after opening the right cab door.
After the adjustment, headlamp setting must meet the specified value.
Perform headlamp inspection and aiming/setting as follows:
- Park the vehicle with all wheels on a flat horizontal surface.
- Perform the check and headlamps setting at the vehicle curb weight, with one person on driver's seat,
with with tires inflated for on-road operation, with suspension bellows inflated for on-road operation.
WARNING:
On vehicle where a superstructure is mounted additionally, headlamps must be newly readjusted after
superstructure installation again.
Page 6-122
Adjusting the headlamp with halogen bulb

- Dismantle the headlamp covering frame.
A 6532
- Use the adjusting screws to adjust the main headlamps.
A 6476
Adjusting the front fog lamp with halogen bulb

2 3
- Use the screw 5 to adjust the front fog lamp aiming.
4
5
6 DD1247
1247
Page 6-123
Adjusting the elevated headlamps*

- "Adjustment of the main headlights is performed by
means of adjusting screws.
B 3128
Page 6-124
6.28.6 List of bulbs used

Bulb, nominal voltage 24 V
Equipment Input Base
Headlamps with halogen bulbs
Main headlamp:
- high beam, low beam 75/70 W (H4) P43t
- position (side-marker) beam 4W Ba 9s
Front fog lamp 70 W (H3) PK 22S
Turn indicator:
- front 21 W Ba 15 s
Elevated headlamps
- high beam, low beam 75/70 W (H4) P43t
- position (side-marker) beam 4W Ba 9s
- turn indicator 21 W Ba 15 s
Tail combined lamp - version No.1:
- stop lamp 21 W Ba 15 s
- side marker lamp 5W Ba 15 s
- tail lamp 2x5W Ba 15 s
- license lamp 5W Ba 15 s
- reverse lamp 21 W Ba 15 s
- tail fog lamp (red) 21 W Ba 15 s
Tail combined lamp - version No.2:
- stop lamp 21 W Ba 15 s
- tail lamp 10 W Ba 15 s
- license lamp 10 W Ba 15 s
- reverse lamp 21 W Ba 15 s
- tail fog lamp (red) 21 W Ba 15 s
Interior illumination
- dome light* 5W/21 W Ba 15 s
- dome light - LED design*
- map reading lamp* 4W Ba 9 s
- map reading lamp- LED design*
- instruments backlight 2W Ba 9 s
- indicator lamps 1.2 W W 2 x 4.6d

- light switches 1.2 W W 2 x 4.6d
Search lamp 70W (H3) PK 22 s
LED side marker
Page 6-125
6.28.7 Electromagnetic air valves

These valves have been designed to engage permanent
mesh in the transmission, "low" and "high" ranges in the
transfer case, control the inter-axle differential, axle
differential, relief exhaust brake, PTO clutch and control of
the superstructure.
If inadequate functioning of any valve is found out, check
the entire intake piping for leaks and inspect the inlet ropes
and valve connectors visually for damage.
A 7862
The label of electromagnetic valve repair 3 is located inside

the cab on the gearshift panel side wall next to the driver's 1
seat and it alerts to stop the engine for repair of 2
electromagnetic valves.
3
WARNING: 4
When checking the permanent mesh valve or
transmission shifting valve, the engine must be at
standstill.
B 1455
Page 6-126
6.29 Belts
Check
The belt tension should be checked at every three months.
Replace the belt if it is frayed or has chunk of material
missing.
Small cracks are acceptable.
Adjust belts that have a glazed or shiny surface which
indicates belt slippage.
Correctly installed and tensioned belts will show even
pulley and belt wear.
Belt damage can be caused by: B 1780
- incorrect tension;
- incorrect size or length;
- incorrect installation;
- severe operating environment;
- oil or grease on the belt.
a) Alternator V-belt tensioning

V-belts tensioning
- Loosen the alternator mounting bolts 1, 2 and rotate bolt
3 to tension the belts.
- Tighten the mounting bolts.
If the belt is pushed with a force of 50 N, the slack may
not be greater than 10 mm.
V-belts replacing
- When replacing belts, loosen mounting bolts 1, 2 and A 6407
rotate bolt 3 to loosen the belts so that you can remove
them from two pulleys.
- Mount new belts and tension them properly.
WARNING:
If one belt is damaged, replace both with new ones at the same time.
Keep the belts clean and protect it against contract with oil and diesel fuel that have detrimental
effects to their service life and functioning.
Page 6-127
a) Alternator and A/C compressor V-belt tensioning

F-50N
A
Belt tensioning
- Release the alternator fastening bolts 1, 2, 3 and shift the 2
alternator in A direction to tension the belts.
- Tighten the mounting bolts.
If the belt is pushed with a force of 50 N, the slack may
3
not be greater than 10 mm.
4 1
V-belts replacing
- When replacing, loosen the mounting bolts and shift the
alternator counterclockwise. This will loosen belt tension
to enable you to remove them from all three pulleys.
B 2273
- Mount new belts and tension them properly.
WARNING:
If one V-belt is damaged, replace all three belts with new ones at the same time.
Keep the belts clean and protect it against contract with oil and diesel fuel that have detrimental
effects to their service life and functioning.
Page 6-128
6.30 Bleeding of axles, transmission, transfer case, tank AdBlue and tank for winch
Vent outlets can be ended by filters to prevent from
possible dirt penetration.
The AdBlue tank vent outlet is located near the AdBlue

tank.
B 2256
The fuel filters of axles, transmission, transfer case and oil

tak for winch* located behind the driver's cab on the right
(Fig. A 7032).
Check and replacement

- Check the condition and cleanliness of axle,
transmission, transfer case, AdBlue tank and hydraulic oil
tank for winch* vent outlets.
The filter service life depends almost solely on the air
contamination level and a visual check will be sufficient.
- If contaminated (dust, sand) or damaged mechanically, A 7032
replace the filters with new ones.
Page 6-129
6.31 Electric engine preheating*

6.31.1 Electrical preheating of the engine oil with a resistor element
Check
230 V electric equipment
1 2
- Keep the electrical equipment clean. Before use, visually
check the electrical equipment for damage (wall outlet 1
and RCD 2).
Arrange for repair if damaged.
WARNING:
If the electrical equipment is faulty or damaged, never
attempt to repair it yourself and have it repaired by
personnel specialized in electrical equipment.
- Allow for a revision of the 230V electrical equipment for
electric engine oil preheating through a resistor element.
- Thorough revisions of this electric equipment must be
performed approx. every half year.
When performing electric revisions/inspections of the
vehicle preheating, proceed in accordance with the local
laws applicable in a respective country, including related
public notices and decrees.
A 7074
Page 6-130
6.32 Vehicle maintenance

The durability, safety, trade-in value and reliability of the vehicle largely depend on the care you give it. This
includes regular service according to the maintenance schedules specified by TATRA.
The driving style and the care given to the vehicle directly influence the condition of the vehicle.
The driver can often provide the dealer with information which is very important for correct maintenance.
Contact the authorized TATRA TRUCKS repair shop prior to the service intervals and related activities.
6.32.1 Cab maintenance

TATRA pays considerable attention to the quality of surface and paint finishing. To keep this quality as high as
possible, during vehicle use, carry out regular maintenance on the cab surfaces.
To prevent the formation of rust in box sections and other cavities, protects the cab with corrosion-inhibiting
products in production.
Due to the setting of the structure, minor bare spots may develop in this additional protective coating.
For this reason, TATRA considers it necessary to have further treatment carried out within a specific
period after the vehicle has been taken into service. Consult the warranty manual.
6.32.2 Cleaning
Cleaning the vehicle
Before the vehicle is cleaned, check for leaks in the engine, axles, transmission, and so on. This is no longer
possible after cleaning the vehicle and carrying out maintenance work.
When a high-pressure cleaner is used, take special note of the following points:
- Make sure that the doors, windows and roof hatch are properly closed.
- Never spray directly on seals. There is a danger that they are forced open so that water can penetrate or
grease packed behind them is flushed away. This may happen, for example, with the universal joint on the
steering box. As a result, the spider may seize so that the steering will jam.
- Do not spray directly onto steering ball joints.
- The power steering oil tank is fitted with a vent. Water may enter the reservoir via this vent, damaging the
steering gear.
- When cleaning the radiator/intercooler, take care not to damage the fins.
- Do not direct the high-pressure cleaner or steam cleaner jet too long at the air-conditioning system
condenser. As a result of the high temperature, the pressure in the system will rise too high, which may
damage the system. Parts of the air conditioning must not be cleaned with the aid of a high-pressure or
a steam cleaner as this can damage the seals.
- Make sure that no water can enter the differential, transmission and auxiliary gearbox via the vents.
- Make sure that no water can enter via the reservoir bleed screws of the clutch, brakes, trailing axle, and so
on.
- The engine and engine compartments can be cleaned with a high-pressure or a steam cleaner. Avoid
spraying directly onto electrical components such as the fuel system pump units, electronic units, starter
motor, alternator, air-conditioning compressor, headlights, and so on.
- Carefully clean the engine encapsulation and its fittings. Remove any spilt oil and diesel oil to avoid the risk
of fire.
- Do not aim the jet of water directly at electrical connections such as connectors and rope plugs in the
vehicle lighting system. Also do not aim the jet at the gear lever unit.
- When cleaning the vehicle, make sure that no water can enter the air inlet system via the air intake or its
flexible seals.
Page 6-131
- When the vehicle has been cleaned, lubricate it again with a grease gun or via the automatic lubrication
system. This is important because it prevents the penetration of moisture and dirt at the various pivot points.
Cleaning the cab exterior

The external paintwork of the cab is subject to attacks by corrosive substances, for example road salt, grit and
polluted air. The paintwork must therefore be cleaned regularly.
When cleaning the cab, make sure that:
- no caustic cleaners are used;
- no hard brushes are used;
- all seams, gaps and door shut-lines are thoroughly cleaned.
Waxing the cab

The paintwork of new vehicles is waxed to protect it against the elements.
After a time this wax coating wears as a result of cleaning and other external influences.
To give corrosive substances less chance of attacking the paint, protect the paintwork with a new wax coating
at least twice a year.
The authorized TATRA TRUCKS repair shop can advise you about additional anti-rust treatment and
maintenance of the paintwork when the vehicle is in service.
Cleaning the cab interior

The cab can be fitted with fabric or plastic trimming.
The plastic can be cleaned with a household cleaning agent and warm water.
The fabric trimming must be cleaned with a non-aggressive dry-cleaning agent, or an equivalent product.
Note:
The appearance of the vehicle is your company's face to the world!
Page 6-132
C 0169
7 Overview of lubricants and operating fluids
Page 7-1
Overview of lubricants and operating fluids 01-0565-ENG/01
7.1 Operating fuel
7.1.1 Diesel oil

Diesel oil - quality requirements:
- cetane index - from 45 to 55
- density range - from 800 to 850 kg/m3
The engine allows long-term operation on the unified fuel F34.
WARNING:
SULPHUR CONTENT IN
ENGINE OIL REFILLING
DIESEL FUEL
up 0,5% RECOMMENDED REFILLING INTERVAL
from 0,5% to 1% REDUCE OIL REFILLING INTERVALTO 50%
over 1% CONSULT A SERVICING TECHNICIAN
WARNING:
With sulphur content in fuel 0.5% -1%, the engine oil refilling intervals are reduced to a half.
7.1.2 AdBlue
Urea: (NH2)2CO
AdBlue is a NOx reduction agent according to DIN V 70070

Chemical characteristics: 32.5 % urea solution
Molecular weight: 60.06 kg/kmol
CAS number: 57-13-6
EINECS number: 200-315-5
Appearance: clear liquid

Viscosity, kinematic (at 25oC): appr. 1,4 mm2/s
Solidificiant point: -11,5 oC
Operating and safety measures for work with AdBlue

WARNING:
Use only AdBlue designed for vehicles and sold in the trade network (DIN 70 070).
When working with AdBlue, use only approved containers and pumps, and designed only for this
application.
Never substitute AdBlue with another product or add another product to it, this might result
in a failure to eliminate harmful substances and damage the exhaust gas combustion system.
If you find that AdBlue used in your vehicle has been contaminated, do not start the vehicle and
contact a TATRA repair shop.
Always handle AdBlue with great care, it is a corrosive substance.
AdBlue must never come into contact with other chemicals.
If AdBlue is spilled on the vehicle or leakage occurs, wipe the excess with a rag and thoroughly rinse
with water.
Page 7-2
31-10-2017 Overview of lubricants and operating fluids
If any action is made on the AdBlue circuit elements, protect electrical connectors and disconnected
piping against any AdBlue splashing with available plugs.
- to a disconnected connector: replace the connector.
CAUTION!
In case of skin or eye contact with adblue, rinse with plenty of water.
If inhaled, breathe fresh air. when in doubt, contact a physician.
7.2 Oils and lubricants

Oil refilling
Oil refilling in all assemblies are not specified in the "Service Booklet".
Perform oil refilling in accordance with TDS (TATRA DRAIN SPECIFICATION), which means refilling in
relation to specified fuel consumption or mileage covered.
The first TDS (TATRA) classification number indicates oil refilling interval in thousands km.
The second number indicates refilling interval in thousands liters of fuel consumed.
For oil refilling, an indicator that occurs earlier in operation is ruling.
WARNING:
Fill the engine and other assemblies with oils and lubricants corresponding to the recommended
classes of oils and lubricants only. Should oils and lubricants of other classes be used, the
manufacturer (TATRA TRUCKS a. s.) assumes no responsibility for resulting damage.
The original factory fills in assemblies are specified in the service booklet.
Page 7-3
7.3 Recommended oils and operating fluids
7.3.1 Engine
Oil specification PARAMO MOL RAVENOL
SAE: 15W-40 MOGUL DIESEL DTT Plus Dynamic Transit RAVENOL Low Emission
10W-40 10W-40 15W-40 Truck SAE 15-40
5W-40 E4, E7, CI-4 E3, E5, E7, CI-4 15W-40
TDS 30/12 TDS 30/12 E7, E9, CJ-4/SM
ACEA: TDS 30/12
E3/E4/E5/E6/E7/E9 MOGUL DIESEL DTT Extra Dynamic Super Diesel
15W-40 15W-40 RAVENOL Turbo plus SHPD
API: E3, E5, E7, CI-4/SL E3, CG-4 SAE 15W-40
CG-4 /CI-4 TDS 30/12 TDS 30/12 15W-40
CI-4/SL / CH-4 E3, E5, E7, CI-4/SL
Dynamic Transit 10W40
CJ-4/SM TDS 30/12
10W-40
E3, E5, E7, CI-4
MB: 228.3/228/31 RAVENOL EURO IV Truck
TDS 30/12
228.5/228.51 SAE 10W-40
229.1 Dynamic Mistral 10W-40
10W-40 E4, E6,E7,CI-4
TDS: 30/12 E4, E6, E7 TDS 30/12
40/16 TDS 40/16
Dynamic Synt Diesel
10W-40
E4, E7, CI-4
TDS 40/16
Engine - continuing
Oil specification ORLEN OIL TOTAL BP FUCHS
SAE: 15W-40 Platinum Ultor Total Rubia Vanellus Multi-Fleet TITAN CARGO
10W-40 Extreme 10W/40 TIR 8900 15W-40 15W-40 MC SAE 10W-40
5W-40 10W-40 10W-40 15W-40 10W-40
E4, E5, E7, CH-4 E4, E6, E7, CI-4 E3, E5, E7, CI-4 E4, E7, CI-4
ACEA: TDS 30/12 TDS 30/12 TDS 30/12 TDS 30/12
E3/E4/E5/E6/E7/E9
Platinum Ultor TITAN TRUCK
API: Max 5W/40 PLUS 15W-40
CG-4 /CI-4 5W-40 15W-40
CI-4/SL / CH-4 E7, E9, CH-4 E3, E5, E7, CI-4
CJ-4/SM TDS 30/12 TDS 30/12
MB: 228.3/228/31 Platinum Ultor

228.5/228.51 CH-4 15W/40
229.1 15W-40
E3, E5, E7, CH-4
TDS: 30/12 TDS 30/12
40/16
Page 7-4
Legend to the tables of recommended oils for transmission, transfer case, axle final drives, back-bone
tube, retarder and clutch PTO
Legend:
* INDIA, IRAQ, ISRAEL, CHINA
** regions AMERICA, AFRICA, AUSTRALIE, ASIA
Territory 1 climatic conditions from -30 °C to +40 °C
Territory 2 climatic conditions from -45 °C to +40 °C
7.3.2 Manual gearbox TATRA, transfer case, axle final drives (with hub reduction gears), back-bone
tube with separate oil filling*, retarder* and clutch PTO*
Territory / TDS
SAE
Oil RUSSIA ASIA
Manufacturer Product name viscosity Other
specification EUROPE except for
grade Territory 1 Territory 2 territories**
*
RUSSIA
Syntetic oils ARAL Getriebeöl
75W-90 120/48 100/40 80/32 100/40 100/40
HYP SYNTH
BP (ARAL)
SAE: 75W-90 ARAL Getriebeöl
75W-90 150/60 120/48 100/40 120/48 120/48
SNA-C 75W-90
API: GL-5
Mobilube SHC LS
75W-90 140/56 120/48 100/40 120/48 120/48
75W-90
TDS: 150/60 EXXONMOBIL
140/56 Mobilube 1 SHC
75W-90 100/40 80/32 60/24 100/40 100/40
120/48 75W-90
100/40
OMV OMV unigear S 75W-90 120/48 100/40 80/32 100/40 100/40
80/32
60/24
SHELL Shell Spirax ASX 75W-90 100/40 80/32 60/24 100/40 100/40
MOGUL
PARAMO 75W-90 100/40 80/32 60/24 80/32 80/32
SYNTRANS 75W-90
FUCHS TITAN
FUCHS 75W-90 150/60 120/48 100/40 120/48 120/48
CYTRAC SL
MOL Hykomol
MOL 75W-90 80/32 60/24 60/24 60/24 60/24
Synt 75W90
7.3.3 Transmission ALLISON*
Oil Oil Approval NATO STOCK

Manufacturer Product name
specification Number TES 295 NUMBER (NSN)
Syntetic oils
CASTROL Heavy
Allison AN-011001 TransSynd 9150015512796
Duty Lubricants
TES 295
Page 7-5
7.3.4 Axle final drives (without hub reduction gears) and back-bone tube with separate oil filling*
Oil SAE Territory / TDS

specification Manufacturer Product name viscosity ASIE except Other
grade EUROPA RUSSIA
for RUSSIA * territories **
Mineral oilsa
BP (ARAL) ARAL Getriebeöl HYP 80W 80/32 50/20 60/24 60/24
SAE: 80W
80W-90
85W-90 PARAMO MOGUL TRANS 80H 80W 80/32 50/20 60/24 60/24
API: GL-5
Mobilube HDA
EXXONMOBIL 85W-90 80/32 50/20 60/24 60/24
TDS: 80/32 85W-90
60/24
50/20
OMV OMV unigear 80W-90 80/32 50/20 60/24 60/24
SHELL Shell Spirax AX 80W-90 80/32 50/20 60/24 60/24
MOL Hykomol ZF
MOL 80W-90 80/32 60/24 60/24 60/24
80W90
a.Applies only to vehicle assemblies factory filled with mineral oils.
7.3.5 Hub reduction gears*
Oil specification PARAMO SHELL BP (ARAL) FUCHS
Syntetic oils MOGUL SYNTRANS Shell Spirax ASX Getriebeöl FUCHS TITAN
75W-90H 75W-90 HYP SYNTH CYTRAC SL
SAE: 75W-90 75W-90 GL-5 75W-90 75W-90
GL-5 GL-5
GL-5
API: GL-5
ARAL Getriebeöl
SNA-C 75W-90
75W-90
GL-5
Hub reduction gears - continuing

Oil specification EXXONMOBIL OMV MOL
Syntetic oils Mobilube SHC LS 75W-90 OMV unigear S MOL Hykomol Synt
75W-90 75W-90 75W-90H
SAE: 75W-90 GL-5 GL-5 75W-90
GL-5
API: GL-5
Mobilube 1 SHC 75W-90
75W-90
GL-5
Page 7-6
7.3.6 Power-steering hydraulic circuit

Oil specification PARAMO TOTALFINAELF SHELL
ISO VG 15 PARAMOL HV 32 EQUIVIS ZS 32 SHELL Donax TX 32
ISO VG 32 ISO VG 32 ISO VG 32 ISO VG 32
HVLP HVLP HVLP
ISO 6743: ISO-L-HV
DIN-51524 - part 3
HVLP
Power-steering hydraulic circuit - continued

Oil specification ORLEN OIL PENTOSIN
ISO VG 15 HYDROL L-HV 32a PENTOSIN CHF 11Sa
ISO VG 32 ISO VG 32 ISO VG 32
HVLP HVLP
ISO 6743: ISO-L-HV
DIN-51524 - part 3
HVLP
a.Hydraulic oils recommended for use under extremely low temperatures (from -40 °C).
7.3.7 Cab tilting hydraulic circuit and hydraulic spare wheel tilting
Oil specification EXXONMOBIL OMV SHELL
ISO VG 15 UNIVIS NVI 13a OMV hyd OHA 15a AERO SHELL FLUID F4a
ISO VG 32 HVLP HVLP HVLP
ISO 6743/4 type HV UNIVIS NVI 26a OMV hyd OHA 32 SHELL SUPER Hydraulic Oil
ISO VG 32 ISO VG 32 15a
DIN-51 524-part 3 HVLP HVLP ISO VG 15
HVLP HVLP
MOBIL SHC 522a
ISO VG 15
HVLP
Page 7-7
Cab tilting hydraulic circuit and hydraulic spare wheel tilting - continued
Oil specification TOTALFINAELF CARL BECHEM
ISO VG 15 AEROHYDRAULIC 520a LM 032 ROTa

ISO VG 32 HVLP HVLP
ISO 6743/4 type HV
DIN-51 524-part 3
HVLP
Cab tilting hydraulic circuit and hydraulic spare wheel tilting - continued
Oil specification ORLEN OIL MOL
ISO VG 15 ORLEN OIL H - 515A MOL HYDRRO HV EXTRA 15a

ISO VG 32 HVLP HVLP
ISO 6743/4 type HV
DIN-51 524-part 3
HVLP
7.3.8 Winch hydraulic circuit and hydraulic body tipping
Oil specification PARAMO TOTALFINAELF SHELL ORLEN OIL
ISO VG 32 Paramol HV 32 EQUIVIS ZS 32 SHELL DONAX TX32 HYDROL L-HV 32

ISO 6743/4 type HV HVLP HVLP HVLP HVLP
DIN-51 524-part 3 HVLP
7.3.8.1 Gear housing of winch (RAMSEY H-800)*
Oil specification
Gear oil
Hypoid oil SAE 85W/140H
Page 7-8
7.3.9 Hydraulic clutch control (brake fluid)

Fluid classification VELVANA TOTALFINAELF EXXONMOBIL VALVOLINE MOBIL OMV
SAE J 1703 DOT 3 DOT 3 DOT 4 DOT 4 DOT 4 DOT 5
DOT-3/4/5 SYNTOL HD-205 DOT 4
Hydraulic clutch control (brake fluid) - continued

Fluid classification CASTROL BP SHELL ARAL DEA FUCHS
SAE J 1703 DOT 4 BRAKE FLUID 3 DOT 4 DOT 4 DOT 4 TITAN
DOT-3/4/5 DISK BRAKE F4 DONAX-B-DOT 3 STOP red
Page 7-9
7.4 Plastic lubricants
7.4.1 Plastic lubricants - propeller shaft - splining, bearings, holder pins SWH
Lubricant
PARAMO TOTALFINAELF ARAL EXXONMOBIL SHELL
specification
DIN 51818: MOGUL LA 2 MULTIS EP-2 ARALUB MKL-3 RONEX MP-D RETINAX A
NLGI-2 KP2K-30 KP2K-25 KP2K-20 KP2N-30 KP2K-30
MOGUL MOLYKA-Ga ESSO MPa

DIN 51502: KF2K-30 (MOLY)
KP2K-30 KF2N-25
KF2K-30 MADIT A2
KP2N-30 KP2K-25 Mobilgrease
KP2K-25 HP 222
KF2N-25 KP2N-20
KP2K-20
KF2K-20
KP2N-20
Bolt threads, flanges,
Use preservation oils (such as KONKOR 101, 103 and so on)
etc.
a.Indicates special lubricants with additive (content) of MoS2 etc.
Plastic lubricants - propeller shaft - splining, bearings, holder pins SWH - continued
Lubricant
CASTROL OMV BP VALVOLINE
specification
DIN 51818: CASTROL LM OMV SIGNUM L2 ENERGREASE LC 2 Multi-Purpose Grease
NLGI-2 KP2K-30 KP2K-30 KF2K-30 KP2K-20
CASTROL LMX OMV SIGNUM LMa

DIN 51502: KP2N-30 KF2K-30
KP2K-30
KF2K-30 CASTROL MS3a OMV SIGNUM 283
KP2N-30 KF2K-30 KP2K-30
KP2K-25
KF2N-25
KP2K-20
KF2K-20
KP2N-20
a.Indicates special lubricants with additive (content) of MoS2 etc.
Plastic lubricants for extreme temperatures (low or high) - propeller shaft - splining, bearings
Lubricant specification EXXONMOBIL CASTROL
DIN 51 818: Mobilith SHC 220 OPTITEMP LG2
NLGI-2 KPHC2R-50 KPHC2R-50
DIN 51 502:
KPHC2R-50
Page 7-10
7.5 Drain intervals
7.5.1 Engine oil refilling intervals

Have the engine oil refillling by an authorized TATRA service facility.
Perform engine oil refilling and cleaning the centrifugal filter depending on quality of oil used in the specified
intervals.
Refilling interval
Oil classification TATRA TDS 30/12 30,000 km 12,000 l of fuel 900 engine hrs.
Oil classification TATRA TDS 40/16 40,000 km 16,000 l of fuel 1,200 engine hrs.
Assembly Intervals and conditions for the refilling and maintenance

Engine TATRA
- Oil refilling Refill oil every two years of operation unless TDS indicators were
reached during this period.
- Replacing engine oil filter element Replace every time you refill engine oil.
- Cleaning a centrifugal oil filter Clean the centrifugal oil filter every time you refill engine oil.
Note:
- Use the oils mentioned in TATRA engines in all year seasons.
For the operation in winter period, easy engine startability is guaranteed down to -15 °C providing oil 15W-40
is used and down to -20 °C with oil 10W-40.
Use oil of 5W-40 viscosity class at lower temperatures.
B 1122
Exceptionally, before engine shutdown in longer term, engine oil may be diluted with JET A-1 aviation
kerosene to reduce the startability temperature by about 5-7 °C per 1 liter of kerosene.
Maximum permissible quantity of kerosene is 2 litres.
Kerosene will evaporate after 10-15 hours of vehicle operation.
Page 7-11
7.5.2 Oil and filter change intervals in the ALLISON transmission

a) Oil and filter change intervals with PROGNOSTICS ON
Table 1 refers to the ALLISON transmission with the prognostics turned ON. It is assumed the TES 295 oil
and high-capacity ALLISON filters are used.
Table 1 - Oil and filter change intervals with Prognostics turned on
3000 and 4000 Families Transmission
PROGNOSTICS ON
TES 295 Oils
Filters TES 295

REQUIRED* REQUIRED*
100 percent contentration TES 295 Allison appoved oils 100 percent contentration TES 295 Allison appoved oils
and Allison High Capacity Filters and Allison High Capacity Filters
General** or Severe*** General** or Severe***
Main Internal Lube / Auxiliary
Overhaul
Change filters when indicated by controller between oil Change oil when indicater by controller or 60 month
changes or 60 month whichever occur first. whichever occurs first. Always replace filters (main and lube)
Applies for replace filters (main and lube) between refilling the oil. with the oil refill.
Note:
If the Prognostics feature is off (not activated) or if it has not been calibrated at all in the transmission control
unit, Tables 2a and 2b (on page 7-13) in this manual need to be used for oil and filter change intervals.
* Lower than 100% oil concentration pursuant to TES 295 approved by Allison would be considered as
a mixture and such an oil should not be used with the Prognostics for TES 295.
** General (normal) operation:
Transmissions without retarder. Vehicles not working in severe conditions. Conventional vehicles, fire and
emergency vehicles.
*** Heavy duty operation:
Transmissions with retarder.
On-road/off-road applications, waste collection vehicles.
b) Oil and filter change intervals with PROGNOSTICS OFF

Table 2 applies to the ALLISON transmission with the Prognostics turned off. It is assumed the TES 295 oil
and high-capacity ALLISON filters are used.
Page 7-12
Table 2a - Filter replacement intervals with Prognostics turned off
PROGNOSTICS OFF
TES 295 Oils
High Capacity Filter
100 percent concentration Allison approved TES 295 oils*
Main Internal Lube / Auxiliary
General** or Severe*** Overhaul General** or Severe***

120,000 km 120,000 km
3,000 Hours 3,000 Hours
36 Months 36 Months
Table 2b - Oil change intervals with Prognostics turned off
PROGNOSTICS OFF
TES 295 Oils
Oil
100 percent concentration Allison approved TES 295 oils*
General** Severe***
480,000 km 240,000 km
6,000 Hours 6,000 Hours
48 Months 48 Months
Note:
Oil/filters should only be changed upon or before reaching the recommended distance, operating hours or
elapsed months, whichever is the earliest.
Page 7-13
Note:
Local conditions and work cycle difficulty may require more or less frequent oil changes,
which differ from the replacement intervals recommended by Allison.
Allison recommends having the oil quality analysed as the primary method to determine the oil change
intervals.
If an oil quality analysis is not available, the oil change intervals listed in the table above should be followed.
* Lower than 100% oil concentration pursuant to TES 295 approved by Allison would be considered as a
mixture and intervals for oil not corresponding to TES 295 should be used.
** General (normal) operation:
Transmissions without retarder. Vehicles not working in severe conditions. Conventional vehicles, fire and
emergency vehicles.
*** Heavy duty operation:
Transmissions with retarder. On-road/off-road applications, waste collection vehicles.
CAUTION!
When refilling oil in the ALLISON transmission, never replace TES 295 oil with any oil.
When changing oil, always replace the main and lubricating filters.
Page 7-14
7.5.3 Oil refilling intervals in the manual gearbox TATRA , transfer case, axle final drives, retarder*
and back-bone tube (with separate oil filling)*
Have the oil in manual gearbox TATRA, transfer case, axle final drives, retarder* and back-bone tube refilling
by an authorized TATRA TRUCKS service facility.
Oils (oil specification) Refilling interval

Oil classification TATRA TDS 50/20 50,000 km 20,000 l of fuel 1,500 engine hrs

Transmission
- Oil refilling Refill oil every three years of operation, unless TDS indicators
were not reached during this period (for specific transmission oil).
Transfer case
Axle final drives
Back-bone tube (with separate oil
filling) Refill oil every three years of operation, unless TDS indicators
- Oil refilling were not reached during this period (for specific transmission oil).
Retarder
Page 7-15
Manufacturer's recommendations for oil refilling

1. The labels located on the windshield indicates vehicle transmission, transfer case and axle final drives,
where synthetic oil is used.
2. Except for recommended oils, never mix synthetic oils from different manufacturers with each other.
Any loss of synthetic oil cannot be topped up by mineral oil and vice versa.
WARNING:
When refilling oil in transmission unit (manual gearbox
TATRA , transfer case), never replace synthetic oil with
mineral oil.
A 7750
WARNING:
When refilling oil in axle final drives (applies to axles
with hub reduction gears), never replace synthetic oil
with a mineral oil.
WARNING:
When refilling oil in back-bone tube with separate oil
filling* (applies to axles with hub reduction gears),
never replace synthetic oil with a mineral oil.
WARNING:
When refilling oil in retarder, never replace synthetic B 1229
oil with a mineral oil.
Oil refilling intervals in the hub reduction gears*

Have the hub reduction oil refilling by an authorized TATRA TRUCKS service facility.
Hub reduction gears

1st refilling After covering 2,500 - 3,000 km.
- Oil refilling
other refilling After covering every 30,000 km or

after every three years of operations at the latest.
WARNING:
When refilling oil in the hub reduction gears, never replace synthetic oil with mineral oil.
Page 7-16
Oil refilling intervals in hydraulic circuits and brake fluid refilling
Have the oil in hydraulic circuits and brake fluid refilling by an authorized TATRA TRUCKS service facilities.
Intervals and conditions for the refilling and

Assembly
maintenance
Power-assisted steering
- Oil refilling After covering 120,000 km or after every three years of
operations at the latest.
- Replacing the oil filter element The 1st change after covering 2,500 - 3,000 km
and next change upon each hydraulic oil refilling.
Hydraulic circuit of cab tilting

Hydraulic clutch control circuit
- Brake fluid refilling After every three years of operation.
Clutch PTO
After 1,200 working hours, after three years of operation
- Oil refilling at the latest.
Gear housing winch RAMSEY H-800
- Oil refilling After every three years of operation.
Gear housing winch SEPSON H 150 PF
- Oil refilling Permanent grease charge.
Hydraulic circuit of spare wheel tilting

Hydraulic circuit of winch and body

- Replacing the oil filter element Replace should be carried out following the indication by the
(filter body with an oil pressure gauge) oil pressure gauge on the filter body, not upon every oil refill.
- Replacing the oil filter element Upon every hydraulic oil refill.
(filter body without an oil pressure gauge)
- Replacing the air filter element Replace to be made if damaged or heavily dirty, the next
replace upon every changing of the oil filter element.
- Replacing the breather filter Upon every hydraulic oil refill.
Page 7-17
7.6 Lubrication intervals

The intervals are specified for certain mileage covered or fuel volume consumed.
Intervals and conditions for the refilling and

Lubrication point
maintenance
Clutch
- Clutch shaft bearing 30,000 km or once a year
Front axle(s), steering rear axle(s)
- Upper and bottom pivot pin mountings Once a month
- Cardan shaft bearing mountings on the half-axles Weekly if used intensively in muddy and wet
- Cardan shaft cross pins of the front axle(s) terrain
Steering
- Telescopic steering spindle (under the cab) 30,000 km or once a year
- Splined steering spindle (under the cab) 30,000 km or once a year
- Telescopic steering spindle (in cab) 30,000 km or once a year
Telescopic tipper lifting cylinder*
- Lower and upper bearing 30,000 km or once a year
Tipper body*
- Rear rotary fork on tipper body beam 30,000 km or once a year
Winch, accessory winch*

- Winch gearbox
- Additional large pulley once a year
- Rope (rope surface) (intensive operation 1x per half year)
- Front guide pulleys
- Rear guide pulleys
Spare wheel lifting mechanism*
- Worm gear and guide rollers of spare wheel tilting 30,000 km or once a year
mechanism
- Holder pin of hydraulic spare wheel tilting 30,000 km or once a year
Other
Towing hitch*
- Hitch mounting and pintle 30,000 km or once a year
- Nut slide 30,000 km or once a year
Page 7-18
7.7 Lubrication points

Clutch - Clutch shaft bearing
Front axle(s) - Upper and lower pivot mounts
Steering rear axle(s) - Propeller shaft bearings in half-axle
- Cardan spiders of front axle shafts
Steering - Steering ball joints*
- Telescopic steering spindle (under the cab)
- Splined steering spindle (under the cab)
- Telescopic steering spindle (in cab)
Telescopic tipper lifting cylinder* - Lower and upper bearing
Tipper body* - Rear rotary fork on tipper body beam
Winch, accessory winch* - Winch gearbox
- Additional large pulley
- Rope (rope surface)
- Front guide pulleys
- Rear guide pulleys
Spare wheel lifting mechanism* - Worm gear and guide rollers of spare wheel tilting mecha-
nism
- Holder pin of hydraulic spare wheel tilting
Other - Hitch mounting and pintle
Towing hitch* - Nut slide
Page 7-19
7.8 Filling capacities

Assemblies Capacity
Engine T3D-928 20.0 l ÷ 24.5 l
Manual gearbox TATRA 10.0 l ÷ 11.6 l
Transmission ALLISON 45.0 l
Transfer case (two-stage type) 9.6 l
Front axle (4x4, 6x6) 9.5 l

Front axle I (8x8) 8.4 l
Front axle II (8x8) 10.3 l
Rear axle (4x4) 9.4 l
Rear axle I (6x6) 12.6 l
Rear axle II (6x6) 9.4 l
Rear axle I (8x8) 10.3 l
Rear axle II (8x8) 8.4 l
Retarder 3.0 l
Back-bone tube (with separate oil filling) 1.5 ÷ 2.5 l
Wheel reduction gear housing:
- front axle I, II 2 x 1.0 l
- rear axle I, II 2 x 1.3 l
HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS CAPACITY

Power-assisted steering
- plastic tank 7.8 l
- metal tank 25.0 l
Clutch control 0.3 l
Clutch PTO
- without forced cooling 2.3 l
- with forced cooling 3.2 l
Cab´s tilting mechanism 1.1 l
Body tipping*
- 4x4, 6x6 versions 45.0 l
- 8x8 versions 104.0 l
Spare wheel tilting* 1.1 l
Winch RAMSEY* 48.0 l
Winch SEPSON* 107.0 l or 173.0 l
Hydraulic winch RAMSEY*

- winch (gear housing) 2.6 l
Fuel tank
- separate fuel tank 220 l, 320 l, 420 l
- with two fuel tanks 220 l + 220 l
AdBlue tank 60.0 l
Windshield washer tank 14.5 l
Page 7-20
7.9 Operating (original) liquids in factory-filled vehicle assemblies

The original factory fills in assemblies are specified in the Service Booklet.
Page 7-21
Page 7-22
B 0911
8 Storage and transport conditions
Page 8-1
Storage and transport conditions 01-0565-ENG/01
8.1 Storage conditions for TATRA vehicles

During a long-term putting the vehicle out of operation, the vehicle's user is obliged to carry out the below
mentioned servicing that guarantees a trouble-free operation of the vehicle in the future operation.
A long-term putting the vehicle out of operation is considered to be a period over one month already.
In the case that a defect occurs in the course of the guarantee period caused by not abiding by these
conditions, the manufacturer TATRA TRUCKS a. s., will transfer the costs of the guarantee repair to the user
and simultaneously reserves the right to carry out a spot-check of following these conditions.
Storage conditions:
1. Clean the vehicle thoroughly.
2. Use blocks to secure the vehicle from movement. Gearshift lever is in N position.
3. During a long-term putting the vehicle out of operation or if the vehicle should be driven under very
aggressive conditions, preserve all chassis parts, front bumper and superstructure surfaces (if the
superstructure is mounted) with the preserving agent:
TEROTEX 7102 made by the Teroson Comp or PROTEWAX 625 made by the ITB Comp.
The preserving effects of both agents are similar and a recommended way of application is the spraying.
4. Lift off the wiper blades from the windshield or pad up the wiper arms so that the rubber wiper blades do
not touch the windshield.
Before the winter season water in the windshield washer tank must be replaced with a low-freezing liquid.
Switch on the washer pump shortly after the low-freezing liquid has been refilled to expel remaining water
and refill the fluid throughout the system.
5. Check the operating tire pressures once a month.
6. Batteries
For short-term vehicle storage for up to 30 days, disconnect the batteries using the battery
disconnector.
If a battery preserver can be used to maintain the battery capacity, connect the battery to the battery
preserver. The preserver maintains the batteries with a current of 0.01 times the total battery capacity.
If the vehicle is being stored for a long period of time, remove the batteries from the vehicle and place
them in the charging station for maintenance during storage.
Should the batteries not be used for a long time, take the following measures:
- remove the batteries from the vehicle;
- check the battery condition and recharge the batteries to 100%;
- clean the battery poles and top;
- treat the battery poles with an acid-free grease;
- store the batteries treated this way in a dry and well-ventilated, non-dusty room (recommended storage
temperature is 10 to 15 °C);
- make sure to disconnect a stored battery from the charging network, with plugs screwed in (if the battery is
equipped with screw plugs);
- never place conductive nor non-conductive objects on the battery surface.
- when storing charged batteries, use all means to prevent short circuit (protect poles with non-conducting
caps, etc).
- regularly check the condition and charge. The voltage on the battery terminals must not drop below 12.4 V.
Page 8-2
31-10-2017 Storage and transport conditions
7. Charge and service the accumulators once in two months at least.

8. Once a month at regular intervals, start the engine and allow it to run at 1,000 rpm for about 10 minutes
while checking the ventilation, dependent heater and cooling system for all functions.
After the air pressure reaches 8.3 bars in the brake system, make a 2 km-drive at least, while applying
the brakes and electric and pneumatic controllers several times in succession to prevent a corrosion of
electric accessories.
9. Prior to hand over the vehicle to the user, it is necessary:
- to check and/or to tension the alternator and air-conditioning compressor V-belts;
- to check the engine oil level;
- to check the fluid in the clutch control circuit
- to check the oil level in the tank of the hydraulic power-assisted steering
- to check the oil level in transmission, transfer case, axle final drive housings, retarder* and wheel
reduction gears*;
- to check the oil level in wheel reduction gears*;
- to check the oil level in back-bone tube with separate oil filling*;
- to check the engine for leaks;
- to check the oil level in the tank of the cab tilting hydraulic circuit
- to check the oil level in the tank of the spare wheel tilting hydraulic circuit*
- to check the oil level in the tank of the winch hydraulic circuit*
- to check the oil level in the tank of the tipper body hydraulic circuit*;
- to check the instruments and indicator lamps on the instrument panel;
- to check the vehicle illumination and electromagnetic air valves for function;
- to check the efficiency of the emergency and parking brake;
- check the clutch disengaging*;
- to check the tightening of wheel nuts;
- tipper body operation*;
- check of winch functionality (hydraulic, electrical)*;
- to check the completeness of the vehicle equipment;
- to carry out a short drive with a customer.
When setting assemblies and instruments, or topping up oil fills, follow this Operation Manual.
Page 8-3
8.2 Vehicle transport
8.2.1 Railway transport

When transporting the vehicle by railway, the carrier must make sure that total load height stipulated by the
national legislation of a respective country is observed.
Should the TATRA vehicle need to be transported on the railway, use wagons of the TWA 1060 type if
possible, because the vehicle does not need to be attached additionally and the loading gauge is not
exceeded.
On wagons of the other type, the loading gauge shall be exceeded what requires to get the transporter´s
approval.
CAUTION:
Never step on the vehicle cargo area or cab roof, if the vehicle is on a freight car under electric railway
trolley wire. A failure to comply may result in injury to personnel.
a) Safety precautions before loading

- Check whether trolleys are used by the means of railway 1
transport (freight car).
- Check the loading ramp, ramp braces, respectively the
crane and other aids before using them. 2
8 3
- The freight car brake must be engaged and car wheels
must be blocked with stop blocks. 7
- When driving over multiple freight cars, use sufficiently
strong reinforcements between them.
- Do not step on the tractor unit, fuel tank, battery box, cab, 6 5 4 B 1520
bumper, frame, etc. unless adequate slip resistant
surfaces and handholds are provided.
- Never step on the vehicle cargo area (superstructure) or cab roof, if the vehicle is on a freight car under
electric railway trolley wire.
CAUTION!
Any handling (loading, unloading) under the trolleys, both on and off, is prohibited. Handling must
always be carried out outside the contact wire area.
It is also FORBIDDEN to stand on the chassis - LIFE HAZARD.
CAUTION!
It is prohibited to transport persons in the cab or superstructure during transport by rail.
CAUTION!
Before ramping up on the freight cars, remove all protruding devices from the vehicles
so that the vehicle met the clearance profile in width and height.
CAUTION!
Make sure that all removable items from outside the vehicle are stored inside the cab and properly
secured.
Page 8-4
b) Vehicle preparation for transport by rail

Depending on the freight car type and its transit profile, remove the following items from the vehicle, store
them properly and secure them in the vehicle:
- antenna(s);
- exhaust tailpipe*;
- other items as instructed by the carrier's representative and a specific freight car type.
CAUTION!
There is the risk of antenna contact with high voltage trolley wires. A failure to comply may result in
injury to personnel.
Always take the following preparation steps:

- Tilt the working spotlight on the roof*.
- Close and secure the roof hatch.
- Make sure that disassembled parts and vehicle equipment are properly stored and secured.
- The vehicle must have inflated tires (at the maximum pressure).
Note:
For vehicles with a Central Tire Inflation System, the shut-off valves must be closed on the wheels (in the OFF
position).
c) Vehicle loading procedure

CAUTION!
A guiding assistant (navigator) must always be available to load the vehicle on a freight car! When the
navigator's position changes, stop the vehicle immediately!
- When loading the vehicle, follow the loading master's instructions, turn on the side markers.
- Load the vehicle at the lowest gear engaged.
- Run on a freight car in such a way that vehicle axis is aligned with the freight car axis.
- Once you reach the desired position on the freight car, engage the parking brake, shift into neutral.
- Let the engine running.
- Set the air discharge valve to position II (ON).
- This will release the air from the axle suspension bellows.
- To completely discharge air from the axle suspension bellows, roll the vehicle back and forth several times
(about ± 1 m).
- Secure the vehicle with the parking brake and shift into neutral.
- Shut off the engine.
- Fold in the door mirror holders to the cab.
- Fold the kerb mirror (above the right door) to the cab door.
- Remove the key from the ignition box.
- Lock the cab door
- The air drain valve must be open (Position II, ON) when transporting the vehicle.
Page 8-5
Note:
Due to possible battery discharge during long-term vehicle transport we recommend disconnecting the battery
jumper rope from the battery contacts (first from the negative terminal (-) then from the positive terminal (+)).
Store and secure the removable jumper rope in the battery box.
- If necessary, have some vehicle parts secured with seals (cab doors, toolkits, battery box, superstructure,
etc.).
- Hand the keys over to the personnel responsible for cargo transport or place them in accordance with their
instructions.
Note:
When driving the vehicle onto a freight car on the loading ramp follow the procedure described in chapter
8.2.3 "Loading vehicle on a means of transport using a loading ramp."
d) Tying down a vehicle on a freight car

When fixing the vehicle on a freight car, follow the railway staff's or loading commander's instructions.
- When tying down a vehicle on a freight car, make sure to observe the following:
- applicable professional regulations;
- loading guidelines;
- carrier representative's instructions;
- loading master's instructions.
General principles:
- Place the vehicle on a freight car evenly in the longitudinal direction.
- The minimum distance from the vehicle edge, or between vehicles must be: 25cm.
- Chock the wheels.
Fasten the chocks to the freight car floor to prevent from moving during loading and transport.
Note:
The principle is that the chocks should be put before and after each wheel, where the twin axles are counted
as one, i.e. to be chocked outside.
- Tie down the vehicle (using e.g. textile fasteners, steel wire ropes, steel chains).
- Make sure to tie down the vehicle crosswise to capture both longitudinal and transverse forces.
- The ties must be tensioned from the sides at an angle no less than 30° in the longitudinal direction.
- Situate the tie-down means in the anchorages on the floor, or freight car sides.
- The vehicle anchorages for attachment are shown in Fig. B 3738 or in Fig. B 3739.
- With regard to the vehicle weight, at least 6 anchorage points must be used to tie down the vehicle in each
direction.
If the textile fastening straps are routed over sharp edges, either on the vehicle or freight car, it is necessary to
pad them with protective elements. The same applies to crossing of textile fastening straps.
WARNING:
Make sure that all connections are properly secured to the vehicle and freight carfloor.
Page 8-6
Note:
In the event of a brake system failure, the vehicle may only be transported SEPARATELY and its tie-down
method must be consulted with the carrier.
Vehicle anchoring points to fasten the tie-down elements (Fig. B 3738):

A - front bumper attachments (4 holes in total)
B - rear cross member attachments (4 holes in total)
C - rear hitch
D - cross member in front of the 1st rear axle (holes Ø 80 mm)
E - cross member between the 1st rand 2nd rear axles (holes Ø 60 mm)
F - 1st rear half-axle
G - 2nd rear half-axle
Anchorage points to tie-down TATRA FORCE vehicles (6x6 version)
F G
A B
D E
C
D E B
A
F G
B 3738
Page 8-7
Example of tying-down a TATRA FORCE vehicle for rail transport (6x6 version)
B 3739
8.2.2 Transport on low-bed trailer

When transporting the vehicle on a low-bed trailer, the carrier must make sure that total load height stipulated
by the national legislation of a respective country is observed.
When being transported on a low-bed trailer, the vehicle must properly be anchored to the low-bed floor (the
same conditions as those of railway transport apply).
Transport route should be chosen with respect to the total height of vehicle combination.
Page 8-8
8.2.3 Loading vehicle on a means of transport using a loading ramp

This chapter describes the steps necessary to load/unload a transported vehicle on a means of transport
using a loading ramp.
a) Before driving the vehicle on a means of transport

- Drive the vehicle in front of a loading ramp to a means of transport.
b) Driving on a means of transport

- Slowly drive on the loading ramp.
- Start to reduce the vehicle height (deflate the air
suspension bellows) after rolling the front axle on the
horizontal surface of the means of transport. A
- Turn the vehicle height setting switch 12 to the
lower "C" position. This will start discharging the air from B
the axle air suspension bellows.
- Drive on the means of transport in such a way that
vehicle axis is aligned with its axis. C
- Secure the vehicle with the parking brake and shift into
B 2677
neutral.
- Let the engine running.
- Get out of the vehicle.
- Set the air discharge valve to position II (ON) to release
the air from the axle suspension bellows.
- Get in the vehicle.
- Leave the vehicle height setting switch 12 in the

lower "C" position (discharge of air from the air
suspension bellows).
CAUTION!
Should the (vehicle height setting) switch 12
A 6462
remain in the lower position "C" and ignition key be
turned to position "0", the vehicle will lift (if air pressure is sufficient) to the home (driving) position.
Attention! If the air suspension bellows are inflated in an already tied-down vehicle, it may result in
LIFE HAZARD OR DAMAGE TO THE VEHICLE. A sling (tie-down textile strap) may either break or slide
out of anchoring points once the vehicle is raised to the driving position.
- Check the parking brake engaged and shift into neutral.

- Shut off the engine.
- Fold in the door mirror holders to the cab. Fold the kerb mirror (above the right door) to the cab door.
- Remove the key from the ignition box.
Page 8-9
- Lock the cab door

c) Anchoring the vehicle on a means of transportation

- Anchor the transported vehicle to the floor of the transport vehicle.
d) Driving down from a transport vehicle

- Release the vehicle from the shipping floor attachment.
- Close the air drain valve (position I (OFF)).
- Set up the holders of exterior mirrors for vehicle
operation.
- Start the engine.
- Pressurize the brake system as required. The indicator
A 6462
lamps 25 and 26 must go out before driving
out.
- To cross the ramp edge with no problems, the air suspension bellows must be inflated to provide a ground
clearance.
- Before driving down from a transport vehicle, DO NOT FORGET to set the switch 12 (vehicle height
setting switch) to the medium (home) position.
- Check the air pressure in tires. Inflate where necessary.
- Release the parking brake and carefully drive out of the means of transport.
Page 8-10
8.2.4 Loading the vehicle on a means of transport using a crane

This chapter describes the loading/unloading of a transported vehicle (applies only to vehicles fitted with
the air suspension bellows only) to a means of transport when using the crane.
LOADING THE VEHICLE ON A MEANS OF TRANSPORT USING A CRANE

- Before loading the vehicle onto a means of transport using a crane, inflate the air suspension bellows
of the vehicle.
WARNING:
The axle suspension bellows could be damaged when placing the vehicle on a means of transport.
- After loading the vehicle for transport, discharge the air from the air suspension bellows through the air drain
valve.
UNLOADING THE VEHICLE FROM A MEANS OF TRANSPORT USING A CRANE

- Before unloading the vehicle from a means of transport using a crane, close the air valve and inflate the air
suspension bellows.
WARNING:
The axle suspension bellows could be damaged when unloading the vehicle from a means of
transport.
Page 8-11
Page 8-12
9 ES Declaration of conformity
Strana 9-1
ES Declaration of conformity 01-0565-ENG/01
Strana 9-2
31-10-2017 ES Declaration of conformity
Strana 9-3
ES Declaration of conformity 01-0565-ENG/01
Strana 9-4
Prepared by:
TATRA TRUCKS a. s. Sales and technical Documentation Section
Areál Tatry 1450/1
www: tatratrucks.com
742 21 Kopřivnice
CZECH REPUBLIC
Copyright © 2017 TATRA TRUCKS a. s.
TATRA TRUCKS a. s.
Areál Tatry 1450/1, 742 21 Kopřivnice, Czech Republic
Copyright © TATRA TRUCKS a. s.

01 0565 ENG 01 01v31 10 2017

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

01 0565 ENG 01 01v31 10 2017

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

01-0565-ENG/01

TATRA TAKES YOU FURTHER tatratrucks.com

Publication number: 01-0565-ENG/01

TATRA TRUCKS a. s. 1st edition 31-10-2017

TATRA Service Assistance

1.1 Basic information about the Manual

1.2 General safety instructions

1.2.1 Safety precautions for vehicle use

When loading, make sure not to exceed the following values:

A stationary unit must have the following:

Anchoring the vehicle on a means of transportation

SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction)

Danger of fire and burns

First aid kit

Air conditioning system

Electric arc welding

Wheel nuts tightening

Recommendations for vehicle towing

Mobile phones and walki-talkies

Accessories and spare parts

Assembly of superstructures and transformation of TATRA vehicle

1.2.2 Safety instructions for working with hazardous materials

Battery, wet, filled with acid.

1.2.3 Fire safety rules for unit operation

1.2.4 Safety precautions for cab lifting/lowering

1.2.5 Safety instructions for operation with refrigerant (A/C)

1.2.7 Safety instructions for lifting/lowering the spare wheel

1.2.8 Precautions on tipper body use

Driver´s responsibility for tipping:

Driver´s responsibility when loading:

Vehicle operator’s liability:

1.2.9 Safety instructions for operation with winch

How to tow loads:

1.3 Environmental precautions

Used operating fluids

Sorption agents, wiping cloths

1.4 List of symbols used

Check TRANS (“ALLISON”)

Intake air electric heater

Error in system SCR

Minimum fuel level

Parking and emergency brake

Pressure drop in brake cylinders

Rear fog lamp

Service brake air overpressure

Turn signals - vehicle

Turn signals - trailer

Trailer body tipping

Trailer/semi-trailer tipping preselection

Vehicle height setting (suspension bellows deflated)

Vehicle height setting (suspension bellows inflated)

Ventilation, dependent heater and cooling system control

Fan speed setting

Air supply to the head

Air supply to the head and feet

Air supply to the feet and windshield

Air supply to the windshield/defrosting

Outside temperature display

Turning on the automatic mode/"ECON" mode

Internal air recirculation

A/C feature display

Acoustic alarms (buzzer)

Air conditioning (A/C) condenser engine